Service Manaual M Cell6 (68p02901w85 B Uk)

/
GSM-105-020 Manual Revision GMR-01

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
Motorola manual affected
Incorporate this GMR only in the manual number and version listed below: 68P02901W85-B Service Manual: M-Cell6
Problem reports
This revision provides a fix to the following problem reports: SR32665 M-Cell6 diagnostics. SR37150 Polarized battery connectors. SR37403 NIU boot-up sequence. SR37394 New transport packaging. SR39004 Lifting cabinets. SR39971 Two BTS IBB connections. SR39998 VSWR alarms. SR41404 See SR39971. SR43431 Fibre optic information. SR44873 Acoustic noise specifications for indoor cabinets. SR48373 Power consumption specifications. SR48849 See SR32665. SR48850 See SR39971.
Service Manual: M-Cell6

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR Page 1
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Reason for revision

This revision provides additional and updated information as follows: Tech. 11 Introduction. Tech. 23 to 26 Acoustic noise specifications and power consumption note. Tech. 25, 28 to 210 Storage and operating humidities. Tech. 995 VSWR monitor option. Tech. 1025 NIU boot up sequence. Inst. 26 Storage and operating humidities. Inst. 39 and 4-7 Reference to new packaging materials. Inst. 311 to 319 References to eyebolts removed. Inst 335 IBB connection diagram for two BTS cabinets. Inst. 386 Polarized battery connectors. Inst. 392 to 394 Care of fibre optic cables. Maint. 13 Storage and operating humidities.
Action
Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows: Remove All pages between the clear acetate front sheet and the blank backing sheet, remove from binder. Insert All pages of the GMR between the front sheet and the blank backing sheet, insert into binder.
Obsolete pages
Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page.
Completion
On completion of the Manual Revision, insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front or back of the manual, for future reference.
GMR Page 2
Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
31st May 01
GMR-01
Cellular Infrastructure Group
GSM-105-020
SERVICE MANUAL M-CELL6 GMR-01

68P02901W85-B
Including: 68P02901W87-B 68P02901W88-B 68P02901W89-B
GSM-105-020
Service Manual M-Cell6
E Motorola 19932001 All Rights Reserved Printed in the U.K.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Copyrights, notices and trademarks

Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others.
Trademarks
and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beryllium health and safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 2 4 5 6 7 9 12 14 15 16 19 20
Category 323 Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 M-Cell6 cabinets overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facilities and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infrastructure sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit external features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet with battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS with additional equipment and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six carrier outdoor BTS with heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six carrier outdoor BTS with air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twelve carrier outdoor BTS with heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twelve carrier outdoor BTS with air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
i
Tech. 11 Tech. 11 Tech. 11 Tech. 11 Tech. 11 Tech. 12 Tech. 12 Tech. 13 Tech. 13 Tech. 13 Tech. 13 Tech. 14 Tech. 15 Tech. 16 Tech. 17 Tech. 18 Tech. 19 Tech. 110 Tech. 110 Tech. 111 Tech. 112 Tech. 113 Tech. 114 Tech. 115 Tech. 116 Tech. 117 Tech. 118 Tech. 119 Tech. 119 Tech. 120 Tech. 121 Tech. 122 Tech. 123 Tech. 124 Tech. 125

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Chapter 2 M-Cell6 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Cabinet enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Indoor cabinet BTS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 23 Tech. 24 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 26 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 211 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213
Cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 214 Measurement technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 214 Radio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Tech. 215 Tech. 215 Tech. 215 Tech. 216
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Chapter 3 M-Cell6 BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS dc cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF front end equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules power modules and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and signalling connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 top panel with ac adaption diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel with ac adaption diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 31 Tech. 31 Tech. 31 Tech. 32 Tech. 33 Tech. 34 Tech. 35 Tech. 35 Tech. 35 Tech. 36 Tech. 37 Tech. 37 Tech. 37 Tech. 37 Tech. 38 Tech. 38 Tech. 38 Tech. 39 Tech. 39 Tech. 310 Tech. 311 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 312
Power supply details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 313 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 313 Module types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 313 AC power supply module (APSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APSM module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated dc output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module (ACPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM module: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 316 Tech. 316 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 318 Tech. 318 Tech. 318

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Indoor dc power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 319 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 319 PSM shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 319 Negative power supply module (NPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NPSM module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive power supply module (PPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPIM external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC interface power supply input/output connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 322 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 325 Tech. 325 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 327 Tech. 327 Tech. 327 Tech. 328 Tech. 328 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 332 Tech. 333 Tech. 334 Tech. 335 Tech. 335 Tech. 335
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet PDU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet PDU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESGM900 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESGM900 RF equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micro base control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU cage module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU cage backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board 6 (AB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB6 alarm board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet and site alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB6 functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIL switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnect board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 43 board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnect board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 337 Tech. 338 Tech. 339 Tech. 340 Tech. 341 Tech. 341 Tech. 341 Tech. 341 Tech. 342 Tech. 343 Tech. 344 Tech. 344 Tech. 344 Tech. 344 Tech. 345 Tech. 345 Tech. 345 Tech. 346 Tech. 347 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 349 Tech. 350 Tech. 351 Tech. 353 Tech. 353 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 355 Tech. 355 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 357 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 359

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
vii
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBB board view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet intercabling diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 361 Tech. 362 Tech. 362 Tech. 362 Tech. 377
Chapter 4 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker panel location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply interconection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC supply functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, indicators and monitor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass assembly functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
i
Tech. 41 Tech. 41 Tech. 41 Tech. 41 Tech. 42 Tech. 42 Tech. 42 Tech. 43 Tech. 43 Tech. 44 Tech. 45 Tech. 45 Tech. 45 Tech. 45 Tech. 45 Tech. 46 Tech. 47 Tech. 47 Tech. 47 Tech. 48 Tech. 48 Tech. 49 Tech. 410 Tech. 410 Tech. 410 Tech. 411 Tech. 414 Tech. 414 Tech. 414 Tech. 415 Tech. 416 Tech. 416 Tech. 416 Tech. 416 Tech. 417 Tech. 417 Tech. 418
viii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicators on control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 419 Tech. 419 Tech. 419 Tech. 419 Tech. 419 Tech. 420 Tech. 420 Tech. 422 Tech. 422 Tech. 423 Tech. 424 Tech. 424 Tech. 424 Tech. 424
Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 425 Interconnect bus board functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 425 Interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 426
Chapter 5 M-Cell6 side cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety labels location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal safety labels location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet bottom panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet ac supply detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 51 Tech. 51 Tech. 52 Tech. 53 Tech. 54 Tech. 55 Tech. 56 Tech. 56
Chapter 6 M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet: internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: inside view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 61 Tech. 61 Tech. 61 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 64 Tech. 64 Tech. 65 Tech. 65 Tech. 65 Tech. 66 Tech. 67 Tech. 68 Tech. 68 Tech. 69 Tech. 610 Tech. 611

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
ix
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Power distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP circuit breaker diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass assembly: Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, indicators and monitor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly: location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 613 Tech. 614 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 616 Tech. 617 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 621 Tech. 621 Tech. 622 Tech. 622 Tech. 622 Tech. 623 Tech. 624
Chapter 7 M-Cell6 heat management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat management system (HMS) cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS cabinet safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger: internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
i
Tech. 71 Tech. 71 Tech. 71 Tech. 71 Tech. 72 Tech. 72 Tech. 73 Tech. 74 Tech. 76 Tech. 76 Tech. 76 Tech. 76 Tech. 77
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Air conditioner detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner cooling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercabling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS connection panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control board detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan controller board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan speed control functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings, indications and check signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 78 Tech. 78 Tech. 78 Tech. 78 Tech. 710 Tech. 711 Tech. 712 Tech. 712 Tech. 713 Tech. 713 Tech. 713 Tech. 714 Tech. 714 Tech. 715 Tech. 715 Tech. 715 Tech. 716 Tech. 717 Tech. 717 Tech. 717 Tech. 717 Tech. 718 Tech. 718 Tech. 719 Tech. 719 Tech. 719 Tech. 719 Tech. 720 Tech. 721 Tech. 722 Tech. 723 Tech. 723 Tech. 723 Tech. 724 Tech. 724 Tech. 725 Tech. 725 Tech. 725 Tech. 726 Tech. 727 Tech. 727 Tech. 727 Tech. 728 Tech. 729 Tech. 730 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xi
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Chapter 8 M-Cell6 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF modules description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver operating frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive antenna transceiver interface (RATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter RF operating frequency and channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixer frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver control unit (TCU) detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU receiver detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC and AGC stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver IF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSI output functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU transmitter detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st and 2nd IF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st and 2nd IF stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping control and transmit frequency stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping control and transmit frequency stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator and exciter path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator and exciter path functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
i
Tech. 81 Tech. 81 Tech. 81 Tech. 82 Tech. 82 Tech. 82 Tech. 83 Tech. 83 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 85 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 87 Tech. 87 Tech. 87 Tech. 88 Tech. 88 Tech. 88 Tech. 89 Tech. 810 Tech. 811 Tech. 812 Tech. 812 Tech. 812 Tech. 813 Tech. 814 Tech. 814 Tech. 814 Tech. 815 Tech. 815 Tech. 816 Tech. 816 Tech. 816 Tech. 817 Tech. 817 Tech. 818 Tech. 818 Tech. 819 Tech. 819 Tech. 820 Tech. 820 Tech. 821 Tech. 821
xii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
TCU digital processing and control (DPC) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC firmware tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU transceiver station manager (TSM) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSM board functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front end processing (FEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel coder processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time division multiplexed (TDM) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver control unit model B (TCU-B) detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B receiver detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC and AGC stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver IF signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSSI data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B transmitter detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ modulator stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ modulator stage functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF and exciter stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF and exciter stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 822 Tech. 822 Tech. 822 Tech. 822 Tech. 823 Tech. 823 Tech. 823 Tech. 824 Tech. 824 Tech. 825 Tech. 826 Tech. 826 Tech. 826 Tech. 827 Tech. 827 Tech. 827 Tech. 827 Tech. 828 Tech. 828 Tech. 829 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 831 Tech. 831 Tech. 832 Tech. 832 Tech. 832 Tech. 832 Tech. 833 Tech. 834 Tech. 835 Tech. 836 Tech. 836 Tech. 836 Tech. 836 Tech. 837 Tech. 837 Tech. 837 Tech. 837 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 839 Tech. 839 Tech. 840 Tech. 840

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xiii
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
TCU-B digital control and signal processing (DPC) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s fibre optic TDM links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQCP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCCP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver interface function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH through BCCH carrier diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH through BCCH carrier description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband frequency hopping (BBH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit signal routeing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive signal routeing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EGSM900 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Dual low noise block (DLNB) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB module functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU receive path functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cabinet routing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB-TCU 4/4/4 configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Extension Block (CEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEB module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 853 Tech. 853 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 855 Tech. 855 Tech. 856 Tech. 857 Tech. 857 Tech. 858 Tech. 859 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860
xiv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Combining bandpass filter (CBF) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-CBF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cavity combining block (CCB) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cavity block control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TATI control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB digital control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TATI control board redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight cell Omni configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-input CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-input CBF module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner (HCOMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCOMB with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 862 Tech. 862 Tech. 863 Tech. 863 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 866 Tech. 867 Tech. 867 Tech. 868 Tech. 868 Tech. 869 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 871 Tech. 871 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 873 Tech. 873 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 875 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 877

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xv
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-HCOMB with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twin band pass filter (TBPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF blanking plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF type blanking plate view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB blanking plate view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 879 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 882
DCS1800/PCS1900 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Low noise amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original LNA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA rear view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxBPF module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxBPF functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 medium power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 885 Tech. 885 Tech. 885 Tech. 886 Tech. 886 Tech. 887 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 889 Tech. 890 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 892 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 894 Tech. 894
xvi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
VSWR Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 895 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 895 Further details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 895
Chapter 9 M-Cell6 digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital modules detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main control unit (MCU) details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM upgrade path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory space DRAM protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant MCU link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC/TCU links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH switching and routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC processor parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault condition interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 91 Tech. 91 Tech. 91 Tech. 92 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 94 Tech. 95 Tech. 96 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 99 Tech. 99 Tech. 99 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 911 Tech. 911 Tech. 911 Tech. 912 Tech. 912 Tech. 912 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 914 Tech. 914 Tech. 914

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xvii
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCXO Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features controlled by the main processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events causing a main processor interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man machine interface management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote login availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network interface unit (NIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface/framing sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIM/BIM-NIU - E1/T1 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU to T43 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIM/BIM-NIU interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
Tech. 915 Tech. 915 Tech. 915 Tech. 916 Tech. 916 Tech. 916 Tech. 917 Tech. 917 Tech. 918 Tech. 918 Tech. 918 Tech. 918 Tech. 919 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 922 Tech. 922 Tech. 922 Tech. 922 Tech. 922 Tech. 923 Tech. 924 Tech. 924 Tech. 924 Tech. 924 Tech. 924 Tech. 924 Tech. 925 Tech. 925 Tech. 925 Tech. 925 Tech. 926 Tech. 926 Tech. 927 Tech. 927 Tech. 928 Tech. 928 Tech. 928 Tech. 928
xviii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Fibre optic extender (FOX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical link maximum length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX connections diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroBCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU architecture functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU redundancy functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroBCU power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 930 Tech. 930 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 933 Tech. 933 Tech. 934 Tech. 934 Tech. 934 Tech. 935 Tech. 935 Tech. 936 Tech. 936 Tech. 936 Tech. 936 Tech. 937 Tech. 937 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 939 Tech. 939 Tech. 939 Tech. 939 Tech. 940
Category 423 Installation & Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 M-Cell6 general installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Field tool kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torxdriver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 12 12 12 12 13 14

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xix
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test lead connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
15 15 16 16 17 17 17
Chapter 2 M-Cell6 site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac BTS site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before departure to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrival at all sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at occupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at unoccupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving site during work periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refuse disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access with maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access without maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base site structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fall of potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.8% Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope method testing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
21 21 21 21
Inst. 22 Inst. 22 Inst. 22 Inst. 22 Inst. 23 Inst. 24 Inst. 25 Inst. 25 Inst. 25 Inst. 26 Inst. 26 Inst. 26 Inst. 26 Inst. 26 Inst. 27 Inst. 27 Inst. 27 Inst. 27 Inst. 28 Inst. 28 Inst. 29 Inst. 29 Inst. 29 Inst. 210 Inst. 210 Inst. 210 Inst. 210 Inst. 210 Inst. 210 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 213 Inst. 213
xx
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Preparing for mounting an outdoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet plinth diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting an indoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting an indoor ac BTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 214 Inst. 214 Inst. 214 Inst. 215 Inst. 216 Inst. 216 Inst. 216 Inst. 217 Inst. 217 Inst. 217
Chapter 3 M-Cell6 normal installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the side cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the ancillary cabinet and HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the BTS cabinet and HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting additional BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting additional BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Inst. 31 Inst. 31 Inst. 31 Inst. 31 Inst. 32 Inst. 33 Inst. 33 Inst. 34 Inst. 35 Inst. 36 Inst. 37 Inst. 38 Inst. 39 Inst. 39 Inst. 39 Inst. 310 Inst. 311 Inst. 311 Inst. 311 Inst. 311 Inst. 312 Inst. 312 Inst. 312 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 314 Inst. 314 Inst. 315 Inst. 316 Inst. 318 Inst. 319 Inst. 319 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 321 Inst. 322 Inst. 322

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xxi
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 323 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 323 Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 323 Installing power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 324 324 324 325
Connecting dc power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 326 Negative earth cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 326 Positive earth cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 326 Connecting single-phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the main isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting three-phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the main isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting antennas to indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 BTS top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 BTS top panel configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 and PCS1900 BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting antennas to outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS top panel alternative configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU DIL switch setting for extended cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a 2 cabinet 4/4/4 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a 3 cabinet 8/6/4 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the alarm board switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the intercabinet fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 327 327 327 327
Inst. 328 Inst. 328 Inst. 328 Inst. 329 Inst. 330 Inst. 330 Inst. 330 Inst. 331 Inst. 332 Inst. 333 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 335 335 335 336 338
Inst. 341 Inst. 341 Inst. 341 Inst. 342 Inst. 342 Inst. 343 Inst. 343 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 345 345 345 345 346 346 347 348 349
xxii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Input/output device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay-closure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry-contact inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX with Krone interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Krone box output details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX without Krone interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector pinout details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power input modules location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing CPSM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and connecting TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing/connecting the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connection panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connection panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-connection checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting ac power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting glass fibre cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 351 Inst. 351 Inst. 352 Inst. 353 Inst. 354 Inst. 356 Inst. 356 Inst. 356 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 358 Inst. 358 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 360 Inst. 362 Inst. 363 Inst. 364 Inst. 365 Inst. 365 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 366 366 366 367
Inst. 368 Inst. 368 Inst. 368 Inst. 368 Inst. 369 Inst. 370 Inst. 370 Inst. 371 Inst. 372 Inst. 372 Inst. 372 Inst. 372 Inst. 373 Inst. 373 Inst. 373 Inst. 374 Inst. 374 Inst. 375 Inst. 375

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xxiii
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Chapter 4 M-Cell6 installation with additional equipment cabinet and battery box .
General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting M-Cell6 indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cell6 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the ac power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker ac connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinets and battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment and battery box external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing and front cabinet power and earth cable setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cable fixings diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cabinet power cable set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: rear view internal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the top panel additional cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
i
Inst. 41 Inst. 41 Inst. 42 Inst. 42 Inst. 42 Inst. 43 Inst. 43 Inst. 44 Inst. 45 Inst. 46 Inst. 47 Inst. 47 Inst. 47 Inst. 48 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 410 Inst. 410 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 412 Inst. 413 Inst. 413 Inst. 414 Inst. 414 Inst. 414 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 416 Inst. 416 Inst. 417 Inst. 417 Inst. 418 Inst. 419 Inst. 419 Inst. 419 Inst. 420 Inst. 421 Inst. 422 Inst. 423 Inst. 424 Inst. 424 Inst. 425 Inst. 426 Inst. 427 Inst. 428 Inst. 428
xxiv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Top panel interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One BTS and one battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One BTS and two battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two BTS units and one battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two BTS units and two battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three BTS units and two battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four BTS units and two battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box interconnection details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box output connection details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One BTS and one duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two BTSs and two duplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three BTSs and three duplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5 M-Cell6 installation with battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51

General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 51 51 52 52 52
Indoor ac BTS cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 53 Indoor BTS ac cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 53 Battery box internal view diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 54 Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the battery box to the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cell6 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 56 56 56 57
Inst. 58 Inst. 58 Inst. 58 Inst. 58 Inst. 59 Inst. 59 Inst. 510 Inst. 510 Inst. 510 Inst. 510 Inst. 510 Inst. 511 Inst. 512
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xxv
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Battery box installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac cabinet and battery box view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet cable set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac cabinet cable fixings diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinet for the ac cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker ac connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 514 Inst. 514 Inst. 514 Inst. 515 Inst. 516 Inst. 517 Inst. 518 Inst. 519 Inst. 519 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 521 Inst. 521 Inst. 522 Inst. 522 Inst. 523 Inst. 524 Inst. 524 Inst. 524 Inst. 525
Chapter 6 M-Cell6 normal commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Cell6 commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 61 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 61 Pre-power up electrical checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory certificate of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirmation of ac supply type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth bonding checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main equipment earths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCD functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up an outdoor (ac) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet circuit breaker location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet power distribution panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 65 65
Inst. 66 Inst. 66 Inst. 66 Inst. 66 Inst. 67 Inst. 67 Inst. 68 Inst. 69 Inst. 69 Inst. 610 Inst. 611
xxvi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Power-up an indoor (dc) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet power supply location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post initialisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample form 1: Request for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample form 2: Completion and inspection form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 612 Inst. 612 Inst. 612 Inst. 613 Inst. 614 Inst. 615 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 617 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 619 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 621 Inst. 622 Inst. 622 Inst. 622 Inst. 623 Inst. 623 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 625 Inst. 626 Inst. 628
Chapter 7 M-Cell6 indoor ac commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M-Cell6 indoor ac commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory certificate of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up a M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of M-Cell6 indoor ac indoor BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP circuit breakers diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box circuit breaker and fuse designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Inst. 71 Inst. 71 Inst. 71 Inst. 72 Inst. 72 Inst. 73 Inst. 73 Inst. 74 Inst. 74 Inst. 75 Inst. 75 Inst. 76 Inst. 77 Inst. 78 Inst. 78 Inst. 79 Inst. 710

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xxvii
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Sample form 1: Request for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 711 Sample form 2: Completion and inspection form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 713
Category 523 Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 M-Cell6 maintenance introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access with maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access without maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field tool kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test lead connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
i
Maint. 11 Maint. 11 Maint. 11 Maint. 11 Maint. 12 Maint. 13 Maint. 13 Maint. 13 Maint. 13 Maint. 14 Maint. 14 Maint. 15 Maint. 15 Maint. 15 Maint. 15 Maint. 16 Maint. 17 Maint. 18 Maint. 18 Maint. 19 Maint. 19
Equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Maintenance equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Materials required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Maintenance support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, materials and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door and hood operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling and enabling devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To disable a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To enable a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separating the BTS and heat management system (HMS) unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, materials and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet with heat exchanger diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To remove an HMS system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 112 Maint. 113 Maint. 114 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 117 Maint. 118
xxviii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Chapter 2 M-Cell6 routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Maint. 21 Maint. 21 Maint. 21 Maint. 22 Maint. 22
Cabinet maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 23 Maintaining the base transceiver station equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 27 Indoor ac BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 212 Checking the ac power module interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 213 Checking the battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 215 Maintaining the heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 220 Cleaning the air circuit grilles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 223 Maintaining the heat exchanger fan impeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 226 Checking the heat exchanger control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 229 Cleaning the recuperators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 233 Maintaining the air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 236 Inspecting all pipes and couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 239 Cleaning the air circuit grilles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 241 Maintaining the air conditioner fan impeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 244 Checking the air conditioner control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 248 Cleaning the air conditioner recuperator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 253 Cleaning the air conditioner condenser coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 256 Maintaining the power distribution system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 259 Visually inspecting the BTS cabinet system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 260 Checking for normal operation of the BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 263 Visually inspecting the ancillary cabinet system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 264 Checking the ancillary cabinet for normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 267 Checking the ancillary cabinet for battery operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 270 Visually inspecting the side cabinet system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 273 Checking the side cabinet normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 275 Checking the installation annually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 276 Checking the installation every 24 months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 280
Chapter 3 M-Cell6 fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fault diagnostic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of diagnostic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Maint. 31 Maint. 31 Maint. 31 Maint. 31 Maint. 32 Maint. 33 Maint. 33 Maint. 33 Maint. 33

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xxix
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Cabinet interconnection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 34 Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 34 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 319 BTS cabinet interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 333 Indoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 333 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 334 DC power distribution to CCB and IADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 335 DC power distribution to mBCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 336 DC power distribution to TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 337 DC power distribution to distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 338 CCB power link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 339 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 340 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (outdoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 341 HMS to top panel, fan dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 342 Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 343 Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 344 Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 345 Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 346 Alarm board (AB 6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 348 Interconnect Bus Board (IBB) electrical interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 350 IBB to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 352 HMS to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 354 BTS 1 to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 355 BTS 2 to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 357 Ancillary to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 359 TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 361 mBCU to mBCU redundant link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 362 mBCU to BIB/T43 signal alarm links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 364 TATI to TATI 1 signal link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 365 mBCU to GPS signal link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 366 Indoor ac BTS power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 367 ACPIM and ACPM fault LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 368 ACPIM and ACPM alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 369 Battery box panel fault LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 370 Battery box fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 371 Indoor ac power supply module interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 373
Chapter 4 M-Cell6 repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
i
xxx
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Repairing the cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 42 Replacing a cabinet door or hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 43 Replacing a cabinet door, side panel or hood lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 46 Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 49 Replacing a hinge on a BTS cabinet door or hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 411 Replacing the BTS cabinet door emc seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 413 Replacing the BTS cabinet door or hood environmental seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 415 Replacing a BTS cabinet door or hood stay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 417 Replacing BTS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 419 DLNB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 420 CBF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 423 CCB and TATI control board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 427 GSM900 medium power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 431 GSM900 high power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 434 DCS1800 medium power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 438 LNA replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 442 Hybrid combiner and power load replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 446 TxBPF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 450 Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 454 IADU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 460 TCU and TCU-B replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 464 Micro base control unit module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 468 Micro base control unit cage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 472 Alarm board AB6 and extender replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 475 T43/BIB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 479 IBB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 482 Temperature sensors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 486 Door or hood microswitch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 492 Krone box replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 494 BTS cabinet power distribution repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 497 Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 498 Fuse holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4101 DC circuit breaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4104 micro BCU circuit breaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4107 Indoor cabinet PSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4110 Ancillary cabinet power distribution repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4113 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4114 APSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4118 Ancillary cabinet control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4121

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
xxxi
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
APSM fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4125 APSM fuse holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4127 BTS cabinet ac power interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4130 Additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4135 Power distribution panel (PDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4139 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4145 Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4148
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I1
xxxii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Issue status of this manual
Issue status of this manual

Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue: Manual issue O A B Date of issue 29th Aug 97 27th Apr 98 1st Oct 98 Original issue Issue A Issue B Remarks
Resolution of Service Requests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual: Service Request 32665 37150 37152 37403 37394 39004 39971 39998 41404 43431 44873 48373 48849 48850 GMR Number 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 M-Cell6 diagnostics. Polarized battery terminals. Cabinet shipments with TCUs installed. NIU boot-up sequence. New transport packaging. Cabinet lifting: priority safety issue Two BTS IBB connections. VSWR alarms. See 39971. Fibre optic information. Acoustic noise specifications for indoor cabinets. Power consumption specifications. See 32665. See 39971. Remarks

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
General information
GSM-105-020
General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) manuals are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola GSM equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola. WARNING Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death. These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
About this manual

The service manual comprises the three manual categories listed below: S S S Category 323 provides an introduction to, a specification and a technical description of the M-Cell6 BTS and associated cabinets. Category 423 provides installation and commissioning information for M-Cell6. Category 523 provides maintenance and repair information for M-Cell6.
The manual set should assist the field engineer to: S S S S S S Understand the warnings and cautions to be observed when working on M-Cell6 equipment. Recognise the features of M-Cell6 components. Recognise M-Cell6 configurations. Understand the function and operation of M-Cell6 components and interconnections. Understand how to implement the installation and commissioning procedures for an M-Cell6 site. Understand how to inspect, maintain, diagnose faults and repair M-Cell6 cabinets and equipment. Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
General information
Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text. This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows: CTRLc ALTf | CR or RETURN Press the Control and c keys at the same time. Press the Alt and f keys at the same time. Press the pipe symbol key. Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is identified with the symbol on both the X terminal and the SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstation keyboard Return key is also identified with the word Return.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
First aid in case of electric shock
GSM-105-020
First aid in case of electric shock

Warning
WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is broken. Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
Artificial respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.
Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration, carry out the following: 1. 2. 3. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover the wound with a dry dressing. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Reporting safety issues
Reporting safety issues

Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises: 1. 2. 3. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment. Report the problem directly to GSM Customer Network Resolution Centre +44 (0)1793 565444 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax +44 (0)1793 430987 (fax). Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network Resolution Centre.
4.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
Warnings and cautions
GSM-105-020
Warnings and cautions

Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all manuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.
Warnings
Definition
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.
Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Cautions
Definition
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.
Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing Motorola base stations.
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
General warnings
General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements.
Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.
High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase mains which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas where the ac mains power is present must not be approached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with. To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the mains input isolator must be set to off and locked. Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders. Refer to the following standards: S S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz. CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High Frequency (10kHz to 300GHz).
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
General warnings
GSM-105-020
Lifting equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.
Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment. Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Toxic material
Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic material Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if: S S S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or a wound. The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled. Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.
See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Introduction
This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. It should be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuring that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit human exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards Institute IEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
Definitions
This standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one for controlled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolled environments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:
Uncontrolled environment
Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals who have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in living quarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels may exceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.
Controlled environment
Controlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by persons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, by other cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areas where analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolled environments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in the table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.
Maximum permitted exposures

The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms of different parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipment in question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment, 1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of power density, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths are described by the standard as follows:
Power density (S)

Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units of watts per square metre (W/m2) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per square centimetre (mW/cm2). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) and magnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. In particular,
2 S + E + 377 377
H2
where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units of W/m 2. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actual quantities measured are E or E2 or H or H2.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Maximum permitted exposure ceilings

Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolled environments is a power density (mW/cm2) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequency expressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. The maximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed in mW/cm 2, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying these principles to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intended to be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels: Uncontrolled Environment 1930MHz Ceiling 1970MHz Controlled Environment 1930MHz 1970MHz 6.567mW/cm 2
1.287mW/cm 2 1.313mW/cm 2 6.433mW/cm 2
If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should be assured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among the frequencies at which operation will occur). Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings. Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstrating compliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, and the exclusion is not applicable. Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, in part, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which this equipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antenna to which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled and controlled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards and computed above.
10
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Example calculation
For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance from the antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment? Transmit frequency Base station cabinet output power, P Antenna feeder cable loss, CL Antenna input power Pin Antenna gain, G Using the following relationship: G + 4p r W Pin
2
1930 MHz +39.0 dBm (8 watts) 2.0 dB PCL = +39.02.0 = +37.0 dB (5watts) 16.4 dBi (43.65)
Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m2 and r is the safe distance from the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows: r+
GPin + 43.65 5 + 1.16m 4p W 4p 12.87
where W = 12.87 W/m2 was obtained from table listed above and converting from mW/cm 2 to W/m2. NOTE The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of the antenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiation patterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distances calculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.
Power density measurements

While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning and design, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies will require making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields for determining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave, IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may be purchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn: Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331, (800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of this equipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a given installation complies with the applicable limits.
Other equipment
Whether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radio frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time the licensees equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later. Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
11
GMR-01
Beryllium health and safety precautions
GSM-105-020

Introduction
Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly in Oxygen. With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Beryllium compounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.
Health issues
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component should be broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released, there exists the potential for harm.
Inhalation
Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptoms of Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of the following: Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that produces yellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucous membranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficulty with swallowing and breathing. Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severe shortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptoms is 2-20 days. Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a very serious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapid breathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. There have been deaths in the acute stage. Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs are mainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain features support the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between the degree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to 10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equally susceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposed persons develop this reaction.
First aid
Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately from the exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported with Oxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualty should be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.
12
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Skin contact
Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blister formations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.
First aid
Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medical assistance.
Eye contact
May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of the mucous membranes of the eyes.
First aid
Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soon as possible.
Handling procedures
Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only at Motorola approved repair centres. The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protective equipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide. If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to be wetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The spatula/tool used to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container is then to be sealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during this operation. Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealed and labelled.
Disposal methods
Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated as hazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and put into sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to the safety and environmental adviser for disposal. Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be put into the general waste skips or incinerated.
Product life cycle implications

Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide (identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment). These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding (Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all such hazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrange for the most environmentally friendly disposal available at that time.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
13
GMR-01
General cautions
GSM-105-020
General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.
Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards. See Devices sensitive to static for further information.
14
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Devices sensitive to static
Devices sensitive to static

Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage. These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons. MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling techniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the following precautions when handling the replacement: S S S S S S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the equipment. Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted. Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable. If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation. All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface. Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
15
GMR-01
Motorola GSM manual set
GSM-105-020

Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the Motorola GSM and GSM Packet Radio Service (GPRS) equipment.
Generic GSM manuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are release dependent: Classification number GSM-100-101 GSM-100-201 GSM-100-202 GSM-100-311 GSM-100-313 GSM-100-320 GSM-100-321 GSM-100-403 GSM-100-423 GSM-100-413 GSM-100-501 GSM-100-520 GSM-100-521 GSM-100-523 GSM-100-503 GSM-100-721 GSM-100-712 Name System Information: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: GSM System Operation . . . Operating Information: OMC-R System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: OMC-R in a GSM System . . Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema . Technical Description: BSS Implementation . . . . . . . Technical Description: BSS Command Reference . Installation & Configuration: GSM System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization . . . . Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install . . Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: BSS Timers . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-R System . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02901W01 68P02901W14 68P02901W19 68P02901W31 68P02901W34 68P02901W36 68P02901W23 68P02901W17 68P02901W43 68P02901W47 68P02901W26 68P02901W58 68P02901W57 68P02901W51 68P02901W56 68P02901W72 68P02901W74
Related GSM manuals

The following are related Motorola GSM manuals: Classification number GSM-001-103 GSM-002-103 GSM-002-703 GSM-005-103 GSM-008-403 GSM-008-703 GSM-006-202 GSM-006-413 GSM-006-712 Name System Information: BSS Equipment Planning . . . . System Information: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information: GSM Advance Operational Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: Network Health Analyst Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst . Operating Information: OMC-R System Administration (OSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B Order number 68P02900W21 68P02900W22 68P02900W76 68P02900W25 68P02900W36 68P02900W77 68P02901W10 68P02901W39 68P02901W70
16
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Generic GPRS manuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals are release dependent: Classification number GPRS-300-101 GPRS-300-202 GPRS-300-222 GPRS-300-311 GPRS-300-313 GPRS-300-321 GPRS-300-423 GPRS-300-413 GPRS-300-501 GPRS-300-503 GPRS-300-722 GPRS-300-712 Name System Information: GPRS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: OMC-G System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: GSN System Administration Technical Description: OMC-G in a GPRS System . Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema . Technical Description: GSN Command Reference . Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install . . . . Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install . Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: GSN System . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-G System . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02903W01 68P02903W03 68P02903W37 68P02903W29 68P02903W46 68P02903W18 68P02903W47 68P02903W04 68P02903W19 68P02903W20 68P02903W76 68P02903W70
Related GPRS manuals

The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals: GPRS-001-103 GPRS-005-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning . . 68P02903W02 System Information: GSN Advance Operational Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W38

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
17
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
BSS service manuals

The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals are not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below: Classification number GSM-100-020 GSM-100-030 GSM-105-020 GSM-106-020 GSM-201-020 GSM-202-020 GSM-203-020 GSM-206-020 GSM-205-020 GSM-204-020 GSM-207-020 GSM-208-020 GSM-101-SERIES GSM-103-SERIES GSM-102-SERIES GSM-104-SERIES GSM-200-SERIES Name Service Manual: BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmicro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizoncompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonoffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor ExCell4 Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ExCell6 Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TopCell Documentation Set (GSM900) . . . . . . . . . . . TopCell Documentation Set (DCS1800) . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellmicro Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02901W37 68P02901W38 68P02901W75 68P02901W85 68P02901W95 68P02901W65 68P02902W36 68P02902W15 68P02902W06 68P02902W12 68P02902W46 68P02902W66 68P02900W50 68P02900W70 68P02901W80 68P02902W80 68P02901W90
GPRS service manuals

The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include the Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS for GPRS: Classification number GPRS-301-020 GPRS-302-020 Name Order number
Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) . . . . . 68P02903W05 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) . . . . . . . 68P02903W10
Classification number
The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example, manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.
Order number
The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.
Ordering manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number. Remember, specify the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter. Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
18
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
GMR amendment
GMR amendment
Introduction to GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue. GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the front.
GMR procedure
When a GMR is received, check on the GMR amendment record page of this manual that previous GMRs, if any, have been incorporated. If not, contact your administrator or Motorola Local Office to obtain the missing GMRs. Remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet.

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
19
GMR-01
GMR amendment record
GSM-105-020
GMR amendment record

Instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below must be filled in to record the insertion. Retain the pink instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for future reference.
Amendment record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:
GMR number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Incorporated by (signature) Incorporated (this GMR)
Date 31st May 01
20
31st May 01
GMR-01
CAT 323: CHAPTER 1 M-CELL6 CABINETS OVERVIEW
CAT 323: CHAPTER 2 M-CELL6 SPECIFICATIONS
CAT 323: CHAPTER 3 M-CELL6 BTS CABINETS
CAT 323: CHAPTER 4 M-CELL6 ANCILLARY CABINETS
CAT 323: CHAPTER 5 M-CELL6 SIDE CABINET
CAT 323: CHAPTER 6 M-CELL6 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT CABINET
CAT 323: CHAPTER 7 M-CELL6 HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
CAT 323: CHAPTER 8 M-CELL6 RF MODULES
CAT 323: CHAPTER 9 M-CELL6 DIGITAL MODULES
Category 323
Technical Description (Tech.)
Technical Description: M-Cell6

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Category 323 Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Cabinet enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Indoor cabinet BTS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 23 Tech. 24

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Outdoor cabinet BTS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 26 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 211 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213
Cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 214 Measurement technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 214 Radio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 215 Tech. 215 Tech. 215 Tech. 216

BTS cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS dc cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF front end equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules power modules and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
i
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Top panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and signalling connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 top panel with ac adaption diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel with ac adaption diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module (APSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APSM module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated dc output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module (ACPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM module: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor dc power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative power supply module (NPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NPSM module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 37 Tech. 37 Tech. 37 Tech. 37 Tech. 38 Tech. 38 Tech. 38 Tech. 39 Tech. 39 Tech. 310 Tech. 311 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 312 Tech. 313 Tech. 313 Tech. 313 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 316 Tech. 316 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 318 Tech. 318 Tech. 318 Tech. 319 Tech. 319 Tech. 319 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 322

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Positive power supply module (PPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPIM external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC interface power supply input/output connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet PDU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet PDU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESGM900 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESGM900 RF equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 325 Tech. 325 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 327 Tech. 327 Tech. 327 Tech. 328 Tech. 328 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 332 Tech. 333 Tech. 334 Tech. 335 Tech. 335 Tech. 335 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 336 Tech. 337 Tech. 338 Tech. 339 Tech. 340 Tech. 341 Tech. 341 Tech. 341 Tech. 341 Tech. 342 Tech. 343
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Micro base control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU cage module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU cage backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board 6 (AB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB6 alarm board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet and site alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB6 functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIL switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnect board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 43 board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnect board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBB board view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet intercabling diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 344 Tech. 344 Tech. 344 Tech. 344 Tech. 345 Tech. 345 Tech. 345 Tech. 346 Tech. 347 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 348 Tech. 349 Tech. 350 Tech. 351 Tech. 353 Tech. 353 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 354 Tech. 355 Tech. 355 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 356 Tech. 357 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 358 Tech. 359 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 360 Tech. 361 Tech. 362 Tech. 362 Tech. 362 Tech. 377

Ancillary cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 41 Tech. 41 Tech. 41 Tech. 41

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
vii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Ancillary cabinet internal detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker panel location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply interconection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC supply functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, indicators and monitor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass assembly functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicators on control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 425 Interconnect bus board functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 425 Interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 426 Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
viii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Side cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety labels location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal safety labels location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet bottom panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 51 Tech. 51 Tech. 52 Tech. 53 Tech. 54 Tech. 55
Side cabinet ac supply detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 56 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 56
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Additional equipment cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet: internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: inside view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP circuit breaker diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass assembly: Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, indicators and monitor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 64 Tech. 64 Tech. 65 Tech. 65 Tech. 65 Tech. 66 Tech. 67 Tech. 68 Tech. 68 Tech. 69 Tech. 610 Tech. 611 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 613 Tech. 614 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 616 Tech. 617

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
ix
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly: location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 621 Tech. 621 Tech. 622 Tech. 622 Tech. 622 Tech. 623 Tech. 624

Heat management system (HMS) cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS cabinet safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger: internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner cooling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercabling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
i
Tech. 71 Tech. 71 Tech. 71 Tech. 71 Tech. 72 Tech. 72 Tech. 73 Tech. 74 Tech. 76 Tech. 76 Tech. 76 Tech. 76 Tech. 77 Tech. 78 Tech. 78 Tech. 78 Tech. 78 Tech. 710 Tech. 711 Tech. 712 Tech. 712 Tech. 713 Tech. 713 Tech. 713 Tech. 714 Tech. 714 Tech. 715 Tech. 715 Tech. 715 Tech. 716
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS connection panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control board detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan controller board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan speed control functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings, indications and check signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 717 Tech. 717 Tech. 717 Tech. 717 Tech. 718 Tech. 718 Tech. 719 Tech. 719 Tech. 719 Tech. 719 Tech. 720 Tech. 721 Tech. 722 Tech. 723 Tech. 723 Tech. 723 Tech. 724 Tech. 724 Tech. 725 Tech. 725 Tech. 725 Tech. 726 Tech. 727 Tech. 727 Tech. 727 Tech. 728 Tech. 729 Tech. 730 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731

RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF modules description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver operating frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive antenna transceiver interface (RATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter RF operating frequency and channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixer frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 81 Tech. 81 Tech. 81 Tech. 82 Tech. 82 Tech. 82 Tech. 83 Tech. 83 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 85

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
xi
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Transceiver control unit (TCU) detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU receiver detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC and AGC stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver IF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSI output functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU transmitter detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st and 2nd IF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st and 2nd IF stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping control and transmit frequency stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping control and transmit frequency stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator and exciter path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator and exciter path functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU digital processing and control (DPC) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC firmware tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU transceiver station manager (TSM) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSM board functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front end processing (FEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel coder processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time division multiplexed (TDM) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 87 Tech. 87 Tech. 87 Tech. 88 Tech. 88 Tech. 88 Tech. 89 Tech. 810 Tech. 811 Tech. 812 Tech. 812 Tech. 812 Tech. 813 Tech. 814 Tech. 814 Tech. 814 Tech. 815 Tech. 815 Tech. 816 Tech. 816 Tech. 816 Tech. 817 Tech. 817 Tech. 818 Tech. 818 Tech. 819 Tech. 819 Tech. 820 Tech. 820 Tech. 821 Tech. 821 Tech. 822 Tech. 822 Tech. 822 Tech. 822 Tech. 823 Tech. 823 Tech. 823 Tech. 824 Tech. 824 Tech. 825 Tech. 826 Tech. 826 Tech. 826 Tech. 827 Tech. 827 Tech. 827 Tech. 827 Tech. 828 Tech. 828 Tech. 829
xii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Transceiver control unit model B (TCU-B) detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B receiver detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC and AGC stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver IF signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSSI data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B transmitter detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ modulator stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ modulator stage functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF and exciter stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF and exciter stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B digital control and signal processing (DPC) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s fibre optic TDM links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQCP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCCP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver interface function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH through BCCH carrier diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH through BCCH carrier description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband frequency hopping (BBH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit signal routeing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive signal routeing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 830 Tech. 831 Tech. 831 Tech. 832 Tech. 832 Tech. 832 Tech. 832 Tech. 833 Tech. 834 Tech. 835 Tech. 836 Tech. 836 Tech. 836 Tech. 836 Tech. 837 Tech. 837 Tech. 837 Tech. 837 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 838 Tech. 839 Tech. 839 Tech. 840 Tech. 840 Tech. 841 Tech. 841 Tech. 841 Tech. 841 Tech. 842 Tech. 842 Tech. 843 Tech. 843 Tech. 844 Tech. 844 Tech. 844 Tech. 845 Tech. 845 Tech. 845 Tech. 845 Tech. 845 Tech. 846 Tech. 846 Tech. 847 Tech. 847 Tech. 847 Tech. 847 Tech. 848 Tech. 849 Tech. 850 Tech. 850

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
xiii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
EGSM900 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Dual low noise block (DLNB) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB module functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU receive path functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cabinet routing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB-TCU 4/4/4 configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Extension Block (CEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEB module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combining bandpass filter (CBF) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-CBF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cavity combining block (CCB) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cavity block control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TATI control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB digital control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TATI control board redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight cell Omni configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 853 Tech. 853 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 855 Tech. 855 Tech. 856 Tech. 857 Tech. 857 Tech. 858 Tech. 859 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 861 Tech. 862 Tech. 862 Tech. 863 Tech. 863 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 864 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 865 Tech. 866 Tech. 867 Tech. 867 Tech. 868 Tech. 868 Tech. 869
xiv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Medium power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-input CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-input CBF module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner (HCOMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCOMB with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-HCOMB with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twin band pass filter (TBPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF blanking plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF type blanking plate view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB blanking plate view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 870 Tech. 871 Tech. 871 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 872 Tech. 873 Tech. 873 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 874 Tech. 875 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 876 Tech. 877 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 879 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 882
DCS1800/PCS1900 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
xv
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Low noise amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original LNA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA rear view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxBPF module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxBPF functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 medium power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 885 Tech. 885 Tech. 885 Tech. 886 Tech. 886 Tech. 887 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 889 Tech. 890 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 892 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 894 Tech. 894

Digital modules detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main control unit (MCU) details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
i
Tech. 91 Tech. 91 Tech. 91 Tech. 92 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 94 Tech. 95 Tech. 96
xvi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MCU technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM upgrade path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory space DRAM protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant MCU link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC/TCU links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH switching and routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC processor parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault condition interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCXO Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features controlled by the main processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events causing a main processor interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man machine interface management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote login availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 99 Tech. 99 Tech. 99 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 911 Tech. 911 Tech. 911 Tech. 912 Tech. 912 Tech. 912 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 914 Tech. 914 Tech. 914 Tech. 915 Tech. 915 Tech. 915 Tech. 916 Tech. 916 Tech. 916 Tech. 917 Tech. 917 Tech. 918 Tech. 918 Tech. 918 Tech. 918 Tech. 919 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 920 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 921 Tech. 921

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
xvii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Network interface unit (NIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface/framing sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIM/BIM-NIU - E1/T1 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU to T43 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIM/BIM-NIU interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic extender (FOX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical link maximum length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX connections diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroBCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU architecture functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU redundancy functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
xviii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MicroBCU power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
xix
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
xx
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 1
M-Cell6 cabinets overview

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

i

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Introduction
Purpose
The Motorola M-Cell6 is a six carrier, Base Transceiver Station (BTS). It supports GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900 standards, and is available in both indoor and outdoor versions. The equipment is designed to provide high capacity digital mobile communications to a large and widespread population. M-Cell6 BTS cabinets can be joined together to provide up to twenty four carriers, and can be integrated with other M-Cell products.
Typical applications
The M-Cell6 BTS is typically used in large towns or cities to provide high capacity digital cellular coverage. A single M-Cell6 BTS contains up to six carrier units and can be configured in either omnidirectional or sectorized arrays The equipment is expandable, up to four BTS cabinets can be joined together to provide twenty four carriers.
Facilities and functions

Maximum transmission power per carrier is 40 W at top of rack. Receiver sensitivity is typically 107 dBm. The equipment can be monitored and controlled remotely, enabling performance to be monitored, problems resolved, and software to be downloaded without visiting the site. The following facilities are provided as standard: S S S S S Receive spatial diversity - to increase cell coverage and improve call quality. Baseband and synthesized frequency hopping - to enhance the quality of the communications link between the BTS and the mobile. Battery backup (outdoor only).
In addition, the following facilities can be specified if required: Local, non-volatile memory to ensure software is not lost in the event of a power failure. Battery backup for M-Cell6 indoor.
Interconnection
The M-Cell6 is connected to a base station controller (BSC) via E1/T1 links to form a base station subsystem (BSS). These links can be configured as star or daisy-chain networks, and the M-Cell6 may be used to create a hub if required.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 11
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Outdoor installations
The M-Cell6 outdoor BTS is supplied with a heat management system (HMS). There are two versions of the HMS: the heat exchanger unit, which enables an operating range of 33 _C to +45 _C, and the air conditioner unit which enables the range 33 _C to +55 _C. Ancillary and side cabinets are available to provide extra space for additional battery backup and communications equipment, for example microwave or HDSL line terminating units (LTUs).
BTS functional diagram

Figure 1-1 shows a functional block diagram of an M-Cell6 BTS:
TX ALARM BOARD RF EQUIPMENT RX RXD
BATTERY BACKUP TCU 0 TCU 1 TCU 5
+27V DC 48V DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE & POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MICRO BCU REDUNDANT MICRO BCU
48 V or +27 V DC or 88/230 V AC
A BIS INTERFACE
LINE TERMINATING UNIT (LTU)
OPTIONAL LTU
Figure 1-1 M-Cell6 BTS functional block diagram.
Tech. 12
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Equipment
The M-Cell6 BTS cabinet is equipped with: S S S S S S Up to two micro base control units (mBCUs), located in the lower portion of the cabinet. A power distribution unit (PDU), located between the mBCUs in the lower portion of the cabinet. Up to six transceiver control units (TCUs), located above the mBCUs and PDU in the cabinet. An alarm board (AB6), located above the TCU cage in the cabinet. RF hardware located in the uppermost portion of the cabinet.
There is also provision for: Mounting a global positioning satellite (GPS) module.
Power supplies
M-Cell6 cabinets operate from: S S S S +27 V dc, negative earth (Indoor only). 48 V/60 V dc, isolated positive earth (Indoor only). Nominal 230 V ac single phase supply (Indoor and Outdoor). 415 V ac three phase supply (Outdoor only).
Infrastructure sharing
Some equipment from GSR3 onwards can employ infrastructure sharing, so that EGSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900 equipment may be located at the same site. Care should be taken to ensure that appropriate equipment and cables are used for each type, and that the appropriate parts of the Service Manuals are consulted.
Configurations
The following cabinets and units are described: S S S M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet. M-Cell6 ac indoor BTS cabinet. M-Cell6 external BTS cabinet with: M-Cell6 side cabinet. M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet. M-Cell6 heat management system HMS (heat exchanger) unit. M-Cell6 heat management system HMS (air conditioner) unit.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 13
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Indoor BTS cabinet external view

Figure 1-2 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet. An optional hood is available on request, which screens the RF equipment mounted on the top panel.
HOOD
AIR EXHAUST
AIR INTAKE
Figure 1-2 External view of an M-Cell6 indoor cabinet Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 14
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Indoor BTS cabinet external features

The cabinet doors have two air vents with grills: S S The lower intake vent has an air filter. The upper exhaust vent has up to two exhaust fans fitted behind the vent.
All connections to a cabinet are at the top panel. This panel also has a feed-through tube for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMC shielded, which includes the provision of an optional hood to screen the RF equipment on the top panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 15
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Indoor BTS ac cabinet external view

Figure 1-3 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet. An optional hood is available on request, which screens the RF equipment mounted on the top panel.
HOOD AC POWER CABLE PLASTIC CONDUIT FEEDTHROUGH HOLE
AIR EXHAUST
AIR INTAKE
Figure 1-3 External view of an M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 16
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Indoor BTS ac cabinet external features

The cabinet doors have two air vents with grills: S S The lower intake vent has an air filter. The upper exhaust vent has up to two exhaust fans fitted behind the vent.
All connections to a cabinet are at the top panel. This panel also has a feed-through tube for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and out of the cabinet, and an ac power cable/plastic conduit feedthrough hole. All cabinets are RF/EMC shielded, including an optional hood to screen the RF equipment on the top panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 17
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Outdoor BTS cabinet external view

Figure 1-4 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet.
AMBIENT AIR EXHAUST RECIRCULATION AIR INTAKE
Figure 1-4 External view of an M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet
Tech. 18
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Outdoor BTS cabinet external features

The cabinet has three air vents: S S S Lower recirculatory air intake vent. Upper recirculatory air exhaust vent has two fans fitted in front of the vent. Bottom front ambient air exhaust vent with grill.
All connections to the cabinet are at the top panel, which is in the top box of the cabinet. This panel also has a feed-through tube for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMC shielded.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 19
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Ancillary cabinet external view

Figure 1-5 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet.
Figure 1-5 External view of an M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet
Ancillary cabinet external features

The cabinet has three air vents: S S S Lower recirculatory air intake vent. Upper recirculatory air exhaust vent, with two fans. Bottom front ambient air exhaust vent.
All connections to the cabinet are at the top panel, which is in the top box of the cabinet. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 110
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Side cabinet external view

Figure 1-6 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 side cabinet.
Figure 1-6 External view of an M-Cell6 side cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 111
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet external features

The side cabinet provides environmental protection for an outdoor, M-Cell6 cable installation. The side cabinet contains: S S S S S S S Termination point for the incoming ac supply. A switched isolator. A 3 pole, 50 A main contact breaker (MCB). The main earth busbar. RF termination panel. Provision for up to three high power duplexers to be fitted.
Optional fitting: The regional electricity company (REC) meter and fuses (can be fitted in the field).
Tech. 112
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box external view

Figure 1-7 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet and battery box.
M-CELL6 INDOOR ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT CABINET
M-CELL6 INDOOR SLAVE BATTERY BOX
M-CELL6 INDOOR MASTER BATTERY BOX
Figure 1-7 External view of an M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet and battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 113
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box external features

The additional equipment cabinet and battery box has five air vents with grills: S S The additional equipment cabinet has an air intake vent at the top with an air filter. Each battery box has an air intake at the top and bottom with air filters.
Connections to the cabinet are at the top panel of the additional equipment cabinet and at the rear of the battery boxes.
Tech. 114
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Heat exchanger unit external view

Figure 1-8 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 HMS (heat exchanger) unit.
AMBIENT AIR EXHAUST
RECIRCULATION AIR INTAKE
RECIRCULATION AIR EXHAUST
AMBIENT AIR INTAKE
AMBIENT AIR EXHAUST FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
Figure 1-8 External view of an M-Cell6 HMS (heat exchanger) unit

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 115
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Heat exchanger unit external features

The metal enclosure has two grills: S S One on its rear face, for ambient air input. One on its top face, for ambient air output.
The metal enclosure has three cutouts on its front face, which mate with corresponding cutouts on the rear face of both the BTS and Ancillary cabinets. They are for: S S S Top cutout: recirculating air input. Lower cutout: recirculating air output. Bottom cutout: ambient air output.
Tech. 116
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Air conditioner unit external view

Figure 1-9 shows an external view of the M-Cell6 HMS (air conditioner) unit.
AIR CONDITIONER EXHAUST
AIR CONDITIONER INTAKE AMBIENT AIR INTAKE
REAR VIEW
Figure 1-9 External view of an M-Cell6 HMS (air conditioner) unit

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 117
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner unit external features

The metal enclosure has three grills on the rear and top panels: S S S S S Two on the rear panel, for ambient air input. One on the top face, for ambient air output.
The enclosure also has three grills on the rear panel: Top cutout, recirculating air input. Lower cutout, recirculating air output. Bottom cutout, ambient air output.
Tech. 118
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
BTS cabinet configurations

Overview
The main M-Cell6 BTS cabinet configurations are outlined below. This chapter contains the cabinet illustrations, cabinet specifications are listed in Chapter 2. The following cabinet and unit configurations are listed: S S S S S S Indoor cabinet ac BTS with battery box. Indoor cabinet ac BTS with additional equipment cabinet and battery boxes. Six carrier outdoor cabinet BTS with side cabinet, ancillary cabinet and heat exchanger units. Six carrier outdoor cabinet BTS with side cabinet, ancillary cabinet and air conditioner units. Twelve carrier outdoor cabinet BTS with side cabinet, ancillary cabinet and heat exchanger units. Twelve carrier outdoor cabinet BTS with side cabinet, ancillary cabinet and air conditioner units.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 119
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor BTS cabinet with battery box

Figure 1-10 shows the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS with battery box.
AC POWER CABLE PLASTIC CONDUIT FEEDTHROUGH HOLE
M-CELL6 INDOOR AC BTS RF CABINET
Figure 1-10 Indoor cabinet ac BTS with battery box.
Tech. 120
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor BTS with additional equipment and battery box

Figure 1-11 shows the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS with additional equipment cabinet and battery boxes.
M-CELL6 INDOOR AC BTS CABINET M-CELL6 INDOOR BATTERY BOX
Figure 1-11 Indoor cabinet ac BTS with additional cabinet and battery boxes.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 121
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Six carrier outdoor BTS with heat exchanger

Figure 1-12 shows an M-Cell6 outdoor, six carrier BTS site, with heat exchanger units. The site consists of an M-Cell BTS outdoor cabinet, ancillary cabinet and side cabinet.
M-CELL6 BTS OUTDOOR CABINET
HEAT EXCHANGER
ANCILLARY CABINET SIDE CABINET
Figure 1-12 Outdoor cabinet, six carrier BTS site with heat exchanger units.
Tech. 122
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Six carrier outdoor BTS with air conditioner

Figure 1-13 shows an M-Cell6 outdoor, six carrier BTS site, with air conditioner HMS units. The site consists of an M-Cell BTS outdoor cabinet, ancillary cabinet and side cabinet.
M-CELL6 BTS OUTDOOR CABINET
AIR CONDITIONER
ANCILLARY CABINET SIDE CABINET
Figure 1-13 Outdoor cabinet, six carrier BTS site with air conditioner units.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 123
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Twelve carrier outdoor BTS with heat exchanger

Figure 1-14 shows an M-Cell6 outdoor, twelve carrier BTS site, with heat exchanger HMS units. The site consists of two M-Cell BTS outdoor cabinets, ancillary cabinet and side cabinet.
HEAT EXCHANGER
M-CELL6 BTS OUTDOOR CABINET ANCILLARY CABINET
SIDE CABINET
Figure 1-14 Outdoor cabinet, twelve carrier BTS site with heat exchanger units. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 124
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Twelve carrier outdoor BTS with air conditioner

Figure 1-15 shows an M-Cell6 outdoor, twelve carrier BTS site, with air conditioner HMS units. The site consists of two M-Cell BTS outdoor cabinets, ancillary cabinet and side cabinet.
AIR CONDITIONER
M-CELL6 BTS OUTDOOR CABINET SIDE CABINET
Figure 1-15 Outdoor cabinet , twelve carrier BTS site with air conditioner units.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 125
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Tech. 126
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 2
M-Cell6 specifications

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Cabinet enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 21 Indoor cabinet BTS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 22 Tech. 23 Tech. 24 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 25 Tech. 26 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 28 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 29 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 210 Tech. 211 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 212 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213 Tech. 213
Cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 214 Measurement technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 214 Radio specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 215 Tech. 215 Tech. 215 Tech. 216

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Introduction
Introduction
Overview
This chapter provides specifications for: S S S S S S S S S S M-Cell6 BTS indoor (with indoor ac version). M-Cell6 BTS outdoor cabinet. Ancillary cabinet. Side cabinet. Additional equipment cabinet and battery boxes. HMS (heat exchanger) and HMS (air conditioner).
For each specification the following information is provided: Environmental limits. Physical characteristics. Power requirements. Power consumption.
At the end of the specifications, a weight breakdown is provided for each cabinet and unit, there are also receiver and transmitting operating frequency tables.
Cabinet enhancements
External cabinet colours
The external cabinets are painted in one of the following colours: S S S S Standard Motorola Issue - RAL 7044/9002. Iron grey - RAL 7011. Beige - RAL 1001. Pine green - RAL 6028.
Internal cabinet RF hood

A hood is available on request, which screens the RF equipment on the top panel of indoor M-Cell6 BTS cabinets.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 21
GMR-01
Indoor cabinet BTS specifications
GSM-105-323

Environment
Storage temperature range
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity
8% to 100% relative humidity. Absolute humidity not to exceed 29 g water/m3 air.
Operating temperature range

5 _C to +45 _C.
Operating humidity
Altitude
Up to 3 km, corresponding to an atmospheric pressure range of 648-1048 millibars. The maximum ambient temperature corresponding to an atmospheric pressure of 648 millibars is 40 _C.
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility complies with ETS300 342.
Dimensions
Height 1518 mm (excluding feet) + 196 mm (RF equipment) Width 710 mm
Depth 470 mm
Floor weights
Floor weight 151 kg (excluding transceivers).
Power requirements
A M-Cell6 indoor cabinet BTS operates from either: S S 48 V or 60 V dc supply (positive ground). +27 V dc supply (negative ground).
A M-Cell6 indoor cabinet ac BTS operates from: S 88 V ac to 264 V ac supply. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 22
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power consumption
NOTE Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived under extreme conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature, component tolerances, transmission power and supply voltage. Although these figures must be considered when planning site power requirements, typical measured consumption values will be lower.
Six carrier BTS

Table 2-1 outlines the maximum power consumption of a M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet with six carriers. In these calculations: S S S S S There are no ancillary functions in the dc cabinets. All transceivers are call processing. Output power is 100%. There is digital redundancy. 100 watts of customer communications equipment fitted to ac cabinets only. Table 2-1 Power consumption (kW). Cabinet type 25 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High power) 27 48 ac ac plus battery box 2.166 1.991 1.991 2.111 (C) 4.042 (F) DCS1800 PCS1900 1.772 1.629 1.629 1.749 (C) 3.680 (F) 45 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High power) 2.460 2.262 2.262 2.382 (C) 4.313 (F) DCS1800 PCS1900 2.066 1.900 1.900 2.020 (C) 3.950 (F)
NOTE: Charged batteries are indicated by (C) and flat batteries are indicated by (F). NOTE The power input for each EGSM900 TCU is approximately 250 watts. The figures quoted in Table 2-1 are for a six carrier configuration, with inputs for several dependent units added. With equipments of less than six carriers, the input decreases by 250 watts for each TCU omitted, plus the proportionate value reduced from the inputs of the other dependent units.
Six carrier BTS heat dissipation

Heat dissipation is calculated by the following method: Heat dissipation = Maximum power consumption RF power output after combining As an example, a + 27 V dc M-Cell6 BTS is taken with six EGSM900 TCUs at 45 _C ambient temperature. 2460 120 = 2340 W

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 23
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Twelve carrier BTS

Table 2-2 outlines the maximum power consumption of a M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet with twelve carriers. In these calculations: S S S S S There are no ancillary functions in the dc cabinets. All transceivers are call processing. Output power is 100%. There is digital redundancy. 100 watts of customer communications equipment is fitted to ac cabinets only. Table 2-2 Power consumption (kW) Cabinet type 25 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High power) 27 48 ac ac plus battery box 4.208 3.869 3.869 3.989 (C) 5.920 (F) DCS1800 PCS1900 3.420 3.145 3.145 3.265 (C) 5.196 (F) 45 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High power) 4.786 4.410 4.410 4.530 (C) 6.461 (F) DCS1800 PCS1900 4.008 3.686 3.686 3.806 (C) 5.737 (F)
NOTE: Charged batteries are indicated by (C) and flat batteries are indicated by (F).
Twelve carrier BTS heat dissipation

Heat dissipation is calculated by the following method: Heat dissipation = Maximum power consumption RF power output after combining As an example, a + 27 V dc M-Cell6 BTS is taken with twelve GSM900 TCUs at 45 _C ambient temperature. 4786 240 = 4546 W
Acoustic Noise
Table 2-3 displays the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet BTS noise levels at 1 m (ISO7779). Table 2-3 Night-time low 50 dBA Peak operation 65 dBA
Tech. 24
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Outdoor cabinet BTS specifications

Environment
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity

33 _C to +45 _C (heat exchanger). 33 _C to +55 _C (air conditioner).
Operating humidity
Altitude
EMC
Dimensions
The cabinet has the following dimensions: Height 1773 mm (including feet) Width 710 mm
Depth 470 mm
Floor weight
Floor weight 151 kg (excluding transceivers).
Power requirements
A M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet operates from either: S S S 110 V ac single phase. 230 V ac single phase. 230 V ac three phase supply NOTE 230 V ac three phase supply is recommended for M-Cell6 12 carrier installations.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 25
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power consumption
NOTE Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived under extreme conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature, component tolerances, transmission power and supply voltage. Although these figures must be considered when planning site power requirements, typical measured consumption values will be lower.
Six carrier BTS

Table 2-4 outlines power consumption of a M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet with six carriers, for ambient temperatures of 33 _C, 25 _C, 45 _C and 55 _C. In these calculations: S S S S All transceivers are call processing. Output power is 100%. There is digital redundancy. 100 watts of customer communications equipment is supplied. Table 2-4 Power consumption (kW). Cabinet type 33 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) AC and ANC (C) AC and ANC(F) 3.387 5.318 DCS1800 PCS1900 3.024 4.956 25 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) 2.180 4.111 DCS1800 PCS1900 1.818 3.749
45 _C (Heat exchanger) EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) AC and ANC (C) AC and ANC (F) 3.179 5.110 DCS1800 PCS1900 2.817 4.748
55 _C (Air conditioner) EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) 6.119 8.050 DCS1800 PCS1900 5.757 7.688
Six carrier BTS heat dissipation

Heat dissipation is calculated by the following method: Heat dissipation = Maximum power consumption RF power output after combining As an example, an ac input M-Cell6 BTS is taken with six EGSM900 TCUs at 25 _C ambient temperature (batteries charged) 2180 120 = 2060 W
Tech. 26
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Twelve carrier BTS

Table 2-5 outlines power consumption of a M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet with six carriers, for ambient temperatures of 33 _C, 25 _C, 45 _C and 55 _C. In these calculations: S S S S All transceivers are call processing. Output power is 100%. There is digital redundancy. 100 watts of customer communications equipment is supplied. Table 2-5 Power consumption (kW) Cabinet type 33 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) AC and ANC(C) AC and ANC (F) 5.868 7.799 DCS1800 PCS1900 5.144 7.075 25 _C EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) 4.058 5.989 DCS1800 PCS1900 3.333 5.264
45 _C (Heat exchanger) EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) AC and ANC (C) AC and ANC (F) 5.557 7.488 DCS1800 PCS1900 4.832 6.763
55 _C (Air conditioner) EGSM900 or DCS1800/PCS1900 (High Power) 9.967 11.898 DCS1800 PCS1900 9.242 11.723
Twelve carrier BTS heat dissipation

Heat dissipation is calculated by the following method: Heat dissipation = Maximum power consumption RF power output after combining As an example, an ac input M-Cell6 BTS is taken with twelve EGSM900 TCUs at 25 _C ambient temperature (batteries charged). 4058 240 = 3818 W

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 27
GMR-01
Ancillary cabinet specifications
GSM-105-323
Ancillary cabinet specifications

Environment
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity

33 _C to +55 _C. 33 _C to +45 _C (heat exchanger).
Operating humidity
Maximum altitude
EMC
Dimensions
Depth 470 mm
Floor weight
Floor weight 157 kg (excluding batteries at 18 kg each).
Tech. 28
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet specifications
Side cabinet specifications

Environment
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity.

33_C to +45 _C (with heat exchanger). 33_C to +55 _C (with air conditioner).
Operating humidity.
Altitude
EMC
Dimensions
Depth 350 mm
Floor Weight
Floor weight 78 kg
Power requirements
This cabinet is designed for connection to: S S S 110 V ac, 45 to 66 Hz, single phase. 230 V ac, 45 to 66 Hz, single phase. 230 V ac three phase supply system.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 29
GMR-01
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box specifications
GSM-105-323

Environment
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity

5 _C to +45 _C.
Operating humidity
Altitude
EMC
Dimensions
The additional equipment cabinet has the following dimensions: Height 678 mm Width 710 mm Depth 470 mm (excluding door) The battery box has the following dimensions: Height 420 mm Width 710 mm Depth 470 mm (excluding door) NOTE There are two battery boxes in total, providing a combined height of 840 mm (excluding feet on lower battery box).
Floor weight
Floor weight 149 kg (includes additional equipment cabinet at 35 kg and two battery boxes at 57 kg each).) Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 210
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power requirements
The additional equipment cabinet has no power requirements: The battery box interfaces have the following input/output voltage requirements: S S +26.9 V dc to +28.4 V dc.
The battery box interfaces have the following input/output current rating: 60 A max.
The current output is a function of the number of rectifiers fitted within the BTS cabinet and the internal cabinet load. The battery box provides optional isolated 54 V dc supplies to two communications units.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 211
GMR-01
Heat exchanger unit specifications
GSM-105-323
Heat exchanger unit specifications

Environment
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity.

33 _C to +45 _C.
Operating humidity.
Altitude
EMC
Dimensions
The unit has the following dimensions: Height 1768 mm Width 710 mm
Depth 330 mm
Floor weight
Floor weight 93 kg.
Power requirements
This unit operates from a +27 V, 32 A supply. This is supplied from CB11 (ANC), CB12 (BTS 1) and CB13 (BTS 2) on the power distribution panel, via three sockets on the top panel of the ancillary cabinet. In the event of an ac mains power failure the +27 V supply will be provided by battery backup. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 212
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner unit specifications
Air conditioner unit specifications

Environment
45 _C to +70 _C.
Storage humidity

33 _C to +55 _C.
Operating humidity
Altitude
EMC
Dimensions
The unit has the following dimensions: Height 1768 mm Width 710 mm
Depth 530 mm
Floor weight
Floor weight 124 kg
Power requirements
The air conditioner unit operates from a single phase 230 V ac supply. This is supplied from main circuit breakers CB18 (ANC), CB19 (BTS 1) and CB20 (BTS 2) on the power distribution panel, via three sockets on the top panel of the ancillary cabinet. The heat exchanger unit operates from a +27 V, 32 A supply. This is supplied from main circuit breakers CB11 (ANC), CB12 (BTS 1) and CB13 (BTS 2) on the power distribution panel, via three sockets on the top panel of the ancillary cabinet. In the event of an ac main power failure, the +27 V supply is provided by battery backup. The air conditioner unit does not operate in this situation.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 213
GMR-01
Cabinet weights
GSM-105-323
Cabinet weights
Measurement technique
Table 2-6 outlines the heaviest recorded weight of each M-Cell6 cabinet crated at a specific time. The crate weight of 68 kg (with the exception of the additional equipment cabinet and battery box) is then subtracted from the cabinet weight arriving at the floor weight. The figures outlined in Table 2-6 and in the specifications only reflect the heaviest recorded floor weight of each cabinet at the time of recording. Table 2-6 Cabinet weights Crated cabinet (kg) Outdoor cabinet BTS Indoor cabinet BTS Indoor cabinet ac BTS Ancillary cabinet Side cabinet Additional equipment cabinet Battery box Heat exchanger Air conditioner Enclosure and packing crate weight (kg) 219 219 219 225 146 35 60 161 192 Floor weight (kg) 151 151 151 157 78 49 92 93 124
Table 2-7 provides miscellaneous weights. Table 2-7 Miscellaneous weights Crated cabinet kg M-Cell6 batteries SBS 60 Ancillary batteries SBS 60 TCU NOTE Due to varying customer requirements, the weight of one cabinet can differ from a similar cabinet. With improvements in component design, resulting cabinet weights may be reduced. Weight (kg) 18 18 13 Comment Four batteries required per battery box Four batteries required TCU-B approximately 10 kg.
Tech. 214
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Radio specifications
Receiver frequencies
Table 2-8 details receive frequency band and channel information for M-Cell6 BTS equipment: Table 2-8 Receiver frequencies and channels GSM Receive frequency band (MHz) Receive/transmit duplex separation (MHz) Channel width (kHz) Number of channels Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) Receive channel centre frequency (MHz) 890 to 915 EGSM 880 to 915 DCS1800 1710 to 1785 PCS1900 1850 to 1910
45 200 124
45 200 174
95 200 374
80 200 299
890.0 to 890.1 880.0 to 880.1 914.9 to 915.0 914.9 to 915.0 MHz/10 from MHz/10 from 890.2 to 914.8 880.2 to 914.8
1710.0 to 1710.1 1850.0 to 1850.1 1784.9 to 1785.0 1909.9 to 1910.0 MHz/10 from MHz/10 from 1710.2 to 1784.8 1850.2 to 1909.8
Transmitter frequencies
Table 2-9 details transmit frequency bands and channel information for M-Cell6 BTS equipment: Table 2-9 Transmitter frequencies and channels GSM Transmit frequency band (MHz) Channel width (kHz) Number of channels Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) 935 to 960 200 124 EGSM 925 to 960 200 174 DCS1800 1805 to 1880 200 374 PCS1900 1930 to 1990 200 299
935.0 to 935.1 925.0 to 925.1 959.9 to 960.0 959.9 to 960.0
1805.0 to 1805.1 1930.0 to 1930.1 1879.9 to 1880.0 1989.9 to 1990.0 MHz/10 from 1805.2 to 1879.8 MHz/10 from 1930.2 to1989.8
Transmit channel MHz/10 from MHz/10 from centre frequency 935.2 to 959.8 925.2 to 959.8 (MHz)

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 215
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Transmitter output power

Table 2-10 outlines achievable transceiver output power at top of cabinet, with a twin bandpass filter (TBPF), or with or without combining. These values can be used along with the power consumption values specified within this section, to calculate heat dissipation figures. Table 2-10 TCU achievable output power Maximum specified output power Transceiver type TCU and TCU-B TCU TCU All NOTE Table 2-10 shows that with transceivers placed on full power, the output values indicated should be achieved at top of cabinet. In practice, the outputs could exceed these values. N/A = Not applicable. Range Twin band pass filter, no duplexer 40 W (46 dBm) N/A N/A No combining N/A 16 W (42.05 dBm) 32 W (45.05 dBm) One stage combining 20 W (43 dBm) 8W (39.05 dBm) 16 W (42.05 dBm)
EGSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900 DCS1800 PCS1900 (High Power)
Or the customer-specified value at the top of the cabinet, taking cable losses into account.
Tech. 216
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 3
M-Cell6 BTS cabinets

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

BTS cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS dc cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF front end equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules power modules and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and signalling connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EGSM900 top panel with ac adaption diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel with ac adaption diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Power supply details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 313 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 313 Module types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 313 AC power supply module (APSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APSM module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated dc output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module (ACPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM module: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 314 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 315 Tech. 316 Tech. 316 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 317 Tech. 318 Tech. 318 Tech. 318

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor dc power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 319 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 319 PSM shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 319 Negative power supply module (NPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NPSM module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive power supply module (PPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPIM external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC interface power supply input/output connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 320 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 321 Tech. 322 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 323 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 324 Tech. 325 Tech. 325 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 326 Tech. 327 Tech. 327 Tech. 327 Tech. 328 Tech. 328 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 331 Tech. 332 Tech. 333 Tech. 334 Tech. 335 Tech. 335 Tech. 335
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet PDU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet PDU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESGM900 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESGM900 RF equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micro base control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU cage module external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU cage backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board 6 (AB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB6 alarm board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet and site alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB6 functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIL switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm 6 extender board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnect board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 43 board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnect board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBB board view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet intercabling diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
BTS cabinet detail
BTS cabinet detail

Overview
This chapter provides mechanical and electrical descriptions of the M-Cell6 cabinet. The cabinet has two variants: S S S S Outdoor. Indoor.
A BTS consists of: Radio equipment in the radio system, which provides the air interface. Digital equipment to control the radio system.
Equipment
The M-Cell6 cabinet is equipped with: S S S S S S S Up to two micro base control units (mBCUs), located in the lower portion of the cabinet. In the indoor ac version, an 88 to 264 V ac power interface module (ACPIM) and an ac power supply module (ACPM). A power distribution unit (PDU), located between the mBCUs in the lower portion of the cabinet. Up to six transceiver control units (TCUs), located above the mBCUs and PDU in the cabinet. An alarm board (AB6), located above the TCU cage in the cabinet. The top panel contains the RF coupling equipment.
There is also provision for: Mounting a global positioning satellite (GPS) module.
M-Cell6 cabinets operating from either an isolated positive earth (48 V/60 V dc), negative earth (+27 V dc), nominal 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply are described in this chapter. External cabinets are equipped with a heat management system (HMS), which may use either a heat exchanger or air conditioner.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 31
GMR-01
BTS cabinet detail
GSM-105-323
Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view

Figure 3-1 shows an internal view of the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet and equipment, with the door and cabinet hood removed:
INTERCONNECTION BUS BOARD
RECEIVE/TRANSMIT EQUIPMENT
TOP PANEL
IADU
ALARM BOARD (AB 6) POWER SUPPLY INPUT PANEL
COOLING FANS
TCU 5 TCU 4 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 0 (not visible) TCU 3 TCU 1 TCU 2 mBCU BLANKING PLATE OR REDUNDANT mBCU 1 CAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU)
mBCU 0 CAGE BLANKING PLATE
Figure 3-1 Outdoor cabinet BTS.
Tech. 32
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
BTS cabinet detail
Indoor BTS dc cabinet internal view

Figure 3-2 shows an internal view of the M-Cell6 indoor dc power cabinet and dc equipment, with the door removed:
TOP PANEL IADU
ALARM BOARD (AB 6)
DC POWER INPUT TERMINALS
COOLING FANS TCU 5 TCU 4 TCU 3 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 0 (not visible) TCU 1 TCU 2 BLANKING PLATE OR REDUNDANT mBCU 1 CAGE
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU)
BLANKING PLATE or REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (P/NPSM) 1 P/NPSM 0
mBCU 0 CAGE
Figure 3-2 Indoor cabinet dc BTS.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 33
GMR-01
BTS cabinet detail
GSM-105-323
Indoor BTS ac cabinet internal view

Figure 3-3 shows an internal view of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet and equipment, with the door removed:
TOP PANEL IADU ALARM BOARD (AB 6)
DC BATTERY BACKUP POWER INPUT TERMINALS
COOLING FANS TCU 5 TCU 4 TCU 3 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 0 (not visible) TCU 1 TCU 2 BLANKING PLATE OR REDUNDANT mBCU 1 CAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU)
mBCU 0 CAGE
CABINET ac MCBs AIR BAFFLE AC POWER SUPPLY MODULES
Figure 3-3 Indoor cabinet ac BTS.
Tech. 34
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
BTS cabinet equipment

Overview
This chapter describes the maximum equipment fit for the M-Cell6 cabinet(s).
RF front end equipment

Table 3-1 Maximum RF equipment fit Indoor Cabinet type RF (EGSM900) IADU DLNB CBF/CCB 3-input CBF Hybrid combiner Non-hybrid combiner TBPF RF (DCS1800/PCS1900) LNA Hybrid combiner Tx BPF 3 5 3 3 5 3 3 5 3 3 5 3 X X X X X X 1 3 3 (1)/2 (2) 3 1 1 2 1 3 3 (1)/2 (2) 3 1 1 2 1 3 3 (1)/2 (2) 3 1 1 2 1 3 3 (3)/2 (4) 3 1 1 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X +27 V 48/ 60 V ac BTS Outdoor Ancil. Side
Antenna multiplexing (EGSM900) Medium power duplexer High power duplexer 3 (1) 3 (2) 3 (1) 3 (2) 3 (1) 3 (2) 3 (3) X X X X 3 (4)
Antenna multiplexing (DCS1800/PCS1900) High power duplexer NOTE (1) CBF and duplexer, medium power. (2) CCB and duplexer, high power - Duplexer fitted to customer provided shelf. (3) CCB and duplexer, high power - Duplexer fitted in side cabinet/additional equipment cabinet. (4) CCBs for use in outdoor cabinets are supplied with extra heatsinks. 3 (2) 3 (2) 3 (2) X X 3 (4)

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 35
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Digital modules power modules and fans

Table 3-2 shows the maximum equipment fit, the number is dependent on the required configuration and redundancy. Table 3-2 Maximum digital equipment fit Indoor Cabinet type MCU Digital modules FOX NIU FMUX ACPM APSM Power modules BPSM CPSM NPSM PPSM Fans NOTE (1) A second BTS cabinet (12 carrier configuration) would only require one FOX, one FMUX and one BPSM. (2) The six APSMs is the maximum requirement for a 12 carrier configuration, including redundancy. (3) CPSMs fitted when customer communications equipment is fitted. +27 V 2 2 4 6 X X 2 X X 3 2 48/ 60 V 2 2 4 6 X X 2 X 3 X 2 ac 2 2 4 6 5 X 2 X X X 2 BTS 2 2 (1) 4 6 (1) X X 2 (1) X X X 2 Outdoor Ancil X X X X X 6 (2) X 2 (3) X X 2 Side X X X X X X X X X X X
Tech. 36
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Top panel detail
Top panel detail

Overview
The top panels provide mounting for : S S RF coupling equipment. Power and signalling connections.
EGSM900 RF modules
S S S S S S S S S S S Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Duplexer, medium power. Combining bandpass filter (CBF). 3-input combining bandpass filter (CBF). Module hybrid combiner. Non-hybrid combiner. Twin bandpass filter (TBPF).
OR, an alternative RF equipment configuration comprising: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Cavity combining block (CCB).
DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF modules

S S S S Low noise amplifier (LNA). Hybrid combiner. Transmitter bandpass filter (Tx BPF). Duplexer, high power.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 37
GMR-01
Top panel detail
GSM-105-323
Power and signalling connections

S S S S S DC input power. Transmit/receive antenna signals. Customer-defined alarm equipment input/output. +27 V power/alarm for heat management systems and ancillary cabinet. Global positioning satellite (GPS).
This panel also has a feed-through tube for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables to the cabinet. NOTE The feed-through tubes do not compromise the EMC screening of the cabinet, as they are operated below their waveguide cut-off frequency. S 2.048 Mbit/s line interconnect modules, either: Type 43 interconnect board (T43). Balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).
Location
Within the top hood of the cabinet.
EGSM900 top panel diagram

Figure 3-4 shows an EGSM900 top panel:
RX EXT A RX EXT B DLNB2 DLNB1 DLNB0
PIX0 DUP2 PIX1 DUP1 DUP0 BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) T43 or BIB T43 or BIB
MS0
DC POWER SUPPLY INPUT
MS1
CBF2
CBF1
CBF0
CCB1
CCB0 FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE
CCB POWER
GPS
Figure 3-4 EGSM900 top panel diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 38
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Top panel detail
EGSM900 top panel with ac adaption diagram

Figure 3-5 shows an EGSM900 top panel with an ac adaption:
MS0
MS1
CBF2
CBF1
CBF0
CCB1 AC POWER CABLE PLASTIC CONDUIT FEEDTHROUGH HOLE
CCB POWER
GPS
Figure 3-5 EGSM900 top panel with an ac adaption diagram.
DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel diagram

Figure 3-6 shows a DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel:
LNA POWER
Rx PIX0 BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) Rx POWER SUPPLY INPUT
PIX1
MS0
MS1
Tx CCB POWER GPS
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE
Figure 3-6 DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 39
GMR-01
Top panel detail
GSM-105-323
DCS1800/ PCS1900 top panel with ac adaption diagram

Figure 3-7 shows a DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel with an ac adaption:
LNA POWER
Rx PIX0 BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) Rx POWER SUPPLY INPUT
PIX1
MS0
MS1
Tx CCB POWER GPS
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE
Figure 3-7 DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel with an ac adaption diagram.
Tech. 310
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Top panel detail
Top panel connectors

Table 3-3 details the possible top panel connectors. Table 3-3 Top panel connector details. Connector Function Internal destination External destination E1/T1 circuits source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB) Customer alarm equipment Other BTS (M-Cell6) cabinets
MS0 and MS1
Multiple serial interface ports (up NIM (J13) connectors to twelve E1/T1 on BCU 0 and BCU 1 circuit at each backplanes connector; six Tx and six Rx circuits) Customer alarm input/output ports Krone (J2) connector on AB 6 IADU panel connector Provide 27 V dc power
PIX0 and PIX1 RX EXT A/RX EXT B CCB Power
PDU TATI 1 and TATI CCB 0 and 1 2 fuses (if fitted) PDU LNA fuse mBCU Fan 0 and Fan 1 LNA 0,1 & 2 (if fitted) GPS antenna module HMS control panel HMS control panel/battery box(es)
LNA Power Provide 27 V dc (DCS1800/PCS 1900 power only) GPS Fan Power HMS/Battery Box Alarms NOTE Timed signal for mBCU Provide 27 V dc power
Feed through for PSU/ANC Alarms HMS/battery box (J1) connector on alarms & signals to AB 6 cabinet
FAN POWER and HMS ALARMS only used on outdoor cabinets.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 311
GMR-01
Fan cooling system
GSM-105-323
Fan cooling system

Overview
The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors and blanking panels, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment. Each fan tray assembly contains an exhaust fan. There is a maximum of two fan tray assemblies fitted to a cabinet. Two fan boxes are fitted as standard. Each fan has a low speed sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the AB6 through connector, PL5.
Location
The fan cooling system is mounted directly above the TCU shelf assembly.
Indoor cabinet power requirements

Power for the fans is derived from the +27 V busbar and is routed to the fans, via two 10 amp power distribution panel mounted, fan supply fuses.
Outdoor cabinet power requirements

Power for the fans is derived from the heat management system (HMS) and is routed directly to the fans.
Tech. 312
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power supply details
Power supply details

Overview
This chapter describes the power supply modules used in M-Cell6 cabinets.
Module types
The following power supply modules are used in the M-Cell6 equipment: S S S S AC power supply module (APSM). Used in outdoor M-Cell6 configurations. AC power supply module (ACPM). Used in indoor ac M-Cell6 configurations. Positive or negative plug in power supply module (PPSM or NPSM) Used in indoor dc M-Cell6 configurations. Communications power supply module (CPSM).

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 313
GMR-01
AC power supply module (APSM)
GSM-105-323

Overview
This section describes the ac power supply module (APSM) used in the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinets. The APSM provides adequate operating power for all the modules in the BTS, and battery charging.
Requirement
Table 3-4 shows the number of APSMs required for the M-Cell6 and M-Cell6 (12 carrier) normal and redundancy operation: Table 3-4 Number of APSMs required for M-Cell6 normal and redundancy operation. Equipment (fully equipped) 6 carrier BTS 12 carrier BTS Normal 3 5 Redundancy plus 1 plus 1 Total 4 6
Location
APSMs are located in the ancillary cabinet.
APSM module external view

Figure 3-8 shows an outdoor ac power supply module (APSM) module:
Figure 3-8 APSM module external view.
Tech. 314
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Functional description
The APSM is a power factor-corrected, wide input ac power supply module. Each APSM is a switching type ac - dc power converter, with the following regulated dc output: +27.5 V 5 % at 45 A (full-load current).
Load sharing
The APSM outputs are connected in parallel by the power supply cage, and share the load.
Regulated dc output
The regulated dc output is applied to the backplane to power the base station. Internal APSM circuits monitor the +27 V output for: S S S S S Output voltage. Over-voltage protection - provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection - provides foldback voltage/current output limiting if output current exceeds; 1.07 to 1.3 times full-load rating. Temperature compensation for the float charging of the internal batteries (battery back-up) in the range +26.9 V at 30 _C to +28.4 V at 0 _C. Enable control of APSM from control and alarm assembly.
Thermal protection
If the APSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level, the APSM sends an alarm message to the alarm board, and then shuts down. Normal APSM operation resumes when the temperature returns to a safe level.
Protection circuits
Activation of the protection circuits causes an alarm condition. If an APSM detects loss of ac input voltage an alarm signal is activated and sent to the alarm board. After an alarm condition has ceased, normal APSM operation is automatically restored.
Alarm Monitoring
The alarm board monitors common alarm signals generated by the APSMs. The alarms are: S S PSU input fail - This alarm is active if all the fitted APSMs lose their input supply or the input drops below their operating minimum value. PSU output fail - This alarm is active if the output of one or more APSMs fails to remain within specified limits.
When an alarm is active, the front panel red LED on the associated PSU is lit.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 315
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Fault condition
If a PSM fails, the output circuits of the failed PSM are isolated and the front panel alarm LED is switched on. The failed PSM informs the cabinet control board of the shutdown.
LED display
There are four front panel LEDs: S S S I/P healthy (Green) - lit when the correct input voltages are present. Overvoltage (Red) - lit when the APSM has shut down due to an output voltage greater than 31.5 V. I/P limit (Red) - lit when the APSM is in current limit and delivering a current in the range 46 A to 51 A. The LED is normally extinguished. When lit, it does not necessarily indicate the existence of a fault as this may be due to recharging of the batteries after an ac supply interruption. O/P healthy (Green) - lit when the correct output voltage is present.
Figure 3-9 is a functional diagram of the APSM LED display:

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+27 V) VOLTAGE TRIM
CONTROL AND ALARM
INPUT FAIL GREEN LED RED LED RED LED GREEN LED INPUT HEALTHY OVERVOLTAGE I/LIMIT OUTPUT HEALTHY ENABLE POWER CONVERTER AND SYSTEM MONITOR OUTPUT FAIL CONTROL AND ALARM
CONTROL AND ALARM
VIN (88 V to 264 V)
Figure 3-9 APSM LED display functional diagram.
Tech. 316
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
AC power supply module (ACPM)

Overview
This section describes the ac power supply module (ACPM) used in the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS.
Requirement
The ac power interface module (ACPIM) contains five ACPM 740 watt, single output power supplies. The ACPIM provides adequate operating power for all the modules in the BTS, plus battery charging.
Location
The ACPMs are housed within the ACPIM, which is positioned at the bottom of the cabinet, below the mBCU and power distribution assemblies.
ACPM module: external view

Figure 3-10 shows the front and back panels of an ACPM.
ACPM
AC INPUT
LEDs yellow red red green

INPUT HEALTHY OVERVOLTAGE CURRENT LIMIT OUTPUT HEALTHY Two 38 x 8 mm engraved outline boxes for bar coded kit and serial numbers
DIN41612
FRONT VIEW Figure 3-10 Indoor ac power supply module
REAR VIEW
The ACPM system is a power factor-corrected, wide input, ac power supply module. Each ACPM is a switching type ac - dc power converter with the following regulated dc output: +27.4 V 0.5 V dc at 25.5 A (full-load current).

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 317
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Dimensions
The ACPM has the following dimensions: Height Width Depth 160 mm 90 mm 265 mm
AC power supply module

Five ACPMs are used. Input voltage Maximum input current Nominal current Single phase ac, 88V to 264 V rms, 45 Hz to 66 Hz. 10.6 A per ACPM (53 A total). 110 V is 8.5 A per ACPM (42.5 A total). 230 V is 4.1 A per ACPM (20.5 A total). Output voltage NOTE Output is temperature compensated when a M-Cell6 battery box is used. Maximum output current Output voltage regulation Output noise 25.5 A dc per ACPM. 0.2 % nominal. < 50 mV rms over the frequency range 10 Hz to 100 MHz. 27.4 V 0.5 V dc, non-temperature compensated.
Indicators
The following LED indicators are located on the front panel of each ACPM: S S S I/P healthy The yellow LED is illuminated when the correct ac supply voltage is present at the input of the ACPM. Overvoltage The red LED is illuminated when the ACPM has shut-down due to an ACPM output voltage of greater than 31.5 V 0.5 V. Current limit The red LED is illuminated when the ACPM is in current limit and delivering a current of between 25.5 A and 28 A. The LED is normally extinguished, but when illuminated it does not necessarily indicate a fault, as this may only be temporary condition after an ac supply failure. Output healthy The green LED is illuminated when the ACPM output voltage is within the normal operating range of 20 V to 30 V.
Tech. 318
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor dc power supply modules
Indoor dc power supply modules

Overview
There are three compartments at the base of the M-Cell6 indoor dc cabinet with slide-in mounting for plug-in power supply modules (PSMs).Table 3-5 details the types of cabinet, power supplies and voltages: Table 3-5 Types of cabinet, power supplies and voltages Cabinet Positive earth M-Cell6 Negative earth M-Cell6 Power supply Negative power supply module (NPSM) Positive power supply module (PPSM) I/P Voltage -48 V/-60 V +27 V
NOTE The negative or positive power supply modules are fitted only to indoor cabinets.
The left compartment is for an optional, redundant PSM. If there is no redundancy, a blanking plate is fitted over the compartment. The outputs of all PSMs in the power supply module shelf are connected in parallel by the PSM backplane. The PSMs in the system load share. A single PSM will run one mBCU and two TCUs. Two PSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped cabinet. The third PSM, if fitted, provides n+1 redundancy.
PSM shelf
Figure 3-11 shows the power supply module shelf:
BLANKING PLATE
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULES
Figure 3-11 Power supply module shelf

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 319
GMR-01
Negative power supply module (NPSM)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The NPSM forms part of the power supply system for each positive earth (48/60 V) cabinet system. The system consists of up to three plug-in NPSMs, located in the PSM shelf. Each NPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to +27 V dc 5 % at 55 A (full-load current) output. The PSM backplane connects the outputs of all NPSMs in parallel, which results in the load being shared equally between the PSMs. If an NPSM is in an alarm condition, it sends an alarm message to the alarm board (AB6).
Requirements
The NPSMs system load share: S S S One NPSM provides power for one mBCU and three TCUs. Two NPSMs provide power for a fully equipped cabinet. The third NPSM, if fitted, provides n + 1 redundancy.
Location
The NPSM is fitted in the PSM shelf assembly which is located beneath the mBCUs and power distribution system.
NPSM module external view

Figure 3-12 shows an NPSM module:
ACTIVE LED (green) - ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE. 25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR (female) (rear view)
+27 V RTN +27 V (OUTPUT) ALARM LED (red) - ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS. GND (chassis ground) 48 V INPUT V RTN (0 V input)
Figure 3-12 NPSM module external view.
Normal operation
During normal operation, all NPSMs equally share the dc output load current demand of the base station modules. The outputs of each NPSM are connected in parallel by the power supply interface module backplane. The NPSMs in the IPS system share the load. Two of the NPSMs in a IPS system provide sufficient power for a fully equipped M-Cell6. The third NPSM, if fitted, provides n + 1 redundancy. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 320
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Alarm Monitoring
The alarm board monitors common alarm signals generated by the NPSMs. The alarms are: S S S PSU input fail - This alarm is active if all NPSMs lose their input supply or the input drops below the specified minimum value. PSU output fail - This alarm is active if the output voltage of one or more NPSMs is outside specified limits. PSU over temperature - This alarm is active if one or more NPSMs is in over temperature condition.
When an alarm is active, the front panel red LED on the associated PSU is lit.
Shutdown condition
During a shutdown caused by a faulty NPSM, the output circuits of the failed NPSM are isolated from the backplane output line and the NPSM alarm LED is on. The malfunctioning NPSM informs the alarm board of the shutdown condition. The alarm board forwards an alarm to the mBCU which reports the alarm signal.
Regulated supply
The regulated dc source is applied to the backplane to power the M-Cell6 cabinet power equipment and the fed around the cabinet to power the cabinet component parts.
Monitor circuits
Internal NPSM circuits monitor the +27 V output for the following: S S S Output voltage regulation. Over-voltage protection - provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection - provides foldback voltage/current output limiting if output current exceeds 1.05 to 1.13 times full-load rating of +27 V output.
Circuit protection
The following is additional internal NPSM circuit protection: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection - NPSM has a series input diode preventing damage if polarity is reversed. Thermal protection - if NPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level, NPSM sends an alarm message via the Alarm interface and then shuts down. Normal NPSM operation resumes after temperature returns to a safe level.
Activation of protection circuits causes an alarm condition. Also if NPSM detects loss of dc input voltage or output voltage an alarm signal to the alarm board is activated. After an alarm condition has ceased, normal NPSM operation is automatically restored.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 321
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
LED display
There are two LEDs mounted on the front of the NPSM which indicate the following: S S Active (Green) - on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits. Alarm (Red) - on when one or more alarm conditions exist.
Figure 3-13 shows the LED functionality.

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+27 V) INPUT FAIL
GREEN LED RED LED
POWER CONVERTER AND SYSTEM MONITOR
OUTPUT FAIL OVER TEMPERATURE
ENABLE
VIN (48/60 V)
Figure 3-13 Functional diagram of the NPSM LED display.
Tech. 322
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Positive power supply module (PPSM)

Overview
The PPSM forms part of the power supply system for each negative earth (+27 V) cabinet system. The system consists of up to three plug-in PPSMs, located in the power supply module (PSM). Each PPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to a +27 V dc 5 % at 55 A (full-load current) output. The PSM backplane connects the outputs of each PPSM in parallel. If a PPSM is in an alarm condition, the PPSM with the fault sends an alarm message to the alarm board (AB6).
Requirements
The PPSMs load-share: S S S One NPSM provides power for one mBCU and three TCUs. Two of the PPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped cabinet. The third PPSM, if fitted, provides n + 1 redundancy.
Location
The PPSM is fitted in the PSM shelf assembly which is located beneath the mBCUs and power distribution system.
PPSM module view diagram

ACTIVE LED (green) - ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE. 25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR (female) (rear view)
ALARM LED (red) - ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS.
+27 V RTN +27 V (OUTPUT)
C GND (chassis ground) +27 V INPUT +27 V INPUT V RTN (0 V INPUT) V RTN (0 V INPUT)
Figure 3-14 A typical PPSM module:

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 323
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Two PPSMs are plugged into the power supply interface module and provide adequate operating power for all modules in the M-Cell6. A third PPSM can be added for redundancy. When plugged into the backplane, all PPSM power outputs are connected in parallel. The PPSM system current capacity is the PPSM current capacity times two; the third PPSM is redundant (N+1).
Normal operation
During normal operation, all PPSMs equally share the dc output load current demand of the base station modules (one-half load current supplied by each PSM for a two PSM system, one-third load current supplied by each PSM for a three PSM system).
Alarm Monitoring
The alarm board monitors common alarm signals generated by the fitted PPSMs, and the possible alarms are: S S S PSU input fail - This alarm is active if all the fitted PPSMs lose their input supply or the input drops below their operating minimum value. PSU output fail - This alarm is active if one or more fitted PPSMs output fails or goes outside their preset tolerance levels. PSU over temperature - This alarm is active if one or more fitted PPSMs are in over temperature condition.
When an alarm is active, the source of the alarm can be identified as the PSU with the alarm condition will have its red LED lit.
Shutdown condition
During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty PPSM, the output circuits of the PSM are isolated from the backplane and the PSM alarm LED is on. The failed PPSM informs the alarm board of the shutdown condition. The alarm board forwards an alarm to the mBCU, which reports the alarm signal.
Regulated supply
The regulated 27V dc output is distributed via the backplane.
Monitor circuits
Internal PPSM circuits monitor the +27 V output for: S S S Output voltage. Over-voltage protection - provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection - provides foldback voltage/current output limiting if output current exceeds 1.05 to 1.13 times full-load rating. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 324
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Circuit protection
The following circuit protection is provided: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection. A series input diode prevents damage if polarity is reversed. Thermal protection - if PPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level, PPSM sends an alarm message via the alarm interface and then shuts down. Normal PPSM operation resumes after temperature returns to a safe level.
Activation of the protection circuits causes an alarm condition. After an alarm condition has ceased, normal PPSM operation is automatically restored.
LED display
There are two front panel LEDs which indicate the following: S S Active (Green) - on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits. Alarm (Red) - on when one or more alarm conditions exist.
Figure 3-15 shows the LED functionality.

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+27 V) INPUT FAIL
GREEN LED RED LED
OUTPUT FAIL OVER TEMPERATURE
ENABLE
VIN (+27 V)
Figure 3-15 Functional diagram of the PPSM LED display

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 325
GMR-01
Communications power supply module (CPSM)
GSM-105-323

Overview
This section describes the CPSM used in the M-Cell6 outdoor ancillary cabinet, and in the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet with battery box. The CPSM provides operating power for internal communications equipment.
Variants
CPSMs are fitted when customer communications equipment is installed, for example, microwave. The variants available are: S S S S 150 W redundant. 150 W twin output. 300 W single output. 150 W non-redundant (battery box fit).
Location
M-Cell6 outdoor configurations
Two CPSMs are collocated, next to APSM 5, at the left hand end of the APSM cage, and are normally in a 1+1 redundancy configuration. With redundancy, both power supplies are diode ORed together.
M-Cell6 indoor ac configurations

Up to two CPSMs are located behind the lower master battery box door in a non-redundant configuration within a CPSM assembly.
Tech. 326
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CPSM module view

Figure 3-16 shows a CPSM and its location on CPSM bracket:
Figure 3-16 Communications power supply module (CPSM)
When required, the power supply system for an M-Cell cabinet contains two 150 W plug-in CPSMs. Each CPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to +54 V 1 % at 2.9 A ( 54 V dc or + 54 V dc can be configured by earthing the negative or positive output connector. If required, this should be made at the load equipment end).
Monitor circuits
Internal CPSM circuits monitor the 54 V dc output for the following: S S S Output voltage. Over-voltage protection - provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection - provides foldback voltage/current output limiting if output current exceeds 1.1 to 1.35 times full-load rating.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 327
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Circuit protection
The following circuit protection is provided: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection - CPSM trips the cabinet circuit breaker if input dc polarity is reversed. Thermal protection - if CPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level the CPSM shuts down. Normal CPSM operation resumes after temperature returns to a safe level.
Functional diagrams
Figure 3-17, Figure 3-18, Figure 3-19 & Figure 3-20 are functional diagrams of the CPSM variants.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
CUSTOMER ALARMS
(3.5 A)
VOUT (54 V dc)
POWER CONVERTER AND SYSTEM MONITOR 0
VIN (+27 V dc)
Figure 3-17 Functional diagram of the 150 W redundant CPSM.
Tech. 328
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
CUSTOMER ALARMS CUSTOMER ALARMS (3.5 A)
VOUT (54 V dc)
(3.5 A)
VIN (+27 V dc) VOUT (54 V dc)
Figure 3-18 Functional diagram of the 150 W dual output CPSM

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
CUSTOMER ALARMS
(7 A)
VOUT (54 V dc)
VIN (+27 V dc)
Figure 3-19 Functional diagram of the 300 W non-redundant CPSM

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 329
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CONNECTORs
ISOLATED VOUT (54 V)
VIN (+27 V dc)
Figure 3-20 Functional diagram of the battery box non-redundant CPSM
Tech. 330
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
AC power interface module

Overview
The ac power interface module (ACPIM) houses the five cabinet front end ac power supply modules (ACPM).The ACPIM consists of: S S S A metal cage with five compartments for the power units. A compartment consisting of a double pole circuit breaker. DC LED indicator and an ac neon indicator.
A double shielded, ac cable is fed into the unit via a plastic conduit. The ac input is distributed to the five ACPMs, from which the dc output is fed to the power distribution unit. Output signals from the ACPMs are fed from the rear of the interface unit to a 9 way signal output connector and passed to the signal control panel.
Location
The ACPIM is situated at the bottom of the cabinet, below the micro base control unit (BCU) and power distribution assemblies.
ACPIM external view

Figure 3-21 is a view of the ACPIM.
SIGNAL OUTPUT 9 WAY CONNECTOR AC INPUT CONNECTING FIXTURES LED NEON LAMP
DC AC
CB1 63A
AC CABLE DIN41612
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Figure 3-21 ACPIM front view.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 331
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Controls and indicators

The following controls and indicators are located on the ACPIM front panel.
CB1
In the ON position (up), CB1 connects the ac supply to rectifiers 0 to 4. In the OFF position (down), CB1 disconnects the ac supply from the rectifiers.
AC neon lamp
The amber neon lamp is illuminated when the ac supply voltage is present at the ACPIM input. NOTE At low input voltages the neon lamp may flicker, this should not be interpreted as a fault on the unit.
DC LED
The green LED is illuminated when the dc output voltage is present at the positive and negative output cables. NOTE The brightness of the LED does not provide a direct indication of the magnitude of the output voltage but at low output voltages the LED may be dimmed.
Tech. 332
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Signal connector
Figure 3-22 shows pinouts for the 9 way, D-type signal connector, PL1.
RETURN OVERTEMPERATURE
AC FAULT ENABLE ACPIM FAULT
2 6 7
3 8
4 9
5
GROUND
PL1
SPARE
VOLTAGE TRIM
CONTACTOR DISABLE
Plug fitted to the board viewed from front
PL1 pin locations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Enable Return Overtemperature ACPIM fault AC fault Spare Contactor disable Voltage trim Ground
Figure 3-22 ACPIM signal output connector.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 333
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
AC interface power supply input/output connector

Table 3-6 details the power supply input/output connector (DIN41612). Table 3-6 Power supply input/output connector scut PIN 26 28 22 24 z2 d6 b16 d2 b2 z4 b4 d12 d14 d8 d6 d10 b12 b14 b10 d16 Forced current share pin Link enable Voltage trim Current trim Mains fail Output healthy Overvolts opto Current limit opto Overtemperature alarm Signal common Current signal FUNCTION + Output + Output Output Output +Sense Sense
2 1 3
Earth Neutral Live
Tech. 334
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Dimensions
The ACPIM has the following dimensions: Height Width Depth 178 mm 540 mm 306 mm
Input
Input voltage Maximum input current Nominal current Single phase ac, 88 V to 264 V rms, 45 Hz to 66 Hz. 10.6 A per ACPM (53 A total). 110 V is 8.5 A per ACPM (42.5 A total). 230 V is 4.1 A per ACPM (20.5 A total).
Output
Output voltage NOTE Output is temperature compensated when a M-Cell6 battery box is used. Maximum output current 25.5 A dc per ACPM. 27.4 V 0.5 V dc, non-temperature compensated.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 335
GMR-01
Power distribution unit
GSM-105-323

Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) distributes dc power throughout the cabinet. It consists of a circuit breaker and fuse panel that contains a maximum of 11 dc circuit breakers and six fuses.
Indoor cabinet
DC input power applied at the top panel of the cabinet, is routed, via MCB 1, 2 and 3, to one of the following PSMs: S S Negative power supply modules (NPSMs) in a positive earth cabinet. Positive power supply modules (PPSMs) in a negative earth cabinet.
Outdoor cabinet
DC input power applied at the top panel of the cabinet is routed to the +27 V and 0 V busbars.
Location
The PDU is mounted below the TCU cage and between the mBCUs in the lower portion of the cabinet and is accessible from the front of the cabinet when the door is open.
Requirements
The indoor and outdoor cabinets must contain a PDU.
Tech. 336
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor cabinet PDU front panel

Figure 3-23 shows an indoor cabinet PDU front panel.
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
LIVE TERMINALS mBCU 1 10A mBCU 0 10A
PCU2 100A
PCU1 100A
PCU0 100A
CCB/TCB 1 3A ALARM BD 3A FAN 1 10A
CCB/TCB 0 3A LNA 3A FAN 0 10A
Figure 3-23 Indoor cabinet PDU front panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 337
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses

Table 3-7 details the circuit breakers and fuses for an M-Cell6 indoor cabinet. Table 3-7 M-Cell6 indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses MCB/Fuse MCB 1 MCB 2 MCB 3 Rating 100 A 100 A 100 A Power to NPSM 0 (in a positive earth cabinet) NPSM 1 (in a positive earth cabinet) NPSM 2 (in a positive earth cabinet) or MCB 1 MCB 2 MCB 3 MCB 4 MCB 5 MCB 6 MCB 7 MCB 8 MCB 9 MCB 10 MCB 11 Fuse 1 Fuse 2 Fuse 3 Fuse 4 Fuse 5 Fuse 6 100 A 100 A 100 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 10 A 10 A 3A 3A 3A 3A 10 A 10 A PPSM 0 (in a negative earth cabinet) PPSM 1 (in a negative earth cabinet) PPSM 2 (in a negative earth cabinet) TCU 0 TCU 1 TCU 2 TCU 3 TCU 4 TCU 5 mBCU 0 mBCU 1 CCB/TCB 1 CCB/TCB 0 ALARM BD LNA (DCS1800 cabinets only) FAN 1 FAN 0 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 Voltage 48/60 48/60 48/60
Tech. 338
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Outdoor cabinet PDU front panel

Figure 3-24 shows an outdoor cabinet PDU front panel.
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
CCB/TCB 1 3A ALARM BD 3A
CCB/TCB 0 3A LNA 3A
Figure 3-24 Outdoor cabinet PDU front panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 339
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Outdoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses

Table 3-8 details the circuit breakers and fuses for an M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet. Table 3-8 M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses MCB/Fuse MCB 4 MCB 5 MCB 6 MCB 7 MCB 8 MCB 9 MCB 10 MCB 11 Fuse 1 Fuse 2 Fuse 3 Fuse 4 Fuse 5 Fuse 6 Rating 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 10 A 10 A 3A 3A 3A 3A 10 A 10 A TCU 0 TCU 1 TCU 2 TCU 3 TCU 4 TCU 5 mBCU 0 mBCU 1 CCB/TCB 1 CCB/TCB 0 ALARM BD LNA (DCS1800 cabinets only) Not used Not used Power to Voltage +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27
Tech. 340
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RF equipment detail
RF equipment detail
Overview
This section describes the radio frequency (RF) modules used in the BTS cabinets. The RF equipment provides a transmit and receive path between the MS and the transceiver control unit (TCU).
ESGM900 cabinets
Either of the following equipment configurations are used in EGSM900 cabinets: Wideband combining: S S S S S S S S Dual low noise block (DLNB). Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Duplexer, medium power. Combining bandpass filter (CBF). 3-input combining bandpass filter (CBF). Module hybrid combiner. Non-hybrid combiner. Twin bandpass filter (TBPF). NOTE With wideband combining, only medium power duplexers can be used. Cavity combining: S S S Dual low noise block (DLNB). Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Cavity combining block (CCB). NOTE With cavity combining, only high power duplexers can be used.
DCS1800/ PCS1900 cabinets

Wideband combining is used in DCS1800/PCS1900 cabinets: S S S S Low noise amplifier (LNA). Hybrid combiner. Transmitter bandpass filter (Tx BPF). Duplexer, high power.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 341
GMR-01
RF equipment detail
GSM-105-323
ESGM900 RF equipment location

Figure 3-25 is a view of the EGSM900 RF equipment locations:
DLNB (3 OFF)
TOP PANEL
DUPLEXER, MEDIUM POWER (3 OFF) CBF (3 OFF) (SEE NOTE)
IADU (MOUNTED UNDERNEATH TOP PANEL)
TCU 5 TCU 4 TCU 3
TCU 0 (not visible) TCU 1 TCU 2
NOTE: TWO CCB MODULES MAY BE FITTED IN PLACE OF THE THREE CBFs AND THREE DUPLEXERS
Figure 3-25 EGSM900 RF equipment location.
Tech. 342
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RF equipment detail
DCS1800/ PCS1900 RF equipment location

Figure 3-26 is a view of the DCS1800/PCS1900 RF equipment locations:
LNA (UP TO 3 OFF)
TOP PANEL
HYBRID COMBINER WITH LOAD (UP tO 5 OFF)
Tx BPF (UP TO 3 OFF) OR MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER (UP TO 3 OFF NOT SHOWN)
Figure 3-26 DCS1800/PCS1900 RF equipment location.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 343
GMR-01
Micro base control unit
GSM-105-323

Overview
A micro base control unit (mBCU) cage assembly consists of a backplane, two vertical slots holding full size digital modules, and six vertical slots holding five half size digital modules and a power supply module.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to two mBCU cage assemblies. A minimum of one mBCU cage assembly must be fitted in each cabinet. To assist with the correct airflow and ventilation, blanking plates must be fitted: S S In any unused mBCU slot. To all unused full size and half size module slots.
Location
The mBCU cage assemblies are fitted above the PSU shelf, in the lower portion of the cabinet.
Tech. 344
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
mBCU cage module external view

Figure 3-27 shows an external view of the mBCU cage:
BACKPLANE
BPSM MCU FOX
FMUX
mBCU CAGE ASSEMBLY NIU
FULL SIZE MODULES HALF SIZE MODULES
FMUX (IF FITTED) OR BLANKING PANEL
Figure 3-27 Micro base control unit (mBCU) cage assembly
Full size modules

Full size modules fit into the card cage of a mBCU. The slots are annotated with the legend of the appropriate module. The following are full size modules: S S Main control unit (MCU) Fibre optic extender (FOX).
Half size modules

Half size modules fit into the card cage of a mBCU. The slots are annotated with the legend of the appropriate module.The following are half size modules: S S S Network interface unit (NIU) Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX). mBCU power supply module (BPSM)

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 345
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
mBCU cage backplane

Figure 3-28 shows the mBCU backplane:
J1 J3 J4 J6 J9
MCU J2
FOX
NIU0 J5
FMUX0 J7
BPSM J8
MCU
NIU1
FMUX1
FMUX2
Front
J15
CGND
J14
PWR J21
+12V J33 J32

CGND CGND
J12
J31 J30 GPS J11 J13
NIM
RED RED IN OUT
ALARM
Back Figure 3-28 Micro base control unit (mBCU) backplane.
Tech. 346
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Backplane connectors
Table 3-9 details the mBCU backplane connectors: Table 3-9 mBCU backplane connectors Connector number J1/J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J21 J30 J31 J32 J33 Legend MCU FOX NIU0 NIU1 FMUX0 FMUX1 FMUX2 BPSM ALARM GPS NIM PWR CGRD +12 V RED OUT RED IN CGRD CGRD Main control unit Fibre optic extender Network interface unit Network interface unit Fibre optic multiplexer Fibre optic multiplexer Fibre optic multiplexer BCU power supply module Interconnection to AB6 Global positioning system receiver connector to top panel of cabinet Network serial interface connector to top panel of cabinet Power input (+27 V dc and PSU enable) Earth connection to cabinet IADU supply Interconnection between BCU 0 and BCU 1 Interconnection between BCU 0 and BCU 1 Earth connection to cabinet Earth connection to cabinet Function

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 347
GMR-01
Alarm board 6 (AB6)
GSM-105-323
Alarm board 6 (AB6)

Overview
The alarm board (AB6) monitors alarm lines and passes individual alarms to the OMC-R. There are 17 LEDs mounted on the AB6, to indicate a cabinet-based fault. The AB6 processes operational failure signals from: S S S S S S S S S BTS cabinet cooling fans. Heat management system (if fitted). Air conditioning system (if fitted). Cabinet doors open. Low voltage disconnect. APSM input and output fail. BTS cabinet over temperature. Ruptured fuses. Ancillary cabinet cooling fans.
Requirement
There must be an AB6 fitted in the cabinet.
Location
The AB6 is mounted between the TCU mounting frame and the fan assemblies near the top of the cabinet.
AB6 alarm board diagram

Figure 3-29 shows an AB6 alarm board:
J1 - PSU/ANC ALARMS PL1 - VSWR PL2 - TCU ALARMS
J2 - KRONE
PL3 - mBCU2
PL4 - mBCU1 LEDs
PL5 - FAN ALARMS PL6 - TEST
PL7 - POWER
Figure 3-29 AB6 alarm board. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 348
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Alarm board 6 (AB6)
Cabinet and site alarm types

Table 3-10 displays the cabinet and site alarms. Table 3-10 Cabinet and site alarms Group Group alarm title Cabinet/Site alarm PSU1 Input Fail PSU2 Input Fail PSU3 Input Fail PSU1 Output Fail 2 PSU Output Fail PSU2 Output Fail PSU3 Output Fail 3 Low Voltage LVD signal Disconnect Imminent BTS Cabinet O/T 4 BTS Cabinet Over Temperature Ancillary cabinet Over Temperature Air Conditioning Unit Fail Heat Management System Fail HMS unit 1 O/T PSU O/T BTS Cabinet O/T HMS unit 2 O/T AC unit 1 Fail AC unit 2 Fail HMS 1 Fail HMS 2 Fail Cabinet Fan 1 Fail Cabinet Fan 2 Fail 8 Cabinet Fan Fail 5 Source BTS PSU0 (indoor) Ancillary APSM0 (outdoor) BTS PSU1 (indoor) Ancillary APSM1 (outdoor) BTS PSU2 (indoor) Ancillary APSM2 (outdoor) BTS PSU0 (indoor) Ancillary APSM0 (outdoor) BTS PSU1 (indoor) Ancillary APSM1 (outdoor) BTS PSU2 (indoor) Ancillary APSM2 (outdoor) BTS PDU Thermostat BTS HMS BTS PSUs Thermostat Ancillary HMS BTS air conditioner unit Ancillary air conditioner unit BTS heat exchanger unit Ancillary heat exchanger unit BTS Fan 0 BTS Fan 1
Anc Cabinet Fan 1 Fail Ancillary Fan 0 Anc Cabinet Fan 2 Fail Ancillary Fan 1
Smoke Alarm (not used) Door 1 BTS Ancillary Side BTS
10
Door Open Alarm Board Removed Not used
Door 2 Door 3
11 12
Alarm Board 6

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 349
GMR-01
Alarm board 6 (AB6)
GSM-105-323
Group 13 14 15 16
Group alarm title Not used Not used Not used LNA Fuse Fail
Cabinet/Site alarm
Source
LNA Fuse Fail
Ancillary
Alarm board LEDs

Table 3-11 details the AB6 LEDs: Table 3-11 AB6 LED details LED [GREEN] PWR ON [RED] LVD AC1 AC2 HM1 HM2 VL1 VL2 VL3 DR1 DR2 DR3 AF0 AF1 FN0 FN1 FS1 Power on and board healthy Low voltage disconnect imminent Air conditioner 1 fail (BTS air conditioner) Air conditioner 2 fail (Ancillary cabinet air conditioner) Heat management system 1 fail (BTS cabinet HMS) Heat management system 2 fail (Ancillary cabinet HMS) Not utilized Not utilized Not utilized Door 1 open (BTS cabinet hood or door open) Door 2 open (Ancillary cabinet hood or door open) Door 3 open (Side cabinet door open) Ancillary cabinet fan 0 fail Ancillary cabinet fan 1 fail BTS cabinet fan 0 fail BTS cabinet fan 1 fail Fuse 1 blown (not used). Title
Tech. 350
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Alarm board 6 (AB6)
Power module
The 20 W power module converts the +27 V dc input, from PL7, down to a regulated +5 V dc, 4 A supply. A fully loaded alarm board draws approximately 550 mA. A green (Power ON) LED is connected across the +5 V dc output and is lit when the +5 V dc is present; and OFF when either: S S There is no +27 V dc input to the alarm board. The power module itself is faulty.
Site alarm input buffers

An alarm board has eight isolated site alarm input buffers. The isolation between each input and the alarm board, and between inputs is achieved by a dc-dc converter and an opto-isolator. The buffer functions by sensing the resistance across the input terminals.
Cabinet alarm input buffers and LEDs

The cabinet alarm buffers detect the presence of an open or closed circuit, by effectively measuring the resistance between its inputs. The normal non-alarmed state of a cabinet alarm input is when the circuitry detects a closed contact. A number of cabinet alarms are ORed together so that either or both alarms can trigger the appropriate output group alarm.
Clock and encoding logic generation

To enable the alarm board to generate each successive alarm data word, the timing and control logic is generated by a combination of a timer, counter and PAL device. The timer generates a square wave with a frequency of approximately 50 Hz, which is output via a buffer to clock both the counter and PAL device. The buffer allows the timer output to be disconnected during in-circuit testing. The counter has 12 outputs, and each subsequent output has a frequency of one half of the previous output. The PAL device decodes the counter outputs to generate A0, A1 and A2, Data Valid and Output latch signals: S S A0, A1 and A2 are used to select the correct block of group alarms (cabinet alarms or site alarms) to be sent to the TCUs. The Output Latch signal is used to capture the next complete Alarm Data Word (Four cabinet alarms, A0, A1 and A2), active for 5.12 mS, and sent out via the output buffers with the Data Valid signal. The Data Valid signal is part of the complete Alarm Data Word sent to the TCUs. At an active high, it indicates that the rest of the word is valid and that the data is steady.
The reset pulse, generated at power-up, is used to clear the outputs of the counter so that it starts to count from zero.
Data multiplexers and outputs to TCUs

Four of the multiplexers are dual 4:1 devices, two receive inputs from the cabinet alarms while the other two receive inputs from the site alarms. These four multiplexers are enabled by A0 and A1. The other multiplexer is a dual 2:1 device which receives the four outputs of the 4:1 multiplexers, and is enabled by A2. Three cycles of the clock elapse, to allow the multiplexers to settle, before the latch signal is activated. The resulting alarm group is then transmitted by the output buffers to the TCUs.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 351
GMR-01
Alarm board 6 (AB6)
GSM-105-323
mBCU interface and site output relays

Each mBCU has six possible outputs to the alarm board, five are actually used. Four relate to the four site output relays while the fifth is used to indicate to the alarm board whether the mBCU is operating as master or slave. An output is generated by the alarm board which indicates which mBCU is the master unit. The alarm board has four double pole, double throw site output relays. The contacts are rated at +30 V dc, 1 A maximum and are accessed via connector J2 on the alarm board. An arbitration function is performed by the alarm board where only the master mBCU is permitted to drive the relays.
Fuse detection
The alarm board has a +27 V dc fused output. This is not used.
Site memory
The site memory consists of a serial memory device, a quad 2:1 multiplexer and interface buffer. The memory device is accessed by the mBCU(s) to either read or write information about the overall BTS site. An arbitration function is performed by the alarm board where only the master mBCU is permitted to access the memory device.
LNA fuse detection

The LNA fuse detection circuit (only utilized in DCS1800 or PCS 1900 cabinets) monitors the LNA fuse within the dc distribution section of the BTS cabinet. The circuit senses the presence of +27 V dc on the load side of the LNA fuse, via PL1 pin 13. When the fuse is ruptured, the +27 V dc is no longer present and the circuit generates an alarm. An LNA Inhibit line is provided so that if there is no LNA fuse fitted (as in EGSM900 cabinets) the detection circuit is permanently disabled by linking PL1 pin 13 to PL1 pin 14 in the mating connector. This connects +27 V dc to PL1 pin 13 and maintains the LNA fuse fail alarm always at a low.
Tech. 352
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Alarm board 6 (AB6)
AB6 functional diagram

Figure 3-30 shows the functional blocks of the AB6:
CABINET ALARMS +27 V PL7 ALARMS TO TCU 0/1 J1 (PART) PL1 PL5 (PART) PL2
+5 V
POWER MODULE ALARM INPUT BUFFERS ALARM OUTPUT DRIVE
SITE INPUT ALARMS (PIX 0) J2
8 ISOLATED INPUT BUFFERS
ALARM LEDs SITE RELAY CONTACTS 4 RELAY OUTPUTS mBCU INTERFACE BUFFERS MULTIPLEXERS
SITE MEMORY AUXILIARY PL5 OUTPUT (PART) SUPPLY +27 V FUSE DETECTION CIRCUIT MASTER/SLAVE INDICATION INPUTS LINK CLOCK & LOGIC GENERATION
PL4/PL3 mBCU 0/1
Figure 3-30 AB6 board functional block diagram.
DIL switch settings

Figure 3-31 shows the AB6 alarm board DIL switch settings:
S1 1 8
Up to 4 x BTS cabinets can be addressed uniquely at one site (i.e. 24 carrier site) Address 0 - 15
S2
Indoor or Outdoor
Figure 3-31 AB6 DIL switch settings.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 353
GMR-01
Alarm 6 extender board
GSM-105-323

Overview
The alarm 6 extender board enables the customer alarm inputs to be extended from eight to sixteen.
Requirements
This extender board can be used to enable up to a further eight alarm inputs. The cable removed from J2 on the AB6, to allow the extender board to be fitted, is connected to J1 (PIX0) on the extender board. A further cable, supplied with the extender board, is fitted to J2 (PIX1), routed and secured to the top panel (PIX1).
Location
Mated to J2 located on AB6. The extender board is secured to AB6 using six standoffs.
Alarm 6 extender board diagram

Figure 3-32 shows an alarm 6 extender board:
Figure 3-32 Alarm 6 extender board layout.
Tech. 354
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The extender board has eight isolated site alarm input buffers. The isolation between each PIX1 input and the extender board is achieved by a dc-dc converter and an opto-isolator. The buffer functions by sensing the resistance across the input terminals. A +5 V dc supply is routed direct from AB6 via PL1.
Alarm 6 extender board functional diagram

Figure 3-33 shows a block diagram of the alarm 6 extender board:
SITE INPUT ALARMS (1 - 8) (PIX0)
RELAY OUTPUTS (PIX0)
J1
+5 V
8 ISOLATED INPUT BUFFERS
PL1 J2 SITE INPUT ALARMS (9 -16) (PIX1)
TO AB6
Figure 3-33 Alarm 6 extender board functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 355
GMR-01
T43 interconnect board
GSM-105-323

Overview
The Type 43 interconnect board (T43) provides the impedance matching between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the mBCU backplane. The board provides an interface for up to six input and six output unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm E1/T1 lines. Twelve transformers are used on the board to provide impedance matching between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the network interface unit (NIU) module. Each transformer has a 1:1.25 turns ratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohm connections. Connection is made using a 37 pin D-type connector to the interconnect board and twelve type 43 coaxial connectors to the external E1/T1 circuit lines.
Location
Two T43 boards can be fitted on the left side of the top panel of an M-Cell6 cabinet.
Cable termination
Master BCU (Right Cage) M-Cell6 master cage to the right of the cabinet terminates on T43 0 at the rear of the cabinet. NIU 0 PORT 0 terminates at [J1 centre/J1 shield] and [J2 centre/J2 shield] NIU 0 PORT 1 terminates at [J7 centre/J7 shield] and [J8 centre/J8 shield] NIU 1 PORT 0 terminates at [J13 centre/J13 shield] and [J14 centre/J14 shield] The terminations shown above are to connector J0. Slave BCU (Left Cage) M-Cell6 Slave cage is to the left of the cabinet. The pin-outs for the slave cage follow exactly that of the master cage, but terminate on T43 1 at the front of the cabinet.
T43 interconnect board diagram

Figure 3-34 shows the plan view of a T43 board:
J0 J8 J14 J16 J13 J7 J17 J5 J11 J1 J10 J2 J4
Figure 3-34 T43 interconnect board view diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 356
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Type 43 board interconnections

Table 3-12 details the possible T43 interconnections: Table 3-12 T43 interconnections NIU/ port Pin no J0-1 0/0 J0-2 J0-4 J0-5 J0-7 0/1 J0-8 J-10 J-11 J0-13 1/0 J0-14 J0-16 J0-17 Eqmt/Ext_Rx3+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx6+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx6+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx2+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx5+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx5+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx3+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx1+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx4+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx4+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx2+ Function Eqmt/Ext_Tx1+ Pin no J1 centre J2 centre J4 centre J5 centre J7 centre J8 centre J10 centre J11 centre J13 centre J14 centre J16 centre J17 centre Pin no J0-20 J0-21 J0-23 J0-24 J0-26 J0-27 J0-29 J0-30 J0-32 J0-33 J0-35 J0-36 Function Eqmt/Ext_Tx1 Eqmt/Ext_Rx1 Eqmt/Ext_Tx4 Eqmt/Ext_Rx4 Eqmt/Ext_Tx2 Eqmt/Ext_Rx2 Eqmt/Ext_Tx5 Eqmt/Ext_Rx5 Eqmt/Ext_Tx3 Eqmt/Ext_Rx3 Eqmt/Ext_Tx6 Eqmt/Ext_Rx6 Pin no J1 shield J2 shield J4 shield J5 shield J7 shield J8 shield J10 shield J11 shield J13 shield J14 shield J16 shield J17 shield
Not used
Not used
Not used
NOTE Connector J0 and J1 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 go to earth.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 357
GMR-01
Balanced-line interconnect board (BIB)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) provides the impedance matching between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the mBCU2 backplane. The board provides an interface for up to six input and six output balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines. Twelve transformers are used on the board to provide impedance matching between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the network interface unit (NIU) module. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio to match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections. Connection is made using a 37 pin D-type connector to both the interconnect board (J0) and the external E1/T1 circuit lines (J1).
Location
Two BIB boards can be fitted on the left side of the top panel of an M-Cell6 cabinet.
Cable termination
The E1/T1 network lines connect to J1 on the BIB. The lines are then routed through impedance matching transformers to terminate at connector J0. connector J0 connects the BIB to the backplane.
Master BCU (Right Cage)

The M-Cell6 master cage is to the right of the cabinet. It terminates on BIB 0 at the rear of the cabinet as follows: NIU 0 PORT 0 Terminates at J1 [pin 1 and pin 20] and [pin 2 and pin 21] NIU 0 PORT 1 Terminates at J1 [pin 7 and pin 26] and [pin 8 and pin 27] NIU 1 PORT 0 Terminates at J1 [pin 13 and pin 32] and [pin 14 and pin 33] The terminations for connector J0 are identical to those shown above.
Slave BCU (Left Cage)

The M-Cell6 Slave cage is to the left of the cabinet. The pin-outs for the slave cage follow that of the master cage, but terminate on BIB 1 at the front of the cabinet.
BIB interconnect board diagram

Figure 3-35 shows a BIB board:
J0
J1
Figure 3-35 BIB interconnect board. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 358
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
BIB interconnections
Table 3-13 details the possible BIB interconnections: NOTE The BIB is a generic interconnection board. Although some of the pin-pairs are not used for the M-Cell6 configuration they are identified in the following table to show the total functionality of the BIB.
Table 3-13 BIB interconnections NIU/ port 0/0 Not used 0/1 Not used 1/0 Not used Pin no J0-1 J0-2 J0-4 J0-5 J0-7 J0-8 J-10 J-11 J0-13 J0-14 J0-16 J0-17 Function Eqmt/Ext_Tx1+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx1+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx4+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx4+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx2+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx2+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx5+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx5+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx3+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx3+ Eqmt/Ext_Tx6+ Eqmt/Ext_Rx6+ Pin no J1-1 J1-2 J1-4 J1-5 J1-7 J1-8 J1-10 J1-11 J1-13 J1-14 J1-16 J1-17 Pin no J0-20 J0-21 J0-23 J0-24 J0-26 J0-27 J0-29 J0-30 J0-32 J0-33 J0-35 J0-36 Function Eqmt/Ext_Tx1 Eqmt/Ext_Rx1 Eqmt/Ext_Tx4 Eqmt/Ext_Rx4 Eqmt/Ext_Tx2 Eqmt/Ext_Rx2 Eqmt/Ext_Tx5 Eqmt/Ext_Rx5 Eqmt/Ext_Tx3 Eqmt/Ext_Tx3 Eqmt/Ext_Tx6 Eqmt/Ext_Rx6 Pin no J1-20 J1-21 J1-23 J1-24 J1-26 J1-27 J1-29 J1-30 J1-32 J1-33 J1-35 J1-36
NOTE Pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 of connectors J0 and J1 are connected to earth.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 359
GMR-01
Interconnect bus board
GSM-105-323

Overview
The interconnect bus board (IBB) provides a connection and distribution point for cabinet alarms and HMS control signals.
Location
An IBB is fitted on the back wall, left hand side, in the top box of the outdoor BTS cabinet.
Requirements
There must be an IBB fitted in each outdoor BTS cabinet.
IBB board view diagram

Figure 3-36 shows an IBB: CABINET TOP PANEL J3
PL1 INPUT FROM ANCILLARY J1 HMS J2 OUTPUT TO NEXT BTS Indicates pin1 position
Figure 3-36 IBB board view
Tech. 360
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Interconnection diagram
Figure 3-37 shows the single BTS and ancillary cabinet interconnections:
BTS CABINET
IBB PANEL HMS CONTROL PANEL
ANCILLARY CABINET
HMS CONTROL PANEL
IBB PANEL
J3 PL1 J3 J1 J2 J1 J2 PL1
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
CABINET CONNECTOR
CABINET CONNECTOR
TOP PANEL
TOP PANEL
Figure 3-37 Single BTS and ancillary cabinet interconnections.
Figure 3-38 shows two BTS cabinets and ancillary cabinet interconnections:
BTS CABINET
IBB PANEL HMS CONTROL PANEL IBB PANEL
BTS CABINET
HMS CONTROL PANEL
ANCILLARY CABINET
HMS CONTROL PANEL
IBB PANEL
J3 PL1 J3 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 PL1 J2 PL1 J3 CABINET CONNECTOR
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
CABINET CONNECTOR
CABINET CONNECTOR
TOP PANEL
TOP PANEL
TOP PANEL
Figure 3-38 Two BTS cabinets and ancillary cabinet interconnections.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 361
GMR-01
Cabinet intercabling diagrams
GSM-105-323

Overview
The intercabling for the indoor cabinet is routed through the cabinet on cableforms. The cableforms interconnect between the various elements of both positive and negative earth indoor cabinet.
Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections

Table 3-14 details the indoor cabinet interconnections diagrams: Table 3-14 Indoor cabinet interconnections diagrams Topic Indoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS positive earth dc power intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3) with air combining diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector and twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling Indoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling See Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40 Figure 3-41 Figure 3-42 Figure 3-43 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-46 Figure 3-47 Figure 3-48 Figure 3-49 Figure 3-50 Figure 3-51 Figure 3-52
Tech. 362
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-39 shows the indoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling details:
(WHEN INSTALLED)
CCB0
RED BLK
CCB1
RED BLK
DCS1800/PCS1900 only LNA2 IADU (EGSM900 only)

2 RED 2 BLK
+27 V LNA1 LNA0
0V
FAN 1
FAN 0
RED BLK RED BLK PL1
AB6
2 RED 2 BLK 3 RED 3 BLK
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
4 RED 4 BLK
RED
BLK
6 BLK
6 RED 6 BLK
MCB9
MCB8
MCB7
MCB6
MCB5
0 V BUS BAR
F5 F3
3 BLK
+27 V BUS BAR CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL MCB3 MCB11 mBCU 1 MCB2 MCB1
F4 F2 F1
MCB10
2 BLK
MCB4
3 BLK
F6
mBCU 0
3 RED BLK RED +27 V 0V
PSU BACKPLANE
PPSM 2
PPSM 1
PPSM 0
Figure 3-39 Indoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling:

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 363
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-40 shows the indoor cabinet BTS positive earth dc power intercabling details:
(WHEN INSTALLED)
CCB0
RED BLK
CCB1
RED BLK
DCS1800/PCS1900 only LNA2 IADU (EGSM900 only)

2 RED 2 BLK
48 V LNA1 LNA0
0V
FAN 1
FAN 0
RED BLK RED BLK PL1
AB6
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
4 RED 4 BLK
RED
BLK
6 BLK
6 RED 6 BLK
MCB9
MCB8
MCB7
MCB6
MCB5
0 V BUS BAR
F5 F3
3 BLK
F4 F2 F1
MCB10
2 BLK
MCB4
3 BLK
F6
mBCU 0
PSU BACKPLANE
NPSM 2
NPSM 1
NPSM 0
Figure 3-40 Indoor cabinet BTS positive earth dc power intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 364
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-41 shows the indoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling details:
(TOP OF CABINET) PIX 1
FAN 1 SPEED SENSOR

4 4 SMOKE ALARM 10
FAN 0 SPEED SENSOR
PIX 0
2 THERMOSTAT
J1 37
AB6
PL3 J2 PL5 PL6 PL7 PL4 PL1 PL2
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
2 THERMOSTAT
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE
25 FOX J31 J30 J12 9
J14
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
25
PWR IADU J21 PWR
PWR IADU J21 PWR
FOX J31 J30
J12
+12 V GPS J13 J11
+12 V GPS J13 J11
RED RED IN OUT NIM ALARM NIM
RED RED IN OUT ALARM
PSU BACKPLANE
PSM 2
PSM 1
PSM 0
Figure 3-41 indoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 365
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-42 shows the indoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling details:
PIX 0
37 J1 PL3 25 PL4 J1 PL1
AB6
PL2
AB6 EXTENDER BOARD

PL5 PL6 J2 PL7
Figure 3-42 Indoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling.
Tech. 366
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-43 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
(TOP OF CABINET) TCU 3A TCU 4A TCU 5A TCU 3B TCU 4B TCU 5B TCU 0A
IADU
TCU 1A TCU 2A TCU 0B TCU 1B TCU 2B
DLNB 2
7/16 7/16
DLNB 1
7/16 7/16 7/16
DLNB 0
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
DUPLEXER 2
7/16
DUPLEXER 1
7/16
DUPLEXER 0
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
CBF 2
N N
CBF 1
N N
CBF 0
N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-43 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 367
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-44 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 0
7/16 7/16
7/16
BPF CCB 1
N
CCB 0
N N N N N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-44 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 368
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-45 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
Tx ANTENNA Rx ANTENNAS
DLNB
RF INPUT RF LOAD
IADU
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-45 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 369
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-46 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3) with air combining diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
Tx/Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 2) Tx/Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 1) Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 2) Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 1)
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB DLNB
IADU RF INPUT RF LOAD RF INPUT RF LOAD
3-INPUT CBF
NON-H COMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
M-Cell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-46 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3) with air combining diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling diagram.
Tech. 370
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-47 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
Rx ANTENNAS (SECTOR 2) Rx ANTENNAS (SECTOR 1)
A
Tx ANTENNA (SECTOR 2) Tx ANTENNA (SECTOR 1)
RF INPUT RF LOAD
Rx EXT BLOCK
DLNB
DLNB
IADU
IADU
RF INPUT RF LOAD
6 2 2 6
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
EXTENDER M-Cell6 BTS CABINET
MASTER M-Cell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-47 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 371
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-48 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 3) Tx/Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 3)
RF INPUT RF LOAD
Tx/Rx & Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 2)
Tx/Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 1)
Rx ANTENNA (SECTOR 1)
DUPLEXER
DLNB
Rx EXT BLOCK
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB
DLNB
IADU IADU RF INPUT

6 6 6 6
RF INPUT RF LOAD
RF LOAD
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B A B
T C U
T C U A B
Figure 3-48 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Tech. 372
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-49 shows the indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector and twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling details:
Tx ANTENNAS (2 of) Rx ANTENNAS
DLNB
IADU
TBPF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-49 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector and twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 373
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-50 shows the indoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling details:
TX1 RX1B RX1A
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
HYBRID COMBINERS
TX BPF 0
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-50 Indoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling.
Tech. 374
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-51 shows the indoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling details:
TX3 TX2 TX1 RX3B RX3A RX2B RX2A RX1B RX1A
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIERS

5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 2 TX BPF 1
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-51 Indoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 375
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-52 shows the indoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling details:
(TOP OF CABINET)
MS0 BIB/T43
37
(WHEN INSTALLED)
TATI 1
9
TATI 0
MS1 BIB/T43
GPS
37
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
10
12
12
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE #
J14
#
PWR J21
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
PWR J21
FOX J31 J30
J12
FOX J31 J30
J12 +12 V
+12 V GPS J13 J13 J11
GPS
*
15 RED RED IN OUT
J11
15 RED RED IN OUT NIM ALARM 40 37 NOTES 40 NIM
ALARM
(1) : # THE FIBRE OPTIC CABLES TERMINATE ON THE FOX FRONT PANEL (2) : * THIS IS A 37 WAY AT THE BIB/T43 REDUCED TO 15 WAY AT J13
Figure 3-52 Indoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 376
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections

Table 3-15 details the outdoor cabinet interconnection diagrams: Table 3-15 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnection diagrams. Topic Outdoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3), with air combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS RF EGSM900 2 single sector, twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling Outdoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling See Figure 3-53 Figure 3-54 Figure 3-55 Figure 3-56 Figure 3-57 Figure 3-58 Figure 3-59 Figure 3-60 Figure 3-61 Figure 3-62 Figure 3-63 Figure 3-64 Figure 3-65

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 377
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-53 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling details:
HMS DCS1800/PCS1900 only LNA2

(WHEN INSTALLED)
LNA1
LNA0
2 RED/2 BLK
CCB0
RED BLK
CCB1
RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK
+27 V
0V
IADU (EGSM900 only)

2 RED 2 BLK RED BLK PL1 RED BLK
FAN 1
FAN 0
AB6
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
4 RED 4 BLK
RED
BLK
6 BLK
6 RED 6 BLK
MCB9
MCB8
MCB7
MCB6
MCB5
0 V BUS BAR
F5 F3
3 BLK
+27 V BUS BAR CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL MCB11 MCB10 mBCU 1
F4 F2 F1
2 BLK
BLK
Figure 3-53 Outdoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 378
MCB4
3 BLK
F6
mBCU 0
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-54 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling details:
25
HMS
2 2 CABINET HOOD SWITCH 2
50 IBB IN NEXT CABINET
IBB
TEMP SENSE (ON TOP PANEL)
50 BTS 2 CABINET (TOP OF CABINET) PIX 1 35 2 PIX 0 TRIP THERMOSTAT 10 HMS ALARMS
ALARM THERMOSTAT
FAN 1 SPEED SENSOR

4 2
FAN 0 SPEED SENSOR
CABINET DOOR SWITCH
J1 37
AB6
PL3 J2 PL4
VSWR PL1 PL2
ALARM TO TCU
PL5 INTERNAL ALARMS 16 16
PL7 PL6 TEST POWER INPUT
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
PIX O/P
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE
PIX O/P
J14
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
25
PWR IADU J21 PWR
FOX J31 J30
J12
25
PWR IADU J21 PWR
FOX J31 J30
J12
+12 V GPS J13 J11
+12 V GPS J13 J11
Figure 3-54 Outdoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 379
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-55 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling details:
PIX 0
37 J1 PL3 25 PL4 J1 PL1
AB6
PL2
AB6 EXTENDER BOARD

PL5 PL6 J2 PL7
Figure 3-55 Outdoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling.
Tech. 380
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-56 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 2
7/16 7/16
DLNB 1
7/16 7/16
DLNB 0
7/16 7/16
Routed to SIDE CABINET
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
DUPLEXER 2
7/16
DUPLEXER 1
7/16
DUPLEXER 0
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
CBF 2
N N
CBF 1
N N
CBF 0
N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-56 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 381
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-57 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 0
7/16 7/16
7/16
BPF CCB 1
N
CCB 0
N N N N N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-57 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 382
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-58 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
DLNB
RF INPUT RF LOAD
IADU
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-58 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 383
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-59 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3), with air combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB DLNB
RF INPUT RF LOAD
RF INPUT RF LOAD
IADU
3-INPUT CBF
NON-H COMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
M-Cell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-59 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3), with air combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Tech. 384
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-60 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
A
RF INPUT RF LOAD
Rx EXT BLOCK
DLNB
DLNB
IADU
IADU
RF INPUT RF LOAD
6 2 2 6
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
Figure 3-60 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 385
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-61 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
RF INPUT RF LOAD
DUPLEXER
DLNB
Rx EXT BLOCK
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB
DLNB
IADU IADU RF INPUT

6 6 6 6
RF LOAD
RF INPUT RF LOAD
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
Figure 3-61 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4), with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Tech. 386
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-62 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS RF EGSM900 2 single sector, twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling details:
DLNB
IADU
TBPF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-62 Outdoor cabinet BTS RF EGSM900 2 single sector, twin band pass filter (TxBPF) RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 387
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-63 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling details:
TX3
RX3B RX2B RX1B
RX3A RX2A RX1A
RF FEEDER PANEL (IN SIDE CABINET)
TX2 TX1
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
HYBRID COMBINERS
TX BPF 0
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-63 Outdoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 388
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-64 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling details:
TX3 TX2 TX1 RX1B RX2B RX3B RX1A RX2A RX3A

5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 2 TX BPF 1
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-64 Outdoor cabinet BTS DCS1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 389
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 3-65 shows the outdoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling details:
(TOP OF CABINET)
MS0 BIB/T43
37
(WHEN INSTALLED)
TATI 1
9
TATI 0
MS1 BIB/T43
GPS
37
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
10
12
12
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE #
J14
#
PWR J21
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
PWR J21
FOX J31 J30
J12
FOX J31 J30
J12 +12 V
+12 V GPS J13 J13 J11
GPS
*
15 RED RED IN OUT
J11
ALARM
Figure 3-65 Outdoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 390
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 4
M-Cell6 ancillary cabinets

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Ancillary cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker panel location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply interconection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC supply functional diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, indicators and monitor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass assembly functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicators on control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board functional blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 425 Interconnect bus board functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 425 Interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 426
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Ancillary cabinet detail
Ancillary cabinet detail

Overview
This chapter provides mechanical and electrical descriptions of an M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet.
General description
The ancillary cabinet provides all +27 V dc power for an outdoor, M-Cell6 installation. An ancillary cabinet has its own independent heat management system either: the HMS heat exchanger or, depending upon the upper ambient operating temperature the HMS air conditioner. The ancillary cabinet houses up to six ac power supply modules (APSMs), each rated at 1.2 kW in an n+1 redundant system. The APSMs float charge four 12 volt lead-acid batteries, arranged in two parallel strings of two, which provide system power in the event of a mains failure. This cabinet also houses individual ac protective breakers for each of the six APSMs: one to supply an isolating transformer for site use during installation and maintenance, and three to supply air conditioners in the ancillary and associated M-Cell6 cabinets. Control circuitry provides temperature compensation for battery charge based on the internal temperature of the battery enclosure. This control circuitry also limits the maximum charge current to the battery and provides a low voltage disconnect of the main cabinet loads to protect the battery from deep discharge. PSU alarms are provided at the OMC-R for mains failure, rectifier failure and low voltage disconnect imminent. A cabinet alarm is also provided for door open.
Equipment
The M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet is equipped with: S S S S S S Two cooling fans, located above the power distribution panel. A power distribution panel, located above the ac power supply modules (APSMs). Up to six APSMs, located in the middle portion of the cabinet. A control and alarm system and bypass system, both located above the battery backup. Battery backup, located in the bottom of the cabinet. The top of the cabinet contains: S S An isolating transformer. Krone blocks, for customer alarms and communications.
There is also provision for: Up to two communications power supply modules (CPSMs); located at the left hand edge of the APSM rack. Mounting of customer communications equipment.
The cabinet is equipped with a heat management system and may also have an optional air conditioner fitted. Either of the units is attached to the rear face of the ancillary cabinet.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 41
GMR-01
Ancillary cabinet internal detail
GSM-105-323

Overview
This section describes the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet.
Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram

Figure 4-1 shows an internal view of the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet and equipment, with the door and cabinet hood enclosure removed:
ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
TOP PANEL
EXTERNAL ALARMS INTERFACE
EXTERNAL COMMS INTERFACE
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (PDP)
COMMS POWER SUPPLY MODULE (CPSM) PANEL (CPSMs mounted behind panel, if required) APSM 5 APSM 4 APSM 3 BUSBARS CUSTOMER COMMS EQUIPMENT SPACE BATTERY ISOLATORS
COOLING FANS x 2
AC POWER SUPPLY MODULE (APSM) 0
APSM 1
APSM 2
CONTROL PANEL
BATTERY BOX (4 x 12V batteries in 2 parallel strings)
Figure 4-1 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet with door and hood removed. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 42
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Ancillary cabinet top panel

This panel provides mounting for: S S Isolating transformer. Krone blocks for: S Customer alarms. Customer communications.
Connections for: AC input power (from side cabinet). AC output power to isolating transformer. AC output power to air conditioner systems. DC output power to BTS cabinets. DC output power to heat management systems. Customer-defined alarm equipment input/output. Alarm management for ancillary cabinet heat management system.
Top panel diagram

Figure 4-2 shows the plan view of the ancillary cabinet top panel.
INPUT FROM HMS EARTH TO IBB KRONE BLOCK
AC INPUT
A/C
KRONE BLOCK
Figure 4-2 Ancillary cabinet top panel layout.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 43
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Table 4-1 details the possible top panel connectors. Table 4-1 Top panel connectors Connector BTS1 +27V BTS1 0V BTS2 +27V BTS2 0V ANC BTS 1 BTS 2 Transformer power External alarms interface Comms interface Ancillary fans power Alarm/control ANC BTS 1 BTS 2 MS External comms BNC Function +27 V power supply 0V +27 V power supply 0V HMS power HMS power HMS power Isolating transformer power supply Customer alarms Customer comms Provide 27 V dc power Cabinet power trip Air conditioner power Air conditioner power Air conditioner power Customer comms Customer comms Customer comms Internal destination CB 14 0 V busbar CB 15 0 V busbar CB 11 CB 12 CB 13 CB 8 PIX connectors in BTS cabinet BIB connector in BTS cabinet Fan 0 and Fan 1 Control & alarm assembly CB 18 CB 19 CB 20 Customer comms equipment Customer comms equipment Customer comms equipment External destination BTS 1 cabinet BTS 1 cabinet BTS 2 cabinet BTS 2 cabinet Ancillary cabinet HMS BTS 1 cabinet HMS BTS 2 cabinet HMS Isolating transformer Customer alarm equipment Customer comms equipment HMS control panel IBB PL4 Ancillary cabinet air conditioner BTS 1 cabinet air conditioner BTS 2 cabinet air conditioner Customer comms Customer comms Customer comms
Tech. 44
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power distribution panel detail

Overview
The power distribution panel (PDP), which distributes ac/dc power throughout the cabinet, consists of circuit breaker and fuse panels containing a maximum of 11 ac circuit breakers, nine dc circuit breakers and three fuses.
Requirement
The cabinet must contain a PDP.
Location
The PDP is mounted above the APSM shelf in the upper portion of the cabinet and is accessible from the front of the cabinet, when the door is open.
PDP diagram
Figure 4-3 shows an ancillary cabinet PDP:
126A
63A
HMS SUPPLY
10A COMMS1 COMMS0
10A
AIR CONDITIONERS
20A APSM 5 4 3 2 1 0
10A
ISO TRANS
BTS2
BTS1
BTS2
BTS1
ANC
63A 63A 63A 63A 63A 63A 63A 10A 10A
FS1-2A CONTROL BOARD FS2-2A LVD CONT. A FS3-2A LVD CONT. B
10A 10A 10A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 10A 10A
Figure 4-3 Ancillary cabinet PDP layout.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
ANC
MAIN BTS2
MAIN BTS1
Tech. 45
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses

Table 4-2 details the circuit breakers and fuses for an ancillary cabinet: Table 4-2 Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses. CB/Fuse CB 2 CB 3 CB 4 CB 5 CB 6 CB 7 CB 8 CB 18 CB 19 CB 20 CB 11 CB 12 CB 13 CB 14 CB 15 CB 16 CB 17 Fuse 1 Fuse 2 Fuse 3 Rating 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 2 x 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 63 A 63 A 63 A 126 A 2 x 63 A 126 A 2 x 63 A 10 A 10 A 2A 2A 2A APSM 0 APSM 1 APSM 2 APSM 3 APSM 4 APSM 5 Safety isolating transformer ANC (Air Conditioner supply) BTS 1 (Air Conditioner supply) BTS 2 (Air Conditioner supply) ANC (HMS supply) BTS 1 (HMS supply) BTS 2 (HMS supply) BTS 1 (Main supply) BTS 2 (Main supply) COMMS 0 COMMS 1 Control & Alarm System/Smoke Detector Control & Alarm System/By-pass System/BCA Control & Alarm System/By-pass System/BCB Power to Voltage 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27
Tech. 46
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
AC power supply
AC power supply
AC input
A three-phase ac power input is provided, which is used for three-phase and single-phase supplies. The input is via a three-pole 50 A circuit breaker, CB1, (breaking the three live lines), from the side cabinet: S CB1a feeds CB2, CB3, CB8 and CB18: S CB2 (20 A) supplies APSM 0. CB3 (20 A) supplies APSM 1. CB8 (a double pole 10 A circuit breaker) supplies the safety isolating transformer. CB18 (10 A) supplies ANC air conditioner (when fitted).
CB1b feeds CB4, CB5 and CB19: CB4 (20 A) supplies APSM 2. CB5 (20 A) supplies APSM 3. CB19 (10 A) supplies BTS 1 air conditioner (when fitted).
CB1c feeds CB6, CB7 and CB20: CB6 (20 A) supplies APSM 4. CB7 (20 A) supplies APSM 5. CB20 (10 A) supplies BTS 2 air conditioner (when fitted). NOTE The side cabinet to ancillary cabinet assumes a three phase supply, the loads (APSMs, safety isolating transformer and HMS (air conditioners)) are equally loaded on the three phases. If single phase is used, then the circuit breakers must be connected in parallel within the side cabinet.
AC circuit breaker panel

The ac supply, from the side cabinet, is controlled by ac circuit breakers on the power distribution panel and routed to up to six APSMs, which convert the ac input to a +27 V dc output. Air conditioner and isolating transformer supplies are also controlled by ac circuit breakers on the power distribution panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 47
GMR-01
AC power supply
GSM-105-323
Location
The ac circuit breaker panel is located above the APSMs in the ancillary cabinet.
AC circuit breaker panel location

Figure 4-4 shows the position of the ac circuit breaker panel:
AC CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Figure 4-4 Ancillary cabinet ac circuit breaker panel.
Tech. 48
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
AC power supply
AC supply interconection
Figure 4-5 shows the ac supply input from the side cabinet to the APSM backplane, air conditioner and isolating transformer connectors:
TOP PANEL
AIR CONDITIONER (WHEN FITTED) BTS 2 BTS 1 ANC
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
CB20
CB19
CB18
CB8
SIDE CABINET
CB1c
phase 3
CB1b
phase 2
CB1a
phase 1
CB7
CB6
CB5
CB4
CB3
CB2
APSM 5
APSM 4
APSM 3
APSM 2
APSM 1
APSM 0
Figure 4-5 AC supply interconnection diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 49
GMR-01
DC power supply
GSM-105-323
DC power supply
DC distribution
DC distribution to the various equipments of the BTS cabinet is controlled from the PDU.
The dc power is distributed using: S S S A control and alarm assembly. A bypass assembly. Battery backup.
The dc outputs of the APSMs are parallelled and connected to common busbars. The positive (+27 V) busbar is connected to the: S S S Batteries via 200 A circuit breakers CB9 and CB10. HMS systems via 63 A circuit breakers CB11, CB12 and CB13. Loads via low voltage disconnect (LVD) contactors BCA and BCB mounted above the batteries.
The negative (0 V) busbar is connected to the: S S S S S S S Batteries via a 60 mV, 300 A shunt SH1. 0 V distribution strip.
Output to the loads are via: CB14 and CB15, at 126 A (2 x 63 A). CB16 to CB17, at 10 A. Fuses FS 1, FS 2 and FS 3, at 2 A.
Test sockets, mounted on the bypass assembly panel, are provided for monitoring: Load voltage (V out). Battery current (I batt).
Tech. 410
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
DC power supply
DC supply functional diagrams

Figure 4-6 shows the dc supply output from the APSM backplane connector and distribution through the circuit breakers and fuses on the distribution panel:
CB11 ANC (HMS) CB12 POWER DISTRIBUTION COMMON POSITIVE BUSBAR +27 V 1 2 APSM 0 BCA (1) 3 4 CB9 APSM 1 CB16 BATTERY BATTERY CB17 APSM 2 BATTERY BATTERY COMMS 1 COMMS 0 10 A 200 A CB10 200 A CB15 BCB (1) CB14 BTS 2 MAIN BTS 1 MAIN BTS 2 (HMS) 63 A RED CB13 BTS 1 (HMS)
APSM 3
APSM 4 SH1 1 2
Part of CONTROL & ALARM assembly
APSM 5 3 4 0V BLACK DISTRIBUTION STRIP
COMMON NEGATIVE BUSBAR
S S
HMS shutdown due to BTS control loss. ac is used to power ACU. Figure 4-6 DC distribution through distribution panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 411
GMR-01
DC power supply
GSM-105-323
Figure 4-7 shows the dc supply output from the APSM backplane connector and distribution through FS1, FS2 and FS3 to power: S S S Control and alarm assembly. BCA and BCB. Bypass assembly.
POWER DISTRIBUTION +27 V 1 2 3 APSM 0 4 INTERNAL BATTERY BCA AUX PL1-6 0V BCA BCB PL1-2 PL1-4 APSM 1 300 A 600 mV PL1-1 PL1-3 PL1-8 APSM 2 PL1-9 PL1-10 P P P P L L L L 5 6 6 6 PL1-5 - - - 9 1 4 5 PL1-3 APSM 3 PL5-8 PL5-7 PL6-3 (TO BATT TEMP SENSE) APSM 4 PL6-2 (TO BATT TEMP SENSE) PL6-10 PL6-9 (PIN 5) PL2 1 APSM 5 2 3 4 PL7-3 PL7-4 PL7-1 PL7-2 (A) (T) O/T PL7-9 PL7-7 DISTRIBUTION STRIP PL7-6 PL7-10 PL7-8 CONTROL AND ALARM ASSEMBLY PL3 PL5-4 PL6-7 PL1-5 SEE NOTE ** SMOKE DETECTOR RESET (NOT USED) SW4 TO SMOKE DETECTOR (NOT USED) LINK MADE IN PLUG AND FAN 1 (PIN 2) BYPASS ASSEMBLY PL1-5 BCB AUX PL1-7 FS1 FS2 FS3 RED
COMMON POSITIVE BUSBAR

FS2 SK1 b b
TO R1 SK1 10-WAY RIBBON
TO R3 SK1
P L 6 6
P L 6 2
P L 1 6
P L 1 1
P L 1 5
FAN 0 (PIN 1) FAN 0 (PIN 2) FAN 1 (PIN 1)
37-WAY RIBBON
TO CABINET ALARMS FRONT BUS DOOR (PIN 4)
SEE NOTE *
O/T
PL7-5 PL7-3 BLACK 1.6M TO SIDE DOOR PL1-7 PL1-9
0V
Figure 4-7 DC distribution to main assemblies
Tech. 412
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
DC power supply
Table 4-3 displays the APSM PL2 pinouts: Table 4-3 APSM PL2 connections Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Use RECTIFIER DC O/P FAIL RECTIFIER MAINS FAIL RECTIFIER ALARM COMMON RETURN RECTIFIER ENABLE RECTIFIER AUXILIARY 12 V dc Comments Alarm signal from APSMs to AB6 Alarm signal from APSMs to AB6 Return line for above signals Held to 0 V by the control and alarm assembly to switch-on the APSMs 12 V dc line feed from the rectifier to the control and alarm assembly present whether or not the rectifier is enabled Signal from the control and alarm board which sets the APSMs output (29.6 V dc to 28.4 V dc) Separate alarm input to control and alarm assembly Common 0 V dc return for control and alarm assembly
RECTIFIER TRIM -
7 8 9 10
RECTIFIER MAIN FAIL GROUND SPARE. SPARE.
This is a simplified schematic, PL1-5 is shown as connected to both 0 V dc and the contactors (BCA) auxiliary and (BCB) auxiliary. In practice both points are connected to 0 V dc (see also the bypass assembly circuit diagram).

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 413
GMR-01
Battery backup
GSM-105-323
Battery backup
Backup function
The batteries provided with the ancillary cabinet are used to provide backup power in the event of loss of main ac power.
The batteries consist of two parallel strings of two 51 Ah lead-acid batteries (102 Ah total system capacity) located in the battery compartment of the cabinet. They are float charged by the output of the APSMs, which provide temperature controlled voltage compensation, and upon loss of the ac mains, the batteries take up the load of the BTS cabinet(s), once the APSMs stop functioning. The typical backup power duration, for an outdoor configuration is 30 minutes. Refer to Figure 4-8. Each battery string is connected to the +27 V busbar via a 200 A circuit breaker (CB9 and CB10), which provide a means of isolating a battery string and for short circuit protection. A thermostat located within the battery compartment provides feedback to the control and alarm assembly, which trims the +27 V output of the APSMs, to provide the correct float charge value. The resistors R2 and R3 provide a protected measurement point for the battery terminal voltage. The current shunt, SH1, provides a signal proportional to the battery current, 60 mV = 300 A. Both these are accessible via two sets of jack socket points and selection dial on the front of the battery compartment.
Tech. 414
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Battery backup
Battery backup functional diagram

Figure 4-8 shows a functional diagram of the battery backup system:
+27 V RED
COMMON POSITIVE BUSBAR
CB9
CB10 PL6-2 TEMPERATURE SENSE PL6-3 +
BATTERY
BATTERY PL5-8 R3 BATTERY VOLTAGE R2 PL5-7 CONTROL & ALARM ASSEMBLY
BATTERY
BATTERY
PL6-10 SH1 BATTERY CURRENT PL6-9 0V BLACK
Figure 4-8 Battery backup functional diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 415
GMR-01
LVD bypass assembly
GSM-105-323
LVD bypass assembly

Bypass function
The bypass assembly panel allows the low voltage disconnect (LVD) circuitry to be bypassed, allowing the output voltage to decrease below 21.0 V without being disconnected. It also gives LED indications of the contactor status. Operation of the bypass function allows replacement of the control and alarm board without powering down.
Location
Mounted on the front of the top panel of the battery box.
LVD bypass assembly: external view

Figure 4-9 shows the bypass assembly part of the control panel:
AUTO BYPASS
RED LED GREEN LED GREEN LED RED LED
BYPASS BCB CLOSED BCA CLOSED SMOKE ALARM
BATT 2 BATT 1
SMOKE ALARM RESET SMOKE DETECTOR
LOW VOLTS
RESET
BYPASS ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-9 LVD bypass assembly.
Tech. 416
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
LVD bypass assembly
Controls, indicators and monitor points

Auto/Bypass switch
This switch (SW1) is normally set to the AUTO position and allows the contactors BCA and BCB to function under control of the control and alarm assembly. If set to the BYPASS position, the contactor control is overridden and allows the output voltage to decrease below 21.0 V without de-energizing the contactor.
Bypass LED
This red LED (LD1) is lit when the AUTO/BYPASS switch is set to the BYPASS position and indicates that the LVD facility is bypassed. The LED is extinguished during normal operation.
BCB Closed LED

This green LED (LD3) is lit when contactor BCB is closed and the dc output is available at the CB14 to CB17 inputs (normal operation). The LED is extinguished when contactor BCB is open due to an LVD condition or a fault condition.
BCA Closed LED

This green LED (LD2) is lit when contactor BCA is closed and the dc output is available at the CB14 to CB17 inputs (normal operation). The LED is extinguished when contactor BCA is open due to an LVD condition or a fault condition. During a fault or when AC power is lost, the batteries are used to provide power to the cabinets. As the batteries are discharged the control and alarm assembly monitors the output voltage. When the voltage reaches 23.4 V dc, a low voltage disconnect imminent (LVDI) alarm is generated and the low volts red LED on the control and alarm assembly is lit. If the batteries are further discharged and the voltage drops to 21 V dc, then a low voltage disconnect (LVD) alarm is generated and relay contacts BCA/BCB are opened. Removing from BTS1, BTS2, COMMS1 and COMMS2. BCA and BCB LEDs on the bypass assembly are extinguished.
Smoke Alarm LED

Not used.
Smoke Alarm Reset push button switch

Not used.
Refer to Figure 4-10. PL1-1 supplies +27 V power to the bypass assembly. With the switch in the AUTO position, contactors BCA and BCB are controlled by the control and alarm assembly. When in the BYPASS position, contactors BCA and BCB are continuously energised via PL1-3 and PL1-4. The BYPASS LED, indicating switch SW1 is in the BYPASS position, is energised via PL1-5. The BCA CLOSED LED, indicating contact BCA closure, is energized via PL1-6. The BCB CLOSED LED, indicating contact BCB closure, is energized via PL1-7.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 417
GMR-01
LVD bypass assembly
GSM-105-323
Bypass assembly functional diagram

Figure 4-10 shows the circuit diagram of the bypass assembly with extensions leading to the positive and negative busbar:
COMMON POSITIVE BUSBAR + 27 V dc PL1-1
D1
D2
FS2 2A
FS3 2A
PL1-2
R1
R2
R3
BCA
BCB BYPASS
D3
BCA CLOSED
LD1 LD2
BCB CLOSED
LD3
PL1-3 0V dc
D4
PL1-4
AUTO PL1-5 BCA AUXILIARY BYPASS PL1-6 BCB AUXILIARY PL1-7

SW1
TO CONTROL AND ALARM ASSEMBLY COMMON NEGATIVE BUSBAR 0 V dc BORDER OF BYPASS ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-10 Bypass assembly functional diagram.
Tech. 418
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control and alarm assembly

Control and alarm functions
The control and alarm assembly provides the following functions: S S S S S S S Monitoring of alarms from HMS and ancillary cabinet. Monitoring of battery voltage, current drain and temperature. Monitoring of ac and dc failure. APSM enable/disable. Control of battery contactors. APSM voltage trim. Low voltage disconnect.
Requirements
The cabinet must contain a control and alarm assembly.
Location
Control and alarm assembly location diagram

Figure 4-11 shows the control and alarm assembly part of the control panel:
AUTO
BYPASS BYPASS
BATT 2 BATT 1
BCB CLOSED BCA CLOSED LOW VOLTS
CONTROL AND ALARM ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-11 Control panel control and alarm assembly

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 419
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control and alarm assembly board

Figure 4-12 shows a control and alarm assembly board:
RL4
RL1
APSM
SW2
PL2
RL3 PL3 IBB
RL2
LD1 LVDI PL7 PL8 ISOLATE SMOKE DETECTOR PL5
PL1
PL6
SW1
Figure 4-12 Control and alarm assembly board.
Controls and indicators on control and alarm assembly

Battery selector switch
This five way (centre position not used) switch (SW1) is used to monitor: S S S S Battery (string 1) voltage. Battery (string 2) voltage. Load voltage. Battery current.
Link PL8
Not used.
Smoke detect
On receipt of either an internal or external Smoke Detect signal, the control and alarm assembly generates a smoke alarm, and starts the smoke shutdown delay timer. This timer provides a delay, adjustable between 2 to 30 seconds by a 16 position switch on the front panel. If the Smoke Detect signal is still present after this time, the battery contactors are opened and the APSMs are inhibited to shut the cabinet down. The smoke alarm may be manually reset by pressing the smoke alarm reset button on the front panel. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 420
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
APSM fail
An alarm output is generated should a DC FAIL signal be received from the main APSMs.
APSM enable/disable
The control and alarm assembly sends an APSM Disable signal to the APSMs under certain alarm conditions.
Cabinet circuit breaker

The control and alarm assembly controls the cabinet main contactors BCA and BCB to connect or isolate the main cabinet power feed.
Battery charge
The battery charge current and temperature are monitored. Should the charge current become excessive, the APSM trim voltage output is adjusted to prevent damage to the battery. The charge voltage is adjusted in accordance with temperature.
APSM trim
The APSM trim voltage output adjusts the output voltage of the APSMs.
Alarm outputs
The alarms generated by the control and alarm assembly are connected to the cabinet alarm board via the alarm bus.
Low-temperature
If a low-temperature warning signal is received from the HMS, this indicates that the system is below the minimum operating temperature. Under this condition, the control and alarm assembly generates a Low Temp alarm, and prevents restart of the APSMs after LVD.
Over-temperature
On receipt of an Overtemp alarm signal, the control and alarm assembly generates an Overtemp alarm, opens the cabinet and battery contactors and inhibits the APSMs to shut the cabinet down.
Low-voltage imminent
An LVD imminent alarm signal is generated if the system voltage level falls below 23.4 volts. A red low volts led, mounted on the top edge of the panel, is illuminated under this condition.
Low-voltage disconnect
If the system voltage falls below 21 volts, contactor BCA and BCB are opened to power down the cabinet and prevent harmful deep discharge of the battery.
AC fail
An alarm output is generated should an AC FAIL signal be received via the APSMs.
Control and alarm assembly power latch

Power is supplied to the control and alarm assembly via on-board switches. These switches are enabled on receipt of a Mains Present signal, and kept latched while the system voltage remains above the LVD threshold. During ac supply failure, the latch is maintained until the LVD threshold is reached. The cabinet is then powered down until the mains power supply is restored. During the time the cabinet is shut down, a 100 mA supply is maintained to the control and alarm assembly for the smoke shutdown latch.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 421
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Alarm inputs
The control and alarm assembly accepts the following inputs: S S S S S S S S S Low temperature warning from HMS. Over temperature alarm. Over temperature trip. Internal/external smoke detectors. DC fail signal from APSMs. AC fail via opto-isolator. Battery temperature sensor. Battery current shunt. Battery A and B voltage.
Alarm signals
The control and alarm assembly provides the following alarm signals: S S S S S S Low temperature alarm. Cabinet over temperature trip. Ancillary cabinet over temperature. Main AC supply failure. LVD (low voltage disconnect) imminent. DC (APSM) failure.
Tech. 422
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control and alarm assembly board functional blocks

Figure 4-13 identifies the functional blocks of the control and alarm assembly:
AC PRESENT SIGNAL VIA OPTO
POWER LATCH
LVD CIRCUIT SYSTEM VOLTAGE SENSE LVD IMMINENT CIRCUIT APSM ENABLE/ DISABLE CIRCUIT APSM DISABLE
LOW TEMP WARNING (INHIBIT) FROM HMS
LOWTEMP CIRCUIT
CONTACTOR BCA DRIVER
OPEN CONTACTOR BCA
ANCILLARY OVERTEMP ALARM SIGNAL OVERTEMP TRIP SIGNAL
OVERTEMP CIRCUIT
BATTERY 2 CONTACTOR BCB DRIVER
OPEN CONTACTOR BCB
APSM TRIM VOLTAGE OUTPUT
BATTERY CURRENT SENSE BATTERY TEMP SENSE
BATTERY CHARGE CIRCUIT
LOW TEMP ALARM CABINET O/T TRIP ANC CAB O/T
AC FAIL SIGNAL VIA RELAY
MAINS FAIL CIRCUIT
ALARM OUTPUTS
PSU AC I/P FAIL LVD IMMINENT
DC FAIL SIGNAL FROM APSMS
APSM FAIL CIRCUIT
PSU DC I/P FAIL
Figure 4-13 Control and alarm assembly functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 423
GMR-01
Fan cooling system
GSM-105-323
Fan cooling system

Fan functions
The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors and blanking panels, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment. Each fan tray assembly contains an exhaust fan. There are two fan tray assemblies fitted to a cabinet. Each fan has a low speed sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the HMS.
Location
The fan cooling system is mounted directly above the power distribution panel.
Requirements
Power for the fans is derived from the HMS and is routed directly to the fans.
Tech. 424
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Interconnect bus board functions
The interconnect bus board (IBB) provides a connection and distribution point for cabinet alarms and HMS control signals.
Location
An interconnect bus board is fitted on the back wall, left side, in the top box of the ancillary cabinet.
Requirements
There must be an IBB fitted in the ancillary cabinet.
Diagram
The following shows an IBB: CABINET TOP PANEL J3
PL1 INPUT FROM ANCILLARY J1 HMS J2 OUTPUT TO NEXT BTS Indicates pin1 position

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 425
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Interconnection diagram
The following shows cabinet interconnection using IBBs:
BTS CABINET
IBB PANEL HMS CONTROL PANEL
ANCILLARY CABINET
HMS CONTROL PANEL
IBB PANEL
J3 PL1 J3 J1 J2 J1 J2 PL1
BACK PANEL
BACK PANEL
CABINET CONNECTOR
CABINET CONNECTOR
TOP PANEL
TOP PANEL
Tech. 426
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 5
M-Cell6 side cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Side cabinet detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety labels location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal safety labels location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet bottom panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 51 Tech. 51 Tech. 52 Tech. 53 Tech. 54 Tech. 55
Side cabinet ac supply detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 56 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 56

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet detail
Side cabinet detail

Side cabinet functions
The side cabinet provides environmental protection for an outdoor, M-Cell6 cable installation. The cabinet is intended to be connected to either a nominal 230 V ac, 45 to 66 Hz, single phase, or 415 V ac three-phase supply system. The side cabinet contains: S S S S S S An area for regional electricity company (REC) meter and fuses to be fitted, (this fitting to take place in the field). Termination points for the incoming ac three phase supply. A 100 A minimum, four pole, switched isolator. A three phase mains transient protector. A 3 pole 50 A main contact breaker (MCB). The main earth busbar that forms the central connection point for: S S Protective earthing. Lightning protection. Functional earthing.
The RF termination panel. Provision for high power duplexers to be fitted.
When required a 30 mA residual current device (RCD) is fitted, after the switched isolator, to provide additional protection against electric shock.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 51
GMR-01
Side cabinet detail
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet internal view

Figure 5-1 shows the M-Cell6 side cabinet with the front cover removed:
EARTH PLATE
RF BULKHEAD PANEL
AC CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
DUPLEXER(S), HIGH POWER (OPTIONAL) DUPLEXER SHELF
MAINS ISOLATOR SWITCH
MAINS METER BOARD
Figure 5-1 M-Cell6 side cabinet internal view
Tech. 52
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet detail
Safety labels location

Figure 5-2 and Table 5-1 show the location of the warning, advisory and specific labels applied to the M-Cell6 side cabinet door.
Figure 5-2 Side cabinet inside door safety labels. Table 5-1 details the side cabinet inside door labelling: Table 5-1 Side cabinet door safety labels. Key 1 2 3 Description Power rating label Earth plate label Rx/Tx positions on bulkhead panel Part number 5404412N05 Comments

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 53
GMR-01
Side cabinet detail
GSM-105-323
Internal safety labels location

Figure 5-3 and Table 5-2 show the location of the M-Cell6 internal safety labels.
3 (ON ISOLATION BOX

ABOVE SWITCH)
Figure 5-3 Side cabinet internal safety labels. Table 5-2 details the internal labelling: Table 5-2 Side cabinet internal safety labels. Key 1 2 3 Description Radiation 500 V AC 500 V AC Part number 5402282W01 AC circuit breaker panel Isolation box Comments
Tech. 54
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet detail
Side cabinet bottom panel

A plastic panel with integrally molded cable sleeves can be fitted to prevent vermin entering the side cabinet. If fitted, the panel is located at the bottom of the side cabinet over the cable entry ducts. Figure 5-4 shows the M-Cell6 side cabinet bottom panel:
Figure 5-4 M-Cell6 side cabinet bottom panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 55
GMR-01
Side cabinet ac supply detail
GSM-105-323
Side cabinet ac supply detail

Single or three phase ac power is provided via the supply authoritys meter and fuse, (these are fitted on the ac meter board or located externally). Refer to Figure 5-5. The ac power is fed via a four-pole isolating switch, SW1, to four termination points. Transient protection is provided by a suppressor connected to the termination points. The ac isolator switch, the suppressor, and the termination points are all contained within the same plastic enclosure. If a single phase supply is connected, the three live termination points are electrically linked to supply the separate loads. If a three phase supply is connected, the termination points must not be linked. The supply is then fed to a three-pole 50 A main contact breaker (MCB), which switches the three live lines only. The MCB is contained in a separate enclosure, mounted immediately above the main distribution enclosure.
INPUT
OUTPUT TO ANCILLARY CABINET
PHASE 1
RED
SW1a
RED CB1a RED
RED
PHASE 2
YELLOW
SW1b
YELLOW
YELLOW
CB1b
YELLOW
PHASE 3
SW1c
BLUE BLUE BLUE
CB1c
BLUE
NEUTRAL
BLACK
SW1d
BLACK BLACK
BLACK
50A MCB enclosure

SUPPRESSOR
GREEN/YELLOW EARTH GREEN/YELLOW
Main distribution enclosure
GREEN/YELLOW
Figure 5-5 AC distribution functional diagram.
Tech. 56
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 6
M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet and battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 61 Additional equipment cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet: internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: inside view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP circuit breaker diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LVD bypass assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass assembly: Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls, indicators and monitor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 62 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 63 Tech. 64 Tech. 64 Tech. 65 Tech. 65 Tech. 65 Tech. 66 Tech. 67 Tech. 68 Tech. 68 Tech. 69 Tech. 610 Tech. 611 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 612 Tech. 613 Tech. 614 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 615 Tech. 616 Tech. 617 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 618 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 619 Tech. 619

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control and alarm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly: location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm assembly board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 620 Tech. 621 Tech. 621 Tech. 622 Tech. 622 Tech. 622 Tech. 623 Tech. 624
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box

Additional equipment
The additional equipment cabinet can be equipped with: S S Up to three high powered duplexers. RF filters (customer specified).
Batteries
The battery box can be equipped with: S 0, 2 or 4 batteries.
The additional equipment cabinet does not require any power.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 61
GMR-01
Additional equipment cabinet
GSM-105-323

Function
The additional equipment cabinet houses up to three duplexers and up to three RF filters (customer specified). The cabinet is accessed by a hinged front door. The top panel interfaces with the battery boxes and BTS, providing power connections, communication signals and monitor signals.
Location
The additional equipment cabinet is positioned on top of the battery boxes.
Additional equipment cabinet: internal view

Figure 6-1 is a view of the additional equipment cabinet:
ENCLOSURE DOOR
TOP PANEL (only required with battery boxes)
DUPLEXERS RF MOUNTING BRACKET FILTERS
Figure 6-1 Additional equipment cabinet.
Tech. 62
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Additional equipment cabinet top panel

Function
This panel provide openings for connections to duplexers and RF filters. The top panel also provides connections for communications, battery feeds, alarm signals and emergency stop.
Location
On the top of the additional equipment cabinet.
Top panel configurations

Figure 6-2 shows the top panel configurations. See also Table 6-1:
BATTERY BOX 2
BATTERY BOX 1
D
BTS 2 BTS 4 EMERGENCY STOP BATT BOX 2 EMERGENCY STOP BATT BOX 1 COMMS POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT BATT BOX 2 ALARMS
C
LINK BTS 3
B
LINK BTS 2
A BTS 1 BTS 1
(cell outputs) BATTERY BOX POWER OUTPUTS
BATT BOX 1 ALARMS
Figure 6-2 Top panel configurations.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 63
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Battery box configurations

Figure 6-3 shows the battery box configurations. See also Table 6-1:
Battery Box (with cells C & D) SLAVE (2) Battery Box (with cells A & B) MASTER (1)
Figure 6-3 Battery box configurations.

Table 6-1 details the top panel connectors: Table 6-1 Top panel connectors Connector Emergency Stop Battery Box 2 Emergency Stop Battery Box 1 Comms Power Supply Output Function Emergency Stop Internal destination Battery Box 2 External destination Customer Emergency Stop Switch Customer Emergency Stop Switch External Customer Equipment Either BTS 1 (Master) for 1 cabinet or BTS 2 (Slave) for 2 cabinets Batt Box 1 Alarms BTS 2/BTS 4 LINK/BTS 3 BTS 2/LINK BTS 1/BTS 1 Alarms Output to BTS DC Output DC Output DC Output DC Output Battery Box 1 & 2 Battery Box 2 Battery Box 2 Battery Box 1 Battery Box 1 BTS RF cabinets. Links provide the connections in order to parallel up the battery boxes. BTS 1
Emergency Stop
Battery Box 1
Comms Power
Battery Box 1
Batt Box 2 Alarms
Alarms Output to BTS
Battery Box 2
Tech. 64
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor battery box
Indoor battery box

Battery box function
The main function of the M-Cell6 indoor battery box is to house backup power batteries. These provide power to M-Cell6 indoor ac mains BTS cabinets in the event of mains ac supply failure. Two battery boxes and an additional equipment cabinet can be stacked on top of each other, next to the M-Cell6 BTS. The cabinet uses internal convection cooling, with vent slots around the box shell. There are no internal or external cooling elements (no cabinet fans or Heat Management Systems). Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 show the battery box layout. There is provision to install up to four off SBS60 (Hawker Energy) 12 V lead-acid monoblocks and the necessary dc distribution equipment. The monoblocks are configured as two parallel batteries consisting of two 12 V monoblocks each. This gives a nominal 24 V dc, which is more generally referred to as the +27 V Bus Voltage. The dc distribution provides for the connection of the monoblocks, their associated protective devices, battery management circuitry and the +27 V dc power distribution. The +27 V dc distribution consists of two MCB protected outputs defined as BTS 1 Output and BTS 2 Output and two fuse protected outputs for CPSM0 and CPSM1. BTS 1 and BTS 2 outputs to the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinets for which the battery box is providing backup power. The external +27 V dc interconnect allows for two of these battery boxes to be used to provide power for up to two M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinets. Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7 show two typical cabinet suite configurations and their connections. NOTE The additional equipment cabinet is not shown.
Location
The battery boxes are located below the additional equipment cabinet.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 65
GMR-01
Indoor battery box
GSM-105-323
Battery box: inside view

Figure 6-4 shows a front inside view of the battery box and door panel:
DC DISTRIBUTION AREA CONTROL BOARD FUSES
OUTPUT MCBS
BATTERY MCCB CONTROL BOARD
SBS60 MONOBLOCKS (4 off total capacity)
FRONT VIEW
CPSM 0 OUTPUT ECB
CPSM 1 OUTPUT ECB
BATTERY BOX INSIDE VIEW OF DOOR
0
1
CPSM 0
0
1
CPSM 1
PROTECTIVE COVER
POWER OUTPUT CONNECTOR
CPSM 0 POWER INPUT
CPSM 1 POWER INPUT ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTOR
NOTE The CPSM module is an option which can only be fitted to the master battery box.
Figure 6-4 Battery box front view and inside door panel
Tech. 66
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor battery box
Battery box: rear view

Figure 6-5 shows a rear view of the battery box:
M10 EARTH STUD
BTS 2 BATTERY FEED
ALARM / SIGNAL CONNECTOR
BATTERY CABINET EMERGENCY STOP CONNECTOR
BTS 1 BATTERY FEED CPSM POWER OUTPUT
REAR VIEW
NOTE : CABLE RESTRAINTS SHOULD BE ADDED AS NECESSARY FOR ALL CABLES
REAR VIEW SHOWING CONNECTORS ON REAR FLANGE OF BATTERY BOX
CPSM POWER OUTPUT
Figure 6-5 Rear view of battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 67
GMR-01
Indoor battery box
GSM-105-323
The battery box back-up connects to the M-Cell6 BTS cabinets via two sets of Anderson type high power connectors. These are located on the rear back-plate of the box. One is dedicated for the nominated M-Cell6 cabinet BTS 1 and the other for the M-Cell6 cabinet BTS 2. Under normal system operating conditions both BTS 1 and BTS 2 cabinets provide battery charging power. The dc distribution within the battery box consists of supplying +27 V dc to the following loads. Each feed is either MCB or fuse protected. S S S S S BTS 1 feed BTS 2 feed CPSM 0 CPSM 1 Control board supply and battery LVD contactors
During normal operation the control board provides a temperature compensation signal to the BTS-located ACPMs, and the nominal +27 V dc bus voltage is at 27.4 V dc. When the ac mains fails, the ACPM outputs falls, and the batteries within the battery box support the BTS load. The internal monoblocks are protected from deep discharge. The control board monitors the falling battery voltage and, when this reaches the low voltage disconnect (LVD) level of 21.0 V, both battery contactors are opened. Disconnecting the +27 V dc supply to the BTS 1 and BTS 2 outputs, removes power from the M-Cell6 BTS cabinets. At this point there is no load on the batteries. The control board closes the battery contactors once the main ac supply is re-applied to the ACPM, and +27 V dc from the rectifiers appears on the battery box BTS 1 and BTS 2 outputs. The control board circuitry also monitors alarms and signals which originate from both outside and within the battery box.
Configuration options
Three battery connection configuration options are available, two are illustrated in Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7. The third option, Figure 6-8, consists of mounting one battery box under the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet . The circuit shown in Figure 6-6 illustrating the master battery box is common to all three options.
Tech. 68
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Indoor battery box
Configuration option 1
Figure 6-6 illustrates the Option 1 connection.
OPTIONAL LINK
MC6 BTS
PIX ALARMS
MC6 BTS
PIX ALARMS BATTERY BOX 2 - SLAVE
+/
BTS 2
BTS 1
+27Vdc
+27Vdc +/
BTS 2 BTS 1 CPSMs
BTS 2
BTS 1
BATTERY BOX 1 - MASTER
BTS 2
+ +
ALARMS BATTERY BOX 2 - SLAVE
BTS 1
+ +
CPSMs CONTROL DRIVE
BTS 2
ALARMS BATTERY BOX 1 - MASTER
BTS 1
NOTE The top diagram illustrates two BTSs with a master and slave battery box. The bottom diagram illustrates simplified master and slave battery box circuits. Figure 6-6 Option1 M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet suite: 55 minutes backup duration at 25_C

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 69
GMR-01
Indoor battery box
GSM-105-323
Figure 6-7 shows the Option2 connections:
ALARM JUMPER
BATTERY BOX 2 SLAVE
BTS 2
BTS 1
MC6 BTS
ALARMS
+27Vdc
BTS 2
BTS 1
CPSMs
ALARMS
PIX
BTS 1
31st May 01
BATTERY BOX 1 MASTER
ALARMS
+27Vdc
MC6 BTS
MC6 BTS
ALARMS
PIX
+27Vdc
Figure 6-7 Option 2 M-Cell indoor cabinet suite: 20+ minutes backup duration at 25_C Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 610
PIX
GMR-01
BTS 4
BTS 3
M-Cell6 BTSs
MC6 BTS
PIX
+27Vdc
BTS 2
GSM-105-323
Indoor battery box
Figure 6-8 shows the Option 3 connections:
MC6 BTS
PIX ALARMS
+27Vdc
BTS 2
BTS 1
CPSMs
BTS 1 Figure 6-8 Option 3 M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet: 55 minutes backup duration at 25_C

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 611
GMR-01
Power distribution panel
GSM-105-323

Function
The power distribution panel (PDP) distributes +27 V dc power throughout the BTS cabinet after an ac fail. It consists of circuit breaker and fuse panels containing a maximum of four dc circuit breakers and five fuses.
Requirement
The cabinet must contain a PDP.
Location
The PDP is mounted above the battery compartment, on the battery box.
PDP location diagram

Figure 6-9 shows the PDP position within the battery box:
MCBS BTS OUTPUT FUSE BANK
BATTERY MCCBS HAZARDOUS ENERGY LABEL WITH !
CONTROL BOARD
PDP
BATTERY COMPARTMENT COVER
FRONT VIEW
COMBINED BATTERY DATA & BATTERY INFORMATION
HAZARDOUS ENERGY LABEL WITH LIGHTNING ARROW
Figure 6-9 PDP position within battery box
Tech. 612
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
PDP circuit breaker diagram

Figure 6-10 shows the circuit breaker positions within the PDP:
MCBs
200 A
BTS 1
126 A 126 A
FS1T10 AHCPSM0 FS3T2 AH BCA
FS1T10 AHCPSM1 FS4T2 AH BCB
BATT 2
BTS 2
BATT 1
FS5T2 AH
CONTROL PCA
FUSES
INDICATOR LEDs AUTO

BYPASS
RED LED GREEN LED GREEN LED
BYPASS BCB
BATT 2 BATT 1
CLOSED BCA CLOSED
LOW VOLTS
Figure 6-10 Circuit breaker positions within battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 613
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Battery box circuit breakers and fuses

Table 6-2 details the circuit breakers and fuses for the battery box. Table 6-2 Battery box circuit breakers and fuses CB/Fuse BTS 1 Output BTS 2 Output BATT 1 BATT 2 CPSM0 CPSM1 PCA BCA BCB Rating Power to Voltage dc +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27
2 pole 63 A 126 A total BTS6 cabinet 2 pole 63 A 126 A total BTS6 cabinet 1 pole of 200 A 1 pole of 200 A 10 A 10 A 2A 2A 2A Cabinet Cabinet Comms Supply 1 Comms Supply 2 Control Board Batt 1 LVD Batt 2 LVD
Tech. 614
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
LVD bypass assembly
LVD bypass assembly

Function
The bypass assembly panel allows the low voltage disconnect (LVD) circuitry to be bypassed, allowing the output voltage to decrease below 21.0 V without being disconnected. It also gives LED indications of the contactor status. Operation of the bypass function allows replacement of the control and alarm board without powering down.
Location
Bypass assembly: Front panel

Figure 6-11 shows the bypass assembly part of the control panel:
AUTO
BYPASS
BYPASS BCB
BATT 2 BATT 1
CLOSED BCA CLOSED
LOW VOLTS
BYPASS ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-11 Bypass assembly control panel diagram

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 615
GMR-01
LVD bypass assembly
GSM-105-323
Controls, indicators and monitor points

Auto/Bypass switch
This switch (SW1) is normally set to the AUTO position and allows the contactors BCA and BCB to function under control of the control and alarm assembly. If set to the BYPASS position, the contactor control is overridden and allows the output voltage to decrease below 21.0 V without de-energizing the contactor.
Bypass LED
This red LED (LD1) is lit when the AUTO/BYPASS switch is set to the BYPASS position and indicates that the LVD facility is bypassed. The LED is extinguished during normal operation.
BCB Closed LED

This green LED (LD3) is lit when contactor BCB is closed and the dc output is available at the CB14 to CB17 inputs (normal operation). The LED is extinguished when contactor BCB is open due to an LVD condition or a fault condition.
BCA Closed LED

This green LED (LD2) is lit when contactor BCA is closed and the dc output is available at the CB14 to CB17 inputs (normal operation). The LED is extinguished when contactor BCA is open due to an LVD condition or a fault condition.
Tech. 616
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
LVD bypass assembly
Refer to Figure 6-12. +27 V power to the bypass assembly is supplied to PL1-1. With the switch in the AUTO position, contactors BCA and BCB are controlled by the control and alarm assembly. When in the BYPASS position, contactors BCA and BCB are continuously energized via PL1-3 and PL1-4. The BYPASS LED, indicating switch SW1 is in the BYPASS position, is energized via PL1-5. The BCA CLOSED LED, indicating contact BCA closure, is energized via PL1-6. The BCB CLOSED LED, indicating contact BCB closure, is energized via PL1-7. Figure 6-12 represents the circuit diagram of the bypass assembly:
COMMON POSITIVE BUSBAR + 27 V dc PL1-1
D1
D2
FS2 2A
FS3 2A
PL1-2
R1
R2
R3
BCA
BCB BYPASS
D3
BCA CLOSED
LD1 LD2
BCB CLOSED
LD3
PL1-3 0V dc
D4
PL1-4
AUTO PL1-5 BCA AUXILIARY BYPASS PL1-6 BCB AUXILIARY PL1-7

SW1
TO CONTROL AND ALARM ASSEMBLY COMMON NEGATIVE BUSBAR 0 V dc BORDER OF BYPASS ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-12 Bypass assembly functional diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 617
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Function
The CPSM provides operating power for internal communications equipment.
Requirement
The CPSMs are fitted when customer communications equipment is installed.
Location
Up to two CPSMs are located behind the lower master battery box door, in a non-redundant configuration within a CPSM assembly (not shown).
CPSM module view diagram

Figure 6-13 shows a CPSM:
Figure 6-13 CPSM module external view.
Tech. 618
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The communications power supply equipment consists of up to two 150 W plug-in CPSMs. Each CPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to either +48 V or +54 V 1 % at 1.85 A.
Monitor circuits
Internal CPSM circuits monitor the output for the following purposes: S S S Output voltage regulation. Over voltage protection - provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over current protection - provides foldback voltage/current output limiting if output current exceeds 1.1 to 1.35 times full-load rating.
Circuit protection
The following is additional internal CPSM circuit protection: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection: CPSM trips the cabinet circuit breaker if input dc polarity is reversed. Thermal protection: if CPSM internal temperature exceeds a safe level the CPSM shuts down. Normal CPSM operation resumes after temperature returns to a safe level.
CPSM functional diagram

Figure 6-14 shows a functional diagram of the CPSM:
CONNECTORS
ISOLATED
VOUT (54 V)
VIN (+27 V)
Figure 6-14 CPSM functional diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 619
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Functions
The control and alarm assembly provides the following functions: S S S S S S Monitors battery voltage, current drain, and temperature. Monitors ac and dc failure. APSM enable/disable. Controls battery contactors. APSM voltage trim. Low voltage disconnect.
Requirement
The cabinet must contain a control and alarm assembly.
Location
The control and alarm assembly is mounted on the front of the battery box.
Control and alarm assembly: location

Figure 6-15 shows the control and alarm assembly part of the control panel:
AUTO
BYPASS BYPASS BCB
BATT 2 BATT 1
CLOSED BCA CLOSED
LOW VOLTS
Figure 6-15 Control panel control and alarm assembly Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 620
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control and alarm assembly board diagram

Figure 6-16 shows a control and alarm assembly board:
RL4
RL1
APSM
SW2
PL2
RL3 PL3 IBB
RL2
LD1 LVDI PL7 PL8 ISOLATE SMOKE DETECTOR PL5
PL1
PL6
SW1
Figure 6-16 Control and alarm assembly board layout
Controls and indicator

Battery selector switch
This five way (centre position not used) switch (SW1) is used to monitor: S S S S Battery (string 1) voltage. Battery (string 2) voltage. Load voltage. Battery current.
Low volts LED

This red LED (LD1) is lit when the output voltage is less than 23.4 V. The LED is extinguished during normal operation.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 621
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Functions
The control and alarm assembly functions are as follows: S S Opens/closes battery contactors. Control of battery charging, by monitoring battery charge current, temperature and voltage.
Alarm inputs
The control and alarm assembly accepts the following inputs: S S S S S Over temperature alarm. Over temperature trip. Battery temperature sensor. Battery current shunt. Battery A and B voltage.
Alarm signals
The control and alarm assembly provides the following alarm signals: S S Cabinet over temperature trip. LVD (low voltage disconnect) imminent.
Tech. 622
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Functional block diagram

Figure 6-17 identifies the functional blocks of the control and alarm assembly:
power latch
LVD circuit SYSTEM VOLTAGE SENSE LVD IMMINENT circuit
CONTACTOR BCA driver
OPEN CONTACTOR BCA
OVERTEMP TRIP SIGNAL
Overtemp circuit
CONTACTOR BCB driver
OPEN CONTACTOR BCB
ACPM TRIM VOLTAGE OUTPUT
BATTERY CURRENT SENSE BATTERY TEMP SENSE
Battery charge circuit CABINET OVERTEMP TRIP
Alarm outputs LVD IMMINENT
Figure 6-17 Control and alarm assembly functional block diagram

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 623
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Cabinet circuit breaker
The control and alarm assembly controls the cabinet main contactors BCA and BCB to connect or isolate the main cabinet power feed.
Battery charge
The battery charge current and temperature are monitored. Should the charge current become excessive, the ACPM trim voltage output is adjusted to prevent damage to the battery. The charge voltage is adjusted in accordance with temperature.
ACPM trim
The ACPM trim voltage output adjusts the output voltage of the ACPMs.
Alarm outputs
The alarms generated by the control and alarm assembly are connected to the cabinet alarm board via the alarm bus.
Over temperature
On receipt of an overtemp alarm signal, the control and alarm assembly generates an overtemp alarm, opens the cabinet and battery contactors, and inhibits the ACPMs to shut the cabinet down.
Low voltage imminent

An LVD imminent alarm signal is generated if the system voltage level falls below 23.4 V. A red low volts LED, mounted on the top edge of the panel, is illuminated under this condition.
Low voltage disconnect

If the system voltage falls below 21 V, contactors BCA and BCB are opened to power down the cabinet and prevent harmful deep discharge of the battery.
Control and alarm assembly power latch

Power is supplied to the control and alarm assembly via on-board switches. These switches are enabled, and kept electronically latched while the system voltage remains above the LVD threshold. During mains failure, the latch is maintained until the low voltage disconnect (LVD) threshold is reached. The cabinet is then powered down until the main ac power supply is restored.
Tech. 624
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 7
M-Cell6 heat management system

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Heat management system (HMS) cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner: external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS cabinet safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger: internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner cooling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercabling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS connection panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control board detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board signal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan controller board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan speed control functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner control board components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings, indications and check signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 727 Tech. 727 Tech. 727 Tech. 728 Tech. 729 Tech. 730 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731 Tech. 731
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Heat management system (HMS) cabinets

Function
The M-Cell6 heat management system maintains the internal temperatures of the BTS cabinets within specified operating limits (not the battery box). The HMS is available in two versions: the heat exchanger and the air conditioner. NOTE the term heat management system (or HMS) applies to both the heat exchanger and the air conditioner.
Heat exchanger
This is designed to cope with ambient temperatures of up to 45 _C and contains: S S S S S Recuperator units. Ambient air fans. Fan controller system. Electric heater elements. Control system.
Air conditioner
This is designed to cope with ambient temperatures up to 55 _C and contains: S S S S S S S S S Recuperator unit. Ambient air fan. Fan controller system. Electric heater elements. Compressor. Evaporator coil. Condenser coil. Condenser fan. Control system. CAUTION The control system and fan controller system boards are electrostatically sensitive. Refer to the Devices sensitive to static section at the beginning of this manual before undertaking installation or maintenance tasks to the HMS.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 71
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Location
The HMS is attached to rear of M-Cell6 BTS/Ancillary cabinet.
Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger: external view

Figure 7-1 shows the external view of the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger unit:
M-CELL6 BTS CABINET
HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (Heat Exchanger)
Figure 7-1 Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger.
Tech. 72
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner: external view

Figure 7-2 shows the external view of the MCell6 outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner unit:
HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (Air Conditioner) M-CELL6 BTS CABINET
Figure 7-2 Outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner unit.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 73
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS cabinet safety labels

Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 show the location of the advisory and specific label applied to the M-Cell6 HMS cabinets.
RATING LABEL
Figure 7-3 External labelling - heat exchanger
Tech. 74
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RATING LABEL
Figure 7-4 External labelling - air conditioner

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 75
GMR-01
Heat exchanger detail
GSM-105-323

Function
The radio and digital equipment installed in the cabinet emit heat which must be removed in order to maintain the correct working temperature. As the radio equipment must be protected against atmospheric contaminants, an indirect cooling system is employed.
Location
Attached to an M-Cell6 BTS/Ancillary cabinet.
Heat exchanger: internal view

Figure 7-5 shows the location of the various components of the heat exchanger:
HMS CONTROL BOARD
RECUPERATOR
POWER ENTRY BOARD
FAN CONTROLLER BOARDS
AMBIENT AIR FANS
HEATER RELAYS
HEATER ELEMENTS
RECUPERATOR
NOTE: THE FRONT PANEL AND WIRING INTERCONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY.
Figure 7-5 MCell6 heat exchanger internal components. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 76
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Heat exchanger components

The heat exchanger consists of the following items:
Recuperators
Both recuperators are manufactured from a series of epoxy resin coated aluminium sheets, sealed at alternate edges to form two sets of narrow air passages, one set for the ambient air and one set for the recirculated air. The warmer air stream gives off heat to the colder air stream, but the air streams do not mix.
Ambient air fans

The ambient air fans are located in the centre, seen from the back of the unit. The fans are of the radial type with backward curved blades for maximum efficiency. The fan impeller is direct driven by a 27 V dc motor with a solid state commutator. The fans are speed controlled under the dictates of the control system, which measures the internal air temperature at the top of the BTS enclosure.
Electric heaters
The electric heaters are located on either side of the ambient air inlet tunnel (in the internal airflow), seen from the back of the unit. There are four individual heaters (in two pairs), each with its own high limit thermostat attached. The heaters are relay controlled in two steps, under the dictates of the control system.
Control system
There are three components that make up the control system. They are: S S S Control board. Used for temperature control of the BTS cabinet. Fan controller boards. Used for current control of the external (ambient) air fans. Temperature control.
Recirculation air fans

The recirculation air fans are located in the top of the BTS cabinet and although not part of the heat exchanger unit, are powered from the HMS control system. The fans are of the radial type with backward curved blades for maximum efficiency. The fan impeller is direct driven by a 27 V dc motor with a solid state commutator. Its speed is controlled from within the fan, by a temperature sensor mounted in the airflow, below the TCU cage.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 77
GMR-01
Air conditioner detail
GSM-105-323

Overview
To enhance the ability of the HMS to maintain the BTS cabinet at the correct working temperature, in hotter climates, an air conditioner system is fitted to supplement the heat exchanger.
Location
Attached to an M-Cell6 BTS/Ancillary cabinet.
Air conditioner internal view diagram

Figure 7-6 shows the heat exchanger components of the air conditioner:
THE AIR CONDITIONER COMPONENTS HMS CONTROL BOARD
POWER ENTRY BOARD
RECUPERATOR
AMBIENT AIR FAN
HEATER ELEMENTS HEATER RELAYS
FAN CONTROLLER BOARD
NOTES: THE FRONT PANEL AND WIRING INTERCONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY.
Figure 7-6 Air conditioner internal view. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 78
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Figure 7-7 shows the air conditioning components of the air conditioner:
THE HEAT EXCHANGER COMPONENTS
CONDENSER COIL
CONDENSER FAN
A-C CONTROL BOARD
EVAPORATOR COIL
HI/LO PRESSURE STATS SOLENOID VALVE
RECEIVER COMPRESSOR NOTES: (1) THE HMS COVER, AIR CONDITIONER PIPING AND WIRING INTERCONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY. (2) ONLY THE MAJOR COMPONENTS OF THE AIR CONDITIONER ARE SHOWN.
Figure 7-7 Air conditioner internal view.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 79
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner components

The air conditioner consists of the following items:
Recuperator
The recuperator is manufactured from a series of epoxy resin coated aluminium sheets, sealed at alternate edges to form two sets of narrow air passages. One set is used for the ambient air circulation and the other for the recirculated air. Heat is transferred from the warmer air stream to the colder air stream, but the air streams do not mix.
Ambient air fan

The ambient air fan is located near the bottom right hand corner, seen from the back of the unit. The radial type fan has backward curved blades for maximum efficiency and is direct driven by a 27 V dc motor with a solid state commutator. Fan speed is controlled by the control system, which measures the internal air temperature at the top of the BTS enclosure.
Electric heaters
The electric heaters are located, centrally, near the bottom of the unit, seen from the back of the unit. There are four individual heaters (in two pairs), each with its own high limit thermostat attached. The heaters are relay controlled in two steps, under the dictates of the control system.
Control system
There are four components that make up the control system. They are: S S S S HMS control board for temperature control of the BTS/Ancillary cabinets. A-C control board for starter control of the air conditioner system. Fan controller board for current control of the external (ambient) air fan. Temperature control.
Compressor
The compressor is located at the bottom right hand corner, seen from the back of the unit. The compressor is a hermetically sealed type, suitable for the environmentally friendly R134a refrigerant. The compressor is fitted on anti-vibration pads, to protect the compressor and minimize the transfer of vibration to the cabinet. The refrigerant system is designed to remove only the excess amount of heat that cannot be removed by the recuperator alone, thereby minimizing running costs.
Evaporator coil
The evaporator coil is located near the bottom of the unit, in the recirculation air inlet opening to the BTS cabinet. The coil is manufactured from copper tubing with mechanically bonded aluminium fins, coated with an epoxy resin lacquer.
Condenser coil
The condenser coil is located half way up the back of the unit, on the right hand side. The coil is manufactured from copper tubing with mechanically bonded aluminium fins, coated with an epoxy resin lacquer. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 710
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Condenser fan
The condenser fan is located directly below the condenser coil, with a short section of the ducting between. The fan is a double inlet centrifugal type, with forward curved blades. The fan is direct driven by a single phase 230 V ac motor.
Recirculation air fans

The recirculation air fans are located in the top of the BTS cabinet and although not part of the air conditioner unit, are powered from the HMS control board. The fans are of the radial type with backward curved blades for maximum efficiency. The fan impeller is direct driven by a 27 V dc motor with a solid state commutator.
Air conditioner electrical circuit

Figure 7-8 shows the air conditioner electrical circuit:
HI/LO pressure stat
From power entry board
Compressor
air Conditioner enable +27 V Start relay From HMS control panel
R1
Solenoid valve C2
Condenser fan
Figure 7-8 Air conditioner electrical circuit

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 711
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner cooling circuit

The air conditioner operates on a pump down system, as follows:
Turn off
As the system is turned off by the HMS control board signal Air Conditioner Enable inactive, the start relay is de-energized. This causes the solenoid valve to open. The compressor will draw a vacuum, this causes the low pressure switch to open and turn the compressor off.
Turn on
The system is turned on by the HMS control board signal Air Conditioner Enable active, the start relay is energized. This causes the solenoid valve to close. The pressure rises, causing the low pressure switch to close, and the compressor runs. The expansion valve is used to prevent the evaporator from freezing. It samples the temperature of the refrigerant at the start and finish of the evaporator, and opens the valve to allow a greater flow through the evaporator.
Cooling circuit diagram

Figure 7-9 shows the air conditioner cooling circuit:
Pressure control
Compressor Condenser Filter dryer
Receiver
Expansion valve Evaporator
Solenoid valve
Figure 7-9 Air conditioner cooling circuit
Tech. 712
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS airflow paths
HMS airflow paths

Heat exchanger airflow
There are two distinct airflow paths through the combined, BTS/HMS (heat exchanger) or Ancillary/HMS (heat exchanger), cabinets: S S Recirculation Ambient Contains the warm air generated by either cabinet. Contains the outside air.
Heat exchanger airflow path

Figure 7-10 shows the airflow paths through the combined cabinets:
HMS HEAT EXCHANGER CABINET
BTS or ANCILLARY CABINET
AMBIENT AIRFLOW
RECIRCULATION AIRFLOW
Figure 7-10 Airflow path through the BTS and heat exchanger cabinets

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 713
GMR-01
HMS airflow paths
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner airflow

There are three distinct airflow paths through the combined, BTS/HMS (air conditioner) or Ancillary/HMS (air conditioner), cabinets: S S S Recirculation Ambient (heat exchanger) Ambient (air conditioner) Contains the warm air generated by either cabinet. Contains the outside air. Contains the outside air.
Air conditioner airflow path diagram

HMS AIR CONDITIONER CABINET
AMBIENT (HEAT EXCHANGER) AIRFLOW AMBIENT (AIR CONDITIONER) AIRFLOW
Figure 7-11 Airflow path through the BTS and air conditioner cabinets Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 714
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS power distribution

Heat exchanger power distribution
A +27 V dc supply, entering the HMS via the power entry board, powers the following: S S The control board and, via fuses, the recirculation and ambient fans. The heater elements; via control relays and thermostats.
Air conditioner power distribution

A 240 V ac single phase supply powers the air conditioner. In addition, a +27 V dc supply is connected to the air conditioner via the power input board to provide power to: S S The control board and board components and, via fuses, the recirculation and ambient fans. The heater elements; via control relays and thermostats.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 715
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Intercabling diagram
Figure 7-12 shows the HMS cabinet dc power intercabling. Note the air conditioner control board for air conditioner modules:
2
POWER ENTRY BOARD
CONTROL BOARD AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL BOARD 4 10 A 10 A 6.3 A 6.3 A (AIR CONDITIONER ONLY) 4
RECIRCULATION FAN
HEATER RELAY
HEATER RELAY
THERMOSTATS
RECIRCULATION FAN 250 W HEATER 250 W HEATER
PART OF BTS CABINET THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT
FAN CONTROLLER
FAN CONTROLLER
250 W HEATER
250 W HEATER
AMBIENT FAN
AMBIENT FAN
Figure 7-12 HMS cabinet dc power intercabling Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 716
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS connection panels

Function
This panel provides connections for: S S S S S S Signals and alarms. Fan power out. Programme and test. Earth. +27 V power in. 240 V single phase ac power in (air conditioner only).
Location
The connection panel is situated at the top right front of the cabinet.
Heat exchanger connection panel

Figure 7-13 shows a heat exchanger connection panel:
HMS SIGNALS AND ALARMS CONNECTOR
27V DC
EARTH CONNECTOR
FAN POWER OUT CONNECTOR
PROGRAMME/TEST CONNECTOR
Figure 7-13 Heat exchanger connection panel

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 717
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner connection panel

Figure 7-14 shows an air conditioner connection panel:
27V DC
EARTH CONNECTOR
AIR CONDITIONER CONNECTOR
Figure 7-14 heat exchanger connection panel
Connection table
Table 7-1 details the possible HMS connectors: Table 7-1 HMS connectors Connector 25 pin D-type 3 pin D-type 9 pin D-type Earth terminal +/27 V terminals 9 pin ac supply plug Function Signals and Alarms Fan power out Programme/Test Ground HMS cabinet Heat exchanger power supply Air conditioner power supply Internal destination Control board Control board Control board Cabinet chassis Control board and Heaters Air conditioner control board External destination Top panel BTS cabinet fans PC (RS232 link) Top panel Top panel of the ancillary cabinet Top panel of the ancillary cabinet
Tech. 718
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control board detail

Overview
The computer based control board is used for temperature control of the BTS cabinet by control of two heaters, PWM control of an ambient air fan in the HMS (heat exchanger and air conditioner) cabinets and control of a recirculation air fan in the BTS cabinet and ancillary cabinet. Additionally, in an HMS (air conditioner) control of the air conditioner system.
Location
The HMS control board is situated at the top right front corner of the cabinet.
HMS control board diagram

Figure 7-15 shows a plan view of the HMS control board:
IC2
IC1
IC3
F1 F2 _ + K7 J3
IC4 IC7
IC5 IC8
IC6 IC9
IC10
K6 F4 K1 K2 K3 F5 _ K5 K4 J4
J5
J1
J6
Figure 7-15 HMS control board.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 719
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The HMS control board contains the circuitry to perform the control and alarm functions of the HMS: S S S S S S S Operation of two heater elements when the internal air temperature falls below 5 C. Provide two +27 V, 10 A fused outputs to power an internal (BTS) fan or ancillary fan. Provide two +27 V, 6.3 A fused outputs to power external (HMS) fans. Switching to a standby mode, so as to draw less than 1 mA when a mains fail and open contactor condition occurs. Provision of an external HMS fail alarm. Provision of an over temperature alarm, when the internal return air temperature is greater than 68 C. Control of air conditioner system (when fitted).
Tech. 720
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS control board signal functions

Table 7-2 shows HMS control board signals and their relative functions. Table 7-2 HMS control board signals. Input/Output Input Input Input (Note 1) Input Input Input Input Input (Note 1) Output (Note 1) Output Output (Note 1) Output (Note 1) Signal RF HOOD THERMOSTAT RETURN AIR SENSOR AIR CONDITIONER FAIL ROTATION SIGNAL A ROTATION SIGNAL B MAINS PRESENT HOOD CLOSED EXTERNAL AIR SENSOR (Note 2) AIR CONDITIONER ENABLE HEATER OUTPUT AIR CONDITIONER FAIL Purpose Temperature of top box of cabinet for cold starting. (not used in this configuration) Temperature of recirculated air input to the BTS/Ancillary cabinet. Controls a relay output, but is delayed for 30 minutes by the controller. Indication of external (ambient) fan rotation Indication of external (ambient) fan rotation (BTS/Ancillary cabinets only) Only when the main dc supply is present is the heater allowed to operate. When the BTS cabinet hood is closed the control override function is cleared and the controller is operating normally. Temperature of ambient air input to air conditioner cabinet. When the temperature of the recirculated air input to BTS/Ancillary cabinet is over 55C the air conditioner cooling is started. Output to control the heater element. This output is controlled by the digital input AIR CONDITIONAL FAIL signal. When the temperature of the recirculated air input to BTS/Ancillary cabinet is over 68C the over temperature alarm is activated. Temperature below 0 C (has fallen below 2C and not yet over 0 C) If the rotational signal(s) are missing, the failure output is activated after a 30 second delay. (Note 3) Pulse width modulated output to control the external (ambient) fan(s) speed.
TEMP HIGH
Output
TEMP LOW
Output
HMS FAIL
Output
PWM CONTROL
NOTE (1) Used on HMS (air conditioner) only. (2) External fan is turned off if ambient air temperature is greater than internal air temperature. (3) If one of the fan fuses are ruptured the failure output is also activated.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 721
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS control board functional diagram

Figure 7-16 shows a functional block diagram of the HMS control board:
(55C)
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONER ENABLE
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR HEATER OUTPUT
HEATER CONTROL
(<68C) AIR CONDITIONER FAIL
OVER, BELOW, DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE
AIR CONDITIONER FAIL TEMPERATURE HIGH
FAILURE LOGIC
TEMPERATURE LOW HMS FAIL
ROTATION SIGNAL A ROTATION SIGNAL B
MAINS PRESENT RELAY CONTROL EQUIPMENT ON
EXTERNAL FAN RELAY
+27 V SUPPLY
CONTROL OVERRIDE LOGIC
RELAY CONTROL
INTERNAL FAN RELAY
+27 V SUPPLY
DOOR CLOSED
BYPASS RELAY
STOP FAN
EXTERNAL AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (fitted on HMS air conditioner only)
SETPOINT AND COMPARE
EXTERNAL FAN PWM OUTPUT
PWM CONTROL
Figure 7-16 HMS control board functional block diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 722
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Fan controller board

The fan controller board is used for current control of the external (ambient) air fan, in the HMS cabinet, by a pulse width modulation (PWM) input from the HMS control board.
Location
Heat exchanger
Two fan controller boards fitted, one either side of the ambient air inlet tunnel, at the back of the cabinet.
Air conditioner
One fan controller board fitted, behind the A-C control panel mounting panel, at the back of the cabinet.
Fan controller board diagram

Figure 7-17 shows a plan view of the fan controller board:
1 _
2 R
3 +
FAN
CONTROL
Figure 7-17 Fan controller board layout.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 723
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The output of the HMS control board is a PWM signal which cannot be interpreted by the ambient air fan as it is current controlled, therefore a fan controller board interfaces between the two. The duty cycle voltage converter samples the fans positive supply against the PWM input. When the duty cycle of the input exceeds 10%, an electronic sensor activates the 1 amp jump circuit, thus switching the fan on. The 1 amp jump circuit turns the fan on to approximately 35% of full speed. As the PWM input width continues to increase, the current through the linear current output circuit, ramps up until the duty cycle reaches 90% and the fan draws approximately 3 amps. The fan is now running at approximately 80% of its full speed. The fan controller board includes a facility to convert a feedback signal from the fan into an ON/OFF rotation signal which can be passed back to the HMS control board failure/alarm logic. When the duty cycle PWM input reaches approximately 90%, the fan controller is switched out of circuit by the bypass relay. This switches the fan connection to ground through the GND contact switch. The fan is then allowed to draw the maximum current and accelerate to maximum speed.
Fan speed control functional diagram

Figure 7-18 shows the functional diagram for the fan speed control:
+27 V
12 V DC STAR 1 AMP JUMP CIRCUIT
FAN MOTOR
PWM SIGNAL
DUTY CYCLE VOLTAGE CONVERTER
LINEAR CURRENT OUTPUT CIRCUIT
0V BYPASS SIGNAL BYPASS RELAY GND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER ROTATION SIGNAL ROTATION INPUT
Figure 7-18 Fan speed control functional diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 724
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner control board

The air conditioner control board provides the means to electrically interconnect the various components of the air conditioner system. The ac supply is routed to the air conditioner control board, as is the Air Conditioner Enable signal and a +27 V dc supply.
Location
The air conditioner control board is fitted to access cover on lower left panel.
Air conditioner control board view diagram

Figure 7-19 shows a plan view of the air conditioner control board:
R1 START RELAY
3 230V
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 R C FAN N
L N 230V
L N L A A N B N B R B R R C MAINS PRESS COMP VALVE THERM CAP RUN CONPR CAP
28
27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Figure 7-19 Air conditioner control board layout.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
21 22 23 24 D O RE SW1 LAY
D O SW2
D O SIG
Tech. 725
GSM-105-323
Air conditioner control board components

Table 7-3 displays the components connected to the air conditioner (A-C) control board: Table 7-3 Air conditioner control board components. Power entry board 1 7 9 A-C Control board 1 2 Earth stud 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 HMS Control board Plug A - 1 Plug A - 5 21 23 +27 V Air Conditioner Enable Live Neutral Earth Linked to 4 Linked to 3 HI/LO Pressure stat HI/LO Pressure stat Compressor (Live) Compressor (Neutral) Solenoid Valve (Live) Solenoid Valve (Neutral) Linked to 13 Linked to 12 Resistor R1 (fitted across 12 & 14) Run Capacitor (C2) Run Capacitor (C2) Condenser fan (Black) Condenser fan (Brown) Condenser fan (Blue) Component/Power/Signal
Earth block Earth block Earth block Earth block NOTE
Compressor (Earth) Condenser fan (Earth) Solenoid Valve (Earth) HI/LO Pressure stat (Earth)
A-C control board connectors 5, 15, 22 and 24 to 28 are not used.
Tech. 726
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Temperature control
Temperature control
Overview
The HMS contains four 250 W heating elements each with its own thermostat, a return air temperature sensor (heat exchanger and air conditioner) and an ambient air temperature sensor (air conditioner).
Operating requirements
Mains Present must be active high to allow the heater to operate. When the BTS cabinet temperature is higher than 0 C: S Both Mains Present and Cabinet Equipment On at an active high will supply power to the controller computer in a wired OR arrangement so that the computer shuts down when both inputs are passive.
Heater control
When the return air temperature is below 5 C the heater is on. When the return air temperature is above 5 C the heater is switched off. The heater is only activated when main ac voltage is present.
HMS temperature control

At low return air temperatures the duty cycle of the PWM output for the external fan is zero (the fan is stopped). From a return air temperature of 35 C the PWM duty cycle is progressively increased, to reach 100% at 50 C. The PWM Control signal is connected to a fan controller, located near the fan, to control the fan speed.
Air conditioner temperature control

When the return air temperature rises more than 5 C over the setpoint (55 C), an Air Conditioner Enable signal is activated. Once started the compressor always runs for a minimum of 10 minutes to avoid excessive wear of the compressor from too many starts. However, once the initial 10 minute period has elapsed, if the return air temperature falls below 55 C the compressor is always shut off. When the compressor is running, the ambient air temperature is monitored. If this is above the return air temperature, the external fan speed is reduced, or the fan stopped.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 727
GMR-01
Temperature control
GSM-105-323
Heat exchanger functional diagram

Figure 7-20 shows the HMS (heat exchanger) cabinet temperature control and alarm intercabling:
CONTROL BOARD HEATER RELAY POSITIVE PLUG A HEATER RELAY STEP 2 HEATER RELAY STEP 1
PLUG B
ROTATION SIGNAL B RETURN
FAN CONTROLLER
Figure 7-20 Heat exchanger cabinet temperature control and alarm intercabling.
ROTATION SIGNAL A RETURN
EXTERNAL FAN PWM
BY-PASS OUTPUT
AMBIENT FAN
EXTERNAL FAN PWM
BY-PASS RELAY
BY-PASS OUTPUT RETURN AIR SENSOR (RECIRCULATORY)
HEATER RELAY
HEATER RELAY
BY-PASS RELAY
THERMOSTATS
FAN CONTROLLER
250 W HEATER AMBIENT FAN THERMOSTAT
250 W HEATER
THERMOSTAT
250 W HEATER
250 W HEATER
Tech. 728
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Temperature control
Air conditioner functional diagram

Figure 7-21 shows the HMS (air conditioner) cabinet temperature control intercabling:
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL BOARD
START RELAY
CONTROL BOARD
AIR CONDITIONER ENABLE HEATER RELAY POSITIVE PLUG A HEATER RELAY STEP 2 HEATER RELAY STEP 1
PLUG B
AMBIENT FAN
EXTERNAL FAN PWM
EXTERNAL FAN PWM
BY-PASS OUTPUT
BY-PASS RELAY
Figure 7-21 Air conditioner cabinet temperature control intercabling.
BY-PASS OUTPUT EXTERNAL AIR SENSOR (AMBIENT)
HEATER RELAY
HEATER RELAY
BY-PASS RELAY
THERMOSTATS
250 W HEATER AMBIENT FAN
250 W HEATER
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
RETURN AIR SENSOR (RECIRCULATION)
250 W HEATER
250 W HEATER

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 729
GMR-01
Temperature control
GSM-105-323
Temperature functional diagram

Figure 7-22 shows a temperature control functional diagram:
CHECK TEMP
< 5 _C Y HEATERS ON
> 35 _C Y FANS ON
= 50 _C Y BOOST
SET = 50 _C > 5 _C OVER SET Y RUN ACU FOR 10 MINUTES MONITOR AMBIENT TEMP N
IS AMBIENT TEMP > RETURN AIR TEMP
REDUCE OR STOP EXT FAN
Figure 7-22 Temperature control functional diagram.
Tech. 730
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HMS test facilities
HMS test facilities

Function
A 9-pin D type connector is provided on the HMS control board front panel, to allow the heat management system to be controlled, via an RS232 link, by either an external computer or control board.
Test connector diagram

Figure 7-23 shows the location of the test connector:
27V DC
Figure 7-23 HMS test connector
Test facilities
The following facilities are provided for for test purposes: S S S S S S Enable the top box hood to remain open for maintenance purposes. Enable the external fans to be run at maximum speed for maintenance purposes. Monitor internal air temperature. Checking the heater function. Control override to be switched off. Ensure the HMS cannot remain in a temperature override state following completion of the tests.
Warnings, indications and check signals

The following signals are required to be input and controlled by the external computer or control board, using PROCOM software: S S Control overridden. Temperature display readout.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 731
GMR-01
HMS test facilities
GSM-105-323
Tech. 732
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 8
M-Cell6 RF modules

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF modules description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver operating frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive antenna transceiver interface (RATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter RF operating frequency and channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixer frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver control unit (TCU) detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU receiver detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC and AGC stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver IF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSSI output functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU transmitter detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st and 2nd IF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1st and 2nd IF stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping control and transmit frequency stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ramping control and transmit frequency stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator and exciter path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator and exciter path functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control driver board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 81 Tech. 81 Tech. 81 Tech. 82 Tech. 82 Tech. 82 Tech. 83 Tech. 83 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 84 Tech. 85 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 86 Tech. 87 Tech. 87 Tech. 87 Tech. 88 Tech. 88 Tech. 88 Tech. 89 Tech. 810 Tech. 811 Tech. 812 Tech. 812 Tech. 812 Tech. 813 Tech. 814 Tech. 814 Tech. 814 Tech. 815 Tech. 815 Tech. 816 Tech. 816 Tech. 816 Tech. 817 Tech. 817 Tech. 818 Tech. 818 Tech. 819 Tech. 819 Tech. 820 Tech. 820 Tech. 821 Tech. 821

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU digital processing and control (DPC) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC firmware tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU transceiver station manager (TSM) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSM board functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front end processing (FEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel coder processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time division multiplexed (TDM) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver control unit model B (TCU-B) detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B receiver detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver RF stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIC and AGC stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver IF signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSSI data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic and control channel functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B transmitter detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ modulator stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IQ modulator stage functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF and exciter stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF and exciter stages functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power amplifier board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU-B digital control and signal processing (DPC) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPC board functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s fibre optic TDM links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQCP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCCP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver interface function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink (Tx) traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink (Rx) traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH through BCCH carrier diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH through BCCH carrier description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband frequency hopping (BBH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit signal routeing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive signal routeing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EGSM900 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 851 Dual low noise block (DLNB) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB module functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU receive path functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cabinet routing functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB-TCU 4/4/4 configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Extension Block (CEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEB module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 852 Tech. 853 Tech. 853 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 854 Tech. 855 Tech. 855 Tech. 856 Tech. 857 Tech. 857 Tech. 858 Tech. 859 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860 Tech. 860

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Combining bandpass filter (CBF) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-CBF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cavity combining block (CCB) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cavity block control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TATI control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB digital control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCB interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TATI control board redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight cell Omni configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-input CBF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-input CBF module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner (HCOMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCOMB with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-HCOMB with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twin band pass filter (TBPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF blanking plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF type blanking plate view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLNB blanking plate view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 878 Tech. 879 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 880 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 881 Tech. 882
DCS1800/PCS1900 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 883 Low noise amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original LNA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High sensitivity LNA functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNA rear view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid combiner with power load module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxBPF module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxBPF functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 medium power duplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium power duplexer functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 884 Tech. 885 Tech. 885 Tech. 885 Tech. 886 Tech. 886 Tech. 887 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 888 Tech. 889 Tech. 890 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 891 Tech. 892 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 893 Tech. 894 Tech. 894

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
vii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
viii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RF equipment detail
RF equipment detail
Function
The RF equipment provides a transmit and receive path between the MS and the transceiver control unit (TCU), via the air interface.
RF modules description
The following equipment is described in this chapter: S S S TCU (EGSM900 and DCS1800/PCS1900). TCU-B (EGSM900). EGSM900 modules: S Transceiver control units (TCU ). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Cabinet extension block (CEB). Combining bandpass filter (CBF). Cavity combining block (CCB). Non hybrid. Duplexer, medium power. Duplexer, high power. 3 Input combining bandpass filter (3-input CBF). Hybrid combiner (HCOMB). Non-hybrid combiner (Non-HCOMB). Twin band pass filter (TBPF).
DCS1800/PCS1900 modules: Low noise amplifier (LNA). Hybrid combiner. Transmitter bandpass filter TxBPF). Duplexer, medium power. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 81
GMR-01
RF equipment detail
GSM-105-323
Receiver operating frequencies

Table 8-1 lists the RF receiver band and channels for M-Cell6 BTS equipment:
Table 8-1 M-Cell6 RF receiver band and channels GSM Receive frequency band (MHz) Receive/transmit duplex separation (MHz) Channel width (kHz) Number of channels Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) Receive channel centre frequency (MHz) 890 to 915 EGSM 880 to 915 DCS1800 1710 to 1785 PCS1900 1850 to 1910
45
45
95
80
200 124
200 174
200 374
200 299
890.0 to 890.1 880.0 to 880.1 1710.0 to 1710.1 1850.0 to 1850.1 914.9 to 915.0 914.9 to 915.0 1784.9 to 1785.0 1909.9 to 1910.0 Even MHz/10 from 890.2 to 914.8 Even MHz/10 from 880.2 to 914.8 Even MHz/10 from 1710.2 to 1784.8 Even MHz/10 from 1850.2 to 1909.8
Receiver RF hardware
M-Cell6 receiver RF hardware consists of the receive antenna transceiver interface (RATI) shelf modules, and the receive section of the transceiver control unit (TCU).
Receive antenna transceiver interface (RATI)

RATI modules consists of one or more of the following: S DLNB - provides bandpass filtering and low-noise amplification of two diversity receive antenna signals in the EGSM receive frequency band. Each diversity signal is split into two receive antenna signal outputs, each of which is input to a single TCU module via the IADU. IADU - provides distribution of the outputs of three DLNB modules to the appropriate receive inputs of six TCU modules.
Tech. 82
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RF equipment detail
Receiver functions
The TCU and the TCU-B are radio transceivers providing the following receive functions: S S S S S S S S Receiver tuning on a timeslot basis to any EGSM900 (TCU and TCU-B) or DCS1800/PCS1900 (TCU only) receive channel frequency. Demodulation and equalization of the receive channel signal. Measurement of the received signal strength indication (RSSI) and received signal quality. Recovery of received data from the demodulated radio channel. Encoding recovered received data for output, via fibre optic transmitter, to the transceiver station manager (TSM) board. The output of control data, via the TCU to receiver matrix coaxial cable, to the receiver matrix for received antenna signal selection. Diversity receive path from a second antenna input. Compares the two received signals.
Transmitter RF operating frequency and channels

Table 8-2 lists the RF transmit band and channels for M-Cell6 BTS equipment: Table 8-2 M-Cell6 RF transmit band and channels GSM Transmit frequency band (MHz) Transmit/receive duplex separation (MHz) Channel width (kHz) Number of channels Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) Transmit channel centre frequency (MHz) 935 to 960 EGSM 925 to 960 DCS1800 1805 to 1880 PCS 1900 1930 to 1990
45
45
95
80
200 124
200 174
200 374
200 299
935.0 to 935.1 925.0 to 925.1 1805.0 to 1805.1 1930.0 to 1930.1 959.9 to 960.0 959.9 to 960.0 1879.9 to 1880.0 1989.9 to 1990.0 Even MHz/10 from 935.2 to 959.8 Even MHz/10 from 925.2 to 959.8 Even MHz/10 from 1805.2 to 1879.8 Even MHz/10 from 1930.2 to 1989.8

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 83
GMR-01
RF equipment detail
GSM-105-323
Transmitter RF hardware
M-Cell transmitter RF hardware consists of the transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) shelf modules and the transmit section of the transceiver control unit (TCU).
Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI)

TATI modules consist of one or more of the following: S CBF module - used to combine the outputs of two TCU modules, and filter this combined signal to reduce emission of out of band spurious signals by the transmit antenna equipment. CCB module - used to combine the transmit output signals from multiple TCU modules for transmission from a single antenna.
Transmitter functions
The TCU and TCU-B are radio transceivers which provide the following transmit functions: S S S S S Transmitter tuning (on a timeslot basis) for generation of any EGSM900 (TCU and TCU-B) or DCS1800/PCS1900 (TCU only) transmit channel RF frequency. Encoding transmit data input. GMSK modulation of transmit data onto the carrier. Final RF power amplification and dynamic output power control. The output of control data, via the coaxial cable connecting TCU to the cavity combining block.
Mixer frequencies
Table 8-3 lists the mixer frequencies: Table 8-3 Mixer frequencies GSM 86.6 MHz Receive Transmit 175.0 MHz EGSM 86.6 MHz 175.0 MHz DCS1800 215.0 MHz 10.75 MHz 175.0 MHz PCS1900 215.0 MHz 10.75 MHz 175.0 MHz
Tech. 84
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RF equipment detail
Antenna duplexing
There are two duplexers available for use in M-Cell6 equipment:
Medium power duplexer

The medium power duplexer allows a single antenna to be used for transmit and receive operations, and is designed to handle the lower power output from CBF modules. The duplexer modules provide operation on EGSM frequency bands, and is used in the M-Cell6.
High power duplexer

Allows a single antenna to be used for transmit and receive operations, and is capable of handling the higher power output from CCB modules. The duplexer module provides operation on EGSM frequency bands, and are used in the M-Cell6 only. The high power duplexer is the only external receiver RF hardware.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 85
GMR-01
Transceiver control unit (TCU) detail
GSM-105-323

Functions
NOTE In this section the term TCU is used for the TCU900, TCU1800 and high power TCU1800 except where the information relates specifically to one type. The TCU is a radio transceiver and is the central element of the base station system (BSS) RF sub-system. The TCU: S S Generates all the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and receive functions. Contains the digital circuits required for eight timeslots of channel equalization and TCU control logic.
The TCU provides the air interface between a BSS and mobile stations. A TCU employs diversity reception which, during signal fades provides a more consistent receive operation. A TCU can change frequency on a timeslot basis to provide for frequency hopping and equipment sharing. The maximum of six TCUs provides six RF channels for a total of 48 GSM channels.
Location
The TCU shelf assembly is fitted above the mBCU cage assemblies in the upper portion of the cabinet.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to six TCU modules. A minimum of one TCU must be fitted in each cabinet. To assist with the correct airflow and ventilation, blanking plates must be fitted in any unused TCU slot.
Transceiver carrier frequency bands

The TCU provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier for communicating with mobile stations. The RF carrier frequency is: S EGSM900 S S Receive (Rx) frequency band, 880.2 to 914.8 MHz. Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 925.2 to 959.8 MHz. Receive (Rx) frequency band, 1710.2 to 1784.8 MHz. Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 1805.2 to 1879.8 MHz. Receive (Rx) frequency band, 1850.2 to 1909.8 MHz. Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 1930.2 to 1989.8 MHz.
DCS1800
PCS1900
The TCU can change transmit/receive RF frequencies for each timeslot, as required for synthesiz ed frequency hopping and/or equipment sharing applications. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 86
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU circuitry
TCU circuitry is contained in an integral module package. This circuitry consists of: S S S S S S S S TCU receiver (Rx) board. Synthesizer board. Transmitter (Tx) board. Control driver board. Power amplifier board. Digital processor and control (DPC) board. Transceiver station manager (TSM) board. Power supply module (SPSM).
TCU external view

Figure 8-1 shows an external view of the TCU module:
Figure 8-1 TCU module external view.
Maintenance ports
For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the control processor is included on the front panel of the TCU. Communication to the equalizer processors is also available from this port via a virtual link provided by the control processor. A special test port on the TCU front panel provides access to critical test points for alignment and maintenance.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 87
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Front panel switches

The front panel pushbutton reset switch is pressed momentarily to reset the control processor and begin front panel indicator test sequence. A front panel mode selection switch is used to switch the transceiver between TCU and SCU modes of operation, (the SCU mode of operation is used only when TCUs are fitted in an InCell BTS cabinet).
Alarm reporting
All major sub-systems within the TCU, such as synthesizers and RF amplifiers, are continuously monitored and alarmed. Alarms are reported to the TSM in the TCU. The TCU control and transmitter status is also displayed, via LED indicators, on the front panel of the TCU.
LEDs
The front panel incorporates two tricolour LED indicators as follows: S Radio status LED S Red = Power fail. Steady yellow (and transmitter status LED off) = Sleep mode. Flashing yellow = Test mode. Steady green = Call processing in progress. Flashing green = Bootstrap mode.
Transmitter status LED Off = Transmitter off and not programmed. Off (and radio status LED steady yellow) = Sleep mode. Red = Transmitter alarm exists. Flashing green = Transmitter programmed and off. Yellow = Transmitter on during at least one timeslot.
Tech. 88
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU front panel

Figure 8-2 shows the TCU front panel:
EGSM900
CAUTION
HEAT SINK MAY BE HOT TO TOUCH
TX OUT TRANSMITTER RF OUTPUT CONNECTOR

TX OUT
Tx STATUS INDICATOR
TX STATUS
DATA OUT B FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA OUT A FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA IN B FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) DATA IN A FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) RADIO STATUS INDICATOR
DATA OUT B
DATA OUT A
DATA IN B
DATA IN A
RADIO STATUS RESET
MANUAL RESET (MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON SWITCH)

EXTERNAL ALARMS SCU
EXTERNAL ALARMS
MODE SWITCH
TCU
MODE SWITCH
CNTRL PRCSR
TEST INTERFACE CONTROL PROCESSORS TTY PORT (RS-232 SERIAL PORT)
TSM INTERFACE
TSM INTFC TEST INTFC
RX IN 2 RECEIVE RF INPUT CONNECTOR

RX IN 1 RX IN 2
VOLTAGE INPUT 2030 VDC
POWER 27 V DC INPUT
Figure 8-2 TCU front panel diagram NOTE Both the EGSM900 and DCS1800 have the same front panels.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 89
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU front panel connectors

Table 8-4 shows the TCU front panel connectors: Table 8-4 TCU front panel connections. Parameter RX In 1 RX In 2 TX Out DATA In A DATA In B DATA Out A DATA Out B External Alarms Cntrl Procr Tsm Info Test Info Voltage Input Valid Input Receiver RF input Receiver RF input Transmitter RF output Fibre optic receiver port Fibre optic receiver port Fibre optic transmit port Fibre optic transmit port Alarms input from AB2 Test connection for control processor Test connection for the TSM board Test connection for the TCU functions 27V dc input PDU circuit breaker DNLB DNLB CBF mBCU (MCU) mBCU (MCU) mBCU (MCU) mBCU (MCU) AB2 PL2 (RS-232 serial port) Default
Tech. 810
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU functional diagram

Figure 8-3 shows a functional block diagram of the TCU:
CHANNEL 1 RECEIVE RF IN CHANNEL 2 RECEIVE RF IN (FROM DLNB) RX FAIL I1 SIGNAL Q1 SIGNAL I2 SIGNAL Q2 SIGNAL AGC DATA RX BOARD
6.12S REF 4.612mS REF 577S REF FIBRE IN FIBRE OUT TRANSCEIVER STATION MANAGER BOARD FIBRE CLOCK 2.048 MHz CLOCK 8.192 MHz CLOCK HDLC DATA HDLC DATA TSM PRESENT MOD CLK MODULATOR (NRZ) DATA RESET CARRIER ENABLE 16 X CLK TX KEY TX ALARM PWR CONTROL DATA 2.048 Mbit/s DATA INPUT 2.048 MHz CLOCK INPUT (FROM FOX) TX BOARD DIGITAL PROCESSOR AND CONTROL BOARD Tx SYNTH SEL LOW POWER ALARMS 13 MHz REF IN Rx SYNTH SEL SYNTHESIZER BOARD
2.048 Mbit/s DATA OUTPUT DETECTED POWER DATA 2.048 MHz CLOCK OUTPUT (TO FOX)
CONTROL DRIVER BOARD
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
DISTRIBUTED POWER (TO EACH OF THE BOARDS)
POWER AMPLIFIER BOARD
RF OUTPUT (TO CBF)
Figure 8-3 TCU functional block diagram

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 811
GMR-01
TCU receiver detail
GSM-105-323
TCU receiver detail

Receiver stages
The receiver section of the TCU is divided into three stages as follows: S S S Receiver RF stage. Receiver IF stage. Traffic and control channel output stage.
Receiver RF stages
The receiver part of the TCU transceiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from a dual low noise block (DLNB) module. The TCU RF front end is designed to function with the DLNB gain and noise level. The receiver provides two receive paths for diversity, branch A and branch B. If diversity reception is configured ON at the OMC-R, the diversity signals from each DLNB are applied to branch A and branch B. If diversity reception is not configured ON at the OMC-R, branch B is rendered inactive. NOTE If a single receive antenna is used, that is without diversity, it must be connected to branch A. Following a switchable automatic intermodulation control (AIC) pad and an RF band pass filter, each receive input signal is converted to a first intermediate frequency (IF) of 86.6 MHz. The IF lineup provides bandpass filtering and 35 dB switchable pad for automatic gain control (AGC).
Tech. 812
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU receiver detail
AIC and AGC stages functional diagram

Figure 8-4 shows a functional block diagram of receiver AIC and AGC stages:
86.6MHz (VSSI PATH) 86.6MHz (TCC PATH)
SPLITTER
AIC 880.2 TO 915MHz Rx A
SWITCHABLE ATTENUATOR
BANDPASS 880 TO 915 MHz
MIXER
BANDPASS 86.6MHz
SWITCHABLE PAD 35dB AGC
MIXER INPUT 793.6 to 828.4MHz
AGC DATA FROM DPC AGC DATA
AGC
Rx B 880.2 TO 915MHz
BANDPASS 880 TO 915 MHz
MIXER
BANDPASS 86.6MHz
SWITCHABLE PAD 35dB
AIC 86.6MHz (TCC PATH) SPLITTER 86.6MHz (VSSI PATH)
Figure 8-4 AIC and AGC functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 813
GMR-01
TCU receiver detail
GSM-105-323
Receiver IF stages
The IF output signal for each receiver branch is split into two signals: S S A VSSI output. Traffic and control channel output.
VSSI output
The VSSI voltage provides an analogue representation of the received signal strength. The limiting IF output is used for the acquistion of random access channel (RACH). The receive VSSI signal is applied to a 86.6 MHz bandpass filter and converted to an IF of 13 MHz with amplitude limitation.
VSSI output functional block diagram

Figure 8-5 shows a functional block diagram of the VSSI path:
86.6 MHz BANDPASS MIXER BANDPASS
AMPLIFIER AND AMPLITUDE LIMITER
BANDPASS
RSSI INDICATOR
SLOPE ADJUST AND TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
VSSI/1 OUTPUT TO DPC
86.6 MHz MIXER INPUT
RSSI INDICATOR
SLOPE ADJUST AND TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION
VSSI/2 OUTPUT
BANDPASS 86.6MHz
MIXER
BANDPASS
AMPLIFIER AND AMPLITUDE LIMITER
BANDPASS
Figure 8-5 VSSI functional block diagram
Tech. 814
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU receiver detail
Traffic and control channel output

The other IF signal is applied to a set of AGC pads which provides analogue AGC element which provides a linear receiver branch used to acquire traffic and control channels. Linear AGC gain settings are sent to the receiver board from the DPC. Either the limited or linear path can be selected by the DPC on a timeslot basis. The selected path is demodulated into quadrature signals (I1/I2 and Q1/Q2) and filtered by baseband analogue filters. These signals are sent to the DPC where they are digitized and made available to the equalizer blocks for the purposes of receive synchronization and data recovery.
Traffic and control channel functional diagram

Figure 8-6 shows the traffic and control channel path:
AMPLIFIER IF AMPLIFIER BANDPASS I/Q DEMODULATOR AMPLIFIER ACTIVE LOWPASS FILTER Q1 OUTPUT ACTIVE LOWPASS FILTER I1 OUTPUT
86.6 MHz
80 dB VARIABLE ATTENUATOR
TO DPC 86.6 MHz 80 dB VARIABLE ATTENUATOR
AMPLIFIER IF AMPLIFIER
ACTIVE LOWPASS FILTER I2 OUTPUT
BANDPASS
I/Q DEMODULATOR
AMPLIFIER
ACTIVE LOWPASS FILTER Q2 OUTPUT
2-WAY SPLITTER 86.6 MHz x 2
Figure 8-6 Traffic and control functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 815
GMR-01
TCU transmitter detail
GSM-105-323

Overview
The transmitter section of the TCU is divided into three boards as follows: S S S Transmitter board. Control driver board. Power amplifier board.
Transmitter board
The transmitter board has the following functional stages: S S S 1st and 2nd IF stages. Ramping control and transmit frequency stages. Attenuator and exciter path.
Tech. 816
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
1st and 2nd IF stages

The modulator non return to zero (NRZ) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) from the DPC is applied to the transmitter board. This NRZ data signal is encoded, serial to parallel converted, Gaussian filtered into a digital representation, and then D/A converted into a GMSK modulated carrier at a 1st IF of 7.0 MHz. This 7.0 MHz IF signal is up converted with a high side injection of 182.0 MHz to a full GMSK modulated carrier at a 2nd IF of 175 MHz.
1st and 2nd IF stages functional diagram

Figure 8-7 shows a functional block diagram of the input signal to 1st and 2nd IF stages:
MOD CLK FRACTIONAL COUNTER
MODULATOR (NRZ) DATA
SERIAL DATA ENCODER
SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTOR
GAUSSIAN FILTER
RESET CARRIER ENABLE
16 x CLK
4-BIT COUNTER
TIMING CONTROL
86.6 MHz MIXER INPUT DIVIDE BY 2 OSCILLATOR 1ST IF LOWPASS D/A CONVERTER FILTER UPCONVERTER 174 MHz AMPLIFIER TO Tx RAMPING
2ND IF
Figure 8-7 1st and 2nd IF stages functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 817
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Ramping control and transmit frequency stages

The full GMSK modulated 175 MHz 2nd IF is filtered and applied to the input of a Gilbert cell linear amplitude modulator for the purpose of transmitter ramping control. The output of the Gilbert cell is then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is upconverted to the final transmit channel frequency which is in the range of 925 to 960 MHz.
Ramping control and transmit frequency stages functional diagram

Figure 8-8 shows a functional block diagram of the 2nd IF signal to ramping control and final transmit frequency stages:
AMPLIFIER FROM 2ND IF STAGE SAW BANDPASS FILTER LOWPASS FILTER FREQUENCY DOUBLER HIGHPASS FILTER
AMPLIFIER LOWPASS FILTER SAW BANDPASS FILTER UP CONVERSION MIXER 925 MHz TO 960 MHz OUTPUT TO ATTENUATORS
POWER DETECTOR (TO DPC FOR POWER CONTROL) 855 to 890 MHz INPUT
Figure 8-8 Ramping control and transmit frequency block diagram.
Tech. 818
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Attenuator and exciter path

This low level modulated carrier signal is then applied to a combination of analogue and digital attenuators for the purposes of RF power control. The analogue ramp voltage and power control voltage are provided by the DPC. Digital attenuator information is provided by the DPC over a serial link. The output of the power control elements is further amplified by an exciter chain to a maximum output of +5 dBm.
Attenuator and exciter path functional diagram

Figure 8-9 shows a functional block diagram of the final transmit frequency to the attenuator and exciter chain stages:
TRANSMIT ALARM
ALARM SENSOR
POWER DETECTOR
KEYING CONTROLLED AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER FROM TRANSMIT FREQUENCY STAGE BANDPASS FILTER BANDPASS FILTER
AMPLIFIER VOLTAGE CONTROLLED ATTENUATORS
AMPLIFIER
TO CONTROL DRIVER BOARD
TRANSMIT KEY
KEYING CONTROL
ATTENUATOR DRIVER
POWER CONTROL
Figure 8-9 Attenuator and exiter functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 819
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Control driver board

The control driver board provides RF power amplification between the transmitter board output and the input of the output stage. It provides power regulation and signal buffering, acting as an interface between the power amplifier section and other parts of the radio. The RF forward power detection is also included on this board.
Control driver board functional diagram

Figure 8-10 shows a functional block diagram of the control driver board:
FORWARD POWER DATA
POWER AMPLIFIER FROM TRANSMITTER BOARD POWER REGULATION AND BUFFER OUTPUT TO POWER AMPLIFIER
TO DPC
REVERSE POWER DETECTION
Figure 8-10 Control driver board functional block diagram.
Tech. 820
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power amplifier board

The power amplifier board amplifies the intermediate level modulated carrier signal input to a final RF power output level. The power amplifier also contains a forward power detector, an isolator and a reverse power detector. The detected output from the two power detectors is applied, via the control driver board to the DPC. Based on these detected signals the DPC determines the setting for the final TCU RF power output level. The DPC then sends a signal to the gain control elements of the transmitter to set the corresponding RF power level. The maximum output power available at the EGSM900 TCU transmitter RF power output connector is 54.3 watts (47.35 dBm) 0.5 dBm. The maximum output power available at the DCS1800 TCU transmitter RF power output connector is 25.1 watts (44.0 dBm) 1.0 dBm. The maximum output power available at the high power DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU transmitter RF power output connector is 50.1 watts (47.0 dBm) 1.0 dBm.
Power amplifier board functional diagram

Figure 8-11 shows a functional block diagram of the power amplifier board:
FINAL AMPLIFIER PROTECTS AGAINST HIGH REGULATOR POWER ISOLATOR CIRCULATOR CIRCULATOR
2-STAGE CLASS AB AMPLIFIER 925 TO 960 MHz MODULATED CARRIER
RF OUTPUT
FORWARD POWER DETECTOR
REVERSE POWER DETECTOR TO DPC LOAD LOAD
INFORMATION FOR POWER GAIN
Figure 8-11 Power amplifier board functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 821
GMR-01
TCU digital processing and control (DPC) board
GSM-105-323

Function
The digital processing and control board (DPC) is a digital control board for the RF part of the TCU. It also provides a duplex interface between the transceiver station manager (TSM) and the TCU so that modulation and equalization data can be passed between them, together with associated control and status data.
TCU control functions

The DPC board contains the digital and analogue circuits required to perform TCU control including the following functions: S S S S TSM interface. RF board interfaces, including PA power control. Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the TCU). Maintenance interface, including: S S S SCU front panel status indicators. Teletype (TTY) ports. Test point I/O port. Test mode operation.
The channel equalization of the uplink (Rx) data. SSI data processing. Control of external modules, such as the remotely tunable combiner, receive matrix.
DPC board functional diagram

Figure 8-12 shows the DPC board functional block diagram:
CLOCK RECOVERY
ITC ASIC
CONTROL PROCESSOR
HDLC
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
FIBRE A
FIBRE B
EQ#0 PROCESSOR
UPLINK TRAFFIC AND CONTROL
EQ#3 PROCESSOR
TDM HIGHWAY
Figure 8-12 DPC board functional block diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 822
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU connections
The connection between the TCU and the main control unit (MCU), located in the micro base control unit (mBCU) is over fibre optic cable at a data rate of 2.048 Mbit/s. The fibre optic link is designed to support up to 1 km of fibre optic cable. Redundant fibre links are provided. All channel data and transceiver control data are exchanged over this link.
Data specifications
All data crossing the 2.048 Mbit/s link is Manchester coded. The DPC clock recovery circuit recovers 2.048 MHz clock reference signal from the 2.048 Mbit/s data stream input (downlink) signal for TCU data synchronization. The recovered 2.048 MHz clock reference signal is sent to the synthesizer board as a reference for all RF PLLs.
Downlink (Tx) digital processing

On the downlink (Tx), the DPC accepts formatted messages from the MCU, via the fibre optic receiver. These messages all fall under three categories: S S S Modulation data. TCU control data. Slow control data (which are messages the DPC executes as background tasks).
The high level data link controller (HDLC) takes these messages as they arrive at the DPC and stores them in a 64 byte first in first out (FIFO) buffer. The DPC firmware takes these messages and either: S S Distributes them to their respective destinations (modulator, equalizer). Interprets them to perform some other slow control or configuration function.
For instance, in the case of information going to the mobile, the DPC firmware distributes the message to the modulator interface. The non-return to zero (NRZ) data output from the modulator interface is applied to the transmitter board. The data is modulated on the RF carrier and transmitted to the MS. The DPC handles all power control and transmitter timeslot ramping control. During each timeslot, the DPC firmware writes a ramp on waveform and a power control word to the PA control hardware resident on the DPC. The power control word is based upon the downlink transmitter power message received on the fibre link. S S S S S S S Rx AGC. Rx ADC. Rx equalization. Tx power control. Midamble insertion. Frequency hopping. 2.048 MHz clock recovery to synth.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 823
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Uplink (Rx) digital processing

On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the receiver board are applied to analogue to digital (A/D) converters on the DPC. The A/D converters convert the analogue I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to digital words which are applied to each of the 4 equalizer (EQ) digital signal processor blocks on the DPC. Each EQ DSP processes the baseband signal into 8 timeslot channels of equalized data. This data output signal is routed to the equalizer dual port RAM (DPR). The host processor reads the equalized data out of the equalizer DPR and formats it into a message which is loaded into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC. The HDLC transmits the information to the MCU, via the fibre optic transmitter. Immediately following this message (when required), host processor reads the uplink control data from the bottom of the dual port RAM and sends this data as a message to the MCU. Any slow control information that needs to be sent uplink, to the MCU, is transmitted by the firmware as a separate message after appropriate hardware transfers have been performed. All messages for both uplink and downlinkmust be transmitted and received by the appropriate entity within a single time division multiple access (TDMA) timeslot (eg, for downlink, modulation data, TCU control data, and any slow control message must all be transferred within one timeslot).
DPC firmware tasks

The following list summarizes some of the major tasks of the DPC firmware. S S S S S S S S S Interpretation of slow control messages into destination processor and type of request/query. Analogue and digital alarm management. Burst selection and insertion for both test purposes and normal operation. Midamble insertion according to training sequence code (TSC), for any one timeslot. Also, tail and guard bit insertion. Control of all transmitter functions including timeslot ramping control and digital and analogue attenuation control for the purposes of power output control. Protocol formatting of slow control messages into source processor and type of confirm/response. Demultiplexing of inbound modulation data, TCU control data, and slow control messages. Multiplexing of equalized data, uplink control and slow control messages (when applicable). Performs GSM frequency hopping algorithm for both uplink and downlink on a per timeslot basis, thus supporting both normal frequency hopping and equipment sharing. Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive, to accommodate fast synthesizer hopping). Accommodates hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier in hopping modes. Controls and co-ordinates the timing of all the above, based on an interrupt driven executive. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
S S S
Tech. 824
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Processing and control

Four individual equalization blocks are used for processing; one block for two EGSM TDMA timeslots. Each equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP). These blocks are largely independent of each other, but access common buses to communicate with the host processor, and other peripherals. The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the receiver board are applied to the respective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits. The output of these circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data. This data is routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. The I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations of the receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be equalized and angle demodulated by the EQ DSP blocks. The EQ DSP blocks use a Viterbi algorithm, digital filtering and other signal processing algorithms to equalize the I and Q baseband information signals. The SSI indications from the receiver board are applied to the SSI A/D conversion and data buffer and RAM circuits on the DPC. The output of these circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of SSI data. This data is routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQ DSP block processes the SSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advance averages for its particular timeslot channel. The timing advance data output signal is loaded into the uplink message DPR. The AGC message is written directly to the AGC control function on the DPC. This function outputs control signals to the fixed attenuators and to the variable attenuator on the receiver board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gain accordingly. Once every timeslot, the DPC firmware writes modulation data to the modulator interface, and writes power control information and a ramp profile to the transmitter control interface. This data is written one timeslot in advance of when it is used by the DPC control hardware. The power control information consists of a digital attenuator word which is transmitted via the transmitter serial link, and an analogue attenuator control word, which is converted to a voltage on the DPC and then sent to the transmitter board.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 825
GMR-01
TCU transceiver station manager (TSM) board
GSM-105-323

Overview
The transceiver station manager (TSM) board provides all radio sub system (RSS) control, front end processing, channel coding processing and communications to the mBCU via a 2.048 Mbit/s 32 timeslot TDM interface. Two fully redundant links are available for communications with a redundant mBCU. A 2.048 Mbit/s HDLC packet data link is provided between the front end processor and the control processor on the DPC. The TSM, together with the corresponding DPC and RF boards, performs the RSS level control together with the air interface for eight GSM logical traffic channels or timeslots. The TSM also performs logical to physical channel mapping, interleaving and de-interleaving, channel encoding and decoding and downlink baseband hopping.
TSM board functional block diagram

Figure 8-13 shows a functional block diagram of the TSM board:
RSS: 68040, QUICC, MEMORY
DUAL PORT RAM
FEP 56002
QUAD PORT RAM
RSS CONTROL
BBH DATA TDM HIGHWAY (TO BCU) CC#0 PROCESSOR TDM INTERFACE
TRAU DATA
TEST POINT SUBSYSTEM CC#7 PROCESSOR
UPLINK TRAFFIC AND CONTROL (TO DPC)
HDLC
Figure 8-13 TSM board functional block diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 826
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Downlink traffic
Downlink traffic data from the mBCU is received at the TDM interface via the TDM highway and routed to one of eight channel coders. The channel coders encode (cyclic or convolutional coding) the speech data or TRAU frames and insert signalling messages per GSM recommendations. The coded traffic data and signalling messages are routed back to the mBCU via the TDM interface for baseband hopping. The post hopped downlink data is then sent back to the appropriate TCU via the TDM link where it is received by the FEP and forwarded on to the DPC. The transceiver control information generated by the FEP is multiplexed with coded downlink messages generated by the channel coder. This multiplexed information is sent to the control processor on the DPC via the direct HDLC link.
Uplink traffic
Uplink traffic and control messages from the DPC are received by the HDLC and read by the FEP. The FEP demultiplexes the incoming data into uplink traffic and control messages. Control messages are sent to the RSS processor via the host and Dual Port RAM (DPR) interfaces. The FEP forwards the equalizer data on to the channel coders via the quad port RAM (QPR) interface. The eight channel coders de-interleave, decrypt, and decode the data into TDM compatible TRAU frames. This data is delivered to the mBCU via the TDM interface.
Baseband hopping
When baseband hopping is implemented, the FEP calculates the hopping sequence for the TCU. The calculated frequency is converted to the corresponding TCU destination every GSM frame and sent to the mBCU. Due to data expansion, as a result of cyclic encoding, baseband hopping data is evenly distributed over four TDM frames. The TDM timeslots containing the baseband hopping downlink data are routed to the same or different TCUs depending on the calculated frequency for that particular downlink data. When baseband hopping data sent through the TDM interface arrives, a further four TDM timeslots are used to receive the baseband hopping data and route it to the FEP. The FEP then sends that to the DPC control processor via the HDLC link.
RSS processing
The RSS processor function provides a BSS software platform which allows the distribution of the RSS software process to each of the TCUs. The RSS function communicates with the other software processing functions in the mBCU via dedicated 64 kbit timeslots on the 2.048 Mbit/s fibre link. The RSS processor communicates with the rest of the TSM via a host port and DPR interface. The RSS processor is based on a Motorola 68040 processor with a Motorola 68360 communications processor operating in companion mode. The assorted non-volatile and volatile memory available include 8 Mbytes of DRAM. Non-volatile memory is used for bootstrap and firmware object code storage.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 827
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Front end processing (FEP)

The FEP function provides a transceiver control and system control interface to the RSS function. It routes data control messages to the control processor on the DPC, and handles messaging and control of the channel coder DSPs (CCDSPs). In addition, it handles the routeing of baseband hopping data on the TCU downlink via the TDM interface. The FEP function is responsible for configuration and control of the channel coder functions. The FEP controls the reset line of the channel coders and downloads the operational code into the channel coder DSPs. The FEP is also responsible for providing a communication links between the following: S S S Channel coders and the RSS. Channel coders and the DPC. RSS and the DPC.
The FEP function is centred on a Motorola 56002 DSP processor. The processor has external RAM used for program and data space. The FEP has access to a 32k of 8 bit space that is used to interface with the RSS block together with a host port interface. The FEP has access to a 2k x 8 memory space that is used for storing uplink and downlink data and communication with the TDM block. The FEP communicates with the DPC board through an HDLC link.
Channel coder processing

As a unit, the eight blocks are responsible for all signal processing associated with GSM specified channel coding. There is a single dedicated CCDSP block for each of the eight GSM air interface timeslots. The channel coders receive downlink speech data from the TDM across the Serial Communication Interface (SCI) port in the form of TRAU frames from the TDM interface. The CCDSPs encode and package the data into GSM air interface frames, which are returned to the TDM via the quad-port RAM interface. From there, the air frames are passed to the appropriate FEP via baseband hopping at the mBCU. On the uplink side, the channel coders receive equalized GSM air interface frames from the DPC via the FEP (through the quad-port RAM interface). After decoding, uplink TRAU frames are provided to the TDM via the SCI port. The channel coding functionality of the TSM board is built around a block of eight (one for each GSM air interface timeslot) Motorola 56002 DSP processors running at 66 MHz. Each processor has 128k of 24 bit wide SRAM memory used for program and data storage, as well as hardware-limited access to a portion of a common 2k x 8 quad-port RAM (QPR). The QPR is used to store encoded pre-baseband hopped data, as well as equalized GSM air interface frames. SCI, Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI), and host interfaces are used to communicate to various other TSM functional blocks.
Tech. 828
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Time division multiplexed (TDM) interface

The TDM function provides an interface between the 32 timeslot redundant 2.048 Mbit/s link from the mBCU to the RSS, FEP, and CCDSP functions. Optical reception and transmission as well as Manchester encoding/decoding are handled for both redundant links on the DPC. The TDM block provides synchronization to the selected primary link from the mBCU. The data on each link is recovered on a timeslot basis and forwarded to the appropriate processing function. Master GSM timing synchronization is also recovered and distributed. The downlink information (mBCU to TCU) includes the following: S S S S Downlink TRAU frames to the CCDSPs. Post baseband hopped encoded data to the FEP. Superframe and 60 msec timing information. 64 kbit HDLC channel to RSS with additional timeslots for future use.
The transmit or uplink side of the TDM interface provides a data link path back to the mBCU. Here, the TDM function receives data from the processing functions and transmits the data back synchronous with the selected primary link. The downlink information (TCU to mBCU) includes the following: S S S S Uplink TRAU frames from the CCDSPs. Pre baseband hopped data encoded data from the CCDSPs. Baseboard hopping routeing word from the FEP. 64 kbit HDLC channel from RSS with additional timeslots for future use.
The TDM interface consists of two Altera FLEX8820 field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs). The devices are programmed on power up. The TDM block interfaces with the FEP and CCDSP blocks through a 2k x 8 Quad Port RAM. The TDM interface also provides a SCI link to the CCDSP blocks for transfer of TRAU data and a HDLC link to the RSS. Other signals provided include baseband hopping/EQ interrupts to the CCDSPs and GSM timing interrupts.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 829
GMR-01
Transceiver control unit model B (TCU-B) detail
GSM-105-323

Functions
This section describes the functional operation of the transceiver control unit (TCU-B) used in base transceiver station (BTS) cabinets. The TCU-B is a radio transceiver and is the central element of the base station system (BSS) RF sub-system. The TCU-B: S S Generates all the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and receive functions. Contains the digital circuits required for eight timeslots of channel equalization, encoding and decoding, and TCU-B control logic.
The TCU-B provides the air interface between a BSS and mobile stations. A TCU-B employs diversity reception which, during signal fades provides a more consistent receive operation. A TCU-B can change frequency on a timeslot basis to provide for frequency hopping and equipment sharing. The maximum of six TCU-Bs provide six RF channels for a total of 48 timeslot channels. NOTE There is no DCS1800/PCS1900 version of TCU-B. The TCU-B cannot be used as an SCU.
Location
The TCU-B shelf assembly is fitted above the mBCU cage assemblies in the upper portion of the cabinet.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to six TCU-B modules. A minimum of one TCU-B must be fitted in each cabinet. To assist with the correct airflow and ventilation, blanking plates must be fitted in any unused TCU-B slot.
Transceiver carrier frequency bands

The TCU-B provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier for communicating with mobile stations. The RF carrier frequency is: S EGSM900 Receive (Rx) frequency band, 880.2 to 914.8 MHz. Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 925.2 to 959.8 MHz.
The TCU-B can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis, as required for frequency hopping and/or equipment sharing applications. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 830
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU-B circuitry
TCU-B circuitry is all contained in an integral module package. This circuitry consists of: S S S S TCU-B transceiver (XCVR) board. Power amplifier (PA) board. Power distribution board (PDB). Power supply module (PSM).
TCU-B external view diagram

Figure 8-14 shows an external view of the TCU-B module:
Figure 8-14 TCU-B module external view.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 831
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Maintenance ports
For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the control processor is included on the front panel of the TCU-B. This port has three serial links multiplexed onto the 25-way connector. The links are to RSS, EQCP and channel coder control processor (CCCP). A special test port on the TCU-B front panel provides access to critical test points for alignment and maintenance.
Front panel switch

The front panel pushbutton reset switch is pressed momentarily to rest the control processor and begin front panel indicator test sequence.
Alarm reporting
All major sub-systems within the TCU-B, such as synthesizers and RF amplifiers, are continuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to the EQCP in the TCU-B. The TCU-B control and transmitter status is also displayed, via LED indicators, on the front panel of the TCU-B.
LEDs
The front panel incorporates two tricolour LED indicators as follows: S Radio status LED S Red = Power fail. Steady yellow (and transmitter status LED off) = Sleep mode. Flashing yellow = Test mode. Steady green = Call processing in progress. Flashing green = Bootstrap mode.
Transmitter status LED Off = Transmitter off and not programmed. Off (and radio status LED steady yellow) = Sleep mode. Red = Transmitter alarm exists. Flashing green = Transmitter programmed and off. Yellow = Transmitter on during at least one timeslot.
Tech. 832
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU-B front panel diagram

Figure 8-15 shows the TCU-B front panel:
Tx OUT - TRANSMITTER RF OUTPUT CONNECTOR Tx OUT
Tx STATUS - INDICATOR DATA OUT B - FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA OUT A - FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA IN B - FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) DATA IN A - FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) RADIO STATUS - INDICATOR MANUAL RESET (MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON SWITCH)
EXTERNAL ALARMS
TTY INTERFACE (RS-232 SERIAL PORT)
TEST INTERFACE
Rx IN 2 - RECEIVE RF INPUT CONNECTOR
RX IN 1 - RECEIVE RF INPUT CONNECTOR
POWER - 27 V DC INPUT (FROM PDU BREAKERS)
Figure 8-15 TCU-B front panel diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 833
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU-B front panel connectors

Table 8-5 shows the TCU-B front panel connectors: Table 8-5 TCU-B front panel connectors Connector RX In 1 RX In 2 TX Out Data In A Data In B Data Out A Data Out B External Alarms Cntrl Procr TSM Info Test Info Voltage Input Purpose Receiver RF input Receiver RF input Transmitter RF output Fibre optic receiver port Fibre optic receiver port Fibre optic transmit port Fibre optic transmit port Alarms input from AB2 Test connection for control processor Test connection for the TSM board Test connection for the TCU functions 27 V dc input PDU circuit breaker Destination DNLB DNLB CBF mBCU (MCU) mBCU (MCU) mBCU (MCU) mBCU (MCU) AB2 PL2 (RS-232 serial port)
Tech. 834
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU-B functional diagram

Figure 8-16 shows a functional block diagram of the TCU-B:
XCVR BOARD
CHANNEL 1 RECEIVE RF IN CHANNEL 2 RECEIVE RF IN
I1 DATA Q1 DATA I2 DATA Q2 DATA AGC DATA
Rx
Tx SYNTH SEL LOCK ALARMS 13 MHz REF IN Rx SYNTH SEL DIGITAL CONTROL AND SIGNAL PROCESSING SYNTH DATA SYNTHESIZER
Tx CLK Tx SYNC Tx DATA (MODULATOR) Tx KEY PWR CONTROL DATA Tx
2.048 Mbit/s DATA INPUT 2.048 MHz CLOCK INPUT (FROM FOX)
2.048 Mbit/s DATA OUTPUT DETECTED POWER DATA 2.048 MHz CLOCK OUTPUT (TO FOX)
POWER AMPLIFIER BOARD
RF OUTPUT
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD
DISTRIBUTED POWER (TO EACH OF THE BOARDS)
Figure 8-16 TCU-B functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 835
GMR-01
TCU-B receiver detail
GSM-105-323

Receiver stages
The receiver section of the TCU is divided into three stages as follows: S S S Receiver RF stage. Receiver IF stage. Traffic and control channel output stage.
Receiver RF stages
The receiver part of the TCU-B transceiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from a dual low noise block (DLNB) module. The receiver provides two receive paths for diversity, bran ch 1 and branch 2. If diversity is configured ON at the OMC-R, the diversity signals from each DLNB are applied to branch 1 and branch 2. If diversity reception is not configured ON at the OMC-R, branch 2 is rendered inactive. NOTE If a single antenna is used, that is non-diversity, it must be connected to branch 1. Following a switchable automatic intermodulation control (AIC) pad and an RF bandpass filter, each receive input signal is converted to an intermediate frequency (IF). The IF lineup provides bandpass filtering and switchable attenuators and variable gain amplifiers for automatic gain control (AGC). The IF also allows selection of either linear or limited amplification depending on the channel type. Received signal strength indication (RSSI) data is also provided via the IF and provides data representation of the received signal strength.
AIC and AGC stages functional diagram

Figure 8-17 shows a functional block diagram of the AGC path (all AGC settings are provided from the control processor):
RSSI DATA AIC IF
BANDPASS FILTER
MIXER
FILTERING GAIN AGC TRAFFIC AND CONTROL DATA
LINEAR OR LIMITED
Figure 8-17 AIC and AGC RF functional block diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 836
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Receiver IF signals
The IF output line up for each receiver branch provides two signals: S S Received signal strength indication (RSSI) data. Traffic and control channel (traffic) data.
RSSI data
RSSI data provides representation of the received signal strength.
Traffic and control channel output

The primary signal flow of the IF is to support traffic and control data. Either a linear or limited amplifier chain can be selected. On a timeslot basis the limiting IF output is used for the acquistion of random access channel (RACH). The linear chain is used primarily for traffic channels. The selected path is demodulated into quadrature signals and filtered by baseband analogue filters. These signals are then digitized (I1/I2 data and Q1/Q2 data) and made available to the equalizer for the purposes of receive synchronization and data recovery.
Traffic and control channel functional diagram

Figure 8-18 shows the traffic and control channel path:
ADC
I DATA
TRAFFIC CONTROL DATA LPF ADC Q DATA
Figure 8-18 Traffic and control path functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 837
GMR-01
TCU-B transmitter detail
GSM-105-323

Overview
The transmitter section of the TCU-B is divided into two boards as follows: S S Transceiver board. Power amplifier board.
Details of these two boards follow:
Transceiver board
The transceiver board has the following functional stages: S S IQ modulation stage. IF and exciter stages.
IQ modulator stage
IQ modulator data for eight timeslot channels is applied to the modulator state machine. This data is encoded, serial-to-parallel converted, Gaussian filtered and split into quadrature components. The quadrature components are D/A converted and applied to a quadrature modulator to create a Gaussian minimum shift keyed (GMSK) carrier at an intermediate frequency (IF).
IQ modulator stage functional diagram

Figure 8-19 shows a functional block diagram of the IQ modulator:
DAC AMPLIFIER IQ MODULATOR DATA MODULATOR STATE MACHINE DAC
Figure 8-19 IQ modulator functional block diagram.
Tech. 838
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
IF and exciter stages

The GMSK modulated IF is filtered and applied to the input of a controlled gain amplifier for the purpose of transmitter pulse sloping (ramped). The ramped signal is filtered and then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is upconverted to the final transmit channel frequency which is in the range of 925 to 960 MHz. This low level modulated carrier is then applied to a combination of analogue and digital attenuators for the purposes of RF power control. The power control data is provided by the digital sections of the XCVR. The output of the power control elements is further amplified by an exciter chain to a sufficient level to drive the power amplifier.
IF and exciter stages functional diagram

Figure 8-20 shows a functional block diagram of the IF and exciter stages:
EXCITER MIXER FILTER RAMPING FILTER DISTRIBUTED GAIN AND POWER CONTROL
Figure 8-20 IF and exciter functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 839
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Power amplifier board

The power amplifier (PA) board provides the RF power amplification required to obtain the desired antenna output power level. The power amplifier also contains a forward power detector and an isolator. The detected output from the power detector is used to determine the setting for the final TCU-B RF power output level. The digital sections of the XCVR then send a signal to the gain control elements of the transmitter to set the corresponding RF power level. The maximum output power available at the EGSM900 TCU-B transmitter RF power output connector is 60.3 Watts (47.8 dBm) 0.5 dBm (normal conditions).
Power amplifier board functional diagram

Figure 8-21 shows a functional block diagram of the power amplifier board:
FORWARD POWER DETECTOR ISOLATOR
RF OUTPUT
LOAD
Figure 8-21 Power amplifier functional block diagram.
Tech. 840
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TCU-B digital control and signal processing (DPC) board

Overview
The digital control and signal processing portion of the TCU-B provides all the control and signal processing associated with a single GSM carrier. These functions include a 2.048 Mbit/s TDM interface to the BCU, a processing platform for the radio sub system (RSS) software layer, signal processing for all the uplink and downlink layer 1 channel coding and uplink channel equalization, and digital control hardware and processing which controls all TX and RX radio functions associated with the air interface.
Control functions
The digital control and signal processing circuitry provides the following functions for the TCU-B: S S S S S S S S Redundant 2.048 Mbit/s fibre optic links which interface with up to two central controllers, BCUs, of the M-Cell system. A software platform for the radio sub system (RSS). A digital signal processor (DSP) for radio control and channel equalization (EQCP). A digital signal processor (DSP) for channel coding, data routing, and baseband hopping (CCCP). Control of all RF systems including diversity receiver, transmitter, and Power Amplifier. Alarm monitoring of internal devices and external elements of the M-Cell cabinet. Control of external modules including remote tune combiners, and receiver frontend equipment. Maintenance ports for processor TTY, test point sub system, and transceiver test connections.
DPC board functional diagram

Figure 8-22 shows the digital control and signal processing board functional block diagram:
TPS TRAU DATA REDUNDANT 2.048 Mbit/s LINK TDM INTERFACE HDLC LINK TTY TO ALL PROCESSORS RSS PROCESSING PCI BACKBONE EQCP DSP CCP DSP
TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE FUNCTION
RX INTERFACE TX INTERFACE SYNTHESIZER INTERFACE PA INTERFACE
Figure 8-22 Digital control and signal processing functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 841
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
2.048 Mbit/s fibre optic TDM links

The TCU-B interfaces to redundant MCUs in an M-Cell cabinet via 2.048 Mbit/s fibre optic links on the FOX boards. These links are Manchester encoded, thus providing both clock and data in a single connection. The recovered clock is used to provide a frequency reference for the transceiver. The fibre optic RX and TX circuitry have been designed to support fibre lengths of up to 1 km. The TDM links are formatted into 32 x 64 kbit/s links which are used to support several data types. Several timeslots are used for link synchronization purposes. The remaining timeslots are used to provide four separate data types. These links provide: S S S S S Downlink and Uplink TRAU speech data. Downlink baseband hopping data to be routed to and from other TCUs. Cell site air interface synchronization. HDLC channel for control information between RSS and MCU. Baseband routing information to indicate source of downlink baseband hopping data.
RSS processor
The RSS processor function provides a BSS software platform which allows the distribution of the RSS process to each TCU. The RSS function communicates to the other software functions running on the MCU platform via dedicated 64 kbit/s timeslots in the TDM link. The RSS function communicates to the rest of the digital control functions via the PCI bus interface. In addition, a dual port interface is provided for communication with the CCCP. A TTY interface is also provided for user support. The RSS processor is based on a Motorola 68040 processor with at 68360 in companion mode. The assorted non-volatile and volatile memory include flash EPROM and 8 Mbytes of DRAM. Flash EPROM is used for code storage.
Tech. 842
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
EQCP processor
The EQCP processor handles all radio control functions and the channel equalizer function. The EQCP controls the RX and TX function via the transceiver control function on a per timeslot basis. These EQCP functions include: S S S S S S S S S S S S Alarm management. Downlink burst building and modulator control. Transmitter power control. Synthesizer channel control. RF frequency hopping. Receiver front end and remote tune combiner control. Uplink synchronization and equalization. Diversity receiver control. Receiver automatic gain control (AGC). Receive signal strength (RXLEV) calculation. Timing advance calculation. Support of front panel indicators.
The EQCP communicates to the rest of the digital control functions via the common PCI bus interface. A TTY interface is provided for radio level calibration, system monitoring, and transceiver level test. A real time test point sub system (TPS) is also provided for specialized test access for evaluating the layer 1 signal processing which includes the channel equalizing and channel coding functions. This test point consists of a shared serial bus with the CCCP processor and specialized external test equipment.
CCCP processor
The CCCP processor handles all the GSM specified layer 1 channel encoding and decoding functions for speech and control data associated with the air interface. In addition, it manages the routing of TRAU frames and baseband hopping (BBH) data, via the TDM interface, to and from the BCU. The CCCP functions include: S S S S S S Uplink channel decoding. Downlink channel encoding. GSM specified encryption algorithms. Baseband frequency hopping. TRAU frame collection and synchronization. Alarms management.
The CCCP communicates to the rest of the digital control functions via the common PCI bus interface. A DPR is also used in the downlink direction for communications from RSS. In addition, a serial link is provided to the TDM function to support uplink and downlink TRAU data. A TPS and TTY connection are also provide to the CCCP.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 843
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Transceiver interface function

The transceiver interface function provides all the air interface timing and radio control circuitry required to manage all the RX and TX control functions. A common PCI bus allows all the processing elements including the RSS processor, EQCP, and CCCP to communicate to the various transceiver functions. The transceiver interface includes: S S S S S S S S S S S Master GSM air interface timing function. Independent Rx gain control interface for each diversity receiver branch. Baseband Rx data interface for each diversity receiver branch. Receiver frontend and remote tune combiner control. Tx data interface including GMSK modulator which provides baseband data to the transmitter. Tx pulse shape control interface which provides a digital ramping control signal. Tx and power amplifier power control interface. Rx and Tx frequency synthesizer control which supports RF frequency hopping. TCU-B level and cabinet level alarm data collection. Extended range cell support. Alarms sampling and multiplexing.
Downlink (Tx) traffic

Downlink TRAU data is received by the TDM function from the BCU via the optical interface to the FOX board. This data is then routed to the CCCP function where it is encoded (cyclic, block, and convolutional), interleaved, and encrypted to GSM recommendations. Signaling messages are also received from the RSS processor and appropriately encoded. These traffic and control messages are built into air interface frames and then routed back to the BCU via the TDM function for baseband hopping. The CCCP calculates a BBH routing word, which informs the MCU as to which fibre link it would like to be the source of its post hopped data. The post hopped data is then once again sent back down to the appropriate TCU-B where it is received by the TDM function and passed to the EQCP function. The EQCP inserts midamble and guard bits to the data bits and forwards the data on to the modulator for transmission. The EQCP also programs the transceiver for the correct RF channel and transmit power level for this transmitted burst.
Uplink (Rx) traffic

Baseband uplink traffic and control data messages are received by the transceiver interface function and sent to the EQCP where they are received and equalized. The EQCP also calculates timing advance and RXLEV information, which is forwarded to the RSS process. The recovered data bits are forwarded into the CCCP process, where it is de-interleaved, decoded, and decrypted into TRAU frames. Control messages are passed to the RSS function, while TRAU frames are sent to the BCU via the TDM interface. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 844
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Frequency hopping
Frequency hopping
Overview
The TCU and TCU-B transceivers support two types of frequency hopping in the M-Cell6 BTS: Synthesizer Frequency Hopping (SFH) and Baseband Hopping (BBH).
Synthesizer frequency hopping

Synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH) uses the frequency agility of the TCU to change Tx/Rx frequency on a per timeslot basis. When SFH is used, each timeslot is allocated a number of frequencies up to a maximum of 64 to hop over. The BCCH carrier frequency can be included in the hopping sequence if necessary, however this will result in the loss of timeslots usage. Due to the requirements of the BCCH a minimum of two carriers are required. SFH requires wideband combining (CBF or hybrid combining), remote tune combiners (RTC) cannot be used. There are two types of SFH: S S Synthesizer frequency hopping. Synthesizer frequency hopping through the BCCH carrier.
SFH diagram
Figure 8-23 shows TCU and timeslot use in SFH:
TCU 0 TCU 1
BCCH Carrier
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Nonhopping traffic channels
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SFH hopping traffic channels
Figure 8-23 Synthesizer frequency hopping TCU and timeslot use.
SFH description
In this type of synthesizer frequency hopping, the BCCH carrier frequency is not included in the hopping sequence. TCU0 does not frequency hop. The BCCH is on timeslot 0, with timeslots 17 used for traffic channels. All timeslots on TCU0 are transmitted at maximum cell power. Frequency hopping is only employed on TCU1. Up to 64 frequencies can be used, except for the BCCH carrier frequency on TCU0. This is configured from the OMC-R by specifying the hopping frequencies in the database parameters.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 845
GMR-01
Frequency hopping
GSM-105-323
SFH through BCCH carrier diagram

Figure 8-24 shows TCU and timeslot use when synthesizer frequency hopping through the BCCH carrier is used: TCU 0 TCU 1
BCCH Carrier
0
1
2 3 4 5
6
Not used (dummy bursts)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SFH hopping traffic channels
Figure 8-24 SFH through the BCCH carrier.
SFH through BCCH carrier description

In this type of synthesizer frequency hopping, the BCCH carrier frequency is included in the hopping sequence. TCU0 timeslot 0 is used for the BCCH, timeslots 17 transmit dummy bursts only. The BCCH carrier frequency is available for use in the hopping sequence during timeslots 17 of TCU0. Timeslot 0 is always used by the BCCH and is not included in the scheme. The BCCH carrier frequency can be included in the hopping sequence of timeslots 17 of TCU1. When the BCCH carrier frequency is selected, the corresponding TCU0 timeslot transmit is inhibited for the duration of the burst. The burst is transmitted at maximum cell power. Timeslots for which the BCCH carrier is allocated in the hopping sequence, but for which no traffic is present, are transmitted by TCU0. This system could be considered to be an expensive option as up to seven of the timeslots of TCU0 are not used.
Tech. 846
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Frequency hopping
Baseband frequency hopping (BBH)

In baseband frequency hopping (BBH) all eight timeslots of the transceiver transmit at the same frequency, but in the receive (uplink) direction the transceiver has to change frequency on a timeslot basis. The number of hopping frequencies will be equal to the number of transceivers. The BCCH frequency is transmitted at max cell site power. Baseband hopping can use CBF/hybrid combining or CCB Tx combining equipment.
BBH diagram
Figure 8-25 shows an example of baseband frequency hopping (BBH): TCU 0 (BCCH) ARFCH=10 TCU1 ARFCH=20 TCU2 ARFCH=30
0
1
2 3 4 5 A
6
0 1 2 3 4 5 B 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 C 6 7
Figure 8-25 BBH example of three MSs on TS5
Downlink direction
MSs A, B and C are using TS5 of TCU0, TCU1 and TCU2 respectively. Using cyclic hopping, TCU0 transmits to mobile A on ARFCH 10 in the first TDMA frame. The next frame is transmitted from TCU1 on ARFCH 20, and the next is sent from TCU2 on ARFCH 30. The sequence is then repeated. The controlling radio, for example TCU0 for MS A, routes the timeslot to the appropriate radio for transmission in accordance with hopping sequence, see Table 8-6.
Uplink direction
The MS transmits the burst in each TDMA frame on a different frequency. The controlling radio (TCU0 for MS A), retunes to each of the frequencies in the hopping sequence in turn (ARFCN 10, 20, 30) to receive the data bursts.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 847
GMR-01
Frequency hopping
GSM-105-323
Table 8-6 shows the sequence of frequencies used in this example: Table 8-6 BBH frequency hopping sequence TCU0 Tx Rx A10 A10 C10 A20 B10 A30 A10 A10 C10 A20 B10 A30 TCU1 Tx Rx B20 B20 A20 B30 C20 B10 B20 B20 A20 B30 C20 B10 TCU2 Tx Rx C30 C30 B30 C10 A30 C20 C30 C30 B30 C10 A30 C20
Transmit signal routeing

The following describes how the BBH transmit signal is routed, see Figure 8-26 and Figure 8-27: 1. Traffic data from the network passed through the NIU to the MCU. In the MCU, the ASIC switches the data to TCU0 (the controlling radio for the timeslot allocated this MS). The data is routed through the communication interfaces to the TSM board. The TSM board processes the data to provide channel coding, interleaving, encryption and routeing information, and passes the processed signal back to the ASIC. The ASIC follows the routeing information to direct the data to the next transceiver in the hopping sequence detailed in Table 8-6. It is then transmitted to the MS.
2.
3.
A second signal allocated to the same timeslot would be controlled by the next available radio, for example TCU1. Motorola equipment implements transmit signal routeing by default. If the BBH mode of operation is not selected then the signal routeing passes the data back to the controlling radio for transmission
Tech. 848
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Frequency hopping
Transmit signal routeing functional diagram

Figure 8-26 shows the transmit signal routeing functional block diagram:
Tx CYCLES THROUGH TRANSCEIVER SEQUENCE
NIU
MCU
1 2 3
TRANSCEIVERS
Figure 8-26 BBH transmit signal processing functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 849
GMR-01
Frequency hopping
GSM-105-323
Receive signal routeing

The TCU synthesizer hops to the Rx signal frequency. This ensures that the channel coders and equalizers within a single transceiver are connected to a single MS for a given timeslot. Data received from the MS is routed from the Rx board to the EQDSPs and then to the DPC board. The data is passed to the TSM board for decryption, de-interleaving, channel decoding and TRAU formatting. The data is then routed back to the network via FOX/MCU.
Receive signal routeing functional diagram

Figure 8-27 shows the receive signal routeing functional block diagram:
TRANSCEIVER 0 TRANSCEIVER 1
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
EQDSP TSM DPC
EQDSP TSM DPC
Tx STEP 1
Tx STEP 2 FOX
Tx STEP 3
Rx
Tx STEP 1
Tx STEP 2
Tx STEP 3
Rx
ASIC MCU Tx STEP 1 Rx
NIU
Figure 8-27 BBH receive signal processing functional block diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 850
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
EGSM900 modules
EGSM900 modules
Overview
The following section describes the functional operation of RF modules used in EGSM900 M-Cell6 cabinets. NOTE The generic term TCU is used in this section to mean TCU and TCU-B. All procedures are the same for each unless otherwise indicated.
Module details
The modules detailed in the following sections are: S S S S S S S S S S S Dual low noise block module (DLNB). Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Cabinet extension block (CEB). Combining bandpass filter module (CBF). Cavity combining block (CCB). Medium power duplexer module. High power duplexer module. Three input combining bandpass filter. Hybrid combining module (HCOMB). Non-hybrid combining module (nonHCOMB). Twin bandpass filter (TBPF).

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 851
GMR-01
Dual low noise block (DLNB) module
GSM-105-323

Overview
A dual low noise block (DLNB) module consists of two receive bandpass filters, two low noise amplifiers and dual 2-way splitters. The module only transfers received signals that are in the BTS EGSM receive frequency band and allows one pair of antennas to feed up to two TCUs. Any unused output connectors are automatically terminated in 50 ohm loads, when the DLNB is fitted to the IADU.
Location
The DLNB modules are fitted on the top panel of a EGSM900 cabinet.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to three DLNB modules, one for each pair of antennas.
DLNB module view

Figure 8-28 shows the two types of DLNB module:
Figure 8-28 DLNB modules external view.
Tech. 852
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
One DLNB module is required for each pair of Rx antenna signals coming into the top of the cabinet (three per M-Cell6 cabinet). The gain through an DLNB is +14 dB.
Receive bandpass filters

The DLNB module consists of two receive (Rx) bandpass filters (BPF) followed by two low-noise RF pre-amplifiers. The Rx BPF attenuates out of band receive signal frequencies. The low-noise RF pre-amplifier increases the bandpass filtered received signals to a level sufficient to compensate for splitter/matrix and cable losses, and provides the proper receive signal level to the TCU receiver input(s). Being of a low-noise design, the pre-amplifier sets the noise figure, and hence the sensitivity, for the whole base station.
Two way splitters

The two 2-way splitters split each of the low-noise amplifier RF output signals into two signals, to provide a receive antenna signal to each of the six possible TCUs. All unused splitter outputs must be terminated by a 50 ohm load.
DC power
DC power is supplied to the module via the Path 2 coaxial outputs.
DLNB module functional diagram

Figure 8-29 shows a functional block diagram of the DLNB module:
OUTPUT X (TO IADU) INPUT 1 3 MAX
OUTPUT Y (TO/FRM EXP)
Rx BANDPASS FILTER STAGE
LOW-NOISE PRE-AMPLIFIER STAGE
OUTPUT X (TO IADU) INPUT 2
OUTPUT Y (TO/FRM EXP)
14 db GAIN
Figure 8-29 DLNB module functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 853
GMR-01
Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU) for the EGSM900 only, allows the transceiver control units (TCUs) to receive signals from more than one antenna. An IADU connects the outputs of any DNLB modules to the inputs of any TCU. Switching is on a timeslot basis. The IADU provides additional amplification, passive splitters, matrix switching and expansion facilities required to realize configurations of up to 12 carriers per sector (defined maximum for EGSM) with full diversity.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 EGSM900 cabinet must contain an IADU.
Location
The IADU is fitted below the top panel in an M-Cell6 cabinet.
Tech. 854
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
IADU module view diagram

Figure 8-30 shows a typical IADU:
DLNBS
FRONT OF IADU BOARD
OFF POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON POSITION
BACK OF IADU BOARD
VIEWED FROM BELOW
Figure 8-30 IADU module external view
The IADU module, used in the M-Cell6 cabinet, is capable of distributing the outputs of three DLNB modules, in any combination, to the receiver inputs of six TCU modules. The IADU module accepts inputs from three DLNB modules via D type RF connectors. The three inputs are fed into three 6-way splitters, and the output of each splitter is applied to the respective input of each of six solid state switches. The outputs from each solid state switch, which is controlled by data sent from the TCU, are fed to the receive input of a TCU via a D type RF connection. The gain through an IADU is +3 dB.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
O N
Tech. 855
GSM-105-323
IADU functional diagram

Figure 8-31 shows a block diagram of the 1st RF path through the IADU. To provide full diversity, the IADU has a duplicate route for the 2nd RF:
TO IADU IN NEXT CABINET
EXPANSION
0y
CONTROL SECTION (CONTROLLED BY TCUS - 7MHZ SIGNAL)
CONTROLS WHICH PORT IS USED FOR EXPANSION VIA A DIP SWITCH
AUTO TERMINATED IF NOT USED FOR EXT.
1y
SOLID STATE SWITCH
TCU 5 RX INPUT
SOLID STATE SWITCH 2y
TCU 4 RX INPUT
DLNB INPUTS
SOLID STATE SWITCH
TCU 3 RX INPUT OUTPUTS
PRE-AMPLIFIER 6-WAY SPLITTER SOLID STATE SWITCH
0x PRE-AMPLIFIER 6-WAY SPLITTER
TCU 2 RX INPUT
SOLID STATE SWITCH 1x PRE-AMPLIFIER 6-WAY SPLITTER SOLID STATE SWITCH 2x
TCU 1 RX INPUT
TCU 0 RX INPUT
Figure 8-31 IADU 1st RF path functional block diagram.
Tech. 856
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Switching settings
Figure 8-32 shows examples of the IADU switch settings:
OFF NO EXTENSION ON
OFF EXTENSION TO NEXT BTS ON 8 1 IADU PORT SELECT VIEWED FROM BELOW
Figure 8-32 IADU switch settings
IADU receive path functional diagram

Figure 8-33 shows the RF receive path through the IADU to a single radio
DLNB
DLNB
DLNB
CONTROL SWITCHES A B
CONTROL A B
C SUBSECTION OF IADU SPLITTER SWITCHES OF THE SAME NAME ARE CONTROLLED SIMULTANEOUSLY RADIO RX PATH 1 RX PATH 2
SPLITTER
Figure 8-33 IADU RF receive path

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 857
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Extension cabinet routing functional diagram

Figure 8-34 shows the extension between cabinets using DLNB and IADU which is necessary when there are more than 6 radios per sector:
ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 CABINET EXTENSION BLOCK (CEB)
DLNB
HARDWIRED SWITCH 1
2 3 4 5 6 6 RECEIVER INPUTS (FROM 1 CABINET)
7 8 2 RECEIVER INPUTS (FROM 2ND CABINET)
Figure 8-34 DLNB/IADU extension cabinet cabling
Tech. 858
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
DLNB-TCU 4/4/4 configuration diagram

Figure 8-35 shows the Motorola default for 4,4,4 configuration: S S Database parameter Antenna Select Number is set per TCU (DR1). It is important that the TCUs supplying power to the DLNBs are connected as shown in Figure 8-35.
CEB
D L N B
0
I A D U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U 1
T C U 1
T C U 3
T C U 3
T C U 1
T C U 1
T C U 1
T C U 1
Antenna Select Number Power Port 2 CABINET 0 Power Port 1 CABINET 1 Figure 8-35 DLNB and radio interconnection Power Port 0

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 859
GMR-01
Cabinet Extension Block (CEB)
GSM-105-323
Cabinet Extension Block (CEB)

Overview
A cabinet extension block (CEB) consists of a D-type RF connector, two receiver connectors RxA and RxB and associated wiring.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to three CEBs.
Location
The CEB is fitted on the top panel of an EGSM900 cabinet.
CEB module view diagram

Figure 8-36 shows a CEB:
RxB RxA
Figure 8-36 CEB module external view diagram
The CEB can be used in place of a DLNB to interface with an IADU to allow TCUs to receive signals from more than one antenna. It also allows one pair of antennas to feed up to two cabinets. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 860
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Combining bandpass filter (CBF) module

Overview
A combining bandpass filter (CBF) module consists of an integrated hybrid coupler, a load and transmit bandpass filter block.
Location
The CBF modules are fitted on the top panel of an EGSM900 cabinet.
Requirements:
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to three CBF modules, one for each pair of TCUs.
Module view
Figure 8-37 shows a CBF module:
Figure 8-37 CBF module external view diagram.
A CBF module is required for each transmit antenna, except where a CCB is used instead. The CBF is connected into the signal path from two TCU modules and the medium power duplexer. The first stage of the CBF is a 3 dB hybrid coupler to combine the two input signals into a single signal before the filtering stage. The second stage is a bandpass filter, covering the 35 MHz EGSM transmit frequency band, to provide the final stage of transmit bandpass filtering. This is a necessary GSM requirement to reduce emission of spurious signals outside the 35 MHz EGSM transmit frequency band by the transmit antenna equipment. The loss through the CBF is 4 dB.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 861
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CBF functional diagram

Figure 8-38 shows a functional block diagram of the CBF:
ANTENNA Tx1 Tx2
3 dB HYBRID COMBINER
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Figure 8-38 CBF functional block diagram. The CBF unit: S S S Combines two TCUs to one antenna. Cannot be used in multi-levels due to excessive losses and the need to pass a cable back into the cabinet. Not M-Cell6 DCS1800.
TCU-CBF functional diagram

Figure 8-39 details TCU power output and insertion losses: From an RF power perspective, a single level of hybrid combining is optimum.
2 CONNECTORS INSERTION LOSS = 0.15 dB
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
INSERTION LOSS OF CABLE = 0.16 dB
CBF
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT +47.35 dBm
POWER OUTPUT FROM THE CBF MUST BE +43 dBm
IT WOULD BE IMPOSSIBLE TO ACHIEVE AN OUTPUT POWER OF +43 dBm IF THERE WERE ANY MORE LEVELS OF COMBINING. IT IS THEREFORE OPTIMUM TO COMBINE NO MORE THAN 2 CARRIERS WITH CBFs.
Figure 8-39 TCU power output and insertion losses. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 862
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Air combining
S S S S S S Use both receive diversity antennas for transmit. Requires one extra medium power duplex if no more antennas are installed. Only ever use one level of combining. Full power output on all configurations. One duplexer as standard on all 3 and 4 carrier sectors to give 3 antenna terminals. Must have diversity antennas.
RF functional block diagram

Hybrid combining can be used for configurations which require the combining of more than two transmitters. Air combining utilizes the receive antenna pair and duplexers to configure systems which have up to four carriers per sector.
Rx 1, 2, 3, 4 Tx 1, 2 Rx 1, 2, 3,4 Tx 3, 4
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER
CBF
RX SPLITTERS
CBF
UPGRADE PATH FROM 2 TO 4 RADIOS PER SECTOR 2 RADIOS PER SECTOR: 3 RADIOS PER SECTOR: 4 RADIOS PER SECTOR: CBF 1 2 2 DUPLEXER 1/0 2 2 RADIO 2 3 4
Figure 8-40 RF functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 863
GMR-01
Cavity combining block (CCB) module
GSM-105-323
Cavity combining block (CCB) module

Overview
A cavity combining block (CCB) module consists of three independent tuneable cavity resonators. The combiner cavities are narrow band devices which only pass transmit signals with an RF frequency equal to the cavity tuned (resonant) frequency.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to two CCB modules, one for three TCUs.
Location
The CCB modules are fitted on the top panel of a EGSM900 cabinet.
CCB module view diagram

The following shows the two types of CCB module (complete with CCB control board modules):
CCB (EXTENSION) WITHOUT BPF BAND PASS FILTER (BPF)
CCB CONTROL BOARD (REDUNDANT)
CCB (OUTPUT) WITH BPF
CCB CONTROL BOARD (MASTER)
Figure 8-41 CCB with CCB control board modules diagram
Tech. 864
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CCB functional description

Cavity block control
The CCB is a cavity combiner operating in the EGSM transmit frequency band of 925 to 960 MHz (35 MHz bandwidth). The CCB consists of three independent tuneable cavity resonators. The combiner cavities are narrow band devices which only pass transmit signals with an RF frequency equal to the cavity tuned (resonant) frequency. The output of the individual cavities are coupled together to provide three channel combining, with a maximum signal power loss of 3 dB. The loss for a single CCB is 2.7 dB and for two CCBs combined the loss is 3.5 dB.
Transmit bandpass filter

A transmit bandpass filter, to reduce emission of spurious signals outside the 35 MHz EGSM transmit frequency band by the transmit antenna equipment, is connected between the combiner output and the antenna connector. This filter is integrated, together with the appropriate number of CCB modules and a CCB control card, to form the complete transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) assembly.
Transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI)

Since cavity designs and tuning methods are proprietary to each manufacturer, the power supplies, alarming and control interface to the TCU are provided by the CCB control board. This allows multiple sourced cavity combiners to be installed without requiring amended TCU software. The CCB modules are tuned by software commands from the CCB control board. In response to these commands, control data is sent by the TCU, via the coaxial cable, to the CCB. This data is separated from the RF signal at the bias tee, and sent to the CCB control board. The CCB will then send control signals along the control bus to the cavity tuning motor control of each CCB. One cavity can be completely retuned and verified in 8 seconds, and all three cavities within 19 seconds.
TATI control board

This control bus is connected to the TATI control board on the TATI assembly in the next cabinet (if applicable), to provide redundancy in the event of a TATI control board malfunction. S S S S S S Each CCB - three tuneable cavities. Two maximum. Control from TCU on RF cable. 3 dBm loss. 8 seconds to tune. DB select which TCU is to control primary and secondary.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 865
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CCB functional diagram

Figure 8-42 shows a functional block diagram of the CCB:
ANTENNA
TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER (FITTED TO #2 CCBs ONLY)
MOTOR CONTROL
CAVITY

BIAS TEE

CONTROL BUS (TO NEXT TCB)
TATI CONTROL BOARD (TCB)
DATA DATA DATA
Tx1
Tx2
Tx3
Figure 8-42 CCB functional block diagram
Tech. 866
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CCB configuration diagram

Figure 8-43 details CCB configuration. The CCB has two outputs in order that it can be phased together to combine up to six carriers.
SHORT CIRCUIT STUB 2.7 dB LOSS (WORST) TO ANTENNA
BANDPASS FILTER UP TO 3 RF INPUTS
SHORT CIRCUIT STUB 3.5 dB LOSS (WORST)
PHASE LEAD
TO ANTENNA BANDPASS FILTER
UP TO 6 RF INPUTS
Figure 8-43 CCB configuration diagram.
CCB digital control

S Control of the CCB. S S S The relationship between the CCB, TCB (TATI control board) and the BTS software.
The TCB acts as the interface between the BTS software and the CCB. BTS software always initiates communications with the TCB.
A single TCB can control up to two CCBs. The address of the TCB is set manually using an 8 bit DIL switch - this is normally set to 254 in the factory. Addressing will change for future equipment sharing option. No need to manually set up data links. Each cavity must be spaced four channels from its neighbour.
S S

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 867
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
CCB interconnection
Figure 8-44 shows the hardware interconnections required for a fully redundant TATI
TCB 1 TCB 0
CCB 1
CCB 0
15 WAY CONNECTION 15 WAY DATA CABLE
15 WAY CONNECTION
COMMS LINK
COMMS LINK
RADIO 5
RADIO 0
Figure 8-44 TATI hardware diagram
TATI control board redundancy

TATI redundancy features: S S S Link redundancy is available whether there are one or two TCBs fitted. Processor redundancy is only available if there are two TCBs fitted. Insertion and removal of live TCBs is possible. In a two TCB system a faulty TCB can be swapped out without affecting the BTS.
CCBs are required for configurations with five or more carriers per sector. S A single CCB system cannot be upgraded to a two CCB system, or a faulty CCB swapped out whilst the system is live.
Figure 8-45 shows an eight cell OMNI configuration. NOTE For 8 radios in a sector, the capacity of 1 and 1/3 cabinets are required, an 8/8/8 configuration requires the capacity of 4 cabinets.
Tech. 868
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Eight cell Omni configuration diagram

Figure 8-45 shows an eight carrier Omni configuration
HARDWARE REQUIRED FOR 8 CARRIERS PER SECTOR
Tx 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Rx 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 HIGH POWER PHASE LEAD DUPLEXER Tx 7, 8 Rx 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER
SHORT CIRCUIT STUB
CCB 1
CCB 0 BANDPASS FILTER IADU x2 Rx Splitters
CBF
6 TRANSMITTERS 8 RECEIVERS
2 TRANSMITTERS
Figure 8-45 Eight carrier OMNI configuration diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 869
GMR-01
Medium power duplexer module
GSM-105-323

Overview
A medium power duplexer module allows a single antenna to be shared by transmitters and receivers.
Requirements
A cabinet can contain up to three duplexer modules. which connect a maximum of two Tx radios. The medium power duplexer cannot be fitted to the cabinet when a CCB is fitted.
Location
Medium power duplexer modules are fitted on the top panel of an EGSM900 cabinet.
Medium power duplexer module view diagram

Figure 8-46 shows a typical medium power duplexer module:
Rx ANTENNA
Tx
Figure 8-46 Medium power duplexer module external view diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 870
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The medium power duplexer allows the transmit and receive signals to share the same antenna. Duplexing is provided for up to two RF carriers, each having a nominal transmit power of 25 W. For this reason the medium power duplexer should only be used in configurations where the CBF is used to provide hybrid combining of the RF carriers. The medium power duplexer consists of two bandpass filters, one for transmit and one for receive. The transmit and receive bandpass filters operate in the 35 MHz EGSM transmit and receive frequency ranges respectively. These filters form the final stage of transmit filtering and the first stage of receive filtering in the BTS cabinets. The loss through a medium power duplexer is 1 dB.
Medium power duplexer functional diagram

Figure 8-47 shows a functional block diagram of the medium power duplexer:
Tx1 ANTENNA
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx
Figure 8-47 Medium power duplexer functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 871
GMR-01
High power duplexer module
GSM-105-323

Overview
A high power duplexer module combines Tx and Rx signals to one RF connection, thus allowing reduction of antenna and feeders installed.
Requirements
High power duplexer modules can be used when CCB modules are used.
Location
M-Cell6 indoor
High power duplexer modules are located next to the BTS cabinet, on customer provided racking.
M-Cell6 outdoor
High power duplexer modules are located on custom duplexer racking mounted in the side cabinet.
High power duplexer module view diagram

Figure 8-48 shows a high power duplexer module:
Rx PORT Tx PORT
ANTENNA
Figure 8-48 High power duplexer module external view diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 872
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The high power duplexer allows the transmit and receive signals to share the same antenna. Duplexing is provided for up to six RF carriers, each having a nominal transmit power of 25 W. For this reason the high power duplexer should be used in configurations where the CCB is used to provide cavity combining of three RF carriers. The high power duplexer consists of two bandpass filters, one for transmit and one for receive. The transmit and receive bandpass filters operate in the 35 MHz EGSM transmit and receive frequency ranges respectively. These filters form the final stage of transmit filtering and the first stage of receive filtering in the BTS cabinets. The loss through a high power duplexer is 1 dB. Maximum power is 100 W.
High power duplexer module view diagram

Figure 8-49 shows a functional block diagram of the high power duplexer:
Tx1 ANTENNA
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx
Figure 8-49 High power duplexer functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 873
GMR-01
3-input CBF
GSM-105-323
3-input CBF
Overview
The 3-input combiner bandpass filter (CBF) performs wide-band combination of the transmit signals from three inputs for simultaneous broadcast on a single antenna. The inputs can be from a module hybrid combiner (HCOMB) or module non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB).
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to two 3-input CBFs, however multi-cabinet configurations can be used.
Location
The 3-input CBF is fitted on the top panel.
Limitations
Refer to HCOMB or non-HCOMB. The 3-input CBF is a five port device, with two input ports underneath, an input port and a suitable power load on the facing side and one output antenna port on the top.
Tech. 874
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
3-input CBF
3-input CBF module diagram

Figure 8-50 shows a 3-input CBF with antenna output and RF power load:
ANTENNA
RF LOAD TX3 TX1 TX2
Figure 8-50 3-input CBF with RF power load

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 875
GMR-01
Hybrid combiner (HCOMB)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The hybrid combiner (HCOMB) module combines transmit signals from two inputs and feeds the signals to a 3-input CBF for simultaneous broadcast to a single antenna. The inputs are from TCUs.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to one HCOMB, however multi-cabinet configurations can be used (the number of HCOMBs cannot be greater than the number of 3-input CBFs for multi-cabinet use).
Location
The HCOMB is fitted on the top panel.
Limitations
There is a 3 dB power signal loss through each hybrid combiner stage. When multiple stages are coupled together, each input signal must be routed through the same number of stages to ensure that the combined output signal contains individual channel frequencies of an equal power level. The hybrid combiner is a four-port device, with two input ports underneath, an output port on the opposite side and a suitable power load on the top.
Tech. 876
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
HCOMB with power load module view diagram

Figure 8-51 shows an HCOMB module with two RF inputs, combined RF output and RF power load:
RF LOAD
TX2
COMBINED RF OUTPUT
TX1
Figure 8-51 HCOMB module with power load

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 877
GMR-01
Non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The non-HCOMB feeds TCU inputs into two 3-input CBFs. There are two RF loads which take the RF load from each 3-input CBF.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to one non-HCOMB, however multi-cabinet configurations can be used (there must be at least one non-HCOMB for every two 3-input CBFs).
Location
The non-HCOMB is fitted on the top panel.
Limitations
The non-HCOMB is a two-port device, with two TCU feedthrough holes and two suitable RF input loads on the upper side and top.
Tech. 878
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Non-HCOMB with power load module view diagram

Figure 8-52 shows a non-HCOMB with two RF power loads:
RF LOAD
TX2 RF LOAD
TX1
Figure 8-52 Non-HCOMB module with power load

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 879
GMR-01
Twin band pass filter (TBPF)
GSM-105-323
Twin band pass filter (TBPF)

Overview
The twin band pass filter (TBPF) module provides two independent filtered transmit paths for realising single Tx sectored BTSs. The inputs are from TCUs.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to two TBPFs, however multi-cabinet configuration can be used.
Location
The TBPF is fitted on the top panel.
Limitations
There is a 1 dB power signal loss through each channel. The TBPF is a four-port device, with two input ports underneath, and two output ports on on the top.
Tech. 880
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
RF blanking plates
RF blanking plates
Overview
The RF blanking plates are designed to fit over the locations of a CBF, CCB, 3-input CBF, HCOMB, non-HCOMB and the DLNB.
Requirements
When CBF, CCB, 3-input CBF, HCOMB, non-HCOMBs or DLNBs are not required, blanking plates are fitted instead (this maintains the EMC characteristics of the enclosure - see Category 423 installation).
Location
The RF blanking plate is fitted on the top panel.
CBF type blanking plate view diagram

Figure 8-53 shows a blanking plate for the CBF type module:
Figure 8-53 CBF type blanking plate external view

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 881
GMR-01
RF blanking plates
GSM-105-323
DLNB blanking plate view diagram

The following diagram shows a blanking plate for the DLNB type.
Figure 8-54 DLNB blanking plate external view
Tech. 882
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
DCS1800/PCS1900 modules
DCS1800/PCS1900 modules
Overview
The following section describes the functional operation of RF modules used in DCS1800/PCS1900 M-Cell6 cabinets.
Module details
The modules detailed in the following sections are: S S S S S Low noise amplifier module (LNA) High sensitivity LNA module Hybrid combiner module Transmit bandpass filter (TxBPF) module DCS1800 medium power duplexer

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 883
GMR-01
Low noise amplifier
GSM-105-323
Low noise amplifier

Overview
The low noise amplifier (LNA) allows one pair of antennas to feed up to six TCUs.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to three LNA modules. NOTE Unused output connectors do not need to be terminated with 50 ohm loads, however the equipment will work more efficiently if they are fitted.
Location
The LNA modules are fitted on the top panel of DCS1800/PCS1900 cabinets.
LNA module view diagram

Figure 8-55 shows an LNA module:
RF INPUT (FROM RX ANTENNA OR DUPLEXER RX PORT)
OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUTS 0 TO 5 (TO CORRESPONDING TCU) OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 0 LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER MODULE
Figure 8-55 LNA module external view
Tech. 884
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Low noise amplifier
The low noise amplifier (LNA) consists of two receive bandpass filters (Rx BPFs) to attenuate out-of-band receive signal frequencies, two RF pre-amplifiers to amplify the bandpass filtered received signals and a dual six way splitter module allows one pair of antennas to feed up to six TCUs. The module only transfers received signals that are in the BTSs receive frequency band. There are now two types of LNA; the original and a high sensitivity version.
Original LNA operation

The original LNA comprises two Rx channels, each consisting of an input bandpass filter, a preselector and an 8-way splitter. The input BPF provides out of band attenuation, and the preselector provides two stages of amplification and additional filtering. The 8-way splitter then divides the output, and six of the outputs are distributed to transceivers for further processing. Outputs J3 and J4 enable BTS cabinets to be daisy chained together, and provide the input path for the 27 V dc required to power the amplifiers. The LNA provides a Rx input gain of 8.5 to 15.5 dB.
LNA functional diagram

Figure 8-56 shows a functional block diagram of the LNA module:
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 1 Rx IN
SPLITTER Rx BPF Rx BPF
RF OUT
J3 J4 EXTENDERS PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 2 Rx IN
SPLITTER Rx BPF Rx BPF
RF OUT
J3 J4 EXTENDERS
Figure 8-56 LNA module functional block

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 885
GMR-01
Low noise amplifier
GSM-105-323
High sensitivity LNA operation

The high sensitivity LNA comprises two Rx channels, each consisting of an input bandpass filter, preselector and an 8-way splitter. The input BPF provides out of band attenuation, and the preselector provides three stages of amplification and a switched attenuator. The 8-way splitter then divides the output, and six of the outputs are distributed to transceivers for further processing. Outputs J3 and J4 enable BTS cabinets to be daisy chained together, and provide the input path for the 27 V required to power the amplifiers. Additional filtering is provided by BPFs on the outputs of the splitter, including the additional outputs (J3 and J4, see below) for when these outputs are used to drive TCUs directly (eg. in the 8/8/8 configuration). The high sensitivity LNA has two gain modes, high gain and low gain. Mode selection is by an externally accessible switch, with the attenuator switched into the RF path in the low gain mode. High gain is selected for normal high sensitivity operation. Low gain is selected where there is to be another source of gain in front of the LNA, ie. if a masthead amplifier is to be used or in the case of daisy chaining receivers. The high sensitivity LNA provides a Rx input gain of 8.5 to 14.5 dB in low gain mode and 19.0 to 25.5 dB in high gain mode.
High sensitivity LNA functional diagram

Figure 8-57 shows a functional block diagram of the high sensitivity LNA module:
PRESELECTOR ANTENNA 1 Rx IN Rx BPF dB RF OUT
SPLITTER
REAR PANEL SWITCH
J3 J4 EXTENDERS
PRESELECTOR ANTENNA 1 Rx IN Rx BPF dB RF OUT
SPLITTER
REAR PANEL SWITCH
J3 J4 EXTENDERS
Figure 8-57 high sensitivity LNA functional block diagram Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 886
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Low noise amplifier
LNA rear view diagram

The following diagram shows a rear view of the of the high sensitivity LNA:
RF INPUT (FROM RX ANTENNA OR DUPLEXER RX PORT)
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER MODULE
J3
J4
PATH A LOW GAIN HIGH GAIN PATH B
HIGH GAIN
LOW GAIN
J4
J3
Figure 8-58 High sensitivity LNA rear view

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 887
GMR-01
Hybrid combiner
GSM-105-323
Hybrid combiner
Overview
The hybrid combiner combines transmit signals from two inputs for simultaneous broadcast on a single antenna. The inputs can be from TCUs or other hybrid combiners; transmit signals from several TCUs can be combined into a single antenna by using more than one hybrid combiner.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to five hybrid combiners.
Location
The hybrid combiner is fitted on the top panel of DCS1800/PCS 1900 cabinets.
Limitations
There is a 3 dB power signal loss through each hybrid combiner stage. When multiple stages are coupled together, TCU transmit power should be adjusted to ensure that the combined output signal contains individual channel frequencies of an equal power level. The hybrid combiner is a four-port device, with two input ports on one side, one output port on the opposite side, connected to a suitable power load, and one output port on the top. NOTE One of the output ports must be terminated by a suitable power load.
Hybrid combiner module view diagram

Figure 8-59 shows a hybrid combiner:
PORT 2
PORT 1
PORT 3
PORT 0
Figure 8-59 Hybrid combiner external view Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 888
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Hybrid combiner
Hybrid combiner with power load module view diagram

Figure 8-60 shows a hybrid combiner with power load in mounting frame:
POWER LOAD
HYBRID COMBINER
MOUNTING FRAME
Figure 8-60 Hybrid combiner with power load in mounting frame external view

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 889
GMR-01
Hybrid combiner
GSM-105-323
Configuration example
Figure 8-61 is a schematic of five hybrid combiners configured to combine six Tx frequencies on one antenna:
COMBINED OUTPUT
100W LOAD
15 way connection
100W LOAD OUTPUT
100W LOAD
100W LOAD
COUPLER
100W LOAD
100W LOAD
INPUTS
HYBRID COMBINER
Tx OUTPUTS FROM 6 TCUs REDUCE POWER OUTPUT TO 30 W TO MATCH
Figure 8-61 Five hybrid combiner configuration
Tech. 890
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Overview
The transmit bandpass filter (TxBPF) module reduces noise and out-of-band interference caused by spurious and harmonic signals. It filters the combined transmit signal before it is applied to the antenna, so that only signals in the transmit frequency band are passed to the antenna.
Requirements
An M-Cell6 cabinet can contain up to three TxBPF modules. Each BPF has a loss of 0.6 dB. A TxBPF module is required for each transmit antenna in all configurations.
Location
The TxBPF module is fitted on the top panel of DCS1800/PCS 1900 cabinets.
TxBPF module view diagram

Figure 8-62 shows a TxBPF module on mounting bracket:
OUTPUT
TESTING OR SAMPLING MOUNTING BRACKET INPUT
Figure 8-62 Tx BPF module with mounting bracket external view

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 891
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
TxBPF functional block diagram

Figure 8-63 is a schematic diagram of the Tx BPF module:
TESTING OR SAMPLING
RF INPUT Tx BPF
RF OUT
Figure 8-63 Tx BPF module functional block diagram
Tech. 892
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
DCS1800 medium power duplexer module

Overview
allows a single antenna to be shared by transmitters and receivers.
Requirements
A cabinet can contain up to three duplexer modules.A medium power duplexer module cannot be fitted to the cabinet when a CCB is fitted.
Location
Medium power duplexer modules are fitted on the top panel of a DCS1800 cabinet.
Medium power duplexer module view diagram

Figure 8-64 shows a DCS1800 medium power duplexer module on mounting bracket:
ANTENNA
Rx MOUNTING BRACKET
Tx
Figure 8-64 DCS1800 medium power duplexer module with mounting bracket external view

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 893
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The medium power duplexer allows the transmit and receive signals to share the same antenna. Duplexing is provided for up to two RF carriers, each having a nominal transmit power of 25 W. For this reason the medium power duplexer should only be used in configurations where the CBF is used to provide hybrid combining of the RF carriers. The medium power duplexer consists of two bandpass filters, one for transmit and one for receive. The transmit and receive bandpass filters operate in the 35 MHz EGSM transmit and receive frequency ranges respectively. These filters form the final stage of transmit filtering and the first stage of receive filtering in the BTS cabinets. The loss through a DCS1800 medium power duplexer is 0.8 dB.
Medium power duplexer functional block diagram

Figure 8-65 shows a functional block diagram of the duplexer:
Tx1 ANTENNA
Tx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx BANDPASS FILTER
Rx
Figure 8-65 DCS1800 medium power duplexer functional block diagram.
Tech. 894
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
VSWR Monitor
VSWR Monitor
Overview
A Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) monitor (VM) is available as an optional extra, for use with M-Cell6 Indoor (or equivalent) BTS systems. This module monitors the RF signals for VSWR by means of side-mounted, dual direction couplers. Alarm outputs are provided to connect the VM to an external PIX alarm connecter on the BTS. The module is connected in the Tx/Rx cables between the BTS and antenna, and requires an external 48 V dc power supply, which must be provided by the user. An integral mounting bracket is fitted to the base of the unit. A single VM is required for each BTS sector, unless the sector is configured with more than three antennas, of which only one is used for Tx.
Further details
A supplementary document is available for this module. For detailed information, please refer to Service Manual Supplement VSWR Monitor for M-Cell6. 68P02900W86.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 895
GMR-01
VSWR Monitor
GSM-105-323
Tech. 896
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 9
M-Cell6 digital modules

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323

Digital modules detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital modules functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main control unit (MCU) details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68LC060 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICC32 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM upgrade path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory space DRAM protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCMCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic board ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant MCU link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC/TCU links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH switching and routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC processor parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault condition interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Tech. 91 Tech. 91 Tech. 91 Tech. 92 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 93 Tech. 94 Tech. 95 Tech. 96 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 97 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 98 Tech. 99 Tech. 99 Tech. 99 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 910 Tech. 911 Tech. 911 Tech. 911 Tech. 912 Tech. 912 Tech. 912 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 913 Tech. 914 Tech. 914 Tech. 914

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Sync block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OCXO Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features controlled by the main processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events causing a main processor interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man machine interface management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote login availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network interface unit (NIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing section overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TTY Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface/framing sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIM/BIM-NIU - E1/T1 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU to T43 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIM/BIM-NIU interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Fibre optic extender (FOX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOX module interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical link maximum length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX connections diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroBCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mBCU architecture functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU redundancy functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroBCU power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulated supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 929 Tech. 930 Tech. 930 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 931 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 932 Tech. 933 Tech. 933 Tech. 934 Tech. 934 Tech. 934 Tech. 935 Tech. 935 Tech. 936 Tech. 936 Tech. 936 Tech. 936 Tech. 937 Tech. 937 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 938 Tech. 939 Tech. 939 Tech. 939 Tech. 939 Tech. 940

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Digital modules detail

Functions
The digital modules in an M-Cell6 cabinet provide all the non-radio processing and control functions for the M-Cell6 BTS. The modules fit into the card cage of a mBCU and are available as full and half size modules. The slots in the mBCU are annotated with the legend of the appropriate module. The following are the full size modules: S S S S Main control unit (MCU). Fibre optic extender (FOX).
The following are the half size modules: Network interface unit (NIU). Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX).
The following text provides a brief functional description of the full and half size modules that can be mounted in a mBCU. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.
The MCU provides all the non-radio processing functions, and supports BTS site processing and fault management together with BTS call processing and management. The FOX module is the electro-optical interface between the MCU and transceivers, and converts electrical Tx data to optical data and optical Rx data to electrical data. The NIU is the interface between the terrestrial network and the MCU and provides the functionality to terminate the network.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 91
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Digital modules functional diagram

Figure 9-1 shows a functional block diagram of the digital modules:
E1/T1
NIU0
NIU1
EXT TO OTHER CABINETS
FMUX
FMUX MCU FMUX
FOX 2 2 2 2 2 2
TCU TCU TCU TCU TCU TCU
Figure 9-1 Digital modules functional block diagram
Tech. 92
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Main control unit (MCU) details

Function
The MCU is a single plug in module which provides the main site processing functions, executive/operating System, operations and maintenance and call processing. In addition all switching and network clock synchronization is performed by the MCU. The MCU module combines all of the non radio processing functions of the present BTS into a single unit for the M-Cell BTS. The MCU combines the functions of the generic processor board (GPROC), the kiloswitch (KSW) and the generic clock (GCLK). The main control unit (MCU) module provides the following functions: S S S S Control processing. Crosspoint switch. BTS master clock synchronization. Timing.
The processing supports the BTS site processing and fault management, together with BTS call processing (radio resource state machine and cell resource manager). The crosspoint switch provides switching for up to six network interfaces and up to 24 TCUs.
Requirements
The cabinets may contain up to two MCU modules, one in each mBCU cage (one for redundancy).
Location
The MCU modules are fitted in the mBCU cage.
Network connections
The MCU is connected to the terrestrial network through the network interface unit (NIU). The MCU supports a maximum of four NIUs (with a combined maximum of six E1 or T1 +circuits), two in each mBCU cage.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 93
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MCU module view diagram

Figure 9-2 shows an MCU module:
COMMS PROCESSOR MAIN PROCESSOR
BACKPLANE CONNECTORS FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTION
TTY
CAL PORT
STATUS LEDS OSCILLATOR PCMCIA BDM PORT MEMORY
RESET BUTTONS (Full - Removes software from memory Soft - Lock/unlock of MCU)
Figure 9-2 MCU module
Tech. 94
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MCU functions
The MCU functions are as follows: S S S S S S S S S S Base station control function (BCF). Switching of traffic and control information. Support of up to six E1 or T1 circuits. Support of up to 24 TCUs. This uses FMUX and FOX boards for physical connection to the TCU. Timing reference. Network synchronization. Switching of baseband hopping data. Switching for onward linking in a drop and insert (daisy chain) configuration. Support of a redundant MCU. Distance measuring and compensation relating the MCU to TCU links. This function is used to equalize the delays between the MCU and all the served TCUs, for site and system synchronization. Alarm inputs and outputs. Capability to read site ID information from within the cabinet. LAPD control links. Call processing. Execute/operating system. Operations and maintenance. Code storage facility via PCMCIA card.
S S S S S S S

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 95
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MCU functional diagram

Figure 9-3 shows a block diagram of the MCU module:
SIGNAL CONNECTOR 2
TTY INTERFACE
50 MHz BUS @ 25 MHz
XTAL QUICC32 PLL COMMS PROCESSOR CONTROL
RS232
MMI GPS
BTP DATA RED LED GREEN LED ADDRESS
68LC060
V.28
PIX OUTPUT
EXTERNAL SITE ID
WARM RESET AND RESET SWITCHES
RESET
BERR
ECC DRAM 16 Mb PCMCIA INTERFACE PCMCIA
FAST FLASH EEPROM
SLOW FLASH EEPROM
6 NIU REDUNDANT MCU ASIC TCU X 2 FIBRE OPTIC SYNC BLOCK 24 GPS 1PPS EXTERNAL CLOCK FOX/FMUX MODULES
Figure 9-3 MCU module functional block diagram.
Tech. 96
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MCU technical description

Memory configurations
The main processing section of the MCU currently supports 16 Mbytes of RAM upgradeable to 32 Mbytes. The boot up code is stored in a 1 Mbyte flash EPROM, a further 0.5 Mbytes of flash EPROM is provided for non volatile data storage.
Processor functionality
The MCU processing section provides a 68LC060 processor in companion mode with a QUICC32. The QUICC32 is used to provide system integration and peripheral functions, specifically, a 32 channel HDLC controller for the TCU BCF links. The DRAM system (refer to DRAM system in this document) will implement an ECC system for high data integrity. In QUICC32 companion mode the 68LC060 replaces the CPU32+ core of the QUICC32. The external processor accesses the internal peripherals of the QUICC32 through the address and data port. The peripherals are mapped into the external processor address space in the same way that they were mapped into the core processor (CPU32+) address space. The internal peripherals on the QUICC32 can address external memory through the address and data bus after arbitrating for the bus in the normal way. This permits the CPM and similar peripherals to access configuration information, and DMA transfers to take place.
68LC060 processor
The 68LC060 is a cut-down version of the 68060. The floating point unit (FPU) removed, and the processor cannot perform floating point calculation. The 68LC060 is a fully static processor operating at 3.3 volts. The 68LC060 has a clock operating speed of 50 MHz with a bus speed of 25 MHz (the reduced bus speed is due to the use of the QUICC32 in companion mode). The on-board memory management unit (MMU) provides write protection of memory areas, particularly program storage areas. The MMU has a granularity of 4 Kbytes.
QUICC32 processor
The QUICC32 processor is a pin compatible derivative of the 68360. There are minor hardware changes and microcode changes which permit SCC1 to operate as a 32 channel HDLC controller, utilising the CPM RISC controller to perform the processing. All other features remain as for the 68360, except for the available performance in the CPM, which is reduced. The QUICC32 processor operates at 25 MHz. This also defines the external bus speed of the 68LC060. The on-board system integration features of the QUICC32 provide DRAM control, major address decoding, tick timers, level 1 watchdog timer, serial ports and general purpose timers. The GSM and system specific timers/ reference counters are provided externally.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 97
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ECC
The error correcting code (ECC) controller provides various diagnostic modes to facilitate both factory test and board self diagnostics. These modes are controlled by the main processor. The ECC controller is capable of operating in read/detect, read/correct or disabled modes. These modes are controlled by the main processor. Normal operation should utilize read/correct mode. The ECC system will not support hardware error scrubbing. The memory system must be scrubbed periodically by software.
DRAM system
The dynamic RAM (DRAM) system provides 16 Mbytes of ECC protected DRAM, upgradeable to 20, 24 or 32 Mbytes. The ECC system permits the correction of single bit errors, the detection of double bit errors and detection of some multi-bit errors. All system memory locations must be initialized by the software before they are read or the ECC is enabled. Memory system performance is seven, four, four, four, for burst accesses. The system supports direct memory access (DMA) to the DRAM. Byte and word writes to the DRAM are also supported.
DRAM upgrade path

The upgrade DRAM uses a 40 bit, 72 pin SIMM. This provides a simple upgrade path to the 32 Mbyte system, utilizing an industry standard SIMM module. The 16 Mbytes of DRAM in the standard installation is implemented using discrete devices.
Memory space DRAM protection

Memory protection is provided through the MMU features of the 68LC060. There are two banks allocated to DRAM providing extension to 32 Mbytes. The 16 Mbyte system utilizes just one bank. The 32 Mbyte system allows the protection status of the two banks to be separately programmed, using the SIM features of the QUICC32.
Tech. 98
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Flash EPROM
The main processor has two banks of Flash EPROM: S The first 1 Mbyte bank is organized 32 bits wide (256 k x 32) for boot code. No upgrade path is available. This 1 Mbyte bank will have an access time of 75 ns or better so that code can run directly from Flash EPROM during normal execution. In particular the fast Flash allows a single executive to be developed which can be used during boot or when running from DRAM. The second 0.5 Mbyte bank is organized 16 bits wide (256k x16) for non-volatile data storage.
The Flash EPROMs provide sectoring to allow partial erase, and sector lock features, which may or may not be used. The Flash EPROM also provides software data protect features and power-on/down protection. The Flash EPROM supports a minimum of 100,000 write/erase cycles. Read/write protection will be provided using the memory management unit (MMU) features of the 68LC060 and the system integration module (SIM) features of the QUICC32. Direct memory access (DMA) from the Flash EPROM will be supported for the 32 bit wide bank only. The 1 Mbyte bank will be connected to the global chip select as boot memory.
TTY port
The main processing section is provided with a TTY interfaces to the QUICC32. This interface does not support hardware handshaking. The serial ports will support a minimum of 9.6 kbit/s, which may be increased depending upon the load on the QUICC32 CPM RISC. The TTY port will go to the MCU front panel.
Front panel switches

The front panel of the MCU module has two reset switches - full and soft. Actuating these switches will reset the MCU. The full (hard) reset temporarily removes power from the MCU, and will require a code load on completion of the reset. The soft (warm) reset does not remove the power and will therefore not require a code load on completion of the reset. NOTE Software reset: On displaying, if dots are still moving across the screen and the soft reset switch is pressed a hard reset will be performed.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 99
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Front panel indicators

The MCU has two front panel LEDs, one green and one red, which are directly controllable by the main processor. Both LEDs are located on the card edge of the MCU. Table 9-1 MCU front panel LEDs Red Off Off On Flashing Green Off On Off Flashing CAUTION When red and green status LEDs are flashing, the boot code is downloading. Do not remove power. Status Board not powered up or in rest cycle Normal operation Fault condition Fast flash reprogramming in progress (Boot ROM and executive downloading - do not remove power)
PCMCIA
The loading and storage of software is done via the PCMCIA interface; this is accessible from the card edge in the MCU. The PCMCIA socket is an industrial standard 68 pin single socket accessible from the MCU front panel and is fitted with an ejector. Access to the PCMCIA socket is by opening the M-Cell6 cabinet door. The PCMCIA interface is controlled using a Cirrus Logic PC card socket controller. The PCMCIA interface is provided to support rev 2.1 type I and II cards. It is possible for a card to be permanently installed provided that it does not require any external connection, such as a flash memory card. It will allow additional cards to be supported as and when the requirement arises.
PIX interface
The MCU provides four outputs. These are driven at V. 28 levels. The PIX connections are routed to the cabinet alarm board which converts the signals from V. 28 levels to/from relay contacts.
GPS interface
The GPS interface to the processor section is an RS232 compatible port. This is additional to the MMI TTY ports. The 1PPS signal is provisioned in the same connector, at V. 28 levels. This signal is fed to the sync block.
Tech. 910
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Electronic board ID
Electronic board ID is supported by the slow flash memory (the non-volatile data bank). This storage will contain the following information: S S S MCU module serial number - 16 bytes. Kit number - 16 bytes. Description - 32 bytes.
Electronic site ID
A programmable site ID feature is provisioned by a database.
Redundant MCU link

The redundant MCU link is similar to a TCU link. It does not have the BBH capability, or the link delay measurement and compensation facility. The 6.12 s, and 60 ms signals, are inserted into timeslots 8 and 16, as done in the TCU link. Timeslots 0 and 1 are framing slots of all 0s with all even timeslots having bit 0 as a 1. This is also done in the same way as in a TCU link. These references are also extracted from the incoming redundancy link, as is the E1/T1 clock. These signals are passed to the sync section to be used when the MCU is in slave mode. The main processor HDLC link to the redundant MCU can be routed in any timeslot(s) of this link with the exception of those used for framing and synchronization references defined above. The ASIC can switch any timeslot on the redundancy link to any timeslot on any of the other links connected to it such as the TCU links, network links, redundancy link or processor links.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 911
GMR-01
Application specific integrated circuit (ASIC)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) provides central switching capabilities for the MCU. It is capable of supporting up to 24 TCUs, together with up to six network interfaces and two links to the processing section, one link to the sync processor plus the link to the redundant MCU. The switch supports baseband hopping across the 24 TCU links. The ASIC also provides link interface features associated with the TCU links, these include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to the TCUs, and the necessary framing and encoding to support the link. All of the serial links into the ASIC are E1/T1, 125 ms frame, 32 eight bit timeslots per frame.
ASIC functional diagram

Figure 9-4 shows the links between the ASIC and other processor elements.
TO MAIN PROCESSOR COMMS PROC AND BTP
TO TCUs VIA FIBRE OPTIC 24 ASIC TO REDUNDANT MCU VIA FIBRE OPTIC TO NETWORK INTERFACES 6
TO SYNC PROCESSOR (FOR CODE LOADING ONLY)
PARALLEL PROCESSOR BUS E1/T1 TDM SERIAL STREAM
Figure 9-4 ASIC functional block diagram.
Tech. 912
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
ASIC/TCU links
The ASIC interfaces to a maximum of 24 TCU links. The ASIC can switch any timeslot on any of the TCU links to any timeslot on any of the other links connected to it for example TCU links, network links, redundancy link or processor links. The TCU links are all Manchester coded/decoded by the ASIC. This function can be switched on or off on a per link basis. The default condition will be with Manchester coding enabled. The disable feature is for applications outside of the MCU module. The ASIC provides the following features associated with the TCU links: S S S S S S Link advance. Distance measurement. Delay compensation. BBH data switching. Timing reference insertion. Manchester coding/decoding.
Link advance
The ASIC will continually measure the round trip delay on each TCU link. This delay is used by the ASIC to calculate a timing advance for each link. The link advance is applied only when triggered via the processor parallel interface. The link advance time can also be adjusted by the main processor via the processor parallel interface.
BBH switching and routeing

BBH switching is performed automatically on any timeslot configured as BBH data. A single timeslot on the TCU uplink (the location of which is programmable) is used for BBH routeing information is provided by the TCU and defines which TCU link (0-23) should be used as the source of data for that particular TCU downlink.
Synchronization
The ASIC receives timing pulses from the sync section and inserts the appropriate bits into the TCU downlink synchronization and framing timeslots. The sync circuit will provide a version of the 6.12 s and 60 ms signals that is advanced by 125 ms for this purpose.
Network links
The ASIC supports a maximum of six network connections. The data to/from these links can be switched to/from any timeslot on any of the other links connected to it, such as the TCU links, Network links, Redundancy link or Processor links.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 913
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Processor links
The ASIC supports three processor links. Two are connected to the main processor, and one to the sync processor. The data to/from these links can be switched to/from any timeslot on any of the other links connected to it, such as the TCU links, network links, redundancy link or processor links. The link to the sync processor is used for code loading purposes only. The two links to the main processor allow it to route HDLC and other links to the appropriate place: S S S S S 24 HDLC timeslots for the BCF RSS channel to each TCU. Four timeslots for NIU control channels (two local, two redundant). Sync processor code load channel. Two channels for RSL links. One HDLC channel occupying up to three timeslots to the redundant MCU.
ASIC processor parallel interface

The ASIC processor parallel interface allows control and monitoring of all ASIC functions as follows: S S S S S TCU link timeslot allocation. Switch connection memory programming. Switch data memory access. Enable TCU link Manchester coding/decoding. Reading of TCU link delay measurement results.
Fault condition interrupts

The ASIC provides a number of interrupts to indicate fault conditions as follows: S S S S S S S TCU link bit error, one per TCU link. TCU link delay compensation invalid, one per TCU link. TCU link sync loss, one per TCU link. TCU link BBH routing data parity error, one per TCU link. Redundancy link bit error, one per TCU link. Redundancy link, loss of sync. Redundancy link reference timing bit error.
It is possible to disable all interrupts.
Tech. 914
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Sync block
Sync block
Overview
The sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates all required local references from a high stability local clock source. This clock source may also be locked to the incoming network clocks. The sync function will be controlled by the main processing section via a parallel port. The microcontroller will be able to control the following functions: S S S S S S S S Network extracted clock selection, one from six (one from each network interface). Monitoring of one of the other available references. No loop/reference selected or closed loop mode selection for selected reference. Site frame reference generation and reference re-timing. Processor reference counters. Master reference counters. Selection of locking to GPS input. Selection of locking to references from MCU redundant link.
Sync references
The reference clocks available to the sync block are: S Six network extracted clocks (E1/T1 source). The NIU board under control of the MCU will select an E1/T1 link and extracted a 2 MHz/1.544 MHz clock and pass this reference to the Sync block for synchronisation purposes. S Sync cal port The sync cal port on the front panel of the MCU can be used to input a 8 MHz reference and using MMI commands the sync block can be calibrated. S S S Redundant MCU link. Front panel reference. GPS. (This feature is not available)

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 915
GMR-01
Sync block
GSM-105-323
Sync test ports

There are two test ports on the front panel for use with the sync circuit these are: S S Reference input, which is used to provide PLL reference clock for calibration purposes. Reference output, which used to monitor PLL output clock for calibration purposes.
The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. It includes an OCXO accurate to 0.05ppm, a phase comparator and a loop filter. The PLL has the following operating modes: S Warm-up The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, but the OCXO is not yet warmed up. S Set frequency The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, and the OCXO is warmed up. S S Fast tune Closed loop with wide filter for course locking (extracted from network clock/GPS). Fine tune Closed loop with narrow filter for accurate locking (extracted from network clock/GPS).
OCXO Behaviour
The crystal oscillator, which provides the clock functions, requires the following times to achieve initial lock: S S S S S S S Warm-up for phase locking - 4 minutes. Frequency Stabilization - 15 minutes. Clock behaviour adds to slave Initialisation.
The sync block provides the following reference clocks: 16.384 MHz - FMUX, FMUX Comm. 125 ms - NIU framing. 60 ms - TCUs GSM timing. 6.12 s - GSM superframe
Tech. 916
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Sync block
Code loading
The sync controller has a E1/T1 serial link into the mBCU ASIC enabling a 64 kbit/s HDLC channel to be used for code loading. This link cannot be used for any other function so as to ensure that the sync block can be migrated to an ASIC in the future. The sync block comprises 256k of Flash EPROM used to store: S S Factory bootstrap code. Operational code.
The factory bootstrap code cannot be altered and its function is to establish an HDLC link to the MCU-m ASIC so that a query can be raised on the current version of the stored operational code. If the stored operational code is the correct version, the factory bootstrap code will move the operational code to RAM and execute the code. If the query results in the need for new operational code, the MCU-m will download the code via the MCU-m ASIC to the RAM in the sync block. After a successful download, the factory bootstrap code will programme the flash EPROM with the new operational code and then start running the operational code in RAM.
Sync control
The sync block is controlled via the parallel interface to the main processor section. The main processor will control the following functions of the sync block: S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Selection of loop mode. The sync circuit will automatically change modes but it is possible for the main processor to override this. Selection of loop reference source. Phase detector mode selection. Reading and preloading of reference counter values. Reading of GSM frame number counter. Reading/loading GSM superframe number counter. Definition of divisor for extracted clocks. Real time clock reading/loading, and definition of tick source. Selection of re-sync strobe source. Setting of lock duration time.
The sync circuit will interrupt the main processor (if enabled) on the following events: Changes in loop operating mode. Loss of selected reference source. When a new calibration value is available for the long term average calculation. Every 1 second pulse from the GPS receiver. sync circuit watchdog timeouts. Illegal phase detector settings.
All interrupts can be enabled/disabled.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 917
GMR-01
Sync block
GSM-105-323
Sync memory
The sync block has two blocks of memory: S Boot flash - 256 kB of Flash EPROM which is used to store the Factory bootstrap code and Operational code. The bootstrap code will establish the (HDLC) code load channel to the main processor section, the main processor section will then query the sync function for validity of the operational code. If the query results in the requirements for a download of new operational code the bootstrap code will facilitate the down load with the main processor section and then copy the new operational code into the boot flash. The new code can then be executed in SRAM. The factory Bootstrap code cannot be changed. SRAM - 512 kB of SRAM, 25 ns. The SRAM is used to execute the Operational code, this code provides the full functionality for the sync block.
Processor parallel interface

The sync circuit will provide a set of registers to the main processor for control and monitoring of the sync function.
Features controlled by the main processor

The following features will be controllable from the main processor: S Selection of loop mode. The sync circuit will automatically change modes, once it is instructed to load to a reference, but it is possible for the main processor to override this. Selection of loop reference source. Phase detector mode selection. Reading and preloading of reference counter values. Reading of GSM frame number counter. Reading/loading GSM superframe number counter. Definition of divisor for extracted clocks. Real Time clock reading/loading, and definition of tick source. Selection of re-sync strobe source. Setting of lock duration time.
S S S S S S S S S
GSM counters
The main processing section will interface to an erasable programmable logic device (EPLD)/field programmable gate array (FPGA) providing GSM specific counters. These will be clocked by the sync function. The interface to the registers will be provided by a 16 bit parallel port. The following counters are provided: S S GSM frame incremented every 4.615 ms, range 0 - 1325. GSM superframe incremented every 6.12 s, range 0 - 2047.
These counters will be provided by the sync functional block. Both counters will be readable, the superframe counter will also be writeable. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 918
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Sync block
Events causing a main processor interrupt

The sync circuit will interrupt the main processor on the following events: S S S S S Changes in loop operating mode. Loss of selected reference source. Every 1 second pulse from the GPS receiver. Sync circuit watchdog timeouts. Illegal phase detector settings.
All interrupts can be enabled/disabled.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 919
GMR-01
Man machine interface management
GSM-105-323
Man machine interface management

Function
The MMI process receives commands from the operator, parses the commands (using library routines from the Exec), and generates messages to procedures that are able to execute commands. The MMI process also returns responses from these procedures to the operator in a human readable format. The MMI process also registers to receive events and alarms and displays these on any attached terminal. The MMI process is created on every MCU has a TTY port to which an operator terminal may be attached. The MMI Process interfaces with the TTY terminal through the Serial DLSP. From the terminal, the operator may log into the MMI process on the MCU to which the terminal is attached. The operator may also log in remotely from the BSC to any BTS site in the BSS and remotely log in from any BTS to the controlling BSC. This capability is supported by the TTY DLSP and by the Serial DLSP in M-Cell. The OMC operator may utilize the full set of capabilities offered by the MMI process by performing a remote login from the OMC to the desired site. Based upon the command input by the operator, the MMI process determines what procedure executes the command. Most commands, including all configuration management related commands, are routed to the BSC, while device management commands are routed to the affected site.
MMI availability
MMI is available at: S S OMC. All BSS sites.
Remote login availability

Remote log is available from: S S S BSC to any BTS site. One MMI process to another at the same site. BTS to controlling BSC.
MMI functional block diagram

Figure 9-5 shows the MMI process interfaces with serial DLSP at M-Cell BTS(s)
MCU COUNT REF
Figure 9-5 MMI functional block diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 920
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Security management
Security management
Function
Security Management refers to controlling access to the BSS operations and maintenance related commands and functionality. The system design places the bulk of responsibility for security management with the OMC, since it is the OMC which is the primary vehicle for accessing operations and maintenance functionality. At the BSS, access is controlled for operations and maintenance commands by the TTY DLSP (MCU). There are three security levels; levels two and three have password access.
Level 1
Access is provided to commands that may be used to display data or status information. Commands that may be used to modify the behaviour or configuration of the system are barred.
Level 2
All commands are available to the user. This includes commands that modify the behaviour or change the configuration of the system.
Level 3
The same access is allowed as in Level 2 but in addition access is allowed to the executive monitor (EMON) prompt. The EMON is intended for developer debugging access.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 921
GMR-01
Network interface unit (NIU)
GSM-105-323

Function
The network interface unit (NIU) module provides the functionality required to terminate the network. This function is separated from the MCU due to the wide variety of interfaces that can be provided. The MCU controls the NIUs provision of network interface configuration and supervision. A local microcontroller is provided for network interface configuration and supervision. This is controlled by the MCU. Each MCU communicates with the NIU microcontroller using timeslot 0 of MCU link 1. The local microcontroller maintains two independent links in the redundant configuration (one to each MCU). The NIU provides an E1 or T1 interface into the network as well as LAPD encoding/decoding and clock recovery from a selected E1/T1 link. In the future a number of other interfaces may be offered such as; primary rate ISDN, HDSL, fibre optic.
Requirements
The cabinet may contain up to two NIU modules in each mBCU cage. An NIU in slot 0 of the mBCU supports two E1/T1 links. An NIU in slot 1 of the mBCU supports one E1/T1 link.
Location
The NIU modules are fitted in the mBCU cage.
NIU module view diagram

Figure 9-6 shows an NIU module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR NIU 1 (GREEN) LED
NIU 2 (RED) LED
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH
Figure 9-6 NIU module view. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 922
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
NIU functional diagram

Figure 9-7 identifies the functional blocks in the NIU:
BACKPLANE CONNECTORS
RS232 RESET SWITCH Reset CONNECTION
BDM RED LED GREEN LED CONTROL PROCESSOR CONNECTION
DATA DRAM ADDRESS XTAL
FLASH EEPROM REDUNDANT LINK 0 REDUNDANT LINK 1 TO MCU MAIN LINK 0

TIME SLOT MULTIPLEXOR
MUX DEMUX
LINK 1
FRAMER PMCSIERRA
LIU
NETWORK LINK 0 EXTRACTED CLOCK 0 2.048 MHz REF 6.12 s REF 125 ms REF 2.048 MHz EXTRACTED CLOCK 1 2.048 MHz
PMCSIERRA FRAMER LIU
NETWORK LINK 1
Figure 9-7 NIU functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 923
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Processing section overview

The processing section comprises a MC68360 microcontroller with 1 Mbyte DRAM and 512 kbytes Flash EPROM. The processor interfaces to the TS0 of one of the two serial streams sourced from each connected MCU.
Processor
The processing section utilises the 68360 processor. This processor provides integrated features such that it requires little peripheral support.
DRAM
The 68360 is provided with 1 Mbyte of DRAM as a 32 bit port. The memory performance is 1 wait state at 25 MHz.
Flash EPROM
The processor section implements 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM as a 16 bit port. S With the GSR3 software release, this is used for boot code and operational code storage. Performance is not critical, as code is not executed directly from the Flash EPROM, except immediately after boot. With the GSR4 software release and later releases, this is used for boot code and operational code storage. Code is executed directly from the Flash EPROM.
TTY Port
The processing section provides two TTY ports for lab debugging purposes only. These ports do not support hardware handshaking.
Redundant links
RSL and control information are handled from the redundant links 0 or 1, depending on which MCU link is active.
Tech. 924
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Front panel indicators

The NIU provides two front panel LEDs, one green and one red, which are directly controllable by the on board processor. The NIU status is indicated by the two LEDs, as detailed in Table 9-2: Table 9-2 NIU status LEDs. Red LED Off Off Flashing Green LED Off On Flashing Status NIU not powered up or in reset cycle Normal operation* NIU undergoing system code download
*Both LEDs will initially be lit, the red LED will extinguish after approximately twenty seconds to indicate normal operation. This period may be increased to 50 seconds for a reboot following a code download.
Electronic ID
Electronic board ID is supported by the slow Flash memory (the non-volatile data bank). The NIU provides EID facilities which store the following information: S S Board Serial Number - 16 bytes. Board Kit Number - 16 bytes.
Clocks
The processor is supplied with a clock from a local crystal oscillator module. This module provides an output enable pad for test purposes. The Framer devices also have their own crystal oscillator modules. The Framers extract a 2.048 MHz clock signal which is then passed to the MCU. The Framers are also provided with a 125 ms frame reference from the selected master MCU.
Resets
The processor is capable of soft resetting itself. The front panel reset causes a hard reset of the entire board. A local power-on reset circuit is provided. This provides a local reset based on the power supply tolerance. The MCU is able to reset the NIU via a message on the HDLC link only.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 925
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Line interface/framing sections

The PMC-Sierra PM6341 E1XC and PM4341 T1XC devices are used for the E1 and T1 implementations. The NIU layout is common to both E1 and T1, the only differences being in the PMC-Sierra devices, associated crystal oscillators and line matching resistor values. The framers provide the decoded and jitter attenuated receive data, for passing to the MCU board. Each framer provides a 2.048 MHz extracted clock signal, which is passed onto the MCU synchronization circuit. At the MCU, one of the incoming signals is used to phase lock a local 16.384 MHz clock signal. Once phase locked, three reference clock signals are produced ie. a REF 2.048 MHz clock signal, a REF 6.12 s clock signal and a REF 125 ms clock signal. These clock signals are then passed onto the NIU . The transmit and receive framing is controlled by a 125 ms reference pulse received from the MCU.
Distance measurement
The NIU provides the ability to perform network distance measurement on either of the two network links. Measurement can only be performed on one link at a time. Three modes of operation are possible: S Mode 1. A pattern is transmitted in a selected network timeslot and the corresponding receive timeslot is monitored for its return. The delay is measured to an accuracy of 488 ns. The pattern is transmitted on the 6.12 s reference signal. Mode 2. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When received the pattern is transmitted back in the next frame. The time between receipt and transmittal of the pattern is measured to an accuracy of 488 ns. Mode 3. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When it is detected a strobe is generated to the MCU sync circuit.
Tech. 926
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Radio signalling links

The radio signalling links (RSL) to the BSC from the main processor on the MCU are 64 kbit/s LAPD links. The MCU does not perform the LAPD encoding of the RSL link data. This is performed on the NIU by the NIU processor. The NIU will support a maximum of two RSL links. The RSL links may both be on a single network link or shared between the two network links. The RSL links from the MCU must be sent to the NIU as follows : S RSL link 1 is embedded in the NIU control link, that is, it will be in timeslot 0 of link 0 to the NIU. NOTE When the NIU is on a network link to a BSC, the RSL can be placed on either line on any timeslot other than zero. S RSL link 2 can be placed on a timeslot and linked differently from that used for the network connection.
The NIU hardware supports switching for 64 k and 16 k LAPD channels.
T1 NIU
A T1 link line consists of 24 timeslots as opposed to an E1 link lines 32 timeslots. A T1 link generates specific T1 alarms, referred to as Red alarms. A T1 NIU will support the same MSI type of device transitions as the existing E1 NIU. A T1 NIU can not be set to an E1 NIU and vice versa. The link type of a site is set by the operator. In ROM it is set by a ROM only MMI command. In RAM it is a database parameter set by a chg_element command. The operator should set the link type or it will default the site to an E1 system. The RSL default timeslots are the same for a T1 NIU as a E1 NIU. The basic mechanism for communicating and configuring a T1 NIU will be the same as is present on a E1 NIU.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 927
GMR-01
CIM/BIM-NIU - E1/T1 mapping
GSM-105-323
CIM/BIM-NIU - E1/T1 mapping

Overview
The network interfaces (E1/T1 links) connect to the top of the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet and terminates on a CIM or BIM board. The CIM/BIM board connected to MS0 is connected via internal cabling to mBCU0. Backplane connector J13 (NIM), MS1 connects to mBCU1, backplane connector J13 (NIM).
NIU to T43 mapping

The M-Cell6 has two CIM boards. Each is connected to a micro BCU containing up to two NIU boards. CIM board A connects to micro BCU number 0, CIM B connects to Micro BCU number 1. Table 9-3 defines the mapping from the CIM and BIM connectors to NIU boards for the M-Cell6 cabinet. Table 9-3 CIM/BIM NIU interconnection details. T43 Network Side Connector J1 J2 J7 J8 J13 J14 V37 way D type connections (BIB) 1 2 7 8 13 14 20 21 26 27 32 33 NIU Location NIU0 - TX1 NIU0 - RX1 NIU0 - TX2 NIU0 - RX2 NIU1 - TX1 NIU1 - RX1
CIM/BIM-NIU interconnection diagram

Figure 9-8 shows the CIM/BIM NIU interconnections
CIM J 1 2 NIU 0 7 8 13 14 J0 NIU 1
Figure 9-8 CIM/BIM NIU interconnection diagram Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 928
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Fibre optic extender (FOX)

Overview
The fibre optic extender (FOX) module forms an optical extender between the MCU and up to six TCUs. The FOX module provides: S S The electrical-optical interface for downlink (Tx) data. The optical-electrical interface for uplink (Rx) data.
An MCU, FOX and TCU group work together to operate as an air interface for eight logical EGSM channels, which may or may not be on the same RF frequency. The board is connected to the TCUs via bayonet connectors.
Requirements
A cabinet may contain up to two FOX modules, one for redundancy.
Location
A FOX module may be fitted in the mBCU and mBCU2 cage.
FOX module view diagram

Figure 9-9 shows a FOX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
Figure 9-9 FOX module view diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 929
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The fibre optic circuit is based on the DRIX-3 design, utilizing the HP drivers. The FOX optical link is capable of driving up to 1km.
FOX module functional diagram

Figure 9-10 shows a functional block diagram of the FOX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VIDEO AMPLIFIERS fibre OPTIC RECEIVER fibre OPTIC RECEIVER fibre OPTIC RECEIVER Rx DATA fibre OPTIC RECEIVER fibre OPTIC RECEIVER fibre OPTIC RECEIVER LOW PASS FILTER LOW PASS FILTER LOW PASS FILTER LOW PASS FILTER LOW PASS FILTER LOW PASS FILTER SCHMITT TRIGGER
C O M P A R A T O R
SCHMITT TRIGGER SCHMITT TRIGGER Rx DATA SCHMITT TRIGGER
SCHMITT TRIGGER SCHMITT TRIGGER
INVERTERS fibre OPTIC TRANSMITTER fibre OPTIC TRANSMITTER fibre OPTIC TRANSMITTER Tx DATA fibre OPTIC TRANSMITTER fibre OPTIC TRANSMITTER fibre OPTIC TRANSMITTER LINE DRIVER LINE DRIVER LINE DRIVER LINE DRIVER LINE DRIVER LINE DRIVER Tx DATA
+/ 7v Dc Regulators +/ 12v Dc
Figure 9-10 FOX module functional block diagram Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 930
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Receiver
The receiver consists of a fibre optic receiver. The output from this is passed through a low pass filter, then fed into a video amplifier.
Amplifier
The amplifier has differential inputs and outputs. Outputs are fed into an analogue voltage comparator. The output from the comparator is then fed to a schmitt trigger to give the five volt data digital pulse stream.
Transmitter
The transmitter consists firstly of an inverter, which gives the correct signal level. The output is fed to a Quad 2-input NAND 30 ohm line driver, this device can provide up to 60 mA DC current at data rates up to 125 Mbit/s.
Voltage regulators
There are two voltage regulators, these are required to give the +7 volts and 7 volts supplies used for the op-amp and the comparator.
FOX module interconnection diagram

Figure 9-11 shows the FOX configuration details:
T C U
2
T C U
2
T C U
2
T C U
2
T C U
2
T C U
2
M C U
F O X
mBCU
TCU - FOX= Fibre optic link FOX - MCU Backplane
Figure 9-11 FOX interconnection

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 931
GMR-01
Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX)
GSM-105-323

Overview
The fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) module is required to multiplex six full-duplex TCU links onto a single fibre link, and demultiplex a single fibre link to six full-duplex TCU links. The FMUX has two modes of operation: S S Working in conjunction with the MCU to multiplex TCU links to/from an extension cabinet. Operating in the extension cabinet in conjunction with a FOX to supply the TCUs in that cabinet.
Requirements
The cabinet may contain up to three FMUX modules in each mBCU cage.
Location
The FMUX modules are fitted in the mBCU cage only.
FMUX module view diagram

Figure 9-12 shows an FMUX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER FMUX IN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER FMUX IN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE
Figure 9-12 FMUX module view diagram.
Tech. 932
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
The FMUX module has three slots in the mBCU cage to allow extension of TCU links to remote cabinets using a minimum number of fibre links. The FMUX module is able to multiplex more than six full duplex TCU links onto a single 16.384 Mbit/s fibre optic link. The FMUX is also be used to terminate a TCU link when interfacing TCUs to a current generation BTS.
FMUX functional diagram

Figure 9-13 is a block diagram of the FMUX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
Rx DATA
FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER
MANCHESTER ENCODED
6 F/O Tx Rx MUX / DEMUX 2:1 SELECT 6
ELECTRICAL TO FOX
ELECTRICAL TO MCU
TXD, Ths, RXD, RxF
Tx DATA
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMITTER
SELECT CONTR (FROM MCU
Figure 9-13 FMUX module functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 933
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
FMUX interconnection diagram

Figure 9-14 details the FMUX interconnections. The multiplexer/demultiplexer can support up to six TCU links. It uses a 16.384 Mbit/s Manchester encoded serial data link organized as 256 x eight bit timeslots in a 125 ms frame.
MCU
FMUX
FMUX
FOX
FOX
6 TCUs
6 TCUs
Figure 9-14 FMUX interconnection diagram.
Frame boundary
The frame boundary is indicated by a violation of the Manchester coding scheme. This occurs at the point where the individual TCU links timeslot zero occurs, so that the corrupted data is known, and can be regenerated at the far end.
Optical link maximum length

The FMUX optical link is capable of driving up to 1 km.
Tech. 934
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
System restrictions
This scheme imposes the following system restrictions: 1. 2. All TCUs connected via an FMUX must be co-located and connected by similar length fibre optic cables. The mBCU does not switch off the distance measurement function for these TCU links. However, the MCU main processor must apply the distance measurement delay from one of the links to all links connected to that FMUX. In position FMUX 0 in the mBCU cage, the FMUX will drive a FOX rather than the MCU itself. This ensures that an MCU is not required at the remote end of an FMUX to FMUX link. NOTE Some earlier versions of the FMUX have been found to cause extension cabinet TCU alarms. This problem has been rectified, so that from revision BBD onwards, it is not necessary to replace FMUX cards if they do not cause these alarm faults.
3.
FMUX connections diagram

Figure 9-15 shows the FMUX connection details:
M-Cell6 BTS M-Cell6 BTS M-Cell6 BTS
1 Km Max FMUX 0 FMUX 0 FMUX 1
1 Km Max FMUX 0
MCU
FOX
FOX
FOX
6 TCUs
6 TCUs
6 TCUs
Figure 9-15 FMUX connections diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 935
GMR-01
MicroBCU redundancy
GSM-105-323
MicroBCU redundancy
mBCU architecture functional diagram
Figure 9-16 shows mBCU architecture with redundancy links connected:
NETWORK CONNECTION MICRO BCU NETWORK CONNECTION MICRO BCU
NIU
NIU
NIU
NIU
J30
J30
MCU
J31
J31
MCU
FMUX FOX FOX
FMUX
To TCUs
To FMUX/FOX
To TCUs
To FMUX/FOX
Figure 9-16 mBCU architecture with redundancy links functional block diagram.
MCU redundancy
An M-Cell6 site can support two MCUs (BTPs), with the second MCU providing MCU redundancy. If the master MCU fails the slave MCU will become the master, after the reset has occurred. The operator can initiate a master/slave MCU swap.
NIU redundancy
S S S NIUs poll both MCUs for a clock source. NIUs lock to first available clock source. NIUs configured to master MCU clock. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 936
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
MicroBCU redundancy
TCU redundancy
The following is the TCU redundancy sequence: S S S TCUs poll MCUs for master. TCUs configured by master MCU. Detection of incorrect wiring.
TCU redundancy functional diagram

Figure 9-17 shows TCU redundancy configuration:
E1 LINKS 1/2 7/8 13/14
NIU
NIU
J30
MCU MCU
J31
TO REDUNDANT MCU
2 2
2 x TCU
OPTION 2
FOX
FMUX
OPTION 1
TO REDUNDANT FOX/MCU
TO REDUNDANT FMUX
6 x TCU
FMUX
OPTION 3
Figure 9-17 TCU redundancy configuration functional block diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 937
GMR-01
MicroBCU power supply module
GSM-105-323

Overview
This section describes the mBCU power supply module (BPSM) used in the micro base station unit (mBSU) backplane, and provides adequate operating power for all modules in a mBSU cage. The BPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet +27 V dc input power to the following dc outputs: S S S S +3.3 V 1 % at 10 A (full-load current) +5 V 2 % at 10 A (full-load current). +12 V 5 % at 4 A (full-load current). 12 V 5 % at 2 A (full-load current).
During normal operation, with all the outputs within their regulation limits a green LED, located on the front panel is illuminated. No alarms are generated by the BPSM and no redundancy is present in a single cage. Redundancy is achieved by the addition of a duplicated mBSU cage.
Requirements
The mBCU cage must contain a BPSM.
Location
The BPSM is fitted in the mBCU cage.
BPSM module view diagram

Figure 9-18 shows a BPSM:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
Figure 9-18 BPSM view diagram. Technical Description: M-Cell6 68P02901W87-B
Tech. 938
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
Regulated supply
Regulated dc sources are applied to the backplane to power BSU cage modules.
Monitor circuits
Internal BPSM circuits monitor the +3.3 V, +5 V, +12 V and 12 V outputs for the following purposes: S S S Output voltage regulation. Over-voltage protection - provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1 to 1.2 times the rated output. Over-current protection - maximum output current is limited within the following limits: 1.1 to 1.8 times full-load rating of +3.3 V output. 1.1 to 1.8 times full-load rating of +5 V output. 1.25 to 2 times full-load rating of +12 V and 12 V outputs.
Circuit protection
The following is additional internal BPSM circuit protection: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection - to prevent BPSM damage, has an input series diode that blocks reverse voltages. Thermal protection - if the BPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level, the BPSM shuts down. Normal BPSM operation resumes after temperature returns to a safe level. A 10 A fuse is located near the backplane connector.
LED display
An active (Green) LED mounted on the front of the BPSM indicates on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.

31st May 01
68P02901W87-B
Tech. 939
GMR-01
GSM-105-323
LED display functional diagram

Figure 9-19 shows a functional diagram of the LED display:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+5 V) VOUT (+12 V) VOUT (12 V)
GREEN LED
VOUT (3.3 V)
VIN (+27 V)
Figure 9-19 LED display functional diagram.
Tech. 940
31st May 01
GMR-01
CAT 423: CHAPTER 1 M-CELL6 GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION
CAT 423: CHAPTER 2 M-CELL6 SITE PREPARATION
CAT 423: CHAPTER 3 M-CELL6 NORMAL INSTALLATION
CAT 423: CHAPTER 4 M-CELL6 INSTALLATION WITH ADDITIONAL CABINET
CAT 423: CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION WITH BATTERY BOX
CAT 423: CHAPTER 6 NORMAL COMMISSIONING
CAT 423: CHAPTER 7 INDOOR AC COMMISSIONING
Category 423
Installation & Configuration
Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Category 423 Installation & Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Field tool kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torxdriver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test lead connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 12 12 12 12 13 14 15 15 16 16
Equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 17 Maintenance equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 17 Materials required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 17

Pre-installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac BTS site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before departure to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrival at all sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at occupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at unoccupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving site during work periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refuse disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access with maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access without maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 23 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 29

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base site structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fall of potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.8% Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope method testing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting an outdoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet plinth diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
210 210 210 210 210 210
Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 213 Inst. 213 Inst. 214 Inst. 214 Inst. 214 Inst. 215
Preparing for mounting an indoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 216 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 216 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 216 Preparing for mounting an indoor ac BTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 217 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 217 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 217

General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
31 31 31 31 32 33 33 34 35 36 37 38
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the side cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the ancillary cabinet and HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the BTS cabinet and HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting additional BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting additional BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting single-phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the main isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting three-phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the main isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting antennas to indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 BTS top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 BTS top panel configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 and PCS1900 BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting antennas to outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS top panel alternative configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU DIL switch setting for extended cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a 2 cabinet 4/4/4 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a 3 cabinet 8/6/4 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 314 Inst. 314 Inst. 315 Inst. 316 Inst. 318 Inst. 319 Inst. 319 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 321 Inst. 322 Inst. 322 Inst. 323 Inst. 323 Inst. 323 Inst. 324 Inst. 324 Inst. 324 Inst. 325 Inst. 326 Inst. 326 Inst. 326 Inst. 327 Inst. 327 Inst. 327 Inst. 327 Inst. 328 Inst. 328 Inst. 328 Inst. 329 Inst. 330 Inst. 330 Inst. 330 Inst. 331 Inst. 332 Inst. 333 Inst. 335 Inst. 335 Inst. 335 Inst. 336 Inst. 338 Inst. 341 Inst. 341 Inst. 341 Inst. 342 Inst. 342 Inst. 343 Inst. 343

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Setting the alarm board switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the intercabinet fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/output device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay-closure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry-contact inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX with Krone interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Krone box output details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX without Krone interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector pinout details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power input modules location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing CPSM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and connecting TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing/connecting the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connection panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connection panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 345 345 345 345 346 346 347 348 349
Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 351 Inst. 351 Inst. 352 Inst. 353 Inst. 354 Inst. 356 Inst. 356 Inst. 356 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 358 Inst. 358 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 360 Inst. 362 Inst. 363 Inst. 364 Inst. 365 Inst. 365 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 366 366 366 367
Inst. 368 Inst. 368 Inst. 368 Inst. 368 Inst. 369 Inst. 370 Inst. 370 Inst. 371
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-connection checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting ac power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting glass fibre cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect bus board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBB board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBB connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power distribution diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single/three phase linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cabling thermal properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet earthing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor side cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main earth busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet earthing plate diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 372 Inst. 372 Inst. 372 Inst. 372 Inst. 373 Inst. 373 Inst. 373 Inst. 374 Inst. 374 Inst. 375 Inst. 375 Inst. 378 Inst. 378 Inst. 378 Inst. 379 Inst. 380 Inst. 381 Inst. 382 Inst. 382 Inst. 383 Inst. 384 Inst. 385 Inst. 385 Inst. 385 Inst. 386 Inst. 387 Inst. 387 Inst. 387 Inst. 387 Inst. 388 Inst. 389 Inst. 391 Inst. 391 Inst. 391 Inst. 391 Inst. 392 Inst. 392 Inst. 393 Inst. 393 Inst. 394 Inst. 394 Inst. 394 Inst. 394 Inst. 394
General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
41 41 42 42 42

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
vii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor BTS ac cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting M-Cell6 indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cell6 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
43 43 44 45 46 47 47 47 48
Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 410 Inst. 410 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 412 Inst. 413 Inst. 413
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 414 Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 414 Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 414 Installing the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the ac power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker ac connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinets and battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment and battery box external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing and front cabinet power and earth cable setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cable fixings diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cabinet power cable set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: rear view internal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the top panel additional cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 416 Inst. 416 Inst. 417 Inst. 417 Inst. 418 Inst. 419 Inst. 419 Inst. 419 Inst. 420 Inst. 421 Inst. 422 Inst. 423 Inst. 424 Inst. 424 Inst. 425 Inst. 426 Inst. 427 Inst. 428 Inst. 428
viii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Chapter 5 M-Cell6 installation with battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
51 51 52 52 52
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
ix
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac cabinet and battery box view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet cable set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac cabinet cable fixings diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinet for the ac cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker ac connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 514 Inst. 514 Inst. 514 Inst. 515 Inst. 516 Inst. 517 Inst. 518 Inst. 519 Inst. 519 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 521 Inst. 521 Inst. 522 Inst. 522 Inst. 523 Inst. 524 Inst. 524 Inst. 524 Inst. 525
M-Cell6 commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 61 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 61 Pre-power up electrical checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory certificate of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirmation of ac supply type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth bonding checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main equipment earths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCD functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up an outdoor (ac) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet circuit breaker location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet power distribution panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 65 65
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Power-up an indoor (dc) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet power supply location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post initialisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample form 1: Request for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample form 2: Completion and inspection form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 612 Inst. 612 Inst. 612 Inst. 613 Inst. 614 Inst. 615 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 617 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 619 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 621 Inst. 622 Inst. 622 Inst. 622 Inst. 623 Inst. 623 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 625 Inst. 626 Inst. 628

M-Cell6 indoor ac commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory certificate of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up a M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of M-Cell6 indoor ac indoor BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP circuit breakers diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box circuit breaker and fuse designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Inst. 71 Inst. 71 Inst. 71 Inst. 72 Inst. 72 Inst. 73 Inst. 73 Inst. 74 Inst. 74 Inst. 75 Inst. 75 Inst. 76 Inst. 77 Inst. 78 Inst. 78 Inst. 79 Inst. 710

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
xi
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
xii
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 1
M-Cell6 general installation information

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 11 Field tool kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torxdriver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test lead connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 12 12 12 12 13 14 15 15 16 16
Equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 17 Maintenance equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 17 Materials required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 17

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Introduction
Introduction
Scope
This category (GSM-106-423) covers installation and commissioning for the M-Cell6
BTS units arranged in the following chapters: Chapter 1 Introduction
General information and an overview about the different M-Cell configurations available plus information about tool kits needed to install the equipment.
Chapter 2
Site Preparation
The procedures to be followed for initially preparing the site and installing the necessary ducting and plinths for outdoor units.
Chapter 3
Normal installation
Installing M-Cell6 equipment (both indoor and outdoor).
Chapter 4 box box Chapter 5
Installation with additional equipment cabinet and battery
Installing M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS with additional equipment cabinet and battery
Installation with battery box under M-Cell6
Installing M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS with battery box under M-Cell6
Chapter 6
Normal commissioning
Details of commissioning procedures for M-Cell6 BTS (indoor and outdoor).
Chapter 7
Indoor ac commissioning
Details of commissioning procedures for M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS. NOTE For hardware optimization and base site integration, refer to Installation and Configuration BSS Optimization 68P02901W43-F.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 11
GMR-01
Field tool kits
GSM-105-423
Field tool kits

Overview
This section details the tools recommended for installing and commissioning M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety items
Table 1-1 details the safety items which should be carried by all engineers: Table 1-1 Toolkit - safety items. Quantity 1 1 pair 1 pack 1 pair 1 1 1 Safety helmet Safety goggles Dust masks Ear defenders Antistatic wrist strap and coiled lead Antistatic mat Torch Item
Commissioning tools
Table 1-2 details the tools required for commissioning M-Cell6 equipment: Table 1-2 Commissioning toolkit. Quantity 1 set 1 set 1 1 1 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 1 pair 1 set 1 set 1 1 1 pair Item Flat blade screwdrivers Crosspoint screwdrivers Tamper-proof screwdriver T25 Hexagon screwdriver M6 Screw-grippng driver Wire cutters Side cutters 150mm Snipe nose pliers Insulated torque wrench General purpose serrated jaw pliers Torxdrivers T10/T20/T30 Allen keys metric/AF Krone insertion tool Knife with retractable blade Straight point tweezers
Inst. 12
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Field tool kits
Quantity 1 pair 1 sheet 1 1 1 1 1 1 Industrial scissors Fine-grade sandpaper Paint brush Soft brush Soft cloth
Item
Soldering iron and solder Heat shrink gun and sleeving Marker pen
Installation tools
In addition to the items listed in Table 1-2, Table 1-3 details the additional tools required for M-Cell6 installation: Table 1-3 Installation toolkit Quantity 1 1 1 1 set 1 1 1 1 1 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Large hammer drill Twin socket extension lead 6m M20 masonry bit Drill bits 0.5-12mm Socket set metric/1/2in drive Adjustable spanner 200mm Adjustable spanner 250mm Ratchet spanner 12mm Torque wrench 10-200Nm Combination pliers 200mm Heavy duty side cutters 150mm Cable shears 50mm Cable stripper BT2002 Hand crimp tool 50mm Type 43 connector crimp tool Telephone plug crimp tool 50mm crimp tool BNC crimp tool with inserts Tape measure 10m Steel rule 300mm Spirit level 1000mm Junior hacksaw and replacement blades Cable tie gun Claw hammer Item

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 13
GMR-01
Field tool kits
GSM-105-423
Torxdriver settings
Torxdriver tools are pre-set to their own specific torque setting. The torxdriver tools used in this document, and their respective torque settings are shown in Table 1-4: Table 1-4 Torque settings Torxdriver Size T10 (M3) T20 (M4) T30 (M6) 13 mm socket (M8) 16 mm socket (M10) 17 mm socket 19 mm socket Note: Torque Setting 1.0 Nm 2.2 Nm 3.4 Nm or 5 Nm* 5.0 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm
The 3.4 Nm or 5.0 Nm torque settings for M6 screws depends on the location of the screw. Refer to specific information in the manual text.
Inst. 14
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Test equipment
Test equipment
Overview
This section details the test equipment required for installation and commissioning M-Cell6 equipment: Table 1-5 details the M-Cell6 test equipment Table 1-5 Test equipment Quantity 1 Description IBM compatible 486 DX2 or DX4 portable personal computer (PC). Comments The minimum requirements are: TFT colour screen. 170 Mbyte hard drive. Minimum 4 Mbyte RAM, 8 Mbyte recommended. 3.5 inch floppy drive. Serial port. CD-ROM drive. PCMCIA (Type 2) compatible slot. Windows 3.1 or higher. Battery power. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Commercial terminal emulator software Signal generator Rubidium standard Frequency counter Digital multimeter (must be sensitive enough to measure 0.1 Ohms) RF 50 ohm dummy load ESD protection kit N to 716 adaptor N to N adaptor RF wattmeter with 2.5W, 5W, 10W 25W and 50W elements 2 meter N to N male coaxial cable 4 meter N to N male coaxial cable Cable kit SWKN6753A Type 43 loop-back cables, 23 cm (9 in) long BIB loop-back plug Resistance tester Insulation and earth tester Bird model 43P or equivalent Must be calibrated Must be calibrated Contains 3086240N01 Cable and 5886540N01 Thor adapter Hewlett Packard E2378A or equivalent 50 W minimum Minimum accuracy 1 x 1010 PC PLUS or similar software

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 15
GMR-01
Test equipment
GSM-105-423
Calibration requirements
Calibration of test equipment
Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing Motorola Cellular Base Stations. All test equipment must be calibrated annually by a recognized laboratory.
Calibration of test leads

Calibrate all test leads before using them in the procedures given or referred to in this manual to minimize variations in test results. Do not try to calibrate test equipment or test leads in the field.
Test lead connection diagram

Figure 1-1 shows the cable for PC to service point control (SPC) or PC to remotely tuned channel combiner (RTC) connection:
PIN NUMBER PIN NUMBER
2 3 5 4 6 7 8
4 m LONG SCREENED CABLE TO PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT 9 WAY D-TYPE F
3 2 7
TO TCU CONNECTOR 9 WAY D-TYPE M
Figure 1-1 9-way to 9-way test cable
Inst. 16
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Equipment and materials
Maintenance equipment
In addition to the tools and test gear, the following equipment may also be required: Table 1-6 Maintenance equipment Quantity 1 1 pair 1 1 1 1 Maintenance tent Aluminium step ladder (minimum 2m) High pressure air line Thermometer Variable resistive load frame (30V dc 200A) Vacuum cleaner Item
Materials required
This list contains the materials which may also be required when installing an indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 Base Transceiver Station (BTS): S S S S S S S Degreasing agent Light grease Rembrandt EP2. Lubricant WD40. Medium machine oil. Mild detergent. No-oxide grease. Paint (5-bottle maintenance kit). Bottle 1 3 : Ral 7021; Ral 7044; Ral 9002 (recommended paint types). Bottle 4 : Accelerator for paint. Bottle 5 : Degreaser. S S S S S S Petroleum jelly. PH-neutral soap/water solution. Solvent. Water (clean and de-ionized). Gasket/seal kit for doors, panels, covers etc. Permabond C791 Cyanoacrylate Adhesive (Hi-speed glue).

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 17
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 18
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 2
M-Cell6 site preparation

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Pre-installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac BTS site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before departure to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrival at all sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at occupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at unoccupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving site during work periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refuse disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access with maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access without maintenance tent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base site structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fall of potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.8% Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope method testing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for mounting an outdoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the plinth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet plinth diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 23 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 29
210 210 210 210 210 210
Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 211 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 212 Inst. 213 Inst. 213 Inst. 214 Inst. 214 Inst. 214 Inst. 215

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Preparing for mounting an indoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 216 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 216 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 216 Preparing for mounting an indoor ac BTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 217 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 217 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 217
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Pre-installation requirements
Pre-installation requirements
Overview
This chapter contains information that should be read, and procedures to be followed, to prepare the site before beginning the actual installation.
Pre-installation procedures
Table 2-1 details M-Cell6 pre-installation and the relevant sections: Table 2-1 Pre-installation information. Section Site requirements and considerations Power supply requirements Visiting the site Preparing the site Earthing the site Preparing the foundation Description Details mechanical and structural parameters to be taken into account when selecting an M-Cell site. Details what the power requirements are for M-Cell equipment. Defines the site operating procedures. Details general site construction parameters. Earthing techniques. Details the procedures for laying the foundations for M-Cell equipment and fitting the plinth.
Torque values
Use the torque values listed in Table 2-2 when installing M-Cell equipment. Table 2-2 Recommended torque values. Size M3 M4 M6 M8 (13 mm socket) M10 (16 mm socket) M12 17 mm socket 19 mm socket NOTE * The setting of the torque value is determined on local conditions. Refer to the manufacturers data for correct values. Rawlplug Technical Advisory Service Tel. +44 (0)141 638 7961 ** These torque values are dependent on the location of the screw/bolt in the cabinet. Torque Values 1.1 Nm 2.2 Nm 3.4 Nm or 5 Nm (see Note ** below) 5 Nm 3.4 Nm or 5 Nm (see Note ** below) (see Note * below) (see Note * below) (see Note * below)

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 21
GMR-01
Site requirements
GSM-105-423
Site requirements
Overview
The base site area, where the M-Cell6 equipment is to be installed, must meet the following structural and environmental criteria.
Cabinet weights
Cabinet floor weights are shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 MCell6 floor weights

Cabinet Indoor BTS* Outdoor BTS** Ancillary Side Heat exchanger Air conditioner Additional indoor equipment cabinet Indoor battery box Floor weight 151 kg excluding transceivers 151 kg excluding transceivers 157 kg excluding batteries 78 kg 93 kg 124 kg 35 kg excluding battery boxes 57 kg
Cabinet dimensions
The dimensions of the M-Cell6 cabinets are shown in Table 2-4:
Table 2-4 M-Cell6 dimensions

Cabinet Indoor BTS* Outdoor BTS** Ancillary Side Heat exchanger Air conditioner Additional indoor equipment cabinet Indoor battery box Additional equipment cabinet and battery box *** Height 1714 mm 1773 mm 1768 mm 1768 mm 1768 mm 1768 mm 678 mm 420 mm 1576 mm Width 710 mm 710 mm 710 mm 350 mm 710 mm 710 mm 710 mm 710 mm 710 mm Depth 470 mm 470 mm 470 mm 800 mm 330 mm 530 mm 470 mm 470 mm 530 mm
* Excluding feet, including RF equipment fitted to top panel ** Including feet *** Indicates top panel fitted.
Inst. 22
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Site requirements
Site dimensions
There must be adequate clearance at the front and rear of the equipment for operation and maintenance purposes. Figure 2-1 shows the site layout plan for the M-Cell6, with dimensions and required clearances:
note: at least 0.5 metres is required for service access. 3980 mm 200 MM MIN OPERATING FREE SPACE Possible wall 355 mm
710 mm
1,000 mm 800 mm
470 mm
1 000 mm Air conditioning unit
Top view
500 mm Cabinet doors
Heat management system Optional expansion BTS cabinet (12 carrier site) Ancillary cabinet Side cabinet 710 mm
2238 mm
BTS cabinet 1 770 mm 2480 mm
1 768 mm
1 768 mm
Side view
Front view (single indoor cabinet)
Figure 2-1 M-Cell6 site layout plan

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
710.0 mm

700 mm
Optional HMS Optional BTS cabinet HMS HMS BTS cabinet Ancillary cabinet
2710 mm
Top view (single cabinet Indoor)
Inst. 23
470 mm
Site requirements
GSM-105-423
Indoor ac BTS site dimensions

Figure 2-2 shows the site layout plan for the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS, with dimensions and required clearances:
Possible wall

470 MM
Optional BTS Cabinet BTS Cabinet Add Equip Cab & Batt Box
355 mm
355 mm
Top view
Cabinet doors
Optional expansion BTS cabinet (12 carrier site) NOTE. Up to 4 BTS can be supported making a 24 carrier site Additional Equipment Cabinet and Battery Box
710 mm
710 mm
710.0 mm 2188 mm
Top view (single cabinet Indoor)
710 MM
1576 mm
1 768 mm
420 mm BTS cabinet 1420 mm 2130 mm
Side view
Front view (single indoor cabinet)
Side view Front view (single indoor (with battery cabinet with box) battery box)
Front view
Figure 2-2 M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS site layout plan
Inst. 24
470 mm
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Site requirements
Operating environment
The operating and storage environmental limits are shown in Table 2-5 and Table 2-6:
Table 2-5 Operating environments for M-Cell6 cabinets

Type Indoor cabinet Outdoor cabinet with heat exchanger Outdoor cabinet with air conditioner Temperature 5 _C to +45 _C 33_ C to +45_ C 33 _C to +55 _C Relative humidity 5 % to 100 % 8 % to 100 % 4 % to 100 % Absolute humidity 29g water/m3 air 30g water/m3 air 30g water/m3 air
Storage environment
Table 2-6 Storage environments for M-Cell6 cabinets
Temperature 45 _C to +70 _C Relative humidity 8 % to 100 % Absolute humidity 29g water/m3 air
Power requirements
The power requirements of M-Cell6 cabinets depend on the configuration. Outdoor M-Cell6 cabinets are supplied from the factory configured to operate on three-phase 50 Hz ac supply, but can be converted to operate on a single-phase 50 Hz ac supply. M-Cell6 indoor cabinets require: either a positive or negative earth dc supply or a single or 3phase ac supply: S S S S +27 V dc negative earth (Indoor). 48 V dc isolated positive earth (Indoor). Nominal 230 V ac single phase supply (Indoor and Outdoor). 415 V ac three phase supply (Outdoor only).
The power requirements are detailed in Category 323, Chapter 2, Specifications. WARNING All cabinets and supply cables must be protected by an upstream fuse or circuit breaker.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 25
GMR-01
Visiting the site
GSM-105-423
Visiting the site

Overview
Follow the instructions provided in this section when preparing to work at a site and on arrival.
Before departure to site

Before departing to the site: 1. 2. Ensure that team members have adequate test equipment, tools, and hardware to carry out the task. Check the site folder for any special requirements. Contact the person in charge of the building to advise of the teams estimated time of arrival and expected duration on site. This will usually have been dealt with previously, but it is always advisable to ensure the information has been passed on. Check with the engineer in charge of the project to see if anything needs to be taken to the site and collect any outstanding work for the site. Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site as local regulations may change.
3. 4.
Arrival at all sites

When entering any site: 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC or MSC to announce the teams arrival. Enter the site and check for building alarms e.g. intruder alarms that may have been activated by entry. If fitted, disable the Halon gas systems, and any alarms that have been activated by entry. Read any local instructions.
Arriving at occupied sites

Contact the person in charge or caretaker of the building who will explain local regulations. This person may also advise teams on parking, rubbish removal, and canteen facilities. Be as polite and helpful as possible as colleagues may have to go back to the site at a later date.
Inst. 26
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Visiting the site
Arriving at unoccupied sites

When entering an unoccupied site: 1. 2. 3. Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC or MSC to announce the teams arrival and advise of expected duration on site. Enter the site and check for building alarms e.g. intruder alarms that may have been activated. If fitted, disable the Halon gas systems, and any alarms that have been activated by entry.
Leaving site during work periods

When leaving a site: 1. 2. 3. 4. At the end of the working day enable the Halon gas system, if fitted, and any alarms that have been disabled. Contact the local OMC or MSC to announce the teams departure. Out of hours if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC is unmanned, contact the Network Control Centre or OMC to inform them of the teams departure. Sign out of the building as necessary. NOTE Never leave vehicles parked on site overnight.
Refuse disposal
Clear refuse from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicated by the customer. WARNING Do not burn rubbish, as packaging might give off toxic gases.
Rural sites
It is the responsibility of the senior engineer to ensure that all personnel on site are aware of the country code and, especially with respect to water authority sites, any relevant health regulations. Always: S S S S S Guard against all risk of fire. Fasten all gates. Leave no litter. Drive carefully on country roads and observe speed restrictions at all times. Keep to the paths/tracks across farm land.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 27
GMR-01
Visiting the site
GSM-105-423
On site safety
Responsibilities of senior engineer
The senior engineer must: S S Advise all new staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place. Ensure that under no circumstances should anyone be permitted to move GSM cabinets without assistance. Cabinets must be safely positioned at all times.
Stop any work that you are supervising should any person in your team not be properly protected.
Responsibilities of all personnel

All personnel must: S S S S Wear supplied safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is in progress, and when local regulations require them. Wear supplied safety goggles and dust masks when drilling. This is particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork. Wear supplied ear protectors while drilling is in progress. Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. This is to prevent sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the locking edge.
Weather considerations
Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance tent for access to the outdoor M-Cell6 cabinets during inclement weather conditions. NOTE The maintenance tent is not supplied with the M-Cell6 equipment and should be provided by the customer if weather conditions require it. Installation and configuration procedures for the M-Cell6 cabinets are dependent on the weather conditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelines should be considered before commencing work: S S S No access. Access with maintenance tent. Access without maintenance tent.
Inst. 28
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Visiting the site
Access
Access should not be attempted to the cabinets during the following actual or imminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance tent: S S S Winds in excess of 25 knots. Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet. During an electrical storm.
Access with maintenance tent

Access may be made to the cabinet under the following conditions with the use of the maintenance tent: S S S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots. Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet. Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a problem.
Access without maintenance tent

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of the maintenance tent: S S S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots. No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period. When the temperature is between 30 _C to 40 _C.
Under these conditions the doors and covers of the cabinet may be opened and secured open with the mechanical stays.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 29
GMR-01
Preparing the site
GSM-105-423
Preparing the site

Overview
The following provides information on the preparation of an M-Cell6 site. The information contains a general overview of site requirements. For specific sites, refer to the site-specific documentation.
Base site structure

The base site structure should be designed to meet accepted cellular system specifications. Additionally, the site must meet the environmental and electrical operating criteria as listed in the Performance Specifications for the M-Cell6 equipment.
Site requirements
The operator should provide secure access from unauthorized personnel, ample protection from fire, and adequate lighting and clearance at the front and rear of the equipment for operation and maintenance. Minimum clearances of 500 mm to the rear and 1425 mm in front must be allowed for maintenance access. Figure 2-3 shows typical site dimensions for the M-Cell6.
Site access
The site access road and equipment receiving area must be constructed of asphalt, concrete, or other suitable load bearing aggregate capable of supporting the transportation vehicle and the M-Cell6 equipment. The recommended transportation vehicle must have a maximum axle loading of 8 tonnes per axle with four axles. The area available and overhead clearance must be sufficient to accommodate turning or reversing of a vehicle 17 m long, 2.5 m wide, and 4.1 m high. The desired turning circle is 15.25 m to allow the vehicle to depart after unloading. Ensure there is a minimum overhead clearance of 6 m to enable the M-Cell6 cabinets to be lifted from the transport vehicle. NOTE Ensure the area is clear of standing water, fallen leaves, mud, and building debris.
Site layout
The site layout plans are provided in the Site requirements and considerations section.
Inst. 210
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Earthing the site
Earthing the site

Overview
The following provides information on suggested earthing procedures for outdoor M-Cell6 site. It is assumed that for indoor installations, adequate building earths will already be in place. The separate earth systems must be isolated from each other to facilitate periodic testing of the earth systems. Earth inspection pits are provided for this purpose. Each M-Cell6 site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis as conditions will vary considerably depending on local soil conditions and site topography. It is essential that a site survey and soil resistance test be performed before installation. The site architect defines the site and foundation earthing requirements to ensure a resistance of less than 10 ohms.
Site earthing diagram

Figure 2-3 shows typical earthing arrangements for an M-Cell6 site.
EARTH CONDUCTOR INTO MCELL2/6 VIA PVC PIPE COPPER TAPE
MAST BONDING (ONE SHOWN FOR CLARITY) TEST CONNECTION INSPECTION BOX CROSS BONDING
MAST FOUNDATION METALWORK CROSS BONDING TEST CONNECTION INSPECTION BOX FOUNDATION
FOUNDATION METALWORK BONDING FOUR PLACES MINIMUM
FOUNDATION METALWORK BONDING GROUND RODS WITH INSPECTION BOXES FOR SYSTEM TEST
Figure 2-3 Site earthing plan for open field site
Earth electrode system

The earth electrode system consists of a series of interconnected earth electrodes (minimum of four) that are located outside the foundation reinforcing metalwork. Refer to Figure 2-3 for details. The earth rods should be connected together using TCO30 solid tape conductors, avoiding any sharp bends; a minimum bend radius of 250 mm is recommended.
Cross bonding
Foundation metalwork must be connected to the earth electrode network. The earth system must also be cross-bonded to an adjacent antenna mast, with two connections made between the two systems. All earth cable terminations must be crimped, clamped or welded; soldered joints are not permitted.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 211
GMR-01
Earthing the site
GSM-105-423
Earthing procedure
The M-Cell6 equipment must be earthed as detailed in this procedure. Make provision for routeing the earth cables into the site and to the cabinet before beginning installation of the system racks. Excavate the site to accommodate the foundation to a depth determined by the site architect. For the earth components to be used, refer to Figure 2-3 and proceed as follows: 1. Drive a minimum of four copper earth rods 2.4 m long below the surface, and connect these rods together with 70 mm Cross Sectional Area (CSA) solid conductor. Connect the earth rods to the cabinet earth busbar via a 70 mm CSA solid conductor. Check that the earth electrode installation resistance is less than 10 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 10 ohms, install more earth rods to bring the resistance within specification. Cross-bond the earth system to the adjacent antenna mast earth with conductors of 70 mm CSA, buried at a depth of not less than 500 mm. Bond equipment such as fences, fuel tanks, metal buildings, or steel building skids associated with the site to the closest earthing rod or bonding wire.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Earth electrode testing

Three methods of earth electrode test (earth mat) are used and should be tested as detailed in BS7671 16th. Edition (or equivalent country regulations): S S S Fall of potential. 61.8% rule. Slope method.
The method of test to be used at a specific site is determined by the site conditions, the extent of the earth system and the limitations of the site boundaries. The method used at the site is to be determined from the earth electrode compliancy certificate and repeated annually. Before proceeding with the test, ensure that the resistance of the test leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
Fall of potential
This method of testing is used for measuring resistance of earth electrodes but is only practical on single earth electrode systems. Drive the current test spike and potential spike into the ground as shown in Figure 2-4. Perform the three resistance tests and check that the average of the three tests is less than 10.0 ohms.
61.8% Rule
This method applies when the three electrodes (earth, potential and current) can be positioned in a straight line, the soil is homogenous and also when single electrode systems are being used. Set up the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-4 with the potential spike placed at a distance of 61.8% of the distance from the earth electrode to the current test spike. A greater accuracy can be achieved by increasing the number of readings. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 212
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Earthing the site
Slope method
This method applies to large earth systems. Refer to Figure 2-4 but insert the potential spike at a number of points between the earth system and the current spike. A minimum of six readings must be taken to plot a graph and this graph compared to published tables to calculate the resistance. On completion of testing, complete and sign the earth electrode test documentation (Forms of Completion and Inspection Certificate).
Slope method testing diagram

Figure 2-4 shows the method for testing earth potential using the slope method.
PAT TESTER C2 P2 C1/P1
25m
3m
(TEST 2)
3m
(TEST 3)
POTENTIAL SPIKE CURRENT TEST SPIKE
EARTH ELECTRODE
50m (TEST 1)
Figure 2-4 Earth electrode test setup

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 213
GMR-01
Preparing for mounting an outdoor BTS
GSM-105-423

Overview
The cabinet must be installed on a discrete concrete base of sufficient size to accommodate the M-Cell6 cabinet size and weight, to be determined by the structural engineer. The foundation depth is determined by a soil survey performed by the site architect, but must be of sufficient strength to withstand 120 MPH winds on the cabinet front or rear and a maximum gross weight of 1050 kgs.
Installing the plinth

The plinth (Figure 2-5) is to be installed prior to the installation of the cabinets. The metal plinth is designed to provide a flat, stable base to support the M-Cell6 cabinets. Motorola recommend the use of M16 Rawlbolts to anchor the plinth to the concrete base, and M12 setscrews to anchor the M-Cell6 cabinets to the plinth. To install the M-Cell6 plinth: WARNING An M-Cell6 plinth weighs 50 kg. Observe proper lifting precautions when handling the plinth. 1. Move the plinth to the concrete base and position it by locating it over the protruding lip of the cable duct trough, maintaining equal all-round clearance between the duct and the plinth. The gap will later be sealed with plastic sealant. WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes. CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust which is harmful to equipment and wiring. Use tarpaulin, cloth or plastic sheeting to protect the cabinets and nearby equipment. Clean up accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposing the equipment. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Using the plinth as a template, mark holes in the concrete base for the mounting anchors. Remove the plinth and drill the mounting holes. Holes should be drilled 25mm clearance and drilled to a depth of 135 mm. Fit the mounting anchors to the holes in the concrete base. Position the plinth over the holes, making sure that there is equal clearance all round the cable duct sides. Fit a bush, flat washer and bolt to each anchor and torque up the bolts according to Table 2-2. NOTE If there is to be any interval between installation of the plinth and the M-Cell6 cabinets, ensure that the blanking grommets which are factory fitted to the plinth, remain in place in all unused holes.
Inst. 214
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Cabinet plinth diagrams

Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 shows the plinth detail for the M-Cell6 cabinet:
BUSHES
Figure 2-5 M-Cell6 plinth
27 mm 40 mm
632 mm
800 mm
SIDE VIEW
1420 mm 2480 mm
530 mm
PLAN VIEW
Figure 2-6 M-Cell6 plinth dimensions

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 215
GMR-01
Preparing for mounting an indoor BTS
GSM-105-423
Preparing for mounting an indoor BTS

Overview
The type of installation procedure for an indoor M-Cell6 will depend on the type of floor construction at the intended site. If the floor is a smooth, level concrete one, the cabinets can be mounted directly onto the floor.
Procedure
If the M-Cell6 cabinets are a direct replacement for existing Motorola BTS4 or BTS6 units, the M-Cell6 cabinets can be mounted in place using the existing fixing holes, as the M-Cell6 was designed with this in mind. If the installation is a completely new one, the concrete floor must be drilled to accept the recommended Rawlbolt fixing screws. 1. 2. 3. Move the BTS to the selected mounting position. Mark the positions of the four mounting holes in the base of the cabinet. Move the BTS well away from the mounting position. WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes. CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust which is harmful to equipment and wiring. Use tarpaulin, cloth or plastic sheeting to protect the cabinets and nearby equipment. Clean up accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposing the equipment. 4. 5. 6. 7. Drill out the four holes to a depth and clearance for an M12 expansion bolt. Fit the M12 expansion bolts to the holes in the concrete base. Position the BTS over the fixing holes and fit the expansion bolts with the supplied washers through the cabinet floor. Tension up the fixing bolts and then check for alignment and level using a spirit level. When satisfied that the cabinet is correctly aligned, torque the bolts to the correct value for M12 bolts.
Inst. 216
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Preparing for mounting an indoor ac BTS.

Overview
This procedure outlines how to drill fixing positions in order that the M-Cell6 cabinets can be mounted directly into a concrete floor.
Procedure
If the M-Cell6 cabinets are a direct replacement for existing Motorola indoor BTSs, the M-Cell6 cabinets can be mounted in place using the existing fixing holes. If the installation is a completely new one, the concrete floor must be drilled to accept the recommended expansion bolts. 1. 2. 3. Move the BTS to the selected mounting position. Mark the positions of the four mounting holes in the base of the cabinet. Move the BTS well away from the mounting position. WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes. CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust which is harmful to equipment and wiring. Use tarpaulin, cloth or plastic sheeting to protect the cabinets and nearby equipment. Clean up accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposing the equipment. 4. 5. 6. Drill out the four holes to a depth and clearance for an M12 expansion bolt. Fit the M12 expansion bolts to the holes in the concrete base. If an additional equipment cabinet is to be added, repeat procedures 1 to 5, substituting master battery box for BTS. NOTE Do not secure the BTS or the master battery box to the concrete floor at this stage .

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 217
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 218
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 3
M-Cell6 normal installation

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger unit internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner unit internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the side cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the ancillary cabinet and HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the BTS cabinet and HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting additional BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting additional BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.
i
31 31 31 31 32 33 33 34 35 36 37 38
Inst. 39 Inst. 39 Inst. 39 Inst. 310 Inst. 311 Inst. 311 Inst. 311 Inst. 311 Inst. 312 Inst. 312 Inst. 312 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 313 Inst. 314 Inst. 314 Inst. 315 Inst. 316 Inst. 318 Inst. 319 Inst. 319 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 320 Inst. 321 Inst. 322 Inst. 322
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 323 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 323 Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 323 Installing power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 324 324 324 325

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting dc power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 326 Negative earth cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 326 Positive earth cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 326 Connecting single-phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the main isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting three-phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the main isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting antennas to indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 BTS top panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM900 BTS top panel configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCS1800 and PCS1900 BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting antennas to outdoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS top panel diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS top panel alternative configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IADU DIL switch setting for extended cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a 2 cabinet 4/4/4 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a 3 cabinet 8/6/4 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the alarm board switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm board diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the intercabinet fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/output device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay-closure outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry-contact inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX with Krone interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Krone box output details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX without Krone interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector pinout details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 327 327 327 327
Inst. 328 Inst. 328 Inst. 328 Inst. 329 Inst. 330 Inst. 330 Inst. 330 Inst. 331 Inst. 332 Inst. 333 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 335 335 335 336 338
Inst. 341 Inst. 341 Inst. 341 Inst. 342 Inst. 342 Inst. 343 Inst. 343 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. 344 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 345 345 345 345 346 346 347 348 349
Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 350 Inst. 351 Inst. 351 Inst. 352 Inst. 353 Inst. 354
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power input modules location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing CPSM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing and connecting TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCU-B front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing/connecting the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connection panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connection panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-connection checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting ac power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting glass fibre cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 356 Inst. 356 Inst. 356 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 357 Inst. 358 Inst. 358 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 359 Inst. 360 Inst. 362 Inst. 363 Inst. 364 Inst. 365 Inst. 365 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 366 366 366 367

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
General installation information

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install M-Cell6 equipment cabinets and their internal and external interfaces. NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of such equipment include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to site-specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with non-Motorola equipment. Before starting an installation, ensure the site has been prepared according to the description in Chapter 2 of this manual and the site-specific documentation. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. GSM1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.
2.048 Mbit/s line testing

If a 2.048 Mbit/s line has been provided, contact the local mobile switching centre (MSC) at the earliest opportunity to test the line.
Torque values
Use the torque values listed in GSM-106-423, Chapter 2, Table 2-2 when installing M-Cell6 equipment.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 31
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installation steps
Installing the M-Cell6 equipment comprises the sections listed in Table 3-1. Table 3-1 Installation details Section Description
General information about how the M-Cell Equipment delivery and packaging equipment is packaged and delivered to the customer site. Unpacking the cabinet Mounting M-Cell6 cabinets Earthing and transient protection Power distribution unit Top panel connections Interconnect bus board Power and earth cabling Cabinet earthing points Installing power and earth cabling Connecting antennas Control signal cabling Installing power supply modules Installing TCU modules Installing batteries Connecting the HMS/air conditioner Connecting input power Describes how to unpack the equipment. Complete procedures for physically mounting an M-Cell6 cabinet. Details site earthing procedures. Details the power distribution unit (PDU). Details inter-cabinet cabling. Details the connections to be made to the interconnect bus board (IBB). Details the power connection, distribution and cabling for M-Cell6. Details and locations of M-Cell6 earthing points. Details of power supply earthing requirements. Details setting up antenna connections. Details control cabling in M-Cell6 equipment. Details procedures for power supply installations. Details installation procedures for RF modules. Details of battery installation. Details the procedures to install the heat management system (HMS) and the air conditioning units. Details the correct sequence for power connection.
CAUTION Ensure that all site equipment associated with an M-Cell6 is completely installed before commissioning the equipment for operation.
Inst. 32
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Indoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram
All RF and data connections to the M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet are at the top panel. This panel also has a feed-through tube for routeing the fibre optic cables in and out of the cabinet. Figure 3-1 shows an internal view of an M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet and equipment, with the door removed for clarity.
TOP PANEL IADU
ALARM BOARD (AB 6)
DC POWER INPUT TERMINALS
COOLING FANS TCU 5 TCU 4 TCU 3 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 0 (not visible) TCU 1 TCU 2 BLANKING PLATE OR REDUNDANT mBCU 1 CAGE
BLANKING PLATE or REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (P/NPSM) 1 P/NPSM 0
mBCU 0 CAGE
Figure 3-1 M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 33
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Outdoor BTS cabinet internal view diagram

All RF and data connections to the M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet are at the top panel. This panel also has feed-through tube for routeing the fibre optic cables in and out of the cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows an internal view of an M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet and equipment, with the door and cabinet hood removed for clarity.
TOP PANEL
IADU
ALARM BOARD (AB 6) POWER SUPPLY INPUT PANEL
COOLING FANS
TCU 5 TCU 4 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 0 (not visible) TCU 3 TCU 1 TCU 2 mBCU BLANKING PLATE OR REDUNDANT mBCU 1 CAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU)
mBCU 0 CAGE BLANKING PLATE
Figure 3-2 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet
Inst. 34
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Figure 3-3 shows the an internal view of the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet and equipment, with the door and cabinet hood enclosure removed for clarity.
TOP PANEL
EXTERNAL ALARMS INTERFACE
COMMS POWER SUPPLY MODULE (CPSM) PANEL (CPSMs mounted behind panel, if required) APSM 5 APSM 4 APSM 3 BUSBARS CUSTOMER COMMS EQUIPMENT SPACE BATTERY ISOLATORS
COOLING FANS x 2
APSM 1
APSM 2
CONTROL PANEL
BATTERY BOX (4 x 12V batteries in 2 parallel strings)
Figure 3-3 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 35
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Side cabinet internal view diagram

Figure 3-4 shows the an internal view of the M-Cell6 side cabinet and equipment, with the door removed for clarity.
EARTH PLATE
RF BULKHEAD PANEL
AC CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL (HIDDEN)
HIGH POWER DUPLEXERS (OPTIONAL)
DUPLEXER SHELF
MAINS METER BOARD
Figure 3-4 M-Cell6 side cabinet Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 36
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Heat exchanger unit internal view diagram

Figure 3-5 shows an external views of the M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger unit:
AMBIENT AIR EXHAUST
RECIRCULATION AIR EXHAUST AMBIENT AIR INTAKE
AMBIENT AIR EXHAUST
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
AMBIENT (HEAT EXCHANGER) AIRFLOW
Figure 3-5 HMS heat exchanger unit.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 37
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Air conditioner unit internal view diagram

Figure 3-6 shows external views of the M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner unit:
AIR CONDITIONER EXHAUST
AIR CONDITIONER INTAKE AMBIENT AIR INTAKE

REAR VIEW
Figure 3-6 HMS air conditioning unit.
Inst. 38
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Equipment delivery and packaging

Overview
Before the M-Cell6 equipment arrives, installation personnel should designate an area at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should also be suitable for unpacking the equipment, if necessary. Consult with the heavy freight or moving company and the owners of the building (if applicable) to select this area. The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company, along with the necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies and padding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.
Packaging detail
The M-Cell6 equipment cabinets are shipped in re-usable wooden crates of a similar construction to that shown in Figure 3-7.
METAL CLIP
LID
SIDE
SIDE
SIDE
BASE
SIDE
Figure 3-7 Typical shipping crate detail
NOTE A different packaging arrangement has been used for M-Cell6 equipment supplied since 1998. The equipment is shipped on a pallet, protected by a cardboard sleeve. If the equipment is re-installed at a different site, it is recommended that this packaging is re-used.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 39
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Cabinet Equipment
M-Cell6 cabinet equipment includes: S S S S S Cabinet interconnect panel. DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment. mBCU shelves and modules. Cooling fan assemblies. All intra-cabinet cabling. NOTE Units packaged separately include S TCU modules S Batteries S High power duplexers
Inst. 310
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Unpacking the cabinet

Overview
The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment.
Weather conditions
Before beginning the unpacking/installation process, it is important to read and take into account the following information concerning the climatic conditions at the intended site. WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of wind and other inclement weather conditions when installing the M-Cell equipment. This is especially important when using a ladder to gain access. Do not climb a ladder, scaffolding or other method of access if you feel unsafe to do so. See Visiting the site for access details.
Unpacking
The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment: NOTE It is recommended that the installer read through the following procedures before starting to unpack and install the equipment.
Tools required
Use these tools to dismantle the crate and unpack the cabinet. S S Claw hammer (or similar levering device). Knife.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 311
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Dismantling the shipping crate

Figure 3-7 shows a typical cabinet shipping crate. NOTE The clips and banding must not be thrown away, put them in a safe place where they will not be lost. Return the clips and banding with the shipping crate. To dismantle a shipping crate: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cut the recyclable plastic banding that secures the wooden crate. Remove the metal clips securing the lid of the crate. Lift the lid free of the crate. Remove the metal clips that secure the sides of the crate. Lift the sides free of the crate. The crate is now dismantled ready for unpacking.
Unpacking procedure
WARNING An unequipped M-Cell6 cabinet can weigh up to 153 Kg. Handle each cabinet with extreme caution, and in accordance with any local health and safety regulations. To remove the cabinet from the crate: CAUTION Care must be taken to avoid damaging the cabinet in any way, especially by scratching the outer surfaces. 1. 2. 3. 4. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet. Lift or slide the cabinet off the base of the crate. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage and report the extent of any damage to the transport company. The cabinet is now unpacked.
Returning the packing material

The packing material used is returnable and is re-used for packing new equipment. To return the packing material: 1. 2. 3. Put all the clips in a bag with the banding, desiccant bag, and barrier bag. Put the bag with the lid, sides and base of the cabinet. Return the dismantled crate for re-use, as advised by the Project Manager. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 312
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting outdoor cabinets

Overview
The following procedures include mounting of side and ancillary cabinets at an M-Cell6 site. If the option being installed does not have either a side or ancillary cabinet, skip the installation procedure for that item and instead fit an RF cable input shroud. NOTE The standard installation of an M-Cell6 is to mount the cabinets onto a metal plinth. If a plinth has previously been installed on the base, it will only be necessary to anchor the M-Cell6 BTS, ancillary and HMS cabinets to the plinth.
Outdoor cabinets
The M-Cell6 BTS outdoor cabinets are installed in the following order: S S S 1 x side cabinet. 1 x ancillary cabinet with HMS or air conditioner cabinet. 1 x BTS (6-carrier site) with HMS or air conditioner cabinet. NOTE A 12-carrier site requires 2 x BTS cabinets + HMS or air conditioner.
Tools, equipment and materials

The following tools are required to mount the M-Cell6 cabinets: S S S S S Screwdriver set. Spirit level. Socket set. Torque wrench. Lifting straps and suitable hydraulic lift gear.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 313
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting bolts and washers

Motorola supplies the following bolts and washers to mount the M-Cell6 cabinets: Table 3-2 M-Cell6 cabinet mounting bolts Purpose M-Cell6 cabinet to plinth M-Cell6 cabinet hood to M-Cell6 cabinet hood HMS/air conditioner to M-Cell6 cabinet HMS to plinth Side cabinet to plinth Bolts 4 5 4 2 4 Washers 4 5 4 2 4 Size M12x30 M8x50 M6x20 M12x30 M12x30
Safety considerations
For each of the cabinets to be mounted, including the heat management system and air conditioner, consider the following notes:
WARNING
M-Cell6 cabinets are heavy and should only be mounted without the use of lifting equipment when there are sufficient personnel available to ensure that regulations covering Health and Safety are not breached. An unequipped M-Cell6 cabinet can weigh up to 112 kg. Handle each cabinet with extreme caution, and in accordance with any local health and safety regulations. Motorola recommend the use of slings in conjunction with hydraulic lift apparatus for moving and positioning M-Cell6 cabinets. Certified straps and slings must be used and the equipment kept in delivery packaging. Always observe proper lifting precautions and handle each cabinet with extreme caution to avoid tipping. In addition to these points, refer to and comply with any local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment.
Inst. 314
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting the side cabinet

To install the M-Cell6 side cabinet: WARNING An unequipped M-Cell6 side cabinet can weigh up to 78 Kg. Observe proper lifting precautions. Handle each cabinet with extreme caution to avoid tipping. 1. Place the M-Cell6 side cabinet on the plinth, over the cable input trough, aligning the holes on the bottom of the cabinet with the holes on the plinth while maintaining all-round clearance. Place a flat washer onto each mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts and tighten to the specified torque to secure the cabinet to the metal plinth, making sure the cabinet remains vertical and level. At the base of the cabinet, use silicon sealant in the gap between the cabinet sides and the cable input trough. See Figure 3-8.
2. 3. 4.
Metal Plinth
Input Trough
Cut away of Side Ancillary
Gap to be filled with silicone sealant
Figure 3-8 Sealing the side cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 315
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting the ancillary cabinet and HMS

WARNING An unequipped M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet can weigh up to 157 Kg. An M-Cell6 heat exchanger can weigh up to 93 Kg. An M-Cell6 air conditioner can weigh up to 124 Kg. Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each cabinet with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
NOTE Motorola recommends that the ancillary cabinet and HMS are installed as a pair rather than bolting one cabinet down followed by the other. Pairs of cabinets should be bolted loosely until all the cabinets for that site are in place.
Ancillary cabinet
To mount the ancillary cabinet and HMS heat exchanger or air conditioner: NOTE If the plinth and side cabinet have already been installed, remove the cover plate from the back of the side cabinet before positioning the ancillary cabinet. For ease of handling and to improve access, the side cabinet door can be removed by removing the three hinge pins and the door earthing strap. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Move the cabinet to the installation point on the plinth. Remove the grille at the front, bottom edge of the ancillary cabinet. Place the ancillary cabinet on the plinth and line up the fixing holes in base of the cabinet. Place a flat washer onto each M12 mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten the bolts yet. Install the 5 mm thick hood interface plate between the side and ancillary cabinets ensuring that the sealing gaskets are correctly positioned. Attach the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet to the side cabinet using M6 bolts in the hood. The sealing gasket between the two cabinets must be correctly positioned. Align the ancillary cabinet with the edge of the side cabinet and tension up the bolts but do not tighten the base fixing bolts and the cabinet side bolts.
Inst. 316
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
HMS cabinet
To mount the HMS heat exchanger or air conditioner: 1. Place the HMS or air conditioning cabinet onto the plinth and line up the bolt holes. CAUTION When positioning the temperature control unit, ensure that the 27 V power studs are not damaged and that its sealing gasket is positioned correctly. 2. 3. 4. Place a flat washer onto each mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten yet. Join the HMS cabinet to the ancillary cabinet at top and bottom using the M6 bolts provided. Tension up all fixing bolts but do not torque the bolts at this stage.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 317
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting the BTS cabinet and HMS

WARNING An unequipped M-Cell6 BTS cabinet can weigh up to 151 Kg. An M-Cell6 HMS can weigh up to 93 Kg. An M-Cell6 air conditioner can weigh up to 124 Kg. Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each cabinet with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
NOTE M-Cell6 cabinets are supplied with radios precalibrated for their correct slots. Radios are removed for transportation. During installation, ensure they are returned to the correct position.
BTS cabinet
To mount the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet and HMS: 1. 2. Move the cabinet to the installation point on the plinth. Remove the grill at the front bottom edge of the BTS cabinet and open the cabinet door. NOTE For ease of handling and to improve access, the cabinet door can be removed simply by removing the two hinge pins and the door earthing strap. 3. Using a Torxdriver and T20 bit, remove the four screws securing the top and bottom TCU retaining brackets. Discard the bottom bracket and refit the bottom screws do not discard the top bracket. Remove and retain the small kick plate secured by three Torx screws,at the front lower edge of the cabinet. Align the holes on the bottom of the cabinet with the holes on the plinth. Place a flat washer onto each M12 bolt and secure the cabinet loosely to the plinth using the bolts and washers. Install the 8 mm thick hood interface plate between the BTS and ancillary cabinet ensuring that the sealing gaskets are correctly positioned. Attach the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet to the BTS cabinet using M6 bolts, and check that the sealing gasket between the two cabinets is correctly positioned. Align the BTS cabinet with the edge of the ancillary cabinet and tension the base fixing bolts and the cabinet side bolts. Replace the grille removed in step 2, at the front, bottom edge of the BTS cabinet.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Inst. 318
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting the HMS cabinet

1. Place the HMS cabinet onto the plinth and line up the bolt holes. CAUTION When positioning the HMS, take care to ensure that the 27 V power studs are not damaged and that the associated sealing gasket is positioned correctly. 2. 3. 4. Place a flat washer onto each mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten yet. Join the HMS cabinet to the BTS cabinet at top and bottom using the M6 bolts provided. Tighten up all bolts to the correct torque (see Table 2-2).
Mounting additional BTS cabinets

Additional M-Cell6 BTS cabinets may be mounted depending on the site configuration. A maximum of four M-Cell6 BTS cabinets (24 carriers) may be installed at a single site. NOTE The standard plinth has the capacity for two BTS cabinets + one ancillary cabinet + one side (power) cabinet (6/12-carrier site). If the configuration is to be extended to 24 carriers, a second plinth with associated side and ancillary cabinets must be installed.
Completing the mounting

To complete the cabinet mounting: 1. 2. 3. Install the 5 mm thick end hood plate at the outside face of the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet hood. Replace the rear covers of each HMS cabinet. Tighten the mounting bolts securing each cabinet, making sure the cabinets remain vertical and level. NOTE A slight gap may remain between the cabinets when all fixing bolts have been tightened due to the sealing gaskets between the cabinets. Provided that these gaskets were properly positioned during cabinet mounting, there will not be a problem with water leaking into the cabinets. 4. 5. 6. If only one BTS cabinet is fitted at the site, install blanks in all exposed threaded inserts and plinth mounting bolts. If commissioning is not to be performed immediately, lock all cabinet hoods using the key provided. Fit each of the cabinets with the door-catch cover plates using tamper-proof screws.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 319
GMR-01
Mounting indoor cabinets
GSM-105-423

Overview
The following procedures describe the mounting of M-Cell6 indoor cabinets. The standard installation of an indoor M-Cell6 is to mount and bolt the cabinets directly to a flat concrete base prepared for cabinet mounting. For an indoor M-Cell6, a plinth will only be required if the floor construction is uneven or is of raised or cavity construction.
Indoor cabinets
An M-Cell6 BTS indoor site comprises the following cabinets: S S S S 1 x BTS (6-carrier site). 2 x BTS (12-carrier site). 3 x BTS (18-carrier site). 4 x BTS (24-carrier site).
Tools, equipment and materials

The following tools are required to mount the M-Cell6 cabinets: S S S S S Screwdriver set. Spirit level. Socket set. Torque wrench. Lifting straps and suitable hydraulic lift gear.

Motorola recommends using M12 expansion bolts to mount M-Cell6 indoor cabinets:
Inst. 320
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting the BTS cabinet

To mount the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet: WARNING An unequipped M-Cell6 BTS cabinet can weigh up to 151 Kg. Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each cabinet with extreme caution to avoid tipping. NOTE All TCUs must be removed to a dry, safe place during this procedure. M-Cell6 BTS cabinets are supplied with radios precalibrated for their correct slots. Always mark or label them prior to removal and ensure they are returned to the correct positions on re-installation. 1. 2. Move the cabinet into position ready for installation. Undo the three M4 Torx screws at the rear of the shipping hood and remove the hood by sliding towards the front of the cabinet. Open the cabinet door. NOTE For ease of handling and also to improve access, the cabinet door can be removed simply by removing the three hinge pins and the door earthing strap. 3. Using a Torx driver and T20 bit, remove the four screws securing the top and bottom TCU retaining brackets. Discard the bottom bracket and refit the bottom two screws - do not discard the top bracket. Install the power, earth and comms cables through the plinth access holes and route them into the cabinet via the three cable glands in the base of the M-Cell6 cabinet. Remove the small kick-plate mounted on the front bottom edge of the cabinet. Align the holes in the bottom of the cabinet either with the holes in the floor or the threaded inserts in the plinth. NOTE To access the front mounting holes, it is necessary to 6. 7. 8. Place a flat washer onto each M12 mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten yet. Using a spirit level check that the cabinet is level, then tighten up all bolts to the correct torque (see Category 423, Chapter 2, Table 2-2). Refit the door if removed. Position the cabinet hood (do not refit the shipping hood) at the front edge of the cabinet and slide rearwards. Fix the hood in place, using three M4 screws.
4.
5.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 321
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting additional BTS cabinets

Additional M-Cell6 BTS cabinets may be installed depending on the site configuration. A maximum of four M-Cell6 BTS cabinets may be installed at a single site.
Completing the mounting

To complete the cabinet mounting: 1. 2. Fit each of the cabinets with the door catch cover plates using tamper-proof screws. If only one BTS cabinet is fitted at the site, install blanks in all exposed threaded inserts and plinth mounting bolts.
Inst. 322
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Earthing and transient protection

Overview
This manual summarises general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to the Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations instructions, provided in Cellular system engineering guide 68P81150E62, for detailed earthing information.
WARNING
Each cabinet must be earthed separately and must not daisy-chained together. S S S S The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its power source). Provision should be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to the cabinet before beginning the installation of the system cabinets. There is an earthing terminal (stud) located on the interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Refer to the site-specific documentation for detailed site earthing information.
Transient and lightning protection

2.048 Mbit/s lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection as part of the balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) or T43 board. Ensure the receive and transmit antenna connections to the building are fed through coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices.
Figure 3-9 M-Cell6 earthing plate

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 323
GMR-01
Installing power and earth cabling
GSM-105-423

Overview
The following describes the procedure for connecting power and earth cabling to M-Cell6 cabinets.
WARNING
Use the earth stud, located on the Interconnect Panel on the top of the cabinet, to earth cabinets. Connect each cabinet individually to the master earth bar. Do not daisy chain cabinet earths together. M-Cell6 cabinets must be earthed with a conductor capable of carrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protection device. Reference BS7671 MCell6 is protected by a 63 A over current breaker. If a differential breaker is required then it must be installed as part of the upstream input to the system. MCell2 is supplied with over current breakers but does not have residual current breakers. Lightning protection is provided by way of a transient protector which is electrically connected across the incoming mains. Each cabinet must have an individual connection from the cabinet earth stud (located on the interconnect panel on the top of the cabinet) to the master earth bar.
WARNING
Do not make ac input power connections at the main power source at this time. Connecting input power is the final installation procedure in this chapter. Refer to Power and earth cabling for details of the power connection, distribution and cabling M-Cell6 cabinets.
Indoor cabinets WARNING

The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service is affected by all of the following factors: Ambient temperature Grouping Partial or total enclosure in thermal insulating material Frequency (ac only) Reference BS7671
Inst. 324
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Negative earth cabinets

For negative earth applications (+27 V dc): S S The positive power cable is red. The negative (earth) cable is black.
Positive earth cabinets

To connect a positive earth cabinet to the main dc power source, Motorola recommends using a 35 sq. mm dc input power cable with a maximum length of 24 m (80 ft.). For positive earth applications (48 V dc): S S The negative power cable is blue . The positive (earth) cable is black.
Outdoor cabinets WARNING

The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service is affected by all of the following factors: Ambient temperature Grouping Partial or total enclosure in thermal insulating material Frequency (ac only) Reference BS7671 To connect an outdoor cabinet to the main ac power source, observe the following rules.
Single-phase supply
For single-phase ac connections: S S S The line power cable is brown or red. The neutral cable is blue or black. The earth cable is green and yellow.
Three-phase supply
For three-phase ac connections: S S S S S The line R power cable is red. The line B power cable is blue . The line Y power cable is yellow. The neutral cable is black. The earth cable is green and yellow.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 325
GMR-01
Connecting dc power cables
GSM-105-423
Connecting dc power cables

Negative earth cabinet
To connect dc power cables to a negative earth cabinet: 1. 2. Connect the earth wire from the master earth bar to the earth stud on top of the cabinet. Connect the black negative () dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly 0V terminal. NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threaded onto the cable before connection. 3. Connect the red positive (+) dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly VIN terminal. NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threaded onto the cable before connection. 4. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal connections (nuts on studs with star washers).
Positive earth cabinet

To connect dc power cables to a positive earth cabinet: 1. 2. Connect the earth wire from the master earth bar to the earth stud on top of the cabinet. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly 0 V terminal. NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threaded onto the cable before connection. 3. Connect the blue negative () dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly VIN terminal. NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threaded onto the cable before connection. 4. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal connections (nuts on studs with star washers). Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 326
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting single-phase ac power cables
Connecting single-phase ac power cables

Preparing for connection
To prepare for connecting ac power cables to an M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet: WARNING Ensure that the mains input isolator is set to position O (off) and source is isolated before proceeding. 1. 2. 3. Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulated cover, and remove the cover. Position the screened power cable, complete with earth, in a conduit. Route the conduit to the ac power outlet point. Feed the power cable via the plinth into the M-Cell6 cabinet. NOTE Single phase link is packed with ac isolator and must be fitted for safety requirements.
Connecting to the main isolator

To connect the earth, line, and neutral power cable to the ac supply input isolator: 1. Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the mains input isolator, and connect the main cabinet earth cable to the ac supply input isolator. Secure both cables. Secure the screen at the cabinet entry gland. Connect the line ac cable (brown or red) to the line terminal in the ac supply input isolator, and secure. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black) to the neutral terminal in the ac supply input isolator, and secure.
2. 3. 4.
Connecting to the power outlet

To connect the earth, line, and neutral power cable to the power supply outlet: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow) to the earth point in the power supply outlet, and secure. Connect the line ac cable (brown or red) to the line connection in the power supply outlet, and secure. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black), to the neutral connection in the power supply outlet and secure. Do not connect the screen, cut it back level with the outer insulation. Refit and secure the ac terminal block insulated cover, and replace the screws and washers.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 327
GMR-01
Connecting three-phase ac power cables
GSM-105-423

Preparing for connection
To prepare for connecting 3-phase ac power cables to an outdoor cabinet: WARNING Ensure that the MAINS INPUT ISOLATOR is set to position O (off) and source is isolated before proceeding. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the screws and washers securing the ac terminal block insulated cover, and remove the cover. Position the screened 5-core power cable from the PCU, complete with earth, in a conduit and route to the nearest ac power outlet point. Feed the power cable via the plinth into the M-Cell6 cabinet. Remove the ac circuit breaker panel cover. Refer to Power and earth cabling and remove the single-phase link. NOTE AC isolator box is now 3-phase with link inside for safety requirements.
Connecting to the main isolator

To connect the earth, 3phase, and neutral power cables to the ac supply input isolator: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect earth ac cable (green/yellow), to the earth point in the AC SUPPLY INPUT ISOLATOR. Connect cabinet earth cable to the AC SUPPLY INPUT ISOLATOR and secure both cables. Secure the screen at the cabinet entry gland. Connect the line ac cable (red), to the R terminal in the AC SUPPLY INPUT ISOLATOR and secure. Connect the line ac cable (blue), to the B terminal in the AC SUPPLY INPUT ISOLATOR and secure. Connect the line ac cable (yellow), to the Y terminal in the AC SUPPLY INPUT ISOLATOR and secure. Connect the neutral ac cable (black), to the N terminal in the AC SUPPLY INPUT ISOLATOR and secure.
Inst. 328
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting to the power outlet

To connect the earth, 3-phase, and neutral power cables to the power supply outlet: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect the earth ac cable (green/yellow), to the earth point in the power supply outlet and secure. Connect the line ac cable (red), to the red phase connection in the power supply outlet and secure. Connect the line ac cable (blue), to the blue phase connection in the power supply outlet and secure. Connect the line ac cable (yellow), to the yellow phase connection in the power supply outlet and secure. Connect the neutral ac cable (black), to the neutral connection in the power supply outlet and secure. Do not connect the screen, but cut it back level with the outer insulation. Refit and secure the ac terminal block insulated cover, and replace the screws and washers.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 329
GMR-01
Connecting antennas to indoor cabinets
GSM-105-423

Overview
This section contains information to assist in making RF (antenna) connections to indoor cabinets. There are several configurations of CBF, CCB, DLNB, 3-input CBF, HCOMB and non-HCOMB, TBPF modules depending on the type of antennas used at the base site and the following diagrams are included to show some of these configurations. CAUTION A tightening torque of 30 Nm must not be exceeded.
RF configurations
The following list identifies the different groups of Tx and RX components used in antenna connections. S GSM900 RF modules: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Duplexer, medium power. Combining bandpass filter (CBF).
An alternative to the previous RF equipment are the following: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Cavity combining block (CCB).
An alternative to the previous RF equipment are the following: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB) (not shown). 3-input CBF. Hybrid combiner (HCOMB). Non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB).
An alternative to the previous RF equipment are the following: S Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB) (not shown). Twin band pass filter (TBPF).
DCS1800/PCS1900 RF modules: Low noise amplifier (LNA). Hybrid combiner. Transmitter bandpass filter (Tx BPF). Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 330
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
GSM900 BTS top panel diagram

Figure 3-10 shows the RF components mounted on the top panel of a GSM900 M-Cell6 and Figure 3-11 shows M-Cell6 cabinet receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) connector locations.
MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER MODULES DLNB MODULES
T43 OR BIB BOARDS
COMBINING BANDPASS FILTER (CBF) MODULES NOTE IN PLACE OF 3 CBF MODULES, 2 CAVITY COMBINING BLOCK (CCB) MODULES CAN BE FITTED
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE FEED THROUGH TUBE
Figure 3-10 Indoor BTS GSM900 RF connections.

PIX0 DUP2 PIX1 DUP1 DUP0
FAN POWER (OUTDOOR) HMS ALARMS (OUTDOOR)
MS0
T43 or BIB T43 or BIB
POWER SUPPLY INPUT
MS1
CBF2
CBF1
CBF0
CCB1
CCB POWER
Figure 3-11 M-Cell6 GSM900 top panel.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 331
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
GSM900 BTS top panel configuration diagrams

Figure 3-12 shows a RF Omni 4 configuration mounted on the top panel of a GSM900 whilst Figure 3-13 shows a RF 3:3 configuration. The four main configurations (Omni 4, 3:3, 4:4 and 4:4:4) are outlined in the cabinet interconnections (indoor) section of this chapter.
DLNB BLANKING PLATE
CBF BLANKING PLATE
HCOMB 3-INPUT CBF
Figure 3-12 Indoor BTS GSM900 RF Omni 4 configuration.
3-INPUT CBF
NON-HCOMB 3-INPUT CBF
Figure 3-13 Indoor BTS GSM900 RF 3:3 configuration . Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 332
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
DCS1800 and PCS1900 BTS top panel diagrams

Figure 3-14 shows the RF components mounted on the top panel of a DCS1800/PCS1900 M-Cell6 indoor cabinet:
MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (LNA) MODULES
TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER
T43 OR BIB BOARDS
HYBRID COMBINERS
MOUNTING FOR TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER (TX BPF) 0R MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER
Figure 3-14 RF components (DCS1800/PCS1900)

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 333
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Figure 3-15 shows receive and transmit connector locations:

LNA POWER
PIX0 BATTERY BOX ALARMS (INDOOR)
PIX1
MS0
POWER SUPPLY INPUT
MS1
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE CCB POWER GPS
Figure 3-15 M-Cell6 DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel.
Inst. 334
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting antennas to outdoor cabinets

Overview
This section contains information to assist in making RF (antenna) connections to outdoor cabinets. There are several configurations of CBF, CCB, DLNB, 3-input CBF, HCOMB and non-HCOMB, TBPF modules depending on the type of antennas used at the base site and the following diagrams are included to show some of these configurations.
RF configurations
The following list identifies the different groups of Tx and RX components used in antenna connections. S GSM900 RF modules: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Duplexer, medium power. Combining bandpass filter (CBF).
An alternative to the previous RF equipment are the following: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB). Cavity combining block (CCB).
An alternative to the previous RF equipment are the following: Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB) (not shown). 3-input CBF. Hybrid combiner (HCOMB). Non-hybrid combiner (non-HCOMB).
An alternative to the previous RF equipment are the following: S Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU). Dual low noise block (DLNB) (not shown). Twin band pass filter (TBPF).
DCS1800/PCS 1900 RF modules: Low noise amplifier (LNA). Hybrid combiner. Transmitter bandpass filter (Tx BPF).

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 335
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Outdoor BTS top panel diagrams

Figure 3-16 shows the RF components mounted on the top panel of an outdoor M-Cell6.
DLNB MODULES
T43 OR BIB BOARDS
2 CAVITY COMBINING BLOCK (CCB) MODULES NOTE: IN PLACE OF 2 CCB MODULES, 3 COMBINING BANDPASS FILTER (CBF) MODULES CAN BE FITTED
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE FEED THROUGH TUBE
Figure 3-16 Outdoor BTS RF connections
Inst. 336
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Figure 3-17 shows M-Cell6 cabinet receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) connector locations.
PIX0 DUP2 PIX1 DUP1 DUP0
FAN POWER (OUTDOOR) HMS ALARMS (OUTDOOR)
MS0
POWER SUPPLY INPUT
MS1
CBF2
CBF1
CBF0
CCB1
CCB POWER
Figure 3-17 M-Cell6 GSM900 BTS top panel .

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 337
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
BTS top panel alternative configuration diagrams

Figure 3-18 shows an alternative configuration of RF components.
MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER MODULES DLNB MODULES
T43 OR BIB BOARDS
COMBINING BANDPASS FILTER (CBF) MODULES NOTE IN PLACE OF 3 CBF MODULES, 2 CAVITY COMBINING BLOCK (CCB) MODULES CAN BE FITTED FIBRE OPTIC CABLE FEED-THROUGH TUBE
Figure 3-18 Alternative GSM900 BTS RF components .
Inst. 338
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Figure 3-19 shows a RF Omni 4 configuration mounted on the top panel of a GSM900 whilst Figure 3-20 shows a RF 3:3 configuration. The four main configurations (Omni 4, 3:3, 4:4 and 4:4:4) are outlined in the cabinet interconnections (outdoor) section of this chapter.
DLNB BLANKING PLATE
CBF BLANKING PLATE
HCOMB 3-INPUT CBF
Figure 3-19 Indoor BTS GSM900RF Omni 4 configuration.
3-INPUT CBF
NON-HCOMB 3-INPUT CBF
Figure 3-20 Indoor BTS GSM900 RF 3:3 configuration.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 339
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Figure 3-21 shows the RF components mounted on the top panel of a DCS1800/PCS1900 M-Cell6 outdoor, and Figure 3-22 shows receive and transmit connector locations.
MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (LNA) MODULES
TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER
T43 OR BIB BOARDS
HYBRID COMBINERS
MOUNTING FOR TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER (TX BPF) 0R MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER
Figure 3-21 DCS1800/PCS1900 RF components.

LNA POWER
FAN POWER (OUTDOOR) PIX0 HMS ALARMS (OUTDOOR)
PIX1
MS0
POWER SUPPLY INPUT
MS1
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE CCB POWER GPS
Figure 3-22 M-Cell6 DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 340
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
IADU DIL switch setting for extended cabinets

Overview
The following provides information on the setting of DIL switches on the IADU board on M-Cell6 GSM 900 equipment (DCS1800 equipment does not contain an IADU board).
Switch location
The IADU board is located beneath the cabinet top panel. It is just visible from the front of the cabinet by looking above the two cooling fans. To view or change the switch setting, it is necessary to remove the left side fan. This is done by disconnecting the power connector and removing the three retaining screws on the fan. Figure 3-23 shows an IADU board of a master cabinet with switch 3 in the ON position allowing extension from DLNB 2 of the master cabinet:
FRONT OF IADU BOARD FRONT EDGE OFF POSITION 1 VIEWED FROM UNDERSIDE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 31st May 01
ON POSITION
BACK OF IADU BOARD
VIEWED FROM BELOW

Inst. 341
GMR-01
O N
Figure 3-23 IADU board
GSM-105-423
Switch setting
The switches are set at the factory prior to delivery of the equipment and should not normally need to be reset. The switches are located to the left side of the IADU board, there are 8 switches in total, mounted in a single bank. Only switches 13 are used, switches 48 have no function and should always be left in the OFF position. S S S Switch 1 controls the extension of DLNB 0. Switch 2 controls the extension of DLNB 1. Switch 3 controls the extension of DLNB 2. NOTE All switches on the IADU board in the extended cabinet must be set to OFF.
Example of a 2 cabinet 4/4/4 configuration

Table 3-3 displays the equipment configuration and switch setting of a sector 4/4/4 configuration in two cabinets, as detailed in the Technical Description: (GSM-106-323):. Table 3-3 Sector 4/4/4 configuration and IADU DIL switch settings Master cabinet Switch 1 - OFF Switch 2 - OFF Switch 3 - ON Switches 4 to 8 - no function DLNB 0 equipped DLNB 2 equipped TCUs 0 - 3 supported on DLNB 0 TCUs 4 - 5 supported on DLNB 2 RF extender block 0 equipped DLNB 2 equipped TCUs 0 - 1 supported on RF extender TCUs 2 - 5 supported on DLNB 2 IADU switches - all OFF Extension cabinet
In the example, switch 3 on the IADU in the master cabinet is set to ON. This causes the signal received on DLNB 2 to be fed via the IADU board to the extension ports, and the RF extender block in the extended cabinet.
Inst. 342
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Example of a 3 cabinet 8/6/4 configuration

Table 3-4 displays the equipment configuration and switch setting of a sector 8/6/4 configuration in three cabinets: Table 3-4 Sector 8/6/4 configuration and IADU DIL switch settings Master cabinet Switch 1 - ON Switch 2 - OFF Switch 3 - OFF Switches 4 to 8 - no function DLNB 0 equipped TCUs 0 - 5 of cabinet 0 and 0 - 1 of cabinet 1 supported on DLNB 0 of cabinet 0 1st extension cabinet Switch 1 - OFF Switch 2 - ON Switch 3 - OFF Switches 4 to 8 - no function RF extender block 0 equipped DLNB 1 equipped TCUs 2 - 5 of cabinet 1 and 0 - 1 of cabinet 2 supported on DLNB 1 of cabinet 1 RF extender block 0 equipped DLNB 2 equipped TCUs 2 - 5 of cabinet 2 supported on DLNB 2 of cabinet 2 IADU switches - all OFF 2nd extension cabinet
In the example, switch 1 on the IADU in the master cabinet is set to ON. This causes the signal received on DLNB 0 of the master cabinet to be fed, via the IADU board and extension ports, to the RF extender block in the 1st extension cabinet. Switch 2 on the IADU in the 1st extension cabinet is set to ON. This causes the signal received on DLNB 1 of the 1st extension cabinet to be fed to the 2nd extension cabinet.
Commissioning notes
During bay level calibration, the command TS A ANT X is used, where X is in the range 13 and represents the antenna number. The TCU uses these commands to provide control signals to the IADU board via the RX 1 port on the front panel. S S S TS A ANT 1 causes the IADU to create a connection to DLNB 0. TS A ANT 2 causes the IADU to create a connection to DLNB 1. TS A ANT 3 causes the IADU to create a connection to DLNB 2.
When performing the bay level calibration on the radios 0 and 1 in the extension cabinet, TS A ANT 1 is used to connect to the RF extender block. NOTE Due to the switch matrix nature of the IADU, the reference signal must be connected to the correct DLNB before the associated TS A ANT command is executed.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 343
GMR-01
Setting the alarm board switches
GSM-105-423
Setting the alarm board switches

Overview
Switches S1 and S2 are located on the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet alarm board (AB6). Switch S2 must be set during installation and commissioning. This section covers the setting of S2 on AB6. NOTE Switch S1 does not function on M-Cell6 equipment. The cabinet identifier (normally set by S1) is set by the software when equipping a TCU at a site, and is then held in the CM database.
Alarm board diagram

The AB6 is mounted between the TCU mounting frame and the fan assemblies near the top of the cabinet. Figure 3-24 shows the location of switches S1 and S2 on an AB6 board.
Switch S2
Switch S1 (8 way)
Figure 3-24 Switches S1 and S2 locations
Switch settings
Switch S1
Switch S1 is not functional on M-Cell6 equipment.
Switch S2
The two states of switch S2 are identified as Indoor or Outdoor. An Indoor variant has a dc power input, and the alarm source is from the BTS NPSMs or PPSMs and the non-alarm state is a normally open contact. An Outdoor variant uses an ac input power source, usually fitted with a HMS, and the input alarm from the HMS is normally closed for the non-alarmed state. Table 3-5 shows the S2 switch settings: Table 3-5 Switch S2 settings Switch S2 Position Indoor Outdoor Functionality NPSM/PPSM over temperature alarm input. HMS over temperature alarm input.
Inst. 344
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Control signal cabling

Overview
The following provides information on the control signal used in M-Cell6 equipment.
Installing control signal cabling

The internal control signal cabling within each M-Cell6 cabinet is assembled and tested at the factory. No further action is necessary.
Connecting the intercabinet fibre optic cables WARNING

Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable, or into the Data In/Out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the Data In/Out connectors, or unterminated fibre optic cables that are connected to Data In/Out connectors.
Refer to the site-specific documentation for all necessary information regarding the following intercabinet fibre optic interconnections: S S M-Cell6 cabinet to M-Cell6 cabinet. M-Cell6 cabinet to BSC cabinet.
Two T43 or BIB boards can be fitted on the left hand side of the top panel of an M-Cell6 cabinet. Master BCU (Right Cage) M-Cell6 master cage to the right of the cabinet terminates on T43 or BIB 0 at the rear of the cabinet. NIU 0 PORT 0 Terminates at J1 and J2 NIU 0 PORT 1 Terminates at J7 and J8 NIU 1 PORT 0 Terminates at J13 and J14 Slave BCU (Left Cage) M-Cell6 Slave cage to the left of the cabinet terminates on T43 or BIB 1 at the front of the cabinet. The pin-outs for the slave cage follow exactly that of the master cage, but terminating on T43 board 1.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 345
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
E1/T1 line connections

CAUTION
The end-user is responsible for transient protection of the E1/T1 Mbit/s lines connected to Motorola equipment.
Motorola requires that all 2.048 Mbit/s lines brought in from outside the building be spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the building entry point. Where this is not practical, the end user may purchase an optional transient protection board from Motorola. Consult Motorola for information on transient protection for the M-Cell6 sites. There are two ways to make 2.048 Mbit/s line connections: S S 120 Ohm twisted pair cable through a Balanced-line Interconnect Board (BIB). 75 Ohm coaxial cable through a Type 43 Interconnect Board (T43) board.
BIB board
The balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) provides the impedance matching between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the mBCU2 backplane. The board provides an interface for up to six input and six output balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines. Twelve transformers are used on the board to provide impedance matching between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the network interface unit (NIU) module. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio to match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections. Connection is made using a 37 pin D-type connector to both the interconnect board (J0) and the external E1/T1 circuit lines (J1). Figure 3-25 shows a typical BIB:
J0
J1
Figure 3-25 Balancedline Interconnect Board (BIB)
Inst. 346
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
BIB interconnections
Table 3-6 provides details of possible BIB interconnections: NOTE The BIB is a generic interconnection board. Although some of the pinpairs are not used for the M-Cell6 configuration they are identified in Table 3-6 to show the total functionality of the BIB.
Table 3-6 BIB interconnections

NIU/ port Pin no J01 0/0 J02 J04 Not used J05 J07 0/1 J08 J10 Not used J11 J013 1/0 J014 J016 Not used J017 Function EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx1+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx1+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx4+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx4+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx2+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx2+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx5+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx5+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx3+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx3+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx6+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx6+ Pin no J11 J12 J14 J15 J17 J18 J110 J111 J113 J114 J116 J117 Pin no J020 J021 J023 J024 J026 J027 J029 J030 J032 J033 J035 J036 Function EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx1 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx1 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx4 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx4 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx2 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx2 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx5 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx5 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx3 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx3 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx6 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx6 Pin no J120 J121 J123 J124 J126 J127 J129 J130 J132 J133 J135 J136
NOTE Connector J0 and J1 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are connected to earth.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 347
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
T43 board
The Type 43 Interconnect Board (T43) provides the impedance matching between the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) circuit lines and the mBCU backplane. The board provides an interface for up to six input and six output unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm 2.048 Mbit/s lines. Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to the interconnect board and twelve type 43 coaxial connectors to the external PCM circuit lines. Figure 3-26 shows a typical T43:
J0 J8 J14 J16 J13 J7 J17 J5 J11 J1 J10 J2 J4
Figure 3-26 Type 43 Interconnect Board (T43)
Inst. 348
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
T43 interconnections
Table 3-7 provides details of possible T43 interconnections:
Table 3-7 T43 interconnections

NIU/ port Pin no J01 0/0 J02 J04 Not used J05 J07 0/1 J08 J10 Not used J11 J013 1/0 J014 J016 Not used J017 Function EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx1+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx1+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx4+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx4+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx2+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx2+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx5+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx5+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx3+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx3+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx6+ EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx6+ Pin no J1 centre J2 centre J4 centre J5 Centre J7 centre J8 centre J10 centre J11 centre J13 centre J14 centre J16 centre J17 centre Pin no J020 J021 J023 J024 J026 J027 J029 J030 J032 J033 J035 J036 Function EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx1 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx1 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx4 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx4 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx2 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx2 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx5 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx5 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx3 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx3 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Tx6 EQUIPMENT/ EXT_Rx6 Pin no J1 shield J2 shield J4 shield J5 shield J7 shield J8 shield J10 shield J11 shield J13 shield J14 shield J16 shield J17 shield
NOTE Connector J0 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are not used

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 349
GMR-01
Input/output device cabling
GSM-105-423

Introduction
Each M-Cell6 site can support a total of eight sets of output control contacts and sixteen input sense contacts.
PIX connector location diagram

Figure 3-27 shows M-Cell6 cabinet PIX connector locations on the top panel.
PIX1
PIX0
T43 or BIB
Figure 3-27 M-Cell6 BTS top panel
Relay-closure outputs
The PIX function is included as part of the Alarm Board and comprises four relays which are controlled by either mBCU. Each relay has several contacts available. Some of the contacts available to each relay are normally open and some are normally closed. The contacts are rated for 1A at 30 V. The contacts may be used to control external equipment at the site such as fans or audible alarms. The external equipment is connected to the M-Cell6 at two 37-way D-type connectors marked PIX0 and PIX1 on the top panel (see Figure 3-27). CAUTION Fit the small plastic covers onto unused PIX0 or PIX1 connectors on the cabinet top panel. Motorola supplies these covers with the cabinet. The covers protect the connectors from damage by static or foreign matter.
Inst. 350
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Dry-contact inputs
The PIX function includes eight inputs which may be connected to external sensors. These inputs report alarms to the BSC. The BSC forwards the alarm to the OMC. The end-user supplies the external sensors. Each sensor connects across a pair of PIX inputs, SEN Dn and SEN Sn, where n corresponds to a PIX opto-coupler 1 to 8. All sensors must be dry-contact type with the following specification: S S 5 kohms or greater across sense inputs for a logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler off). 500 ohms or less across sense inputs for a logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).
These inputs are available in exactly the same way as shown in Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29.
PIX with Krone interconnection diagram

Figure 3-28 is for an M-Cell6 with 8 external Site Alarm Inputs accessed via a Krone Box. The internal cables shown in the diagram are delivered as part of the M-Cell6 cabinet.
37W 37W PIX0 PLG SKT SKT 37W PIX1 Krone Box
SKT PLG
MC6 Krone Box Output 50W
PLG SKT
Alarm Board 6 BTS Cabinet Ancillary Cabinet
Figure 3-28 PIX inputs/outputs to Krone Box

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 351
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Krone box output details

Table 3-8 displays the Krone box output connections in Figure 3-28.
Table 3-8 Connector pinouts

Krone Box Output Free Termination in Krone Box 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 to 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 to 40 Signal Name Site Input EXT 11 Site Input EXT 12 Site Input EXT 21 Site Input EXT 22 Site Input EXT 31 Site Input EXT 32 Site Input EXT 41 Site Input EXT 42 Site Input EXT 51 Site Input EXT 52 Site Input EXT 61 Site Input EXT 62 Site Input EXT 71 Site Input EXT 72 Site Input EXT 81 Site Input EXT 82 No connection Site Output Relay 1 NO Site Output Relay 1 NC Site Output Relay 1 COM Site Output Relay 2 NO Site Output Relay 2 NC Site Output Relay 2 COM Site Output Relay 3 NO Site Output Relay 3 NC Site Output Relay 3 COM Site Output Relay 4 NO Site Output Relay 4 NC Site Output Relay 4 COM No connection
Inst. 352
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
PIX without Krone interconnection diagram

Figure 3-29 is for an M-Cell6 with 16 Site Alarm Inputs accessed directly from two 37-way D-Type sockets. The internal cables shown in the diagram are delivered as part of the M-Cell6 cabinet.
Site / PIX 0 Input/output Site / PIX 1 Input
BTS Cabinet
PIX0 37W SKT SKT PIX1 37W
50W PLG SKT PLG 50W SKT
25W PLG SKT
AB6 Extender Board Alarm Board 6
Figure 3-29 PIX inputs/outputs without Krone Box

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 353
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
PIX connector pinout details

Table 3-9 displays the pinouts for Site/Pix connector 1:

Site / PIX 1 Input BTS Cabinet Interconnection Panel 37W DType SKT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 to 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 to 37 Signal Name Site Input EXT 91 Site Input EXT 101 Site Input EXT 111 Site Input EXT 121 Site Input EXT 131 Site Input EXT 141 Site Input EXT 151 Site Input EXT 161 Not used Site Input EXT 92 Site Input EXT 102 Site Input EXT 112 Site Input EXT 122 Site Input EXT 132 Site Input EXT 142 Site Input EXT 152 Site Input EXT 162 Not used
Inst. 354
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Table 3-10 displays the pinouts for Site/Pix connector 0:

Site / PIX 0 Input/Output BTS Cabinet Interconnection Panel 37W DType SKT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 & 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 to 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 to 37 Signal Name Site Input EXT 11 Site Input EXT 21 Site Input EXT 31 Site Input EXT 41 Site Input EXT 51 Site Input EXT 61 Site Input EXT 71 Site Input EXT 81 No connection Site Output Relay 1 NO Site Output Relay 2 NO Site Output Relay 2 NC Site Output Relay 3 NO Site Output Relay 4 NO Site Output Relay 4 NC No connection Site Input EXT 12 Site Input EXT 22 Site Input EXT 32 Site Input EXT 42 Site Input EXT 52 Site Input EXT 62 Site Input EXT 72 Site Input EXT 82 Spare Site Output Relay 1 NC Site Output Relay 1 COM Site Output Relay 2 COM Site Output Relay 3 NC Site Output Relay 3 COM Site Output Relay 4 COM No connection

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 355
GMR-01
Installing power supply modules
GSM-105-423

Overview
The following describes the procedure for installing the power supply modules (PSMs) into a cabinet. The PSMs may be one of three types; two are used for dc input power systems and one for ac power input systems: S dc power input S Positive Power Supply Module (PPSM). Negative Power Supply Module (NPSM).
ac power input AC Power Supply Module (APSM) NOTE PPSMs are fitted to +27 V cabinets, and NPSMs are fitted to 48/60 V cabinets.
A further power module, the comms power supply module (CPSM) is a dc to dc converter used to switch the normal M-Cell6 dc voltage to 54 V for internal communications equipment.
DC power input modules location diagram

Figure 3-30 shows the two dc power modules. They are of identical construction and physical size and plug into a power supply rack located at the base of the indoor BTS cabinet.
BLANKING PLATE or redundant psm
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULES
Figure 3-30 Power supply rack Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 356
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power supply modules

AC Power Supply Modules (APSM) are located in the Ancillary cabinet. Figure 3-31 shows an APSM.
Figure 3-31 AC Power Supply Module (APSM)
Pre-installation
Refer to the site specific documentation before starting the installation procedure to determine the number and types of PSMs to install.
Installation procedure
To install a PSM: 1. 2. 3. 4. Unpack the PSM. Isolate the supply to the PSMs by switching the appropriate circuit breakers in the PDU to OFF. Mount each PSM in the PSU shelf assembly according to the configuration information in the site specific documentation. Repeat this procedure for all other PSMs to be installed.
Installing CPSM modules

Up to two CPSMs are located, next to APSM 5, at the left hand end of the APSM cage, in a one + one redundancy configuration. With redundancy both power supplies are diode ORed together.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 357
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Figure 3-32 shows a CPSM and location on CPSM bracket:
Figure 3-32 CPSM and CPSM mounting bracket.
To install a CPSM: 1. 2. 3. 4. Unpack the CPSM. Ensure the CPSM is the required variant. Isolate the supply to the CPSMs by switching the appropriate circuit breakers in the PDU to OFF. Plug in the CPSMs, connect up the power cable and customer alarms cable.
Inst. 358
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installing TCU modules

Overview
This section contains instructions for installing TCU modules. NOTE The term TCU used in this section is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.
Before installation
Motorola calibrate the TCU modules in the M-Cell6 cabinet, and the slot number is recorded prior to removal for shipping. Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of TCU modules and their slot positions, and take care to install each TCU in the correct slot as identified by the documentation. Cover any unused slots with a plastic air block panel.
Preparing the cabinet

To prepare the cabinet for the TCU modules: WARNING Handle the TCU module with extreme care. The TCU module weighs 9.8 kg. 1. 2. 3. Locate and unpack the TCU modules. Open the M-Cell6 cabinet door and locate the TCU shelf assembly. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the TCU shelf. The dc power cable/connector, receive coaxial cables/connectors and fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit at each TCU slot position. NOTE In some cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit. Release two 4M screws to open the conduit. 4. Remove the plastic air block panels from the TCU slots that are to receive TCU modules.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 359
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installing and connecting TCU modules

To install the TCU modules and connect power and coaxial cables: WARNING Handle the TCU module with extreme care. The TCU module weighs 9.8 kg. 1. 2. 3. 4. Grasp the TCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the other hand. Position the module in the designated slot. Insert the back of the TCU module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Make sure the module is firmly seated in the slot; it should fit snugly. Connect the dc power cable connector to the POWER connector at the bottom of the TCU front panel and secure the dc connector to the TCU by tightening the two captive screws on the connector with a flat blade screwdriver. NOTE The dc power connector is a D-subminiature connector. The connector cable is labelled TCUx, where x = TCU slot number 0 to 5. 5. Connect the coaxial cable connector to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connector near the bottom of the TCU front panel. The coaxial cable connector is an N-type connector, labelled on the cable as TCUx, where x = TCU slot number. Connect the coaxial cable connector to the TX OUT connector near the top of the TCU front panel. The coaxial cable connector is an N-type connector, labelled on the cable as TCUx, where x = TCU slot number.
6.
Inst. 360
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Figure 3-33 illustrates the front panel of a TCU and Figure 3-34 illustrates the front panel of a TCU-B, while Table 3-11 describes the front panel connectors.
Table 3-11 Front panel connectors TCU front panel legend RX IN 1 RX IN 2 TX OUT DATA IN A DATA IN B DATA OUT A DATA OUT B EXTERNAL ALARMS CNTRL PROCR TSM INFC TEST INFC VOLTAGE INPUT TCUB front panel legend RX IN 1 RX IN 2 TX OUT DATA IN A DATA IN B DATA OUT A DATA OUT B EXTERNAL ALARMS TTY INFC TEST INFC VOLTAGE INPUT Function Receiver RF input Receiver RF input Transmitter RF output Where connected IADU4 IADU CBF , CCB
Fibre optic receiver port (Rx downlink) mBCU, (FOX) Fibre optic receiver port (Rx downlink) mBCU, (FOX) Fibre optic transmit port (Tx uplink) Fibre optic transmit port (Tx uplink) Alarms input from AB6 Test connection for control processor Test connection for the TSM board Test connection for control processor Test connection for the TCU functions 27 V dc input PDU circuit breaker (RS-232 serial port) mBCU, (FOX) mBCU, (FOX) AB6 PL2 (RS-232 serial port)

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 361
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
TCU front panel diagram

Figure 3-33 shows the front panel of a TCU:
EGSM900
CAUTION
HEAT SINK MAY BE HOT TO TOUCH
TX OUT TRANSMITTER RF OUTPUT CONNECTOR

TX OUT
Tx STATUS INDICATOR
TX STATUS
DATA OUT B FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA OUT A FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA IN B FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) DATA IN A FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) RADIO STATUS INDICATOR
DATA OUT B
DATA OUT A
DATA IN B
DATA IN A
RADIO STATUS RESET
MANUAL RESET (MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON SWITCH)

EXTERNAL ALARMS SCU
EXTERNAL ALARMS
MODE SWITCH
TCU
MODE SWITCH
CNTRL PRCSR
TEST INTERFACE CONTROL PROCESSORS TTY PORT (RS-232 SERIAL PORT)
TSM INTERFACE
TSM INTFC TEST INTFC

RX IN 1 RX IN 2
VOLTAGE INPUT 2030 VDC
POWER 27 V DC INPUT
Figure 3-33 TCU front panel Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 362
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
TCU-B front panel diagram

Figure 3-34 shows the front panel of the TCU-B:
Tx OUT - TRANSMITTER RF OUTPUT CONNECTOR Tx OUT
Tx STATUS - INDICATOR DATA OUT B - FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA OUT A - FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMIT PORT (UPLINK) DATA IN B - FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) DATA IN A - FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER PORT (DOWNLINK) RADIO STATUS - INDICATOR MANUAL RESET (MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON SWITCH)
EXTERNAL ALARMS
TTY INTERFACE (RS-232 SERIAL PORT)
TEST INTERFACE
Rx IN 2 - RECEIVE RF INPUT CONNECTOR
RX IN 1 - RECEIVE RF INPUT CONNECTOR
POWER - 27 V DC INPUT (FROM PDU BREAKERS)
Figure 3-34 TCU-B front panel

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 363
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting the fibre optic cables

WARNING Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connectors. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors. To connect the fibre optic cables to the TCU modules: 1. 2. 3. Remove the protective caps from the optical connectors on the TCU front panel and from the fibre optic cable. Ensure the DATA IN and DATA OUT fibre optic cables are connected to the FOX modules. Secure the DATA IN A and DATA OUT A fibre optic cables for the appropriate slot position to the DATA IN A and DATA OUT A optical ports on the TCU front panel. Finger tighten the connectors. Fit the DATA IN B and DATA OUT B fibre optic cables, if required, and finger tighten the connectors. NOTE See the site specific documentation to determine the exact connection point for each individual TCU module. The TCU is now installed. Repeat steps 2 to 4 above for each TCU to be used in the M-Cell6 cabinet. NOTE Some earlier versions of the FMUX have been found to cause extension cabinet TCU alarms, this problem has now been rectified from revision BBD onwards. The following problems may be experienced: Failure of TCUs to come directly into service, or TCUs that were previously working to go out of service or into inhibited state. These faults can be resolved by: Replacing the FMUX for version BBD or later, see Category 523, Chapter 4, Micro base control unit module replacement. Cleaning the fibre optic, see Category 423, Chapter 3, Care of optical fibres. Replacing the fibre optic cable with the new version 3004946C20, kit number SWKN5977.
4.
Inst. 364
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mode switch
The TCU is fitted with a mode switch, located on the front panel between the control processor connector and the external alarms connector. The purpose of the mode switch is to disable the TSM board within the TCU, thus making this unit backward compatible with existing Motorola BTSs.
WARNING
When installing TCUs in an M-Cell6 cabinet, always check the position of the Mode switch. The switch MUST be set to TCU mode of operation. If set to SCU, the radio will not be brought into service and no alarm to this effect will be sent to the OMC. NOTE The TCU-B does not have a Mode switch, and cannot be used in the SCU mode of operation.
External alarms
External alarms for transmission to the OMC are collected on two cables which are plugged into Slot 0 and Slot 1 TCUs. The cable harness is constructed so that it is not possible to cross connect these two connectors.
TCU-B alarm connections

The alarm connection socket is in a different position on the TCU-B to that of the TCU, and has a different orientation. The following additional steps may be required to connect the alarm cable to the TCU-B: 1. 2. Remove the cable ties securing the alarm cables. Carefully take up any available slack on the cables. This should provide sufficient extra cable length to reach the alarm sockets.
If these steps fail to provide sufficient cable to make the connection then: S S Use the adaptor cable (3086626M01: alarm cable adaptor, TCU-B) to link between the alarm cable and the alarm socket on the front panel of the TCU. Or, Contact GSM MCSC +44 (0) 1793 430040 for further advice.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 365
GMR-01
Installing/connecting the batteries
GSM-105-423

General
WARNING Refer to the Health and Safety Warnings and Cautions contained in the battery manual.
Battery installation procedure

WARNING Each battery weighs approximately 18 kg and is considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the batteries. 1. 2. Locate and unpack the batteries as detailed in the battery manual (supplied with the batteries). Prepare the batteries for installation as detailed in the battery manual. WARNING The battery is capable of supplying high short circuit current and as such provides a high energy hazard. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Ensure that the battery isolator (BATTERY) on the dc distribution panel is in the OFF position. Remove the four M6 screws securing the battery panel, and lift off the panel. Loosen the battery securing bracket, using a 17 mm insulated spanner. Locate, unpack and prepare the battery as detailed in the manufacturers manual supplied with the battery. Position the batteries in the battery tray as per the labels on the bottom of the tray, and bolt the inter-bloc connecting link between the four batteries using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to a torque of 1.5 Nm
Inst. 366
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery connection procedure

CAUTION The battery connectors are now different sizes to prevent reverse-polarity connection. However caution must still be exercised to prevent accidental reverse contact which could result in damage to the equipment. 1. Remove the insulating tape from the battery cables. Bolt the red cable to the battery positive terminal and the black cable to the negative common battery terminal using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to a torque of 1.5 Nm. Apply no-oxide grease to the battery terminals, taking care not to allow the grease to contact any plastic components on the lid assembly. Refit the terminal covers to each terminal and the plastic covers on each monobloc. Fit the cell number marker labels provided with the battery to the monoblocs, starting at the positive end of each monobloc string. Place the temperature sensor in the space between the two centre monoblocs. Refit and secure the battery box front cover and secure with four M6 screws.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 367
GMR-01
Connecting the HMS
GSM-105-423
Connecting the HMS

Overview
The M-Cell6 may be fitted with a Heat Management System (HMS). There are two types of HMS: the heat exchanger or the air conditioner. This section provides the procedures to connect power, earth and control cables from the BTS and ancillary cabinet to the HMS equipment.
Heat exchanger connection panel diagram

Figure 3-35 shows a connection panel on an M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger:
27V DC
EARTH CONNECTOR
Figure 3-35 M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger connection panel.
Heat exchanger connections

Table 3-12 details the M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger connectors: Table 3-12 M-Cell6 heat exchanger connections Connector 25 pin D-type 3 pin D-type 9 pin D-type +/27 V terminals Earth terminal Function Signals and Alarms Fan power out Test HMS power supply Ground HMS cabinet Internal destination Control and Alarm board Control and Alarm board Control and Alarm board Control and Alarm board/Heaters # External destination Top panel BTS cabinet fan PC (RS232 link) Top panel of the ancillary cabinet Top panel
See Figure 3-36 for layout of the HMS heat exchanger. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 368
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting the HMS
Heat exchanger internal view diagram

Figure 3-36 shows the internal view of the HMS heat exchanger:
RECUPERATOR
HMS control board
power entry board ambient air fanS
fan controller boardS
heater relays
Heater elements
RECUPERATOR
Figure 3-36 M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger layout

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 369
GMR-01
Connecting the HMS
GSM-105-423
Air conditioner connection panel diagram

Figure 3-37 shows an HMS air conditioner connection panel:
27V DC
EARTH CONNECTOR
AIR CONDITIONER CONNECTOR
Figure 3-37 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner connection panel
Air conditioner connections

Table 3-13 details the air conditioner connectors: Table 3-13 M-Cell6 air conditioner connections Connector 25 pin D-type 3 pin D-type 9 pin D-type Earth terminal ac supply plug Function Signals and Alarms Fan power out Test Ground HMS cabinet Air conditioner power supply Internal destination Control board Control board Control board # A-C control board External destination Top panel BTS cabinet fan PC (RS232 link) Top panel CB 4 (ac supply input panel)
See Figure 3-38 for layout of the HMS air conditioner.
Inst. 370
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting the HMS

Figure 3-38 shows the internal view of the HMS air conditioner:
HMS control board
power entry board
RECUPERATOR
ambient air fan
Heater elements
heater relays
fan controller board
Figure 3-38 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner layout

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 371
GMR-01
Connecting input power
GSM-105-423
Connecting input power

Pre-connection checks
At this point in the installation, ensure that: S S The cabinet(s) are not already connected to the main dc or ac power source. The cabinet(s) are connected to the ac or dc power cabling.
Connecting dc power
To connect dc power to a cabinet: WARNING Do not wear an anti static wrist strap while servicing the power supplies or power distribution cabling, as serious personal injury can result. The external converter that supplies the cabinet must have double or reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits, and must conform to Safety Standard EN60 950. CAUTION Perform any adjustments recommended by the manufacturer on the main power supply equipment before connecting dc power cables to the main dc power source. Input to the base station must remain between 20 V and 30 V under all load conditions for nominal +27 V dc operation. Input to the base station must remain between 40 V and 60 V dc for 48 V dc operation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn off the main dc power supply. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present. Connect the positive lead of the input dc power cable to the positive terminal of the main dc power supply. See Installing power and earth cabling. Connect the negative lead of the input dc power cable to the negative terminal of the main dc power supply. See Installing power and earth cabling.
Connecting ac power
The Request for connection certificate should have been sent to the local electricity supplier when the equipment left the manufacturers. S S Ensure that the Request for connection certificate and the Forms of completion and inspection certificate have been sent to the local electricity supplier. Ensure that the equipment doors are open when the electricity supplier representative is in attendance. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 372
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Care of fibre optic cables

Overview
WARNING Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or the data in/out connectors with or without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors. Optical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of glass coated by a cladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer protective sheath which provides mechanical protection. The fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly light must be propagated with minimal losses from end-to-end of the fibre. A number of problems can prevent this from happening, resulting in a potentially faulty link. Care must be taken to ensure that the following conditions are met:
Minimum bend radius

All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest circle that is allowed to be formed from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can be coiled, looped or bent. CAUTION Under no circumstances should fibres be bent tighter than the minimum bend radius. If fibres are bent tighter than the minimum bend radius then two possible effects can happen: S S Excessive light loss can occur from the outside of the bend, resulting in a loss of performance. The fibre can fracture due to microscopic imperfections in the surface. This type of break is invisible externally. If such a break occurs, excessive light loss would be permanent and light would be scattered and reflected from the break in the fibre. Returning the fibre to straight will not help and the whole assembly will require replacement.
For glass fibres (orange or green outer sheath) the long term minimum bend radius is approximately 30 mm.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 373
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Minimum bend radius diagram
30 mm
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
Figure 3-39 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm If the fibre is under tension (being stretched), the bend radius should be much larger, at least doubled. This is because the tension in the fibre can increase the possibilities of damage. If in doubt about the radius, the fibre should be allowed to form its natural bend radius by allowing it to bend under gravity only. This natural bend radius is normally greater than 30 mm.
Protecting fibres and connectors

To maintain good light transmission through the fibre optic link it is essential to maintain cleanliness of the connector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends. At all times when fibres are not connected into the system, the connector protective caps (normally red) should be fitted and kept in place. This is especially important when routeing fibres during installation.
Inst. 374
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Cleaning fibres and connectors

Cleanliness of fibre terminations and connectors is essential. If cleaning of contaminated optical components is required, then all areas should just be gently wiped with a lint-free cloth. NOTE Lintfree cloth is the preferred cleaning material as it causes minimal risk of contamination or damage during the cleaning process. Soft clean cotton cloth cloth may be used in exceptional circumstances. Recommended cleaning materials are: S S Kimberly Clark Kimwipes EX-L or Kaydry EX-L. 3M lint-free cloth. CAUTION Do not use cotton buds and Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) solutions. Cotton buds can leave lint deposits on the fibre, and IPA may result in the fibre still being wet when connected. Care should be taken to ensure the ends of the fibres are not scratched in any way.
Connecting glass fibre cables

Fibre-SMA connectors are used to terminate the fibre optic cables. These should be tightened to hand-tight only when connecting. CAUTION Under no circumstances should any tools such as pliers or spanners be used to tighten SMA fibre connectors.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 375
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 376
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 4
M-Cell6 installation with additional equipment cabinet and battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
General installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.048 Mbit/s line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS ac cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dismantling the shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting M-Cell6 indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cell6 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting bolts and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the ac power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breaker internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker ac connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment cabinet and battery box installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinets and battery boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional equipment and battery box external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing and front cabinet power and earth cable setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cable fixings diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cabinet power cable set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box: rear view internal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the top panel additional cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Inst. 41 Inst. 41 Inst. 42 Inst. 42 Inst. 42 Inst. 43 Inst. 43 Inst. 44 Inst. 45 Inst. 46 Inst. 47 Inst. 47 Inst. 47 Inst. 48 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 49 Inst. 410 Inst. 410 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 411 Inst. 412 Inst. 413 Inst. 413 Inst. 414 Inst. 414 Inst. 414 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 415 Inst. 416 Inst. 416 Inst. 417 Inst. 417 Inst. 418 Inst. 419 Inst. 419 Inst. 419 Inst. 420 Inst. 421 Inst. 422 Inst. 423 Inst. 424 Inst. 424 Inst. 425 Inst. 426 Inst. 427 Inst. 428 Inst. 428

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, additional equipment cabinet and battery box. NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of such equipment may include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to site-specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with non-Motorola equipment. Before starting an installation, ensure the site has been prepared according to the description in this category, chapter 2, site-specific documentation. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 41
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installation steps
This chapter deals with the installation of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS power interface modules, additional equipment cabinet, battery boxes and relevant equipment only. In order to perform a full installation for the remaining equipment, consult the existing BTS Service Manual M-Cell6 installation chapter. This installation comprises the sections listed in Table 4-1: Table 4-1 Installation details Section Equipment delivery and packaging Unpacking the cabinet Mounting M-Cell6 indoor cabinets Earthing and transient protection Power distribution unit Top panel connections Power and earth cabling Installing the ac power supply Installing the battery boxes and additional equipment cabinet Top panel interconnections Comms power supply module CAUTION Ensure that all site equipment associated with an M-Cell6 is completely installed before commissioning the equipment for operation. Description General information about how the M-Cell6 equipment is packaged and delivered to the customer site. Describes how to unpack the equipment. Complete procedures for physically mounting an M-Cell6 cabinet. Details site earthing procedures. Details the power distribution unit (PDU). Details inter-cabinet cabling Details the power connection, distribution and cabling for M-Cell6. Details procedures for power supply installations. Details of battery installation and additional equipment cabinet. Details the cable connections between the M-Cell6 and additional equipment cabinet. Details the procedure for installing a CPSM.

Torque values
Use the torque values listed in Table 2-2 (chapter 2 Site preparation of category 423), when installing M-Cell6 equipment.
Inst. 42
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor BTS ac cabinet configurations

Indoor BTS ac cabinet
All RF, data connections and earth cables to the M-Cell6 indoor BTS ac cabinet are at the top panel. This panel has a feedthrough tube for routeing the fibre optic cables in and out of the cabinet; there is a further feedthrough tube for routeing ac supply cables to the ac power interface module (ACPIM). Figure 4-1 shows an internal view of an M-Cell6 indoor BTS ac cabinet and equipment, with the door removed for clarity.
mBCU 0 CAGE
Figure 4-1 M-Cell6 indoor BTS ac cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 43
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

The additional equipment cabinet is a metal enclosure housing up to three duplexers and RF filters (customer specified). The cabinet is accessed by a front panel hinged door. The top panel interfaces with the battery boxes and BTS, providing power connections, communication signals and monitor signals. Figure 4-2 shows an internal view of additional equipment cabinet, with the door opened.
ENCLOSURE DOOR TOP PANEL (only required with battery boxes)
DUPLEXERS RF MOUNTING BRACKET FILTERS
Figure 4-2 M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet
Inst. 44
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box front view

Figure 4-3 shows the an internal view of the M-Cell6 battery box with the door and cabinet enclosure removed for clarity.
DC DISTRIBUTION AREA CPSM FUSE
Output Battery MCCB MCBs CONTROL BOARD
SBS60 MONOBLOCKS (4 off total capacity)
Front View
CPSM 0 OUTPUT ECB CPSM 1 OUTPUT ECB
0
1
0
1
PROTECTIVE COVER
CPSM 0
CPSM 1
CPSM 1 POWER INPUT ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTOR CPSM 0 POWER INPUT
Figure 4-3 M-Cell6 battery box and CPSMs NOTE The CPSM assembly is an optional item and only used in the master battery box.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 45
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box rear view

Figure 4-4 shows the rear view of the M-Cell6 battery box.
M10 EARTH STUD
BTS 2 BATTERY FEED
REAR VIEW
CPSM POWER OUTPUT
Figure 4-4 M-Cell6 rear view of battery box
Inst. 46
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
Packaging
LID
METAL CLIP
SIDE
SIDE
SIDE
BASE SIDE
Figure 4-5 Typical shipping crate detail NOTE A different packaging arrangement has been used for M-Cell6 equipment supplied since 1998. The equipment is shipped on a pallet, protected by a cardboard sleeve. If the equipment is re-installed at a different site, it is recommended that this packaging is re-used.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 47
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Equipment
Cabinet equipment
M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet equipment includes: S S S S S S S S Cabinet interconnect panel. DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment. mBCU shelves. Cooling fan assemblies. All intra-cabinet cabling. Additional equipment cabinet. ac power interface module (ACPIM). Battery box. NOTE Units packaged separately include: S S S S TCU modules. Batteries. High power duplexers. Additional equipment cabinet top panel.
Inst. 48
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment. NOTE It is recommended that the installer read through the following procedures before starting to unpack and install the equipment.
Tools

NOTE The clips and banding must not be thrown away, put them in a safe place where they will not be lost. Return the clips and banding with the shipping crate. To dismantle a shipping crate: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cut the recyclable plastic banding that secures the wooden crate. Remove the metal clips securing the lid of the crate. Lift the lid free of the crate. Remove the metal clips that secure the sides of the crate. Lift the sides free of the crate. The crate is now dismantled ready for unpacking.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 49
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Unpacking procedure

The packing material used is returnable and is re-used for packing new equipment. To return the packing material: 1. 2. 3. Put all the clips in a bag with the banding, desiccant bag, and barrier bag. Put the bag with the lid, sides and base of the cabinet. Return the dismantled crate for re-use, as advised by the Project Manager.
Inst. 410
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting M-Cell6 indoor cabinets

Overview
The following procedures describe the mounting of M-Cell6 indoor cabinets. The standard installation of an indoor M-Cell6 is to mount and bolt the cabinets directly to a flat concrete base prepared for cabinet mounting.
M-Cell6 cabinets
An M-Cell6 BTS indoor site comprises the following cabinets: S S S S 1 x BTS (6-carrier site). 2 x BTS (12-carrier site). 3 x BTS (18-carrier site). 4 x BTS (24-carrier site).
Tools
The following tools are required to mount the M-Cell6 cabinets: S S S S S Screwdriver set. Spirit level. Socket set. Torque wrench. Lifting straps or eyebolts and suitable hydraulic lift gear.

Table 4-2 details the bolts and washers are required to mount the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, additional equipment cabinet and battery box: Table 4-2 M-Cell6 cabinet mounting bolts Purpose M-Cell6 cabinet to concrete floor M-Cell6 master battery box to concrete floor M-Cell6 slave battery box to master battery box M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet to slave battery box Bolts Washers Size M12 Rawlbolts (not supplied) M12 Rawlbolts (not supplied) M12 x 30 M12 x 30
4 4 (Not supplied) (Not supplied) 4 4 (Not supplied) (Not supplied) 4 4 (Not supplied) (Not supplied) 4 4 (Not supplied) (Not supplied)

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 411
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
For each of the cabinets to be installed, consider the following notes:
WARNING
Inst. 412
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet

To mount the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet: WARNING An unequipped M-Cell6 BTS cabinet can weigh up to 153 kg. Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each cabinet with extreme caution to avoid tipping. NOTE For ease of handling and also to improve access, the cabinet door can be removed simply by removing the three hinge pins and the door earthing strap. 1. 2. 3. 4. Place the BTS cabinet on the floor location and line up the fixing holes in the base of the cabinet. Place a flat washer onto each M12 mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten yet. Using a spirit level, verify that the cabinet is level. Tighten up all bolts to the correct torque. NOTE The setting of the torque value is determinate on local conditions. Refer to the manufacturers data for correct values.
Mounting the additional equipment cabinet and battery box

At this stage, the additional equipment cabinet and battery box should not be mounted on the concrete floor. Instructions for this are given at the appropriate stage of the installation procedure.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 413
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Site earthing
This manual summarises general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to the Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations instructions, 68P81150E62, for detailed earthing information. WARNING Each cabinet must be earthed. S S S S The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its power source). Provision should be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to the cabinet before beginning the installation of the system cabinets. There is an earthing terminal (stud) located on the interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Refer to the site-specific documentation for detailed site earthing information.

Inst. 414
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installing the ac power supply

Overview
This section contains instructions for installing ac power supply modules.
Before installation
Before the ac power supply modules (ACPMs) can be fitted to the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, an air baffle and an ac power interface module (ACPIM) circuit breaker cover have to be removed and a power cable has to be fitted inside the cabinet.
Preparing the ac power interface

To prepare the ac power interface for the ac power supply modules: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Locate and remove the air baffle (see Figure 4-1) using a T30 Torxdriver (retain the two M6 screws). Release the four M3 screws securing the circuit breaker cover from the ac power interface by using a T10 Torxdriver. Remove the flexible plastic conduit on the bottom of the cabinet from its fixing positions. Remove the circuit breaker cover and place in a secure location. Remove redundant ac cable (Figure 4-7). NOTE Although not normally required, the circuit breakers unit can be removed by two methods in order to aid the process. The preferred method is to loosen the captive screws securing the circuit breakers to the din bar and then pull out the unit. Alternatively, place a screwdriver between the retaining clip and exerting slight downwards pressure; the circuit breakers unit should then be released from its securing. 6. Feed the new double insulated ac power cable through the plastic conduit.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 415
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power interface module diagram

Figure 4-6 illustrates a front view of the ac power interface module.
CONNECTING FIXTURES SIGNAL OUTPUT 9 WAY CONNECTOR LED NEON LAMP
M3 SCREW
DC
AC
CB1 63A
AC CABLE (double shielded)
DIN41612
CIRCUIT BREAKER COVER
Figure 4-6 ac power interface module
AC circuit breaker internal view diagram

Figure 4-7 illustrates a front view of the circuit breaker with front cover removed, showing redundant ac cable.
CAPTIVE SCREW DIN BAR RELIEF BAR GREEN/YELLOW (earth)
BLUE (neutral)
RETAINING CLIP BROWN (live)
Figure 4-7 Circuit breaker connections Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 416
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power cable installation

To fit the ac power cable to the circuit breaker: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect, line, neutral and earth wires to the ac power interface circuit breaker. Slide plastic conduit into fixing position. Fasten a cable tie through the plastic clip to the loose wires, then take up the strain and secure the clip to a relief bar. Fit the cable gland holding the three core cable into its location and tighten it to secure it in position. Slot the plastic conduit cable into the plastic clip positions (situated around the inner cabinet left side and inner cabinet bottom) in order to take up slack. Refit the ac power interface module circuit breaker cover, and secure with four M3 screws. Secure ac supply cable leading from the plastic conduit top panel to a brace and fixings above the cabinet (not shown) and take up the strain.
Circuit breaker ac connection diagram

Figure 4-8 illustrates the connection between the ac cable and circuit breaker.
DIN BAR GREEN/YELLOW (earth) RETAINING CLIP BROWN (live) PLASTIC CONDUIT
CAPTIVE SCREW BLUE (neutral) RELIEF BAR PLASTIC CLIP CABLE GLAND
FIXING POSITION
Figure 4-8 ac power cable fixture

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 417
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ACPM installation
To fit the ACPM into the ac power interface module: NOTE A minimum of two and a maximum of five ACPMs can be fitted to the ACPIM. 1. For each ACPM to be fitted, start from the right, offer the ACPM to its location, then gently push it home, ensuring that the pcb is engaged into the card guides of the ACPIM. Using a flatbladed screwdriver, tighten the spring-loaded captive screw alongside the handle on the front panel of the ACPM. CAUTION Never use less than two ACPMs to power the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS. 3. 4. Refit the air baffle using a T30 Torxdriver and two M6 x 20 screws. Close M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS panel door.
2.
Inst. 418
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Additional equipment cabinet and battery box installation

Overview
This section contains instructions for installing the battery boxes and additional equipment cabinet.
Before installation
Before the slave battery box can be installed, the plastic feet have to be removed using an allen key. NOTE The master battery box needs to have the feet attached, while the additional equipment cabinet is not provided with attached feet.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 419
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Preparing the cabinets and battery boxes

WARNING The battery boxes each weigh approximately 60 kg and are considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the battery boxes. The following procedure describes how to connect up the battery boxes and additional equipment cabinet. NOTE The master battery box differs to the slave battery box in that only the master can contain the communications power supply module (CPSM), (see inside door). 1. 2. Position the slave battery box over master battery box. Open slave battery box cabinet panel door, remove the three M6 screws securing the battery maintenance handle using a T20 Torx screwdriver and put in a safe place. Remove the remaining three M6 screws securing the battery panel using a T20 Torx screwdriver and put the panel in a safe place.. Feed the supplied four M12 washers and bolts (not supplied) through slave battery box floor connector positions to master battery box top connector positions. Tighten bolts to a torque of 40 Nm. WARNING The additional equipment cabinet weighs approximately 35 kg +/ 10 kg and is considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the additional equipment cabinet. 5. 6. Position the additional equipment cabinet on the slave battery box and open additional equipment cabinet panel door Feed supplied four M12 washers and bolts through additional equipment cabinet floor connector positions to slave battery top connector positions. Tighten bolts to a torque of 40 Nm. Unpack additional equipment cabinet top panel. Place cables leading from top panel into additional equipment cabinet top, allow cables to run into cabinet. Align fixing positions of top panel to fixing positions of additional equipment cabinet top rim and secure top panel to additional equipment cabinet with six M6 x 12 screws to a torque of 3.4 Nm. NOTE Do not secure the master battery box to the concrete floor at this stage.
3. 4.
7. 8. 9.
Inst. 420
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Additional equipment and battery box external view diagram

Figure 4-9 shows the M-Cell6 additional cabinet and battery box external view:
Figure 4-9 M-Cell6 indoor additional equipment cabinet and battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 421
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Earthing and front cabinet power and earth cable setup

The following procedure describes how to configure the earth cables at the front and rear of the cabinets and front power cables. See Figure 4-10. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect earth cable to top inside right edge and top side of additional equipment cabinet with 15 mm socket screws . Place additional equipment cabinet and battery box to a position where easy access can be made to the rear of the unit. Remove six M4 x 10 countersunk screws securing back plates of each battery box with T20 Torx screwdriver. Remove panels and place in safe location with the countersunk screws. Connect two earth cables to the slave battery box earth stud using 15 mm socket screws. Take one cable into the additional equipment cabinet and then connect the remaining cable to the earth stud on the master battery box. NOTE Each battery box is supplied with its earth cable fixed to its earth stud. 6. Secure the earth cable entering the rear of the additional equipment cabinet to the earth stud on the front facing position of the backing plate (behind the duplexer position) with 15 mm socket screws. Remove power cables from container package. There are two 3086707E02 cables and two 3086707E03 cables. Secure the two 3086707E02 cables to the upper additional equipment cabinet fixing plate (A and B), (from right side facing front of cabinet) with two M6 x 40 mm screws for each cable to torque of 3.4 Nm . Secure the two 3086707E03 cables to the upper additional equipment cabinet fixing plate (D and C), (from left side facing front of cabinet) with two M6 x 40 mm screws for each cable to torque of 3.4 Nm. Secure the power cables with cable ties and connect to fixing positions.
7. 8.
9.
10.
Inst. 422
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Power and earth cable fixings diagram

Figure 4-10 illustrates the power cable and tie wrap fixing positions within the additional equipment cabinet.
D C B A M6 x 40 SCREW (2 off) EARTH CABLE
EARTH STUD BLACK POWER CABLE TIE WRAP AND FIXING POSITION
RED POWER CABLE
E03
E03
E02
E02
TIE WRAP AND FIXING POSITION
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT CABINET REAR EARTH STUD
REAR PANEL EARTH CABLE/LINK
BTS 2 (slave)
BATTERY BOX 2 BTS 1 (slave) C
BTS 2 (master)
BATTERY BOX 1
BTS 1 (master)
FRONT VIEW
Figure 4-10 Power and earth cable fixing positions

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 423
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Rear cabinet power cable set-up

The following procedure describes how to connect the power cables to the rear battery boxes. See Figure 4-11. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Feed the four power cables to the rear of the additional equipment cabinet and thread through gap so that they hang over the battery boxes. Connect longest power cable (Figure 4-10 (A)) of type 3086707E02 to master battery BTS 1 connector (Figure 4-11 (A)). Connect remaining power cable (Figure 4-10 (B)) of type 3086707E02 to master battery BTS 2 connector (Figure 4-11 (B)). Connect longest power cable (Figure 4-10 (C)) of type 3086707E03 to slave battery BTS 1 connector (Figure 4-11 (C)). Connect remaining power cable (Figure 4-10 (D)) of type 3086707E03 to slave battery BTS 2 connector (Figure 4-11 (D)). Tie wrap power cables and connect to tie wrap fixing positions.
Battery box: rear view internal diagram

Figure 4-11 illustrates the rear view of both battery boxes with rear panel removed.
BTS 2 BATTERY FEED M10 EARTH STUD 3086707E03 (cable connector) C D ALARM CONNECTOR BATTERY CABINET EMERGENCY STOP CONNECTOR CPSM POWER OUTPUT 3086707E03 (cable connector)
BTS 1 BATTERY FEED BTS 2 BATTERY FEED
SLAVE
ALARM CONNECTOR M10 EARTH STUD BATTERY 3086707E02 (cable connector) 3086707E02 (cable connector) A B CABINET EMERGENCY STOP CONNECTOR CPSM POWER OUTPUT
BTS 1 BATTERY FEED
MASTER
Figure 4-11 Rear view of battery boxes Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 424
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Connecting the top panel additional cables

The following procedure describes how to connect up the alarm/signal, battery stop cables and communications power supply module (CPSM) power cables to the rear battery box connectors. 1. 2. 3. Facing the front of the additional equipment cabinet, unfasten the additional cables connecting the top panel. Feed and clamp designated cables for the master batter box down the nearest inside left edge using the fixed clamps secured to the cabinet. Once the cables have reached the floor of the cabinet, pass them to the rear of the cabinet and then using the fixed clamps, clamp down the cables onto the cabinet floor in order to take up slack. Pass the cables through the rear gap and leave to hang over rear battery boxes. Feed and clamp designated cables for the slave batter box down the furthest inside left edge using the fixed clamps secured to the cabinet. Once the cables have reached the floor of the cabinet, using the fixed clamps, clamp down the cables onto the cabinet floor in order to take up slack. Pass the cables through the rear gap and leave to hang over rear battery boxes. Facing the rear of the additional equipment cabinet and battery box, connect up the alarm/signal cables to the sockets on the master and slave battery boxes (Figure 4-11). Remove the emergency stop links from the master and slave battery box and replace them in position on the top panel (NO TAG) Emergency Stop 1 and 2 connectors. Connect the emergency stop cables to the master and slave battery box sockets (Figure 4-11). NOTE There is no CPSM in the slave battery box. 11. 12. Connect the CPSM cable socket to the marked socket on the master battery box (Figure 4-11). Use the cable clamps (inside the additional equipment cabinet) and P clips (on the rear of the battery box), to tidy up the cables and to take up any remaining slack.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 425
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Securing the cabinet

The following procedure secures the additional equipment cabinet and battery box to the concrete floor. 1. Refit each battery box back plate and secure with six M4 x 10 screws for each box using a T20 Torx screwdriver to a torque of 3.4 Nm. WARNINGS The additional equipment cabinet weighs approximately 35 kg +/ 10 kg and each battery box weighs 60 kg. They are considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when positioning them. NOTE The additional equipment cabinet and battery box front panels should be facing in the same direction as the front panel on the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet. 2. 3. 4. 5. Position additional cabinet and battery box assembly on the floor location and line up the fixing holes in the base of the master battery box. Place a flat M12 washer onto each mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten yet. Using a spirit level, verify that the cabinet is level. Tighten up all bolts to the required torque. NOTE The setting of the torque value is determinate on local conditions. Refer to the manufacturers data for correct values. 6. Secure the top of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, additional equipment cabinet and battery box assembly with the two cabinet brace brackets and fixings.
Inst. 426
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

The following procedure describes how to fit the batteries to the master battery box and slave battery box. Both procedures are identical. WARNING Refer to the Health and Safety Warnings and Cautions contained in the battery manual. Two battery boxes are required (with four batteries for each box). Each of the four batteries weighs approximately 18 kg and are considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the batteries.
NOTE The battery panels of battery boxes 1 and 2 should have been removed before attaching the additional equipment cabinet to the slave battery box. If this has been done ignore steps 4 to 6. If this is a separate procedure include steps 4 to 6. 1. 2. Locate and unpack the batteries as detailed in the battery manual (supplied with the batteries). Prepare the batteries for installation as detailed in the battery manual. WARNING The battery is capable of supplying high short circuit current and as such provides a high energy hazard. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Ensure that the battery isolators (BATTERY) on the dc distribution panel is in the OFF position. Remove the three M6 screws securing the battery maintenance handle with a T20 Torx screwdriver (also see NOTE above), as identified in Figure 4-12. Remove the remaining three M6 screws securing the battery panel, as identified in Figure 4-12, and lift off the panel (also see NOTE above). Loosen the battery securing bracket, using a 17 mm insulated spanner. Locate, unpack and prepare the battery as detailed in the manufacturers manual supplied with the battery. Position the batteries in the battery tray as per the labels on the bottom of the tray, and bolt the inter-bloc connecting link between the four batteries using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to a torque of 1.5 Nm

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 427
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

CAUTION The battery connectors are now different sizes to prevent reverse-polarity connection. However caution must still be exercised to prevent accidental reverse contact which could result in damage to the equipment. 1. Remove the insulating tape from the battery cables. Bolt the red cable to the battery positive terminal and the black cable to the negative common battery terminal using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to the correct torque by referring to the schedule of torque settings given in Table 2-2. Apply non-oxide grease to the battery terminals, taking care not to allow the grease to contact any plastic components on the lid assembly. Refit the terminal covers to each terminal and the plastic covers on each monobloc. Fit the cell number marker labels provided with the battery to the monoblocs, starting at the positive end of each monobloc string. Place the temperature sensor in the space between the two centre monoblocs and secure in position. Refit and secure the battery panel using three M6 screws, as identified in Figure 4-12. Refit and secure the battery box maintenance handle using three M6 screws, as identified in Figure 4-12.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Battery box front view diagram

Figure 4-12 shows the front view of the battery box:
M 4 x 16 SCREW (6 off) BATTERY PANEL MAINTENANCE HANDLE
Figure 4-12 Front view of battery panel, maintenance handle and screw fixtures
Inst. 428
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Top panel interconnections

Indoor BTS ac cabinet top panel
This section describes how to connect up the cables from the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS top panel leading to the additional equipment top panel. Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14 illustrate the top panels of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS and additional equipment cabinet. Figure 4-15 illustrates the configurations for up to four M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS units and two battery boxes. The details of the connectors illustrated in Figure 4-13 can be located in NO TAG.
MS0
MS1
CBF2
CBF1
CBF0
CCB1 AC POWER CABLE PLASTIC CONDUIT FEEDTHROUGH HOLE
CCB0 FIBRE OPTIC CABL FEED-THROUGH T
CCB POWER GPS
Figure 4-13 M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS top panel (EGSM900 type)
NOTE A DCS1800/PCS1900 top panel (NO TAG) can be connected up to the the additional equipment cabinet using the same procedure outlined in this section.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 429
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Figure 4-14 illustrates the connectors on the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS top panel. The details of the connectors can be located in NO TAG.
BATTERY BOX 2 BATTERY BOX 1
D
BTS 2 BTS 4 EMERGENCY STOP BATT BOX 2 EMERGENCY STOP BATT BOX 1 COMMS POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT BATT BOX 2 ALARMS
C
LINK BTS 3
B
LINK BTS 2
A
BTS 1 BTS 1
(cell outputs)
BATTERY BOX POWER OUTPUTS
BATT BOX 1 ALARMS
BATTERY BOX (with cells C & D)
SLAVE (2)
BATTERY BOX (with cells A & B) MASTER (1)
(REAR VIEW OF BATTERY BOX)
Figure 4-14 Additional equipment cabinet top panel and battery boxes cell configurations
Inst. 430
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
One BTS and one battery box

When one M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS is used and one battery box: 1. Select the power cable 3086708E03 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 1 to the battery box power output BTS 1 (A) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select alarm cable 3086556E02 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 1 to the BATT BOX 1 connector on the additional equipment cabinet top panel.
2.
One BTS and two battery boxes

When one M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS is used with two battery boxes: 1. Select the power cable 3086708E03 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 1 to the battery box power output BTS 1 (A) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the link power cable 3086707E04 and connect up to the link positions (B and D) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Remove jumper cable assembly 3086710E01 from alarm cable 3086556E02 and store. Select alarm cable 3086556E02 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 1 to the BATT BOX 1 and 2 connectors on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. NOTE If only one battery box is populated with batteries, do not remove the jumper from cable 3086556E02 and do not connect to BATT BOX 2 connector.
2. 3. 4.
Two BTS units and one battery box

When two M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS units are used with one battery box: 1. Select the power cable 3086708E03 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 1 to the battery box power output BTS 1 (A) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E04 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 2 (B) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select alarm cable 3086529E02 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 1 along with the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) on the BTS 2; then connect the BATT BOX 1 connector on the additional equipment cabinet top panel.
2.
3.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 431
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Two BTS units and two battery boxes

When two M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS units are used with two battery boxes: 1. Select the power cable 3086708E03 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 1 to the battery box power output BTS 1 (A) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E04 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 2 (D) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the link power cable 3086707E04 and connect up to the link positions (B and C) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Remove jumper cable assembly 3086710E01 from alarm cable 3086529E02 and store. Select alarm cable 3086529E02 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 1 along with the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) on the BTS 2; then connect to the BATT BOX 1 and 2 connectors on the additional equipment cabinet top panel.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Three BTS units and two battery boxes

When three M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS units are used with two battery boxes: 1. Select the power cable 3086708E03 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 1 to the battery box power output BTS 1 (A) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E04 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 2 (B) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E01 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 3 (C) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select alarm cable 3086529E02 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 1, along with the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) on the BTS 2. Ensure the connector which would have linked to the additional equipment BATT BOX 2 connector (on a one or two BTS system as described above) is blanked with alarm jumper cable assembly 3086710E01 (originally supplied with the cable); then connect the remaining cable to the BATT BOX 1 connector on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select alarm cable 3086529E03 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 3 and tie back the other connector to BTS 4 (which is not required). Ensure the connector which would have linked to the additional equipment BATT BOX 2 connector (on a one or two BTS system as described above) is blanked with alarm jumper cable assembly 3086710E01 (originally supplied with the cable); then connect the remaining cable to the BATT BOX 2 connector on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inst. 432
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Four BTS units and two battery boxes

When four M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS units are used with two battery boxes: 1. Select the power cable 3086708E03 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 1 to the battery box power output BTS 1 (A) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E04 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 2 (B) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E01 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 3 (C) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select the power cable 3086708E05 and connect up the POWER SUPPLY INPUT on BTS 2 to the battery box power output BTS 4 (D) on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select alarm cable 3086529E02 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 1 along with the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) on the BTS 2. Ensure the connector which would have linked to the additional equipment BATT BOX 2 connector (on a one or two BTS system as described above) is blanked with alarm jumper cable assembly 3086710E01 (originally supplied with the cable); then connect the remaining cable to the BATT BOX 1 connector on the additional equipment cabinet top panel. Select alarm cable 3086529E03 and connect up the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) and the PIX0 on the BTS 3 along with the BATT BOX ALARMS (INDOOR) on the BTS 4. Ensure the connector which would have linked to the additional equipment BATT BOX 2 connector (on a one or two BTS system as described above) is blanked with alarm jumper cable assembly 3086710E01 (originally supplied with the cable); then connect the remaining cable to the BATT BOX 2 connector on the additional equipment cabinet top panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 433
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box interconnection details

Figure 4-15 details the battery box cell power output connections, and identifies the cables to use for each configuration: NOTE In two settings, battery cell outputs B and D are linked together.
BTS BATT BOX
BTS 1
BTS 2
BTS 1
N/A
D C B BTS 1 A D BTS 2 C B A
N/A
BTS 1
BTS 2 BTS 1 BTS 3
BTS 3 BTS 2 BTS 1 BTS 4
2
LINK D C B A LINK D C B A
ALARM CABLES
3086556E02
3086529E02
3086529E02 3086529E03
3086529E02 3086529E03
POWER LINK CABLES
3086707E04
3086707E04
N/A
N/A
POWER CABLES
3086708E03
3086708E03 3086708E04
3086708E03 3086708E04 3086708E01
3086708E03 3086708E04 3086708E01 3086708E05
Figure 4-15 Battery box and BTS configuration Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 434
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box output connection details

Figure 4-16 details the battery boxes 1 and 2 and cells A to D, the outputs feed directly to the additional equipment cabinet top panel.
BATTERY BOX 2 (with cells C & D) C D BATTERY BOX 1 (with cells A & B) A B
(REAR VIEW OF BATTERY BOXES) Figure 4-16 Battery box cell configuration

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 435
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Duplexer configurations
Figure 4-17 illustrates up to three BTS and duplexer combinations.
RX PORT BTS 1 DLNB TX PORT 1 BTS AND 1 DUPLEXER CCB CCB 3086106M01 BTS 2 3086107M01 BTS-1
RX PORT CCB DLNB CCB CCB DLNB CCB TX PORT
3086106M01 2 BTSs AND 2 DUPLEXERS 3086106M02 3086107M02 BTS 3 BTS 2 BTS 1 3086107M01
RX PORT CCB DLNB CCB CCB DLNB CCB CCB DLNB CCB TX PORT
3086106M01 3 BTSs AND 3 DUPLEXERS 3086106M03 3086107M03 3086107M01 3086106M02 3086107M02
Figure 4-17 BTS and duplexer combinations Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 436
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
One BTS and one duplexer

When one M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS is used with one duplexer: 1. Select RF high powered cable 3086106M01 and connect up to Rx input of duplexer-1 within the additional equipment cabinet and Rx output of dual low noise block (DLNB) on top panel of BTS 1. Select RF high powered cable 3086107M01 and connect up to Tx input of duplexer within the additional equipment cabinet and cavity combiner block (CCB) Tx output.
2.
Two BTSs and two duplexers

When two M-Cell6 indoor ac BTSs are used with two duplexers: 1. 2. Follow instructions above for One BTS and One duplexer. Select RF high powered cable 3086106M02 and connect up to Rx input of duplexer within the additional equipment cabinet and Rx output of DLNB on top panel of BTS 2. Select RF high powered cable 3086107M02 and connect up to Tx input of duplexer within the additional equipment cabinet and CCB Tx output on BTS 2.
3.
Three BTSs and three duplexers

1. 2. 3. Follow instructions above for One BTS and One duplexer. Follow instructions above for Two BTSs and Two duplexers. Select RF high powered cable 3086106M03 and connect up to Rx input of duplexer within the additional equipment cabinet and Rx output of DLNB on top panel of BTS-3. Select RF high powered cable 3086107M03 and connect up to Tx input of duplexer within the additional equipment cabinet and CCB Tx output on BTS 3.
4.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 437
GMR-01
Communications power supply module
GSM-105-423

Overview
This section describes how to fit the CPSMs to the master battery box inside door panel.

Figure 4-18 shows details of a CPSM, and identifies where it is fitted.
CPSM
SCREW FIXING POSITIONS
CPSM BRACKET
Mains ON/OFF switch
Mains ON/OFF switch
EARTH CABLE A
CPSM
CPSM
CPSM 0 EARTH STUD INPUT SOCKET
CPSM ALARMS SOCKET
CPSM 1
CPSM 0 & 1
INPUT SOCKET OUTPUT SOCKET
COMMS 0 PLUG
CPSM ALARMS PLUG
COMMS 1 PLUG
CPSM 0 & 1 OUTPUT PLUG
Figure 4-18 CPSM with CPSM bracket
Inst. 438
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
To install a CPSM unit: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Unpack the CPSM bracket containing two CPSMs within. Ensure an earth cable is linked from inside the master battery box to the panel inside door. Secure the CPSM bracket unit to the master battery box inside door panel using four M6 x 8 screws using a T30 Torx screwdriver. Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm. Fit earth cable supplied from the CPSM fixing point A to the battery door earth stud. Isolate the supply to the CPSMs by switching the appropriate circuit breakers in the battery box circuit breaker to OFF. Plug in the CPSMs and connect up the power cable.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 439
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 440
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 5
M-Cell6 installation with battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 51
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 52
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Chapter 5 M-Cell6 installation with battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
51 51 52 52 52
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 513 Battery box installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac cabinet and battery box view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet cable set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor ac cabinet cable fixings diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing the cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ac power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the cabinet for the ac cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power interface module diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker internal view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker ac connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACPM installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPSM module view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 514 Inst. 514 Inst. 514 Inst. 515 Inst. 516 Inst. 517 Inst. 518 Inst. 519 Inst. 519 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 520 Inst. 521 Inst. 521 Inst. 522 Inst. 522 Inst. 523 Inst. 524 Inst. 524 Inst. 524 Inst. 525

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 53
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 54
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, with battery box under the M-Cell6. NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of such equipment may include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to site-specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with non-Motorola equipment. Before starting an installation, ensure the site has been prepared according to the description in Chapter 2 of this manual and the site-specific documentation. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 51
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Installation steps
This chapter deals with the installation of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS power interface modules, battery box and relevant equipment only. In order to perform a full installation for the remaining equipment, consult the existing M-Cell6 Service Manual installation chapter. This installation comprises the sections listed in Table 5-1: Table 5-1 Installation details Section Equipment delivery and packaging Dismantling the shipping crate Mounting the battery box onto the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet Earthing and transient protection Top panel connections Installing the ac power supply Battery box installation Power distribution unit Comms power supply module (optional) NOTE Details of the correct powerup sequence are to be found in chapter NO TAG, (indoor ac commissioning, of category 423). CAUTION Ensure that all site equipment associated with an M-Cell6 is completely installed before commissioning the equipment for operation. Description General information about how the M-Cell6 equipment is packaged and delivered to the customer site. Describes how to dismantle the shipping crate. Complete procedures for physically mounting a battery box on a M-Cell6 cabinet. Details site earthing procedures. Details inter-cabinet cabling. Details procedures for power supply installations. Details M-Cell6 cabinet and battery box cable setup. Details the power distribution unit (PDU). Details the procedures for installing a comms power supply module.

Torque values
Use the torque values listed in Table 2-2 (chapter 2, Site preparation of Category 423), when installing M-Cell6 equipment.
Inst. 52
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor ac BTS cabinet configurations

Indoor BTS ac cabinet
All RF, data connections and earth cables to the M-Cell6 indoor BTS ac cabinet are at the top panel. This panel also has a feedthrough tube for routeing the fibre optic cables in and out of the cabinet; there is a further feedthrough tube for routeing ac mains cable to the ac power interface module (ACPIM). Figure 5-1 shows an internal view of an M-Cell6 indoor BTS ac cabinet and equipment, with the door removed for clarity.
mBCU 0 CAGE
Figure 5-1 M-Cell6 indoor BTS ac cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 53
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box internal view diagrams

Figure 5-2 shows the an internal view of the M-Cell6 battery box with the door and cabinet enclosure removed for clarity.
DC DISTRIBUTION AREA CPSM FUSE
Output Battery MCCB MCBs CONTROL BOARD
SBS60 MONONBLOCKS (4 off total capacity)
Front View
CPSM 0 OUTPUT ECB CPSM 1 OUTPUT ECB
0
1
0
1
PROTECTIVE COVER
CPSM 0
CPSM 1
CPSM 1 POWER INPUT ALARM OUTPUT CONNECTOR CPSM 0 POWER INPUT
Battery box inside view of door NOTE The CPSM assembly is an optional item and only used in the master battery box.
Figure 5-2 M-Cell6 battery box and CPSMs
Inst. 54
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Figure 5-3 shows the rear view of the M-Cell6 battery box.
M10 EARTH STUD
BTS 2 BATTERY FEED
REAR VIEW
CPSM POWER OUTPUT
Figure 5-3 M-Cell6 rear view of battery box

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 55
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
Packaging
LID
METAL CLIP
SIDE
SIDE
SIDE
BASE SIDE
Figure 5-4 Typical shipping crate detail NOTE A different packaging arrangement has been used for M-Cell6 equipment supplied since 1998. The equipment is shipped on a pallet, protected by a cardboard sleeve. If the equipment is re-installed at a different site, it is recommended that this packaging is re-used.
Inst. 56
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Equipment
Cabinet equipment
M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet equipment includes: S S S S S S S Cabinet interconnect panel. DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment. mBCU shelves. Cooling fan assemblies. All intra-cabinet cabling. ac power interface module (ACPIM). Battery box. NOTE Units packaged separately include: S S TCU modules. Batteries.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 57
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
The following describes the procedure for dismantling the shipping crate. NOTE It is recommended that the installer read through the following procedures before starting to unpack the equipment.
Tools
Procedure for dismantling the shipping crate

Figure 5-4 shows a typical cabinet shipping crate. NOTE The clips and banding must not be thrown away, put them in a safe place where they will not be lost. Return the clips and banding with the shipping crate. To dismantle a shipping crate: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cut the recyclable plastic banding that secures the wooden crate. Remove the metal clips securing the lid of the crate. Lift the lid free of the crate. Remove the metal clips that secure the sides of the crate. Lift the sides free of the crate. The crate is now dismantled ready for unpacking.
Inst. 58
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Unpacking procedure

The packing material used is returnable and is re-used for packing new equipment. To return the packing material: 1. 2. 3. Put all the clips in a bag with the banding, desiccant bag, and barrier bag. Put the bag with the lid, sides and base of the cabinet. Return the dismantled crate for re-use, as advised by the Project Manager.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 59
GMR-01
Mounting the battery box to the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet
GSM-105-423

Overview
The following procedure describes the unpacking and mounting of the battery box to the M-Cell6 cabinet.
M-Cell6 cabinets
An M-Cell6 BTS indoor site comprises the following cabinets: S S S S 1 x BTS (6-carrier site) 2 x BTS (12-carrier site) 3 x BTS (18-carrier site) 4 x BTS (24-carrier site)
Tools
The following tools are required to mount the M-Cell6 cabinets: S S S S S Screwdriver set. Spirit level. Socket set. Torque wrench. Lifting straps eyebolts and suitable hydraulic lift gear.

The following bolts and washers are required to mount the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet and battery box: Table 5-2 M-Cell6 cabinet mounting bolts Purpose M-Cell6 cabinet to battery box M-Cell6 master battery box to concrete floor Bolts 4 (Not Supplied) 4 (Not Supplied) Washers 4 (Not Supplied) 4 (Not Supplied) Size M12 x 30 bolts M12 Rawlbolts (Not supplied)
Inst. 510
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
For each of the cabinets to be installed, consider the following notes:
WARNING

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 511
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Mounting procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the feet from the M-Cell6 ac indoor cabinet. Remove the plugs in the battery box top to expose the fixing holes. With the cabinet and battery boxes still on their bases, slide the battery box crate base and cabinet next to the base of the M-Cell6 ac indoor cabinet. Ensure that the M-Cell6 ac indoor cabinet mounting holes and the battery box threads on the top of the unit line up. Slide the battery box against the M-Cell6 ac indoor cabinet (see Figure 5-5). Bolt the M-Cell6 ac indoor cabinet to the battery box using four M12 x 30 bolts and four M12 washers. Tighten to a torque of 40 Nm. NOTE The combined weight of the units will now be approximately 210 kg. 7. 8. Lift or slide the assembled cabinets off the bases of the crates. Remove the desiccant bags from the cabinets.
M-CELL6
BATTERY BOX
Figure 5-5 Sliding the battery box against the M-Cell6
Inst. 512
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
This manual summarises general procedures for earthing the site. Refer to the Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations instructions, 68P81150E62, for detailed earthing information. WARNING Each cabinet must be earthed. S S S S The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point as its power source). Provision should be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to the cabinet before beginning the installation of the system cabinets. There is an earthing terminal (stud) located on the interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Refer to the site-specific documentation for detailed site earthing information.


31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 513
GMR-01
Battery box installation
GSM-105-423

Overview
This section contains instructions for installing the battery box cable connections on the rear of the unit.
Indoor ac cabinet and battery box view diagram

Figure 5-6 shows the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet and battery box:
M-CELL6 INDOOR AC BTS RF CABINET
Figure 5-6 M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet and battery box Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 514
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Cabinet cable set-up

The following procedure describes how to configure the earth cables at the front and rear of the cabinets and front power cables. 1. 2. Remove power cable and alarm cable from container package. Remove six M4 x 10 countersunk screws securing back plate of battery box with T20 Torx screwdriver. Remove panel and place in safe location with the countersunk screws. Remove container bag attached to conduit within the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet. Fit cable tie bases (5 off) evenly down the centre on the back of the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet (see Figure 5-7). Attach earth cables from suitable earthing points within the building to the earth studs illustrated in Figure 5-7 using 15 mm socket screws. Connect power cable 3086708E02 to BTS 1 connector (A) on the rear of the battery box, and at the other end to the top panel DC input of the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet (see Figure 5-1). Connect alarm cable 3086556E03 to ALARM CONNECTOR on rear of battery box (see Figure 5-7), and at the othe end connect to PIX0 connector on the top panel of the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet (see Figure 5-1). Connect BTS 1 ALARMS to battery box ALARMS connector on top panel. NOTE If a communications power supply module (CPSM) is to be fitted to the battery box the relevant supply output cabling (cable assembly, cpsm output 3086709E01), must be connected to the CPSM POWER OUTPUT connector on the rear of the battery box before completing the next step. 9. 10. Secure the cables onto the cable tie bases down the rear of the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet using the supplied tie wraps. Remove bracket cabinet standoff (back plate 0786712E01) from container package and fit to rear of battery box with six M4 x 10 countersunk screws previously stored, and discard the other back plate.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
8.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 515
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor ac cabinet cable fixings diagram

Figure 5-7 illustrates the tie wrap fixing positions within the M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet.
ALARM CABLE
EARTH CABLES TIE WRAP
EARTH STUD
POWER CABLE
M10 EARTH STUD
ALARM CONNECTOR BTS 2 BATTERY FEED 3086707E02 (cable connector) A BTS 1 BATTERY FEED
3086707E02 (cable connector) B
MASTER
CPSM POWER OUTPUT
Figure 5-7 Rear view of M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet and battery box
Inst. 516
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Securing the cabinets

The following procedure secures the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS and battery box to the concrete floor. WARNINGS The M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet weighs approximately 153 kg and the battery box weighs 60 kg. They and considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when positioning them. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ensure an earth cable is fixed to the rear of the battery box just prior to installation. Position the assembly on the floor location and line up the fixing holes in the base of the master battery box Place a flat M12 washer onto each mounting bolt. Install the four mounting bolts loosely. Do not tighten yet. Using a spirit level, verify that the cabinet is level. Tighten up all bolts to the torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. NOTE The setting of the torque value is determinate on local conditions. Refer to the manufacturers data for correct values.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 517
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

The following procedure describes how to fit the batteries to the master battery box. WARNINGS Refer to the Health and Safety Warnings and Cautions contained in the battery manual. Two battery boxes are required (with four batteries for each box). Each of the four batteries weighs approximately 18 kg and are considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the batteries. 1. 2. Locate and unpack the batteries as detailed in the battery manual (supplied with the batteries). Prepare the batteries for installation as detailed in the battery manual. WARNING The battery is capable of supplying high short circuit current and as such provides a high energy hazard. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Ensure that the battery isolators (BATTERY) on the dc distribution panel is in the OFF position. Remove the three M6 screws securing the battery maintenance handle with a T20 Torx screwdriver. Remove the remaining three M6 screws securing the battery panel, and lift off the panel. Loosen the battery securing bracket, using a 17 mm insulated spanner. Locate, unpack and prepare the battery as detailed in the manufacturers manual supplied with the battery. Position the batteries in the battery tray as per the labels on the bottom of the tray, and bolt the inter-bloc connecting link between the four batteries using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to a torque of 1.5 Nm.
Inst. 518
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

CAUTION The battery connectors are now different sizes to prevent reverse-polarity connection. However caution must still be exercised to prevent accidental reverse contact which could result in damage to the equipment. 1. Remove the insulating tape from the battery cables. Bolt the red cable to the battery positive terminal and the black cable to the negative common battery terminal using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to the correct torque by referring to the schedule of torque settings given in Table 2-2. Apply non-oxide grease to the battery terminals, taking care not to allow the grease to contact any plastic components on the lid assembly. Refit the terminal covers to each terminal and the plastic covers on each monobloc. Fit the cell number marker labels provided with the battery to the monoblocs, starting at the positive end of each monobloc string. Place the temperature sensor in the space between the two centre monoblocs and secure in position. Refit and secure the battery panel using three M6 screws. Refit and secure the battery box maintenance handle using three M6 screws.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Figure 5-8 shows the front view of the battery box:
M 4 x 16 SCREW (6 off) BATTERY PANEL MAINTENANCE HANDLE
Figure 5-8 Front view of battery panel, maintenance handle and screw fixtures

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 519
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
This section contains instructions for installing ac power supply modules.
Before installation
Before the ac power supply modules (ACPMs) can be fitted to the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, an air baffle and an ac power interface module (ACPIM) circuit breaker cover have to be removed and a power cable has to be fitted inside the cabinet.
Preparing the cabinet for the ac cable

To prepare the cabinet for the ac cable: NOTE The ac power cable is supplied by the customer. Motorola recommend a double insulated cable and of TN-S type. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Locate and remove the air baffle (see Figure 5-1) using a T30 Torxdriver (retain the two M6 screws). Remove the flexible plastic conduit on the bottom of the cabinet from its fixing positions. Release the four M3 screws securing the circuit breaker cover from the ac power interface by using a T10 Torxdriver. Remove the circuit breaker cover and place in a secure location. Remove redundant ac cable (Figure 5-10). NOTE Although not normally required, the circuit breakers unit can be removed by two methods in order to aid the process. The preferred method is to loosen the captive screws securing the circuit breakers to the din bar and then pull out the unit. Alternatively, place a screwdriver between the retaining clip and exerting slight downwards pressure, the circuit breakers unit should then be released from its mounting. 6. Feed the new double insulated ac power cable through the plastic conduit.
Inst. 520
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power interface module diagram

Figure 5-9 illustrates a front view of the ac power interface module.
CONNECTING FIXTURES SIGNAL OUTPUT 9 WAY CONNECTOR NEON LAMP M3 SCREW LED
DC
AC
CB1 63A
AC CABLE (double shielded)
DIN41612
CIRCUIT BREAKER COVER
Figure 5-9 ac power interface module
Circuit breaker internal view diagram

Figure 5-10 illustrates a front view of the circuit breaker with front cover removed, showing redundant ac cable.
CAPTIVE SCREW DIN BAR RELIEF BAR GREEN/YELLOW (earth)
BLUE (neutral)
RETAINING CLIP BROWN (live)
Figure 5-10 Circuit breaker connections

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 521
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power cable installation

To fit the ac power cable to the circuit breaker: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Connect, line, neutral and earth wires to the ac power interface circuit breaker. Slide plastic conduit into fixing position. Fasten a cable tie through the plastic clip to the loose wires, then take up the strain and secure the clip to a relief bar. Fit the cable gland holding the three core cable into its location and tighten it to secure it in position. Slot the plastic conduit cable into the plastic clip positions (situated around the inner cabinet left side and inner cabinet bottom) in order to take up slack. Refit the ac power interface module circuit breaker cover, and secure with four M3 screws. Secure ac mains cable leading from the plastic conduit top panel to a brace and fixings above the cabinet (not shown) and take up the strain.
Circuit breaker ac connection diagram

Figure 5-11 illustrates the connection between the ac cable and circuit breaker.
DIN BAR GREEN/YELLOW (earth) RETAINING CLIP BROWN (live) PLASTIC CONDUIT
CAPTIVE SCREW BLUE (neutral) RELIEF BAR PLASTIC CLIP CABLE GLAND
FIXING POSITION
Figure 5-11 ac power cable fixture
Inst. 522
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ACPM installation
To fit the ACPMs to the ac power interface module: NOTE A minimum of two and a maximum of five ACPMs can be fitted to the ACPIM. 1. For each ACPM to be fitted, start on the right, offer the ACPM to its location into the ACPIM, then gently push it home, ensuring that the pcb is engaged into the card guides of the ACPIM. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, tighten the spring-loaded captive screw alongside the handle on the front panel of the ACPM. CAUTION Never use less than two ACPM to power the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS. 3. 4. Replace the air baffle using a T30 Torxdriver and two M6 x 20 screws. Close M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS panel door.
2.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 523
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
This section describes how to fit the optional CPSMs to the battery box inside door panel.

Figure 5-12 shows a CPSM module and mounting bracket:
CPSM
SCREW FIXING POSITIONS
CPSM BRACKET
Mains ON/OFF switch
Mains ON/OFF switch
EARTH CABLE A
CPSM
CPSM
CPSM 0 EARTH STUD INPUT SOCKET
CPSM ALARMS SOCKET
CPSM 1
CPSM 0 & 1
INPUT SOCKET OUTPUT SOCKET
COMMS 0 PLUG
CPSM ALARMS PLUG
COMMS 1 PLUG
CPSM 0 & 1 OUTPUT PLUG
Figure 5-12 CPSM with CPSM bracket
Inst. 524
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
To install a CPSM unit: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Unpack the CPSM bracket containing two CPSMs within. Ensure an earth cable is linked from inside the master battery box to the panel inside door. Secure the CPSM bracket unit to the master battery box inside door panel using four M6 x 8 screws using a T30 Torx screwdriver. Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm. Fit earth cable supplied from the CPSM fixing point A to the battery door earth stud. Isolate the supply to the CPSMs by switching the appropriate circuit breakers in the battery box circuit breaker to OFF. Plug in the CPSMs and connect up the power cable. NOTE The power cable should be placed into the rear of the battery box prior to fixing the floor.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 525
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 526
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 6
M-Cell6 normal commissioning

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
M-Cell6 commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 61 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 61 Pre-power up electrical checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory certificate of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirmation of ac supply type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power cable continuity checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth bonding checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main equipment earths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCD functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up an outdoor (ac) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS cabinet power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side cabinet circuit breaker location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet power distribution panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up an indoor (dc) BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor BTS cabinet power supply location diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat exchanger airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 65 65
Inst. 66 Inst. 66 Inst. 66 Inst. 66 Inst. 67 Inst. 67 Inst. 68 Inst. 69 Inst. 69 Inst. 610 Inst. 611 Inst. 612 Inst. 612 Inst. 612 Inst. 613 Inst. 614 Inst. 615 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 616 Inst. 617 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 618 Inst. 619

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Commissioning the air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioner airflow path diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test connector diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post initialisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 620 Inst. 621 Inst. 622 Inst. 622 Inst. 622 Inst. 623 Inst. 623 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 624 Inst. 625
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
M-Cell6 commissioning
M-Cell6 commissioning
Overview
This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of M-Cell6 equipment cabinets and their internal and external interfaces. NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of such equipment may include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to site specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with non-Motorola equipment. All site preparation (Chapter 2) and equipment installation (Chapters 3, 4 and 5, as relevant) must be completed before commissioning. Commissioning of the M-Cell6 equipment consists of the following: S S S S Pre-power up checks. Powering up the M-Cell6. DC power supply tests. Testing the Heat Management System (HMS). CAUTION The M-Cell6 equipment and all associated site equipment must be completely commissioned before optimizing the equipment for operation.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 61
GMR-01
Pre-power up electrical checks
GSM-105-423

Overview
This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applying power to the cabinet. WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in this section must be performed.
Factory certificate of compliance

Before commencing the power commissioning, check that the request for connection form (where required) has been completed and signed by the manufacturer or his representative and sent to the local electricity board. Check that the forms of completion and inspection certificate has been completed and signed. NOTE Samples of these certificates are shown in Sample form 1 and Sample form 2.
Safety
Observe the following precautions: WARNING 230 V is present within the cabinets containing the ac cabling when the cabinets are connected to the a.c. supply. Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of the ac and dc power system, and watches and other jewellery should be removed. Only insulated tools should be used. CAUTION This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to mis-handling causing barrier breakdown. The approved earth strap (high impedance) must be worn at all times when adjusting or handling the processor cards (but see WARNING above regarding use of earth straps). If the cabinet doors are kept open for long periods of time during commissioning, an alternative method of cooling must be provided to avoid damage to the equipment through overheating. Apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth mat connection on the earth busbar if an earth mat connection is used. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 62
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Visual inspection
Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition <Section 712>) or the IEC 364 equivalent. WARNING If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, the commissioning must not proceed further until the damage has been inspected and rectified by the manufacturers or their representatives.
Cabling
Check the following points for all cables: S S S security of a.c. connection. all labelling is correct and adequately displayed. mechanical integrity of all cables and connections.
Cabinet exterior
Examine the exterior of the cabinets for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage to manufacturers for repair.
Cabinet interior
Examine the interior of the cabinet for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage to manufacturers for repair.
Power equipment
Examine the power equipment for mechanical damage and report any damage to manufacturers for repair.
Confirmation of ac supply type

Check the details of the type of supply to the site, see Sample form 1, Request for a Connection at the end of this chapter.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 63
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power cable continuity checks

Check the continuity of Line, Neutral and Earth up to the BTS input breaker CB1. Also check continuity to the 13 A outlet in the ancillary cabinet.
Earth continuity check

Ensure total earth loop impedance (Zs) complies with BS7671 (16th edition wiring regulations). S S Measure (R1 + R2) for the ac feed to the BTS. Measure (R1 + R2) for the ac feed to the ancillary cabinet 13 A outlet.
Earth bonding checks

Check that the resistance of the test equipment leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
Main equipment earths

Connect the PAT tester to the earth terminal and to the following earth points: S S Antenna feeders. ac supply input earth. The local electricity supply termination point. ac distribution board. ac isolator. NOTE The switched isolator will not be connected to earth if it is a double insulated devices and will therefore not require to be tested. S S S S Battery box chassis. Cabinet chassis (all cabinets). +27 V power supply unit chassis. Rack members.
Check that the measured resistance is less than 0.1 ohms with the tester connected to a conductive surface (bare metal) at extreme ends of the earth cables. On completion of each earth check apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth connections on the earth busbar.
Inst. 64
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
AC power system insulation check

Perform an insulation check on all ac power cables which supply the site up to the ac input to the BTS or ancillary cabinet. Testing must be carried out in accordance with the BS 7671 (16th Edition <section 713-0401 to 713-04-06>) or IEC 364 equivalent, at the voltage levels shown in Table 6-1, using an approved insulation tester. Check that the resistance at each point is as shown in Table 6-1. Table 6-1 BS7671 (16th edition) Table 71A Parameter Extra-low voltage circuits when the circuit is supplied with a safety transformer. Up to and including 500 V with the exception of the above. Above 500 V to 1000 V. Between SEL circuits and associated LV circuits. With additional withstand test. ac test voltage (volts) 250 500 1000 500 3750 V rms ac for 1 minute Minimum insulation (megohms) 0.25 0.5 1.0 50
When the test has been completed, sign the completion and inspection certificate, a sample of which may be found in Sample form 2.
RCD functional check

Perform a functional check on the operation of the RCDs in the system prior to performing the cabinet power-up procedure: S S 30 mA RCD within the side cabinet distribution box. 13 A outlet 30 mA RCD protection.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 65
GMR-01
Power-up an outdoor (ac) BTS
GSM-105-423

Overview
This procedure is to be followed when powering up the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet BTS. WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in Pre-power up checks must be performed. Two people should be present during these tests. One person performs the tests. The second person acts in a safety capacity.
Power-up procedure
To power-up the M-Cell6: WARNING 230 V is present within the cabinets containing the ac cabling when the cabinets are connected to the a.c. supply. Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of the ac and dc power system, and watches and other jewellery should be removed. Only insulated tools should be used. 1. 2. 3. Locate the main ac circuit breaker (CB1) in the Side cabinet and ensure this is switched OFF (See Figure 6-1). Locate the Power Distribution Panel (PDP) in the Ancillary cabinet. Set all the CBs to the OFF position (See Figure 6-2, Figure 6-3 and Table 6-2). Locate the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) in the BTS cabinet. Set all the CBs to the OFF position (See Figure 6-4). CAUTION If the cabinet is to powered from a single-phase supply, verify that the jumper link has been installed to the main input MCB.
Side cabinet power-up procedure

To power-up the side cabinet: 1. 2. Operate the a.c. Isolator switch (Set to 1) to switch on the ac supply to the cabinet. Switch ON CB1
Inst. 66
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Ancillary cabinet power-up procedure

To power-up the ancillary cabinet: 1. Set in turn CB2 (APSM0), CB3 (APSM1), CB4 (APSM2), CB5 (APSM3), CB6 (APSM4), CB7 (APSM5), in the Ancillary cabinet to the ON position (See Table 6-2 and Figure 6-3) Check that all APSMs start up correctly: The Input Healthy and Output Healthy LEDs should illuminate. Check that the BCA and BCB LEDs illuminate, following start up of the APSMs (An audible click can be heard as the contactors BCA and BCB activate. Check that the voltage between V+ and V is +27.4 Vdc 0.5V Check that the Ancillary cabinet fans begin to operate. Set in turn CB11 (Ancillary cabinet HMS supply), CB12 (BTS1 HMS supply), CB13 (BTS2 (if fitted) HMS supply) to the ON position. Check that the BTS fans operate. Set in turn CB14 (BTS1 Main supply), CB15 (BTS2 (if fitted) Main supply) to ON. Set CB16 (COMMS 0) and CB17 (COMMS1) to ON.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
BTS cabinet power-up procedure

To power-up the BTS cabinet: 1. Set all required MCBs in the BTS to ON. (See Figure 6-4) MCB4 TCU 0 MCB5 TCU 1 MCB6 TCU 2 MCB7 TCU 3 MCB8 TCU 4 MCB9 TCU 5 MCB10 mBCU 0 MCB11 mBCU 1 Check that the appropriate module, to which the selected MCB supplies power, starts up correctly.
2.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 67
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Side cabinet circuit breaker location diagram

Figure 6-1 shows the position of the circuit breakers inside the side cabinet:
AC CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
Figure 6-1 Side cabinet circuit breakers
Inst. 68
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers location diagram

Figure 6-2 shows the position of the circuit breakers inside the ancillary cabinet:
AC CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Figure 6-2 Ancillary cabinet circuit breaker position
Ancillary cabinet power distribution panel diagram

Figure 6-3 shows the layout of the ancillary cabinet power distribution panel:
126A
63A
HMS SUPPLY
10A COMMS1 COMMS0
10A
AIR CONDITIONERS
20A APSM 5 4 3 2 1 0
10A
ISO TRANS
BTS2
BTS1
BTS2
BTS1
ANC
63A 63A 63A 63A 63A 63A 63A 10A 10A
FS1-2A CONTROL BOARD FS2-2A LVD CONT. A FS3-2A LVD CONT. B
10A 10A 10A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 10A 10A
Figure 6-3 Ancillary power distribution panel diagram.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
ANC
MAIN BTS2
MAIN BTS1
Inst. 69
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses

Table 6-2 displays the ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses: Table 6-2 Ancillary cabinet circuit breakers and fuses. CB/Fuse CB 2 CB 3 CB 4 CB 5 CB 6 CB 7 CB 8 CB 18 CB 19 CB 20 CB 11 CB 12 CB 13 CB 14 CB 15 CB 16 CB 17 Fuse 1 Fuse 2 Fuse 3 Rating 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 2 x 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 63 A 63 A 63 A 126 A 2 x 63 A 126 A 2 x 63 A 10 A 10 A 2A 2A 2A APSM 0 APSM 1 APSM 2 APSM 3 APSM 4 APSM 5 Safety isolating transformer ANC (Air Conditioner supply) BTS 1 (Air Conditioner supply) BTS 2 (Air Conditioner supply) ANC (Heat Exchanger supply) BTS 1 (Heat Exchanger supply) BTS 2 (Heat Exchanger supply) BTS 1 (Main supply) BTS 2 (Main supply) COMMS 0 COMMS 1 Control & Alarm System/Smoke Detector Control & Alarm System/By-pass System/BCA Control & Alarm System/By-pass System/BCB Power to Voltage 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac 230 ac +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27
Inst. 610
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Outdoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram

Figure 6-4 shows the front panel layout of the PDU:
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 TCU2 16A 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
CCB/TCB 1 3A ALARM BD 3A
CCB/TCB 0 3A LNA 3A
Figure 6-4 M-Cell6 BTS outdoor PDU front panel

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 611
GMR-01
Power-up an indoor (dc) BTS
GSM-105-423

Overview
This procedure is to be followed when powering up the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet BTS. WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in Pre-power up checks must be performed. Two people should be present during these tests. One person performs the tests. The second person acts in a safety capacity.
Power-up procedure
NOTE There should be no APSMs or internal batteries fitted to a dc input M-Cell6
cabinet.
To power-up the M-Cell6: WARNING Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of dc power system, and watches and other jewellery should be removed. Only insulated tools should be used. The dc source must be supplied to the cabinet via a suitable over-current protective device and be isolated from the BTS cabinet. 1. 2. Verify that the dc source is disconnected from the cabinet. Locate the Power Distribution Panel (PDU) in the cabinet. See Figure 6-5, Figure 6-6 and Table 6-3. Set all the MCBs to the OFF position. Operate the external dc supply isolator to supply dc to the cabinet. Set in turn MCB1 (PSU0), MCB2 (PSU1), MCB3 (PSU2, if fitted) Check that all power supply LEDs are showing correctly. Set in turn all remaining MCBs to ON: MCB4 TCU 0 MCB5 TCU 1 MCB6 TCU 2 MCB7 TCU 3 MCB8 TCU 4 MCB9 TCU 5 MCB10 mBCU 0 MCB11 mBCU 1 Check that the appropriate module, to which the selected MCB supplies power, starts up correctly Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
Inst. 612
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor BTS cabinet power supply location diagram

Figure 6-5 shows the indoor BTS power supply equipment:
POWER SUPPLY INPUT PANEL
BLANKING PLATE OR (P/NPSM 2)
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (P/NPSM) 1 P/NPSM 0
Figure 6-5 M-Cell6 indoor PSU locations

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 613
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor cabinet BTS circuit breakers and fuses

Table 6-3 details the indoor cabinet circuit breakers and fuses: Table 6-3 Circuit breaker designations (indoor M-Cell6) MCB/Fuse MCB 1 MCB 2 MCB 3 MCB 1 MCB 2 MCB 3 MCB 4 MCB 5 MCB 6 MCB 7 MCB 8 MCB 9 MCB 10 MCB 11 Fuse 1 Fuse 2 Fuse 3 Fuse 4 Fuse 5 Fuse 6 Rating 100 A 100 A 100 A 100 A 100 A 100 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 10 A 10 A 3A 3A 3A 3A 10 A 10 A Power to NPSM 0 (in a positive earth cabinet) NPSM 1 (in a positive earth cabinet) NPSM 2 (in a positive earth cabinet) or PPSM 0 (in a negative earth cabinet) PPSM 1 (in a negative earth cabinet) PPSM 2 (in a negative earth cabinet) TCU 0 TCU 1 TCU 2 TCU 3 TCU 4 TCU 5 mBCU 0 mBCU 1 CCB/TCB 1 CCB/TCB 0 ALARM BD LNA (DCS1800 cabinets only) FAN 1 FAN 0 +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V +27 V Voltage 48 V/60 V 48 V/60 V 48 V/60 V
Inst. 614
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Indoor cabinet BTS PDU front panel diagram

Figure 6-6 shows the indoor cabinet PDU front panel layout
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
PCU2 100A
PCU1 100A
PCU0 100A
Figure 6-6 M-Cell6 indoor PDU front panel

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 615
GMR-01
Commissioning the heat exchanger
GSM-105-423

Overview
The commissioning tests verify the correct operation of the heat exchanger unit.
Test equipment requirements

The PC is connected to the serial comms board to override the HMS control board via HMS/PC interface cable SWLN2558.
Airflow paths
In normal operation there are two separate airflow paths through the combined BTS and heat exchanger cabinets: S S Recirculation which contains the warm air generated by the BTS cabinets. Ambient which contains the cooler outside air.
Figure 6-7 shows the airflow paths through the combined cabinets.
Inst. 616
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Heat exchanger airflow path diagram

AMBIENT AIRFLOW
Figure 6-7 M-Cell6 airflow paths

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 617
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Test connector
A 9-pin D type connector is provided, on the HMS control board front panel, to allow the HMS heat exchanger to be controlled, via an RS232 link, by either an external computer or control board.

Figure 6-8 shows the location of the test connector:
27V DC
EARTH CONNECTOR
+
TEST CONNECTOR
Figure 6-8 Location of test connector
Test facilities
Provision is made to perform the following: S S S S S S Enable the top box hood to remain open for maintenance purposes. Enable the external fans to be run at maximum speed for maintenance purposes. Override the start-up heater operation, to allow for equipment operation. Checking the heater function. Control override to be switched off. Ensure the HMS heat exchanger cannot remain in a temperature override state following completion of the tests.
Test signals
The following signals are required to be input and controlled by the external computer or control board, using PROCOM software: S S S Start timer on. Control overridden. Temperature display readout.
Inst. 618
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Test procedure
1. 2. 3. Open the HMS heat exchanger cabinet door. Disable the door interlock switch. Power up the unit and observe the HMS heat exchanger fans are rotating. NOTE Initially the fans will operate at full speed and then after approximately 10 seconds will reduce speed. CAUTION Do not operate the unit in this position for more than 3 minutes otherwise damage to the electronic equipment will occur. 4. 5. Power down the unit, remove the disable from the door interlock and close and lock the HMS heat exchanger cabinet. Power up the unit again and listen to verify the HMS heat exchanger fans are operating correctly.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 619
GMR-01
Commissioning the air conditioner
GSM-105-423

Overview
The commissioning tests verify the correct operation of the air conditioner unit.
Test equipment requirements

The PC is connected to the serial comms board to override the HMS control board via HMS/PC interface cable SWLN2558.
Airflow paths
In normal operation there are three separate airflow paths through the combined BTS and air conditioner cabinets: S S S Recirculation contains the warm air generated by cabinets. Ambient (heat exchanger) which contains the cooler outside air. Ambient (air conditioner) contains the cooler outside air.
Figure 6-9 illustrates these airflow paths.
Inst. 620
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Air conditioner airflow path diagram

Figure 6-9 Air conditioner airflow paths

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 621
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Test connector
A 9-pin D type connector is provided, on the HMS control board front panel, to allow the HMS/Air conditioner to be controlled, via an RS232 link, by either an external computer or control board.

Figure 6-10 shows the location of the air conditioner test connector:
27V DC
EARTH CONNECTOR
+
TEST CONNECTOR
Figure 6-10 HMS air conditioner test connector location
Test facilities
Provision is made to perform the following: S S S S S S Enable the top box hood to remain open for maintenance purposes. Enable the external fans to be run at maximum speed for maintenance purposes. Override the start-up heater operation, to allow for equipment operation. Checking the heater function. Control override to be switched off. Ensure the HMS air conditioner cannot remain in a temperature override state following completion of the tests.
Inst. 622
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Test signals
The following signals are required to be input and controlled by the external computer or control board, using PROCOM software: S S S Start timer on. Control overridden. Temperature display readout.
Test procedure
1. 2. 3. Open the air conditioner cabinet door. Disable the door interlock switch. Power up the unit and observe the HMS air conditioner fans are rotating. NOTE Initially the fans will operate at full speed and then after approximately 10 seconds will reduce speed. CAUTION Do not operate the unit in this position for more than 3 minutes otherwise damage to the electronic equipment will occur. 4. 5. Power down the unit, remove the disable from the door interlock and close and lock the air conditioner cabinet. Power up the unit again and listen to verify the HMS air conditioner fans are operating correctly.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 623
GMR-01
Initialization process
GSM-105-423
Overview
When a code download from the OMCR to the BSC is made, all the code objects including the M-Cell code objects are downloaded. When the download is complete the BSP will renumber the M-Cell code objects (NG objects): 8 (208), 12(219), 63(209), 70(210), 71(211), 72(212), 79(213), 165(225), 166(226), 177(235), 200(215)): If no Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP) exists the M-Cell code objects will be deleted this means that this BSC site is unable to support M-Cell BTSs. If M-Cell BTS support is required, the CSFP must be equipped. The BSC will then automatically request the download of the M-Cell code objects from the OMC and store them on the CSFP GPROC.
Initialization Process
The functionality of the micro Initialization Process (mIP) is broken into three main categories: the functionality after a hard reset, the functionality after a soft reset, and the functionality after the site has been started. Hard resets are used to completely re-initialize the board and provide master arbitration, soft resets are optimised to re-start the MCU as quickly as possible.
Soft reset
A soft reset will do the following: S S S S S Determine reset mode is soft reset, check CA Master flag. Init mIP variables and threads. Attempt to contact other MCU. Start MCU to MCU mIP heartbeats. Start CM and CA.
Hard reset
A hard reset will be doing the following: S S S S S S S S S S S Determine reset mode is hard reset. Init mIP variables and threads. Attempt to create HDLC link to the other MCU. Attempt to create HDLC links to the NIUs. Mater Arbitration. Start MCU to MCU mIP heartbeats. If becoming the Master, soft reset NIU. Set up NIUs and contact BSC. Codeload MCU from the BSC and check sum. Flash ROM. Start CM and CA. Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 624
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Post initialisation
Functions that happen after the system is initialized: S S S Code loading of TCUs. Code loading of slave MCUs. Code loading of CSFP next load and fallback (current running) objects into PCMCIA memory.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 625
GMR-01
Sample form 1: Request for connection
GSM-105-423

XXXXXXXXXX ELECTRIC REQUEST FOR A CONNECTION OF A CUSTOMER'S INSTALLATION
The electrical installation at the following address will be ready for connection on (date) ......................................................................................................................................
NOTE : At least 4 full working days' notice is required.
Address
...................................................................................................................................... Telephone No. ...................................
........................................................................................
DETAILS OF INSTALLATION
The installation to be connected is : tick as appropriate A completely new installation TYPE OF EQUIPMENT Cooker Water heater Storage radiators Other list below METHOD OF EARTHING tick as appropriate PME Cable Sheath RCD Other Give Details 1 3 Other Give Details An alteration CONNECTED LOAD (kW) A rewire
NO OF PHASES
DECLARATION
The electrical installation, summarised above, complies with the current edition of the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and is now ready for connection to xxxxxxxxx Electric's supply network. It is understood that xxxxxxxxxx Electric will carry out tests, required by law, prior to connection, but these tests will NOT confirm that the installation complies with the IEE Wiring Regulations, NOR will its connection imply that it is approved by xxxxxxxxxx Electric in any way.
Electrical Installer's Name Address
............................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Telephone No. ................................. ...............................................
........................................................................................... Signed
................................................................................ Date
Inst. 626
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
PARTICULARS OF THE INSTALLATION

(Delete or complete items as appropriate) Type of Installation Type of earthing (31203): (Indicate in the box) Earth Electrode New/alteration/addition/to existing installation TNC TNS TNCS TT IT
Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms Method of Measurement .............................................
Type (5420201) and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation ( 31301 ): Nominal voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . volts Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz
......
Number of phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ascertained by enquiry Prospective shortcircuit current Earth fault loop impedance (Ze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms
determined by calculation
measured
Maximum demand . . . . . . . . . . A per phase Overcurrent protective device Type BS ........................ Rating . . . . . . . . A Rating . . . . . . . . A No of poles . . . . .
Main switch or circuitbreaker (4600102): Type BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (if an r.c.d., rated residual operating current I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA.)
Method of protection against indirect contact:
1. Earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply or 2. Other (Describe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main equipotential bonding conductors (4130201/02, 5470201): Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm2
schedule of Test Results: Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pages
Details of departures (if any) from the Wiring Regulations (12004, 12005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments on existing installation, where applicable (7430101): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 627
GMR-01
Sample form 2: Completion and inspection form
GSM-105-423
FORMS OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

(as prescribed in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations) DETAILS OF THE INSTALLATION Client: Address: DESIGN
I/We being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Design of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate. For the DESIGN of the installation: Name (In block Letters): for and on behalf of: Address: (2.) Signature: (3.) Date Position:
(1.) (see Notes overleaf)
CONSTRUCTION
I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my/our signatures below ) for the Construction of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate. For the CONSTRUCTION of the installation: Name (In block Letters): for and on behalf of: Address: (2.) Signature: (3.) Date Position:
INSPECTION AND TEST

I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my / our signatures below ) for the Inspection and Test of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/ our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate. For the INSPECTION AND TEST of the installation: Name (In block Letters): for and on behalf of: Address: I RECOMMEND that this installation be further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than . . . . years (5.) (2.) Signature: (3.) Date (6) page 1 of . . . . pages Position:
Inst. 628
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
1. 2.
This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or addition to an existing installation and of an inspection. The signatures appended are those of the persons authorised by the companies executing the work of design, construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorised to certify more than one category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places. Dates to be inserted. Where particulars of the installation recorded herein constitute a sufficient schedule for the purpose of Regulation 5140901 further drawings / schedules need not be provided. For other installations the additional drawings/schedules listed below apply. Insert here the time interval recommended between periodic inspections. Regard should be paid to relevant National or Local legislation and reference should be made to chapter 13. The page numbers of each sheet should be indicated together with the total number of sheets involved. (4) Schedule of additional records.
3. 4.
5. 6.
(6) page 2 of . . . . pages

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 629
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Inst. 630
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 7
M-Cell6 indoor ac commissioning

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
M-Cell6 indoor ac commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 71 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 71 Commissioning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 71 Pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory certificate of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up a M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of M-Cell6 indoor ac indoor BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box front view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDP circuit breakers diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery box circuit breaker and fuse designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. 72 72 73 73 74 74
Inst. 75 Inst. 75 Inst. 76 Inst. 77 Inst. 78 Inst. 78 Inst. 79 Inst. 710

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

Overview
This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS additional equipment cabinet and battery box only. NOTE Only the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS and additional equipment cabinet and battery box will be covered. For further information on a full commissioning procedure for the BTS (including test equipment and test leads), consult the M-Cell6 Service Manual. Some equipment at the site may not be produced by Motorola. Examples of such equipment may include battery chargers, power supplies, and antennas. Refer to site specific documentation and the vendor instructions provided with non-Motorola equipment. All site preparation (Chapter 2) and equipment installation (Chapter 3, 4 or 5, as relevant) must be completed before commissioning.
Commissioning procedures
Commissioning of the M-Cell6 equipment consists of the following: S S S Pre-power up checks. Powering up the M-Cell6. DC power supply tests. CAUTION The M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS, additional equipment cabinet and battery box must be completely commissioned before optimizing the equipment for operation. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 71
GMR-01
Pre-power up checks
GSM-105-423
Pre-power up checks
Overview
WARNING Before powering up the equipment, the power system checks provided in this section must be performed. This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applying power to the cabinet. WARNING 88 to 264 V is present within the cabinets containing the ac cabling when the cabinets are connected to the mains supply. Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of the ac and dc power system, and watches and other jewellery should be removed. Only insulated tools should be used. CAUTION This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to mis-handling causing barrier breakdown. The approved earth strap (high impedance) must be worn at all times when adjusting or handling the processor cards (but see WARNING above regarding use of earth straps). If the cabinet doors are kept open for long periods of time during commissioning, an alternative method of cooling must be provided to avoid damage to the equipment through overheating.
Inst. 72
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Pre-power up checks
Visual inspection
Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition <Section 712>) or the IEC 364 equivalent. WARNING If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, the commissioning must not proceed further until the damage has been inspected and rectified by the manufacturers or their representatives.
Cabinet exterior
Examine the exterior of the cabinets for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage to manufacturers for repair as detailed in the M-Cell6 Service Manual.
Cabinet interior
Examine the interior of the cabinet for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage to manufacturers for repair as detailed in the M-Cell6 Service Manual.
Power equipment
Examine the power equipment for mechanical damage and report any damage to manufacturers for repair as detailed in the M-Cell6 Service Manual.
Factory certificate of compliance

Before commencing the power commissioning, check that the request for connection form (where required) has been completed and signed by the manufacturer or his representative and sent to the local electricity board. Check that the forms of completion and inspection certificate has been completed and signed. NOTE Samples of these certificates are shown in Sample form 1 and Sample form 2 at the back of this chapter. Apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth mat connection on the earth busbar if an earth mat connection is used.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 73
GMR-01
Pre-power up checks
GSM-105-423
Earth continuity check

Check that the resistance of the test equipment leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
Main equipment earths

Connect the PAT tester to the earth terminal and to the following earth points: S S Antenna feeders. ac supply input earth. The local electricity supplier termination point. ac distribution board. ac supply isolator. NOTE The switched isolator will not be connected to earth if it is a double insulated devices and will therefore not require to be tested. S S S S Battery box chassis. Cabinet chassis (all cabinets). +27 V power supply unit chassis. Rack members.
Check that the measured resistance is less than 0.1 ohms with the tester connected to a conductive surface (bare metal) at extreme ends of the earth cables. On completion of each earth check apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth connections on the earth busbar.
AC power system insulation check

Perform an insulation check on all ac power cables which supply the site up to the ac input to the cabinet. Testing must be carried out in accordance with the BS 7671 (16th Edition <section 713-0401 to 713-04-06>) or IEC 364 equivalent, at the voltage levels shown in Table 7-1, using an approved insulation tester. Check that the resistance at each point is as shown in Table 7-1. Table 7-1 BS7671 (16th edition) Table 71A (part of) Parameter Up to and including 500 V AC test voltage (volts) 500 Minimum insulation (megohms) 0.5
When the test has been completed, sign the completion and inspection certificate, a sample of which may be found in Sample form 2.
Inst. 74
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Power-up a M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet

Power-up procedure
WARNING Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning of ac power system, and watches and other jewellery should be removed. Only insulated tools should be used. The ac source must be supplied to the cabinet via a suitable over-current protective device and be isolated from the BTS cabinet. NOTE There should are no internal batteries fitted to a M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet. To power-up the M-Cell6: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Verify that the ac source is disconnected from the cabinet. Set the cabinet ac MCBs to OFF. Locate the power distribution panel (PDU) in the cabinet. Set all the MCBs to the OFF position. Locate the battery box circuit breaker control panel. Set all the MCBs to the OFF position. Operate the external ac supply isolator to supply ac to the cabinet. Turn on the cabinet ac MCBs. Check that all power supply LEDs are showing correctly (each ACPM will show a green illuminated LED). Set all MCBs within the M-Cell6 to ON (as appropriate to the installation equipment): MCB4 MCB5 MCB6 MCB7 MCB8 MCB9 MCB10 MCB11 7. 8. TCU 0 TCU 1 TCU 2 TCU 3 TCU 4 TCU 5 mBCU 0 mBCU 1
Check that the appropriate module to which the selected MCB supplies power starts up correctly. Set the battery box circuit breaker panel battery cabinet outputs BATT 1 and BATT 2 to ON. Measure at battery box terminals (24 V dc at 25 _C) to check that the appropriate supply is present. Set the battery box circuit breaker panel BTS 1 and BTS 2 (if used) outputs to ON. Measure at battery box terminals (27 V dc at 25 _C) to check that the appropriate supply is present. This completes the power up sequence for an indoor M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS and battery box. NOTE The battery box readings assume fully charged monoblocks.
9.
10.

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 75
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Diagram of M-Cell6 indoor ac indoor BTS cabinet

Figure 7-1 shows the indoor BTS power supply equipment:
TOP PANEL
ALARM BOARD (AB 6)
mBCU 0 CAGE
Figure 7-1 M-Cell6 indoor ACPM locations
Inst. 76
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Diagram of Power distribution unit

Figure 7-2shows the indoor ac cabinet PDU front panel layout
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
Figure 7-2 M-Cell6 indoor PDU front panel

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 77
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Circuit breaker designations

Table 7-2 details the M-Cell6 circuit breaker designations: Table 7-2 Circuit breaker designations (indoor M-Cell6) MCB/Fuse MCB 4 MCB 5 MCB 6 MCB 7 MCB 8 MCB 9 MCB 10 MCB 11 Fuse 1 Fuse 2 Fuse 3 Fuse 4 Fuse 5 Fuse 6 Rating 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 10 A 10 A 3A 3A 3A 3A 10 A 10 A TCU 0 TCU 1 TCU 2 TCU 3 TCU 4 TCU 5 mBCU 0 mBCU 1 CCB/TCB 1 CCB/TCB 0 ALARM BD LNA (DCS1800 cabinets only) FAN 1 FAN 0 Power to Voltage +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27

Figure 7-3 shows a front view of the battery box:
MCS BTS OUTPUT FUSE BANK BATTERY MCBs HAZARDOUS ENERGY LABEL WITH
CONTROL BOARD
POWER ISTRIBUTION PANEL
BATTERY COMPARTMENT COVER
COMBINED BATTERY DATA & BATTERY INFORMATION
HAZARDOUS ENERGY LABEL WITH LIGHTNING ARROW
Figure 7-3 Battery box front view Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 68P02901W88-B
Inst. 78
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
PDP circuit breakers diagram

Figure 7-4 shows the PDP circuit breaker and fuse positions:
MCBs
200 A
BTS 1
126 A 126 A
BATT 2
BTS 2
BATT 1
FS5T2 AH
CONTROL PCA
FUSES
INDICATOR LEDS AUTO

BYPASS
BYPASS BCB
BATT 2 BATT 1
CLOSE BC D CLOSE A D
LOW VOLTS
Figure 7-4 PDP circuit breaker positions

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 79
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
Battery box circuit breaker and fuse designations

Table 7-3 details the battery box circuit breakers and fuses: Table 7-3 Battery box circuit breakers and fuses CB/Fuse BTS 1 Output BTS 2 Output BATT 1 BATT 2 CPSM0 CPSM1 PCA BCA BCB Rating 2 pole 63A 126A total 2 pole 63A 126A total 1 pole 200A 1 pole 200A 10A 10 A 2A 2A 2A Power to BTS6 cabinet BTS6 cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Comms Supply 1 Comms Supply 2 Control Board Batt 1 LVD Batt 2 LVD Voltage +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27 +27
Inst. 710
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423

XXXXXXXXXX ELECTRIC REQUEST FOR A CONNECTION OF A CUSTOMER'S INSTALLATION
The electrical installation at the following address will be ready for connection on (date) ......................................................................................................................................
NOTE : At least 4 full working days' notice is required.
Address
...................................................................................................................................... Telephone No. ...................................
........................................................................................
DETAILS OF INSTALLATION
The installation to be connected is : tick as appropriate A completely new installation TYPE OF EQUIPMENT Cooker Water heater Storage radiators Other list below METHOD OF EARTHING tick as appropriate PME Cable Sheath RCD Other Give Details 1 3 Other Give Details An alteration CONNECTED LOAD (kW) A rewire
NO OF PHASES
DECLARATION
The electrical installation, summarised above, complies with the current edition of the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and is now ready for connection to xxxxxxxxx Electric's supply network. It is understood that xxxxxxxxxx Electric will carry out tests, required by law, prior to connection, but these tests will NOT confirm that the installation complies with the IEE Wiring Regulations, NOR will its connection imply that it is approved by xxxxxxxxxx Electric in any way.
Electrical Installer's Name Address
............................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ Telephone No. ................................. ...............................................
........................................................................................... Signed
................................................................................ Date

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 711
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
PARTICULARS OF THE INSTALLATION

(Delete or complete items as appropriate) Type of Installation Type of earthing (31203): (Indicate in the box) Earth Electrode New/alteration/addition/to existing installation TNC TNS TNCS TT IT
Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms Method of Measurement .............................................
Type (5420201) and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation ( 31301 ): Nominal voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . volts Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz
......
Number of phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ascertained by enquiry Prospective shortcircuit current Earth fault loop impedance (Ze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms
determined by calculation
measured
Maximum demand . . . . . . . . . . A per phase Overcurrent protective device Type BS ........................ Rating . . . . . . . . A Rating . . . . . . . . A No of poles . . . . .
Main switch or circuitbreaker (4600102): Type BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (if an r.c.d., rated residual operating current I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA.)
Method of protection against indirect contact:
1. Earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply or 2. Other (Describe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main equipotential bonding conductors (4130201/02, 5470201): Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm2
schedule of Test Results: Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pages
Details of departures (if any) from the Wiring Regulations (12004, 12005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments on existing installation, where applicable (7430101): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst. 712
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
FORMS OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

(as prescribed in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations) DETAILS OF THE INSTALLATION Client: Address: DESIGN
I/We being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Design of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate. For the DESIGN of the installation: Name (In block Letters): for and on behalf of: Address: (2.) Signature: (3.) Date Position:
(1.) (see Notes overleaf)
CONSTRUCTION
I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my/our signatures below ) for the Construction of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate. For the CONSTRUCTION of the installation: Name (In block Letters): for and on behalf of: Address: (2.) Signature: (3.) Date Position:
INSPECTION AND TEST

I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my / our signatures below ) for the Inspection and Test of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/ our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate. For the INSPECTION AND TEST of the installation: Name (In block Letters): for and on behalf of: Address: I RECOMMEND that this installation be further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than . . . . years (5.) (2.) Signature: (3.) Date (6) page 1 of . . . . pages Position:

31st May 01
68P02901W88-B
Inst. 713
GMR-01
GSM-105-423
1. 2.
This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or addition to an existing installation and of an inspection. The signatures appended are those of the persons authorised by the companies executing the work of design, construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorised to certify more than one category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places. Dates to be inserted. Where particulars of the installation recorded herein constitute a sufficient schedule for the purpose of Regulation 5140901 further drawings / schedules need not be provided. For other installations the additional drawings/schedules listed below apply. Insert here the time interval recommended between periodic inspections. Regard should be paid to relevant National or Local legislation and reference should be made to chapter 13. The page numbers of each sheet should be indicated together with the total number of sheets involved. (4) Schedule of additional records.
3. 4.
5. 6.
(6) page 2 of . . . . pages
Inst. 714
31st May 01
GMR-01
CAT 523: CHAPTER 1 M-CELL6 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION
CAT 523: CHAPTER 2 M-CELL6 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
CAT 523: CHAPTER 3 M-CELL6 FAULT DIAGNOSIS
CAT 523: CHAPTER 4 M-CELL6 REPAIR
Category 523
Maintenance Information (Maint.)
Maintenance Information: M-Cell6

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ii
Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Category 523 Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
Equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Maintenance equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Materials required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Maintenance support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, materials and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door and hood operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling and enabling devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To disable a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To enable a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separating the BTS and heat management system (HMS) unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, materials and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To remove an HMS system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 112 Maint. 113 Maint. 113 Maint. 114 Maint. 114 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 117 Maint. 118

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

i

Fault diagnostic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of diagnostic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
i
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cabinet interconnection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 34 Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 34 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 319 BTS cabinet interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 333 Indoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 333 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 334 DC power distribution to CCB and IADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 335 DC power distribution to mBCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 336 DC power distribution to TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 337 DC power distribution to distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 338 CCB power link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 339 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 340 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (outdoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 341 HMS to top panel, fan dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 342 Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 343 Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 344 Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 345 Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 346 Alarm board (AB 6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 348 Interconnect Bus Board (IBB) electrical interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 350 IBB to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 352 HMS to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 354 BTS 1 to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 355 BTS 2 to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 357 Ancillary to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 359 TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 361 mBCU to mBCU redundant link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 362 mBCU to BIB/T43 signal alarm links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 364 TATI to TATI 1 signal link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 365 mBCU to GPS signal link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 366 Indoor ac BTS power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 367 ACPIM and ACPM fault LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 368 ACPIM and ACPM alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 369 Battery box panel fault LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 370 Battery box fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 371 Indoor ac power supply module interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 373

Repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Repairing the cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 42 Replacing a cabinet door or hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 43 Replacing a cabinet door, side panel or hood lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 46 Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 49 Replacing a hinge on a BTS cabinet door or hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 411 Replacing the BTS cabinet door emc seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 413 Replacing the BTS cabinet door or hood environmental seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 415 Replacing a BTS cabinet door or hood stay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 417 Replacing BTS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 419 DLNB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 420 CBF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 423 CCB and TATI control board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 427 GSM900 medium power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 431 GSM900 high power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 434 DCS1800 medium power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 438 LNA replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 442 Hybrid combiner and power load replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 446 TxBPF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 450 Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 454 IADU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 460 TCU and TCU-B replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 464 Micro base control unit module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 468 Micro base control unit cage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 472 Alarm board AB6 and extender replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 475 T43/BIB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 479 IBB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 482 Temperature sensors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 486 Door or hood microswitch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 492 Krone box replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 494 BTS cabinet power distribution repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 497 Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 498 Fuse holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4101 DC circuit breaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4104 micro BCU circuit breaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4107 Indoor cabinet PSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4110 Ancillary cabinet power distribution repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4113 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4114 APSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4118 Ancillary cabinet control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4121 Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
vi
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
APSM fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4125 APSM fuse holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4127 BTS cabinet ac power interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4130 Additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4135 Power distribution panel (PDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4139 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4145 Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4148

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
vii
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
viii
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 1
M-Cell6 maintenance introduction

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

i
Equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Maintenance equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Materials required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 110 Maintenance support procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, materials and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door and hood operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor cabinet BTS external view diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling and enabling devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To disable a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To enable a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separating the BTS and heat management system (HMS) unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools, materials and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor BTS cabinet with heat exchanger diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To remove an HMS system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 111 Maint. 112 Maint. 113 Maint. 114 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 115 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 116 Maint. 117 Maint. 118

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Introduction
Introduction
Overview
This chapter describes the content of each section of the manual. Except where specifically stated, the information is applicable to both indoor and outdoor GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900 M-Cell6 cabinets and their associated peripheral units. Where there are differences, they are highlighted in the text or a separate description is provided.
Content
Chapter 1 (this chapter) a description of the general content of the maintenance information category. Chapter 2 a description of the routine maintenance procedures to be carried out on the M-Cell6 BSS/RXCDR base transceiver station (BTS) and its associated peripheral units, see Information presentation below. Chapter 3 a description of the diagnostic procedures that are provided as a general aid to tracing faults in the field replaceable units (FRU) of the M-Cell6 BTS cabinet and associated peripheral units. These diagnostic procedures are not intended to enable fault location to sub-module or component level. Chapter 4 a description of the procedures for repairing the M-Cell6 BTS equipment cabinets by the replacement of an FRU that has been diagnosed as faulty, see Information presentation below.
Presentation
The routine maintenance procedures and repair procedures are presented in modular form, each module being one of the main constituents of the equipment, as follows: S S S S S S S S S S S The BTS equipment. The ac power distribution system (PDS). The dc power distribution system (PDS). The equipment cabinet. The heat management system (HMS) heat exchanger. The heat management system (HMS) air conditioner. The ancillary cabinet. The side cabinet. The BTS ac interface module. The additional equipment ac cabinet. The battery box.
Each module provides a further breakdown into the associated procedures that are presented as individual topics. In the routine maintenance section of the maintenance information category, the procedures are intended to be performed sequentially. In the repair sections of the maintenance information category, the procedures are intended to be performed individually. To avoid constant repetition in the text, certain common activities (such as opening and closing doors) are separated out and then cross referenced from the individual procedures. Where necessary, in order to gain access to a particular component, one procedure may encompass other individual procedures by cross reference.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 11
GMR-01
Introduction
GSM-105-523
Customer support
If problems are encountered during maintenance of the M-Cell6, help can be obtained from the nearest Motorola Local Office or from MCSC at Swindon on: Telephone number +44 (0)1793430040 Fax number +44 (0)1793 430987
Maint. 12
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Access conditions
Access conditions
Environmental requirements
The following information details the environmental requirements that should be considered before attempting to gain access to M-Cell6 equipment cabinet. The environmental limits for equipment operation and maintenance activity are shown in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 Operating environments for M-Cell6 cabinet Cabinet type Indoor cabinet Outdoor cabinet Outdoor extended climate cabinet Temperature 5 _C to +45 _C 33 _C to +45 _C 33 _C to +55 _C Relative humidity 5 % to 100 % 8 % to 100 % 4 % to 100 % Absolute humidity 29g water/m3 air 30g water/m3 air 30g water/m3 air
Weather considerations
Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance tent for access to the outdoor M-Cell6 cabinets during inclement weather conditions. Maintenance procedures for the M-Cell6 cabinets are dependent on the weather conditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelines should be considered before commencing work: S S S No access. Access with maintenance tent. Access without maintenance tent.
Access
Access should not be attempted to the cabinets during the following actual or imminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance tent: S S S Winds in excess of 25 knots. Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet. During an electrical storm.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 13
GMR-01
Access conditions
GSM-105-523
Access with maintenance tent

Access may be made to the cabinet under the following conditions with the use of the maintenance tent: S S S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots. Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet. Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a problem.
Access without maintenance tent

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of the maintenance tent: S S S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots. No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period. When the temperature is between 30 _C to 40 _C.
Under these conditions the doors and covers of the cabinet may be opened and secured open with the mechanical stays.
Maint. 14
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Field tool kits
Field tool kits

Overview
This section details the tools recommended for maintenance of the M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety items
Table 1-2 details the safety items which should be carried by all engineers: Table 1-2 Tool kit - safety items Quantity 1 1 pair 1 pack 1 pair 1 1 1 Safety helmet Safety goggles Dust masks Ear defenders Antistatic wrist strap and coiled lead Antistatic mat Torch Item
Maintenance tools
Table 1-3 details the tools required for maintenance operations: Table 1-3 Maintenance toolkit Quantity 1 set 1 set 1 1 1 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 1 pair 1 set 1 set 1 1 1 pair Item Flat blade screwdrivers Crosspoint screwdrivers Tamper-proof screwdriver T25 Hexagon screwdriver M6 Screw-gripping driver Wire cutters Side cutters 150mm Snipe nose pliers Insulated torque wrench General purpose serrated jaw pliers Torxdrivers T10/T20/T30 Allen keys metric/AF Krone insertion tool Knife with retractable blade Straight point tweezers

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 15
GMR-01
Field tool kits
GSM-105-523
Quantity 1 pair 1 sheet 1 1 1 1 1 1 Industrial scissors Fine-grade sandpaper Paint brush Soft brush Soft cloth
Item
Soldering iron and solder Heat shrink gun and sleeving Marker pen
Installation tools
In addition to the items listed in Table 1-3, Table 1-4 details the additional tools required for M-Cell6 installation: Table 1-4 Installation toolkit Quantity 1 1 1 1 set 1 1 1 1 1 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Large hammer drill Twin socket extension lead 6m M20 masonry bit Drill bits 0.5-12mm Socket set metric/1/2in drive Adjustable spanner 200mm Adjustable spanner 250mm Ratchet spanner 12mm Torque wrench 10-200Nm Combination pliers 200mm Heavy duty side cutters 150mm Cable shears 50mm Cable stripper BT2002 Hand crimp tool 50mm Type 43 connector crimp tool Telephone plug crimp tool 50mm crimp tool BNC crimp tool with inserts Tape measure 10m Steel rule 300mm Spirit level 1000mm Junior hacksaw and replacement blades Cable tie gun Claw hammer Item
Maint. 16
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Field tool kits
Torque settings
Torxdriver tools are pre-set to their own specific torque setting. The torxdriver tools used in this document, and their respective torque settings are shown in Table 1-5: Table 1-5 Torque settings Torxdriver Size T10 (M3) T20 (M4) T30 (M6) 13 mm socket (M8) 16 mm socket (M10) 17 mm socket 19 mm socket Note: Torque Setting 1.0 Nm 2.2 Nm 3.4 Nm or 5 Nm* 5.0 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm 3.4 Nm
The 3.4 Nm or 5.0 Nm torque settings for M6 screws depends on the location of the screw. Refer to specific information in the manual text.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 17
GMR-01
Test equipment
GSM-105-523
Test equipment
Overview
This section details the test equipment required for maintenance of the M-Cell6 equipment. Table 1-6 details the M-Cell6 maintenance test equipment: Table 1-6 M-Cell6 test equipment Quantity 1 Description IBM compatible 486 DX2 or DX4 portable personal computer (PC). Comments The minimum requirements are: TFT colour screen. 170 Mbyte hard drive. Minimum 4 Mbyte RAM, 8 Mbyte recommended. 3.5 inch floppy drive. Serial port. CD-ROM drive. PCMCIA (Type 2) compatible slot. Windows 3.1 or higher. Battery power. PC PLUS or similar software Minimum accuracy 1 x 1010
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Terminal emulator software Signal generator Rubidium standard Frequency counter Digital multimeter (must be sensitive enough to measure 0.1 ohms) RF 50 ohm dummy load ESD protection kit N to 716 adaptor N to N adaptor RF wattmeter with 2.5W, 5W, 10W 25W and 50W elements 2 meter N to N male coaxial cable 4 meter N to N male coaxial cable Cable kit SWKN6753A Type 43 loop-back cables, 23 cm (9 in) long BIB loop-back plug AC power generator (M-Cell2 outdoor only) Resistance tester
Hewlett Packard E2378A or equivalent 50 W minimum
Bird model 43P or equivalent Must be calibrated Must be calibrated Contains 3086240N01 Cable and 5886540N01 Thor adapter
Required to power test equipment at M-Cell2 outdoor sites Insulation and earth tester
Maint. 18
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Test equipment
Calibration requirements
Calibration of test equipment
Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing Motorola Cellular Base Stations. All test equipment must be calibrated annually by a recognized laboratory.
Calibration of test leads

Calibrate all test leads before using them in the procedures given or referred to in this manual to minimize variations in test results. Do not try to calibrate test equipment or test leads in the field.
Test lead connection diagram

Figure 1-1 shows the cable for PC to service point control (SPC) or PC to remotely tuned channel combiner (RTC) connection:
PIN NUMBER PIN NUMBER
2 3 5 4 6 7 8
4 m LONG SCREENED CABLE TO PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT 9 WAY D-TYPE F
3 2 7
TO TCU CONNECTOR 9 WAY D-TYPE M
Figure 1-1 9-way to 9-way test cable

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 19
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Maintenance equipment
In addition to the tools and test gear, the following equipment may also be required: Table 1-7 Maintenance equipment Quantity 1 1 pair 1 1 1 1 Maintenance tent Aluminium step ladder (minimum 2m) Highpressure air line Thermometer Variable resistive load frame (30 V dc 200 A) Vacuum cleaner Item
Materials required
This list contains the recommended materials to be used when carrying maintenance and repair procedures for an indoor or outdoor M-Cell2 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) installation. S S S S S S S Degreasing agent. Light grease Rembrandt EP2. Lubricant WD40. Medium machine oil. Mild detergent. No-oxide grease. Paint (5-bottle maintenance kit). Bottle 1 3 : Ral 7021; Ral 7044; Ral 9002 (recommended paint types). Bottle 4 : Accelerator for paint. Bottle 5 : Degreaser. S S S S S S Petroleum jelly. pH-neutral soap/water solution. Solvent. Water (clean and de-ionized). Gasket/seal kit for doors, panels, covers etc. Permabond C791 Cyanoacrylate Adhesive (Hi-speed glue). Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 110
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Maintenance support procedures

Overview
The support procedures are those which need to be carried out before and after the nominated repair procedures on the M-Cell6 equipments can be performed. These support procedures consist of the following activities: S S S Opening and closing doors and hoods. Disabling and enabling devices. Separating a heat management system (HMS) unit from a BTS cabinet.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, and high energy sources are present within the cabinet when the ac supply isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or the batteries are connected.
Tools, materials and equipment

The tools, materials and equipment specifically required for the following procedures are to be found in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials sections of this chapter.
Door and hood operation

These procedures describe how to enter and close an indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 BTS equipment cabinet and the outdoor side and ancillary cabinets. CAUTION Refer to Access conditions in this chapter for the conditions that must be considered before performing any equipment cabinet entry.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 111
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Outdoor cabinet BTS external view diagram

Figure 1-2 illustrates the doors and hoods on a BTS M-Cell6 cabinet, an ancillary cabinet and side cabinet:
HOODS
SIDE CABINET
BTS CABINET
ANCILLARY CABINET
LOCK COVERS
Figure 1-2 M-Cell6 outdoor 6 carrier BTS site
Maint. 112
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Door opening and closing

1. On outside cabinets, remove the door lock cover by using the pin hexagon screwdriver and unscrew the two M6 tamper proof screws securing the cover to the door. Insert the door key and rotate it a quarter turn counter clockwise to unlock the door. Remove the door key and press the central button in the locking mechanism to unlatch the door and its handle. Pull the outer edge of the door handle forwards to open the door. NOTE If the equipment is active, a door open alarm will be generated. 5. 6. Unclip the door stay from the inside of the door and locate its free end in the hole provided in the cabinet base to secure the door. To close the door, repeat the opening procedure in reverse order. NOTE When closing the door, the door handle must be firmly pushed into the door until the central button clicks out to confirm that the door is properly latched.
2. 3. 4.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 113
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Hood opening and closing

CAUTION A pair of steps or suitable platform should be used to gain adequate access to the hood and top panel of the BTS or ancillary cabinet. 1. 2. 3. Remove the hood lock cover by using the pin hexagon screwdriver to unscrew the two M6 tamper proof screws securing the cover to the hood. Insert the EMKA key and rotate it nearly a quarter turn counter clockwise to unlock the hood. Raise the hood with one hand sufficient to gain access with the other hand to the hood stay clamped inside, adjacent to the lock. NOTE If the equipment is active, a hood open alarm will be generated. 4. 5. 6. Release the stay, maintaining a hold to prevent it from falling onto the top panel assemblies. Raise the hood fully and clamp the free end of the stay in the location provided on the left hand side of the top box. To close the hood repeat the opening procedure in reverse order.
Maint. 114
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Disabling and enabling devices
Disabling and enabling devices

Overview
These procedures describe how to disable or enable devices in the M-Cell6 equipment in order to carry out a repair procedure. These procedures describe how to disable or enable devices in the M-Cell6 equipment in order to carry out a repair procedure.
To disable a device
Use the lock device command from the OMC or from a PC connected to the MCU. Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321) for more information on usage and specific device codes.
To enable a device
Use the unlock device command from the OMC or from a PC connected to the MCU. Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321) for more information on usage and specific device codes.
Return to service
Perform the operational checks or cross refer to the appropriate GSM service manual or chapter containing the associated post maintenance test checks. Notify GSM cell site network of the base station availability. Log the maintenance activity.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 115
GMR-01
Separating the BTS and heat management system (HMS) unit
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes the method used to separate a heat management system (HMS) unit from an M-Cell6 BTS cabinet. This procedure is identical for both the HMS heat exchanger and the HMS air conditioner units, and is necessary for the implementation of all repair procedures involving both.
Safety
WARNING Power down the cabinet before starting this procedure.

The tools, materials and equipment specifically required for the following procedures are to be found in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials sections of this chapter.
Maint. 116
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Outdoor BTS cabinet with heat exchanger diagram

Figure 1-3 shows the BTS/HMS (heat exchanger) configuration:
M-CELL6 BTS CABINET
HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM HEAT EXCHANGER
Figure 1-3 BTS cabinet with heat exchanger HMS unit

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 117
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove an HMS system:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the BTS cabinet lid/cover and disconnect all cables from the HMS unit. Unscrew the three tamper-proof screws holding the HMS onto the HMS support plate. From the inside of the lid, remove the three tamper-proof screws holding the HMS unit to the BTS cabinet. Remove the HMS unit but not the support plate. The HMS system removal is now completed.
Maint. 118
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 2
M-Cell6 routine maintenance

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

i

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Routine maintenance
Routine maintenance
Overview
This chapter contains the procedures for the routine maintenance of a GSM900, GSM1800 or PCS1900 indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 base transceiver station (BTS), including the side and ancillary cabinets fitted in an outdoor installation. NOTE Since an M-Cell6 BTS operates as part of a network, the procedures in this chapter must be performed in conjunction with the relevant network procedures in the associated OMC manuals.
List of maintenance procedures

The routine maintenance procedures are organized according to the physical and functional aspects of the equipment, as follows: S S S S S Maintaining the BTS equipment. Maintaining the power distribution system. Maintaining the equipment cabinets. Maintaining the Heat Management System (HMS) heat exchanger. Maintaining the HMS air conditioner. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. GSM1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 21
GMR-01
Routine maintenance
GSM-105-523
Schedule
Table 2-1 details routine maintenance for indoor and outdoor installations recommended at the following intervals: Table 2-1 Routine maintenance schedules. Interval Task Inspect external bodywork and paintwork, repair if required. Maintain the BTS equipments. Ensure that air inlets, exhaust grilles and filters are not blocked. 6 Months Maintain the heat exchanger and air conditioner. Check the power distribution system. Check normal operation. Annual check of the installation. 12 Months Check batteries and battery operation. Inspect general mechanical condition of the cabinets. 24 Months Inspect locks, handles and hinges of door and hood. Lubricate if required.
Safety
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these routine maintenance procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working on the equipment.
Maint. 22
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cabinet maintenance
Cabinet maintenance
Overview
This procedure describes how to repair damaged (scratched or chipped) cabinet paintwork on the M-Cell6 cabinet.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected. Remove rings, watches and jewelry before starting these procedures, and exercise extreme caution when working on the equipment.

The tools, equipment and materials required for the following procedure are detailed in Chapter 1 Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials sections.

The maintenance activities described here are: S S S S S Inspecting the cabinet exterior Inspecting the doors or hood Inspecting the cabinet interior Cleaning the cabinet exterior Repairing damaged paintwork

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 23
GMR-01
Cabinet maintenance
GSM-105-523
Outdoor BTS cabinet external view diagram

Figure 2-1 shows an outside BTS site, with M-Cell6 outdoor BTS, ancillary and side cabinets and fitted with HMS heat exchanger units.
Figure 2-1 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS site
Maint. 24
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cabinet maintenance
Inspecting the cabinet exterior

NOTE Use the step ladder or platform where necessary for ease of access. 1. 2. Check exterior panels for dents and structural damage. Check the paintwork for damage or scratches and touch up as necessary. The paint touch-up procedure is detailed in Repairing damaged paintwork in this chapter. Check the air intake and exhaust area and remove any debris, leaves, paper etc from them.
3.
Inspecting the doors or hood

1. 2. 3. 4. Check cabinet doors for distortion, security and correct operation. Check environmental door seals for cuts, distortion, damage and security. Check EMC seals for cuts, distortion, damage and security. The beryllium copper fingers should be clean and of uniform appearance. Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation. Carefully lubricate the hinges with a light lubricating oil, but avoid getting the lubricant on the EMC gasket. Ensure that all door seals are wiped clean of the lubricant. Check earth connections for damage and security. Check door lock mechanisms and inspect them for ease of operation. Lubricate the mechanisms with light grease. Ensure that the lubricated surfaces are grit-free.
5. 6.
Inspecting the cabinet interior

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the desiccant bags. Check the rack equipment for security of attachment, and check the connections (especially the APSMs and batteries). Carry out a visual check of all visible wiring for signs of overheating and security of attachment. Check that all fuses are correctly secured in their respective holders. Check the connections to the earth busbars and equipment earth connections for corrosion and tightness using a spanner, do not over stress the connections. Replace the desiccant bags.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 25
GMR-01
Cabinet maintenance
GSM-105-523
Cleaning the cabinet exterior

1. Clean the cabinet exterior with a mild detergent to remove grime and atmospheric deposits. NOTE Take care to clear salt deposits in coastal areas. 2. 3. 4. After washing rinse the exterior of the cabinet with clean water. Rinse with de-ionized water. Dry the cabinet with a soft leather cloth.
Repairing damaged paintwork

To repair scratched or damaged paintwork: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use the fine grain sandpaper to remove any loose paint around the area to be re-painted. Degrease the damaged area. Use the soft cloth to thoroughly dry in and around the damaged area. Re-paint the damaged area using the correct type of paint.
Maint. 26
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Maintaining the base transceiver station equipment

Overview
The only routine maintenance procedure necessary on M-Cell6 equipment is the inspection, cleaning and checking of the fan assemblies in GSM900 or GSM1800 indoor or outdoor BTS cabinets, and outdoor ancillary cabinets.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.


31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 27
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
M-Cell6 indoor cabinet diagram

Figure 2-2 illustrates the position of the fans in a BTS cabinet (indoor EGSM900).
COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
Figure 2-2 M-Cell6 indoor BTS showing cooling fans
Maint. 28
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet diagram

Figure 2-3 shows the location of the fans in an ancillary cabinet.
COOLING FAN FAN CONNECTOR POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (PDP)
COOLING FAN
Figure 2-3 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet showing cooling fans

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 29
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cleaning and checking the fans

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove each fan, as described in the associated procedures below. Use the brush and the vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the impellers and in the fan box. Spin the impellers of the fan to ensure free rotation, with no excessive noise. Through the aperture in the bottom plate of the fan box, grasp the fan motor and rock it from side to side, to assess the wear in the bearing. Replace each fan, as described in the associated procedures below.
Procedure
To remove a fan from a BTS cabinet
WARNING If working on an outdoor BTS, first identify the fan to be replaced and switch OFF the relevant BTS1 or BTS2 HMS SUPPLY circuit breaker on the ancillary cabinet PDP. When this has been done, proceed to step 1. 1. 2. Identify the fan to be replaced and power down by disconnecting the six pin plug adjacent to the relevant fan. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, from the OMC or via a PC connected to the MCU. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure that the RF power is OFF, as indicated by the TX STATUS LEDs being extinguished on the relevant TCUs. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 3. Unscrew and remove the knurled ring cable connectors that secure the RF cables positioned in front of the fan to be removed to the underside of the top panel RF modules. Secure the cables out of the way. Unscrew and retain the three M4 torx screws securing the front base of the fan housing to the fan shelf. Grasp the handle at the front of the fan housing and carefully slide it forwards out of its location. Place the fan assembly on a convenient work surface. Unscrew and retain the single M4 torx screw and shakeproof washer securing the fan grille to the top front of the fan housing. Withdraw the grille upwards. Taking care to support the fan blades, unscrew and retain the four M4 screws and shakeproof washers securing the fan to the top of the fan housing. Carefully withdraw the fan from the rear of its housing, guiding the lead and connector through the aperture at the top. The fan removal is now complete. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
4. 5. 6. 7.
Maint. 210
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement fan in a BTS cabinet

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE When re-inserting the grille, ensure that its lower corners engage in the slots provided in the fan housing. CAUTION When sliding the fan housing back into the cabinet, take care not to stress or damage the interior cableforms. 2. 3. Power up the cabinet as describes in normal commissioning (Chapter 6 or 7 as relevant, Category 423) and check that the fan is operating correctly. The fan replacement is now complete. Inform the OMC and log completion of repair/test activity.
To remove a fan from an ancillary cabinet

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch OFF the ANC HMS SUPPLY circuit breaker on the PDP. Identify the fan to be replaced and disconnect its associated six pin plug at the relevant side of the fan shelf. Unscrew and retain the three M4 torx screws securing the front base of the fan housing to the fan shelf. Grasp the handle at the front of the fan housing and carefully slide it forwards out of its location. Place the fan assembly on a convenient work surface. Unscrew and retain the single M4 torx screw and shakeproof washer securing the fan grille to the top front of the fan housing. Withdraw the grille upwards. Taking care to support the fan blades, unscrew and retain the four M4 screws and shakeproof washers securing the fan to the top of the fan housing. Carefully withdraw the fan from the rear of its housing, guiding the lead and connector through the aperture at the top. The fan removal is now complete.
To install a replacement fan in an ancillary cabinet

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE When re-inserting the grille, ensure that its lower corners engage in the slots provided in the fan housing. CAUTION When sliding the fan housing back into the cabinet, take care not to stress or damage the interior cableforms. 2. 3. Power up the cabinet as describes in normal commissioning (Chapter 6 or 7 as relevant, Category 423) and check that the fan is operating correctly. The fan replacement is now complete. Inform the OMC and log completion of repair/test activity.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 211
GMR-01
Indoor ac BTS
GSM-105-523
Indoor ac BTS
Overview
This section contains the procedures for routine maintenance of the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS ac power interface module, additional equipment cabinet and battery box.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and sources of high energy are present within the M-Cell6 ac indoor BTS ac power interface module, additional equipment cabinet and battery box only; extreme caution must be observed at all times. Access to the interior of the units for installation, commissioning, maintenance removal and replacement of equipment is limited to fully trained service personnel only. Rings, watches and jewellery should be removed and only single ended insulated tools should be used when working or making measurements inside the unit. A soldering iron must not be used unless the input and output have first been isolated. Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazard that exist. All statements regarding safety within these routine maintenance procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working on the equipment.
Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance should be carried out on the ac power interface module at six monthly intervals, whilst routine maintenance for the battery box should be carried out at six monthly and annual intervals. Any faults should be recorded in the service log.
Maint. 212
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Checking the ac power module interface

Overview
This procedure is to be carried out every six months to verify that the ac and dc PDS is operating correctly.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and sources of high energy are present within the M-Cell6 ac indoor BTS ac power interface module, additional equipment cabinet and battery box only; extreme caution must be observed at all times. Access to the interior of the units for installation, commissioning, maintenance removal and replacement of equipment is limited to fully trained service personnel only. Rings, watches and jewellery should be removed and only single ended insulated tools should be used when working or making measurements inside the unit. A soldering iron must not be used unless the input and output have first been isolated. Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these faults diagnosis procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working on the equipment.

Six monthly procedure check

CAUTION Before checking any multimeter reading, ensure that the multimeter is set to the appropriate range. The procedure is detailed below, any faults should be recorded in the service log. 1. 2. Connect the multimeter to the output monitoring terminal of the control and alarm assembly. Check that the power distribution supply (PDS) output voltage is the correct value for the ambient temperature . It should be within the normal operating limits of +27.4 V dc +/ 0.5 V dc at 20 _C +/ 5 _C. NOTE If the voltage is outside the limits, this may be due to a recent interruption of the ac supply or at extremes of temperature. This can be verified by checking the battery recharge current.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 213
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
3. 4. 5.
Check that the ac lamp and all LEDs are indicating the correct status. Make a visual inspection for mechanical damage, signs of overheating, damaged cables, terminals and insulation. Check that all electrical connections and mechanical fixings are secure.
Control and alarm assembly front panel diagram

Figure 2-4 shows details of the output voltage control and alarm assembly, located on the front panel of the battery box:
AUTO
BYPASS BYPASS BCB
BATT 2 BATT 1
LOW VOLTS
Figure 2-4 M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS voltage control and alarm assembly detail.
Maint. 214
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Checking the battery box

Overview
Routine maintenance should be carried out on a six monthly and annual basis in order to verify the interior/exterior condition and battery discharge rate.

Safety
Six monthly procedure check

The procedure is detailed below, any faults should be recorded in the service log. 1. Set the BATT.1/BATT.2/V/A switch to the V position and check the voltage at the + and sockets. Ensure the PDS output voltage is the correct value for the ambient temperature . It should be within the normal operating limits of +27.4 V dc +/ 0.5 V dc at 20 _C +/ 5 _C. Ensure that all LEDs are indicating the correct status. Ensure that there is no corrosion, leaks or bulges on each battery monobloc. Ensure that each battery monobloc is clean and dry, if necessary clean with a clean cotton cloth dampened with water. CAUTION Do not use solvents, paraffin or other cleaning agents.
2. 3. 4.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 215
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
5. 6.
Make a visual inspection for mechanical damage, signs of overheating, damaged cables, terminals and insulation. Ensure that all electrical connections and mechanical fixings are secure.
Annual procedure check

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 264 V ac are present in the M-Cell6 ac indoor BTS cabinet, when the ac mains isolators are set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected. The procedure is detailed below (see also Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7), any faults should be recorded in the service log.
Preliminary checks
1. 2. 3. 4. Check that the batteries have been float charged by the ACPMs for a period of at least 24 hours. Perform all six monthly procedures detailed above. Check that all system fuses and circuit breakers are intact. Check that all batteries and ACPM connections are tight.
Maint. 216
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery checks
Figure 2-5 shows the circuit breaker positions within the battery control panel. CAUTION Ensure that the battery voltage does not fall below 21.6 V dc at any time during the test, or the battery may be permanently damaged. If this happens, abort the test and report the discrepancy to the maintenance organization responsible. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the three M4 top screws on the battery panel and lift off the maintenance handle. Remove the remaining three M4 screws using a T20 Torxdriver and lift the front panel off. With the aid of the manufacturers battery leaflet determine the system rated standby time (5 minutes) and discharge current (32.8 A). Measure the voltage across each monobloc and record the reading. Set all circuit breakers to the OFF position. Disconnect the cables from the equipment (BTS 1 and BTS 2) and connect to the load frame (set to 32.8 A). Set BATT 1 and BATT 2 to the ON position for 5 minutes and leave the unit connected. The unit will draw power from the battery during the test, partially discharging the battery, but the battery should continue to function correctly. NOTE It may be necessary to adjust the load frame current periodically to maintain a current of 32.8 A. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Wait for a period of 1 min 15 secs (25% of the system rated standby time). Record the voltage across each monobloc. Repeat step 9 after 2 mins 30 secs, 3 mins 15 secs and 5 mins. Check that the final voltage of all four monoblocs is equal to within 10%. Check that the final voltage of each string (monobloc group) is greater than 21.6 V dc. Set BATT 1 and BATT 2 to the OFF position and disconnect the load frame. Connect the cables to the equipment (BTS 1 and BTS 2), observing correct polarity. Refit the battery panel and maintenance handle and secure with six M4 screws. Power up the system as described in Chapter 6 or 7 as relevant, Category 423#. The ACPMs may operate in current limit mode while recharging the battery. Check that this does not continue once the battery is recharged.
Log the maintenance operation.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 217
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery box circuit breakers panel diagram

Figure 2-5 shows the circuit breaker positions within the battery box control panel:
MCBs
200 A
BTS 1
126 A 126 A
BATT 2
BTS 2
BATT 1
FS5T2 AH
CONTROL PCA
FUSES
INDICATOR LEDS RED LED GREEN LED GREEN LED
AUTO
BYPASS BYPASS BCB
BATT 2 BATT 1
LOW VOLTS
Figure 2-5 Circuit breaker positions within the battery box.
Maint. 218
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery box fixing positions diagram

Figure 2-6 illustrates one of the battery box external fixtures:
M 4 x 16 SCREW (6 off)
MAINTENANCE HANDLE
BATTERY PANEL
Figure 2-6 Battery box front view panel and screw fixtures.
Battery box internal fixtures diagram

Figure 2-7 illustrates one of the battery boxes in the cabinet. The battery boxes, slave and master are identical with the exception that the master may also contain two CPSMs on the inside panel door.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL
BATTERY HEAT SENSORS ON REAR OF CABINET
COPPER LINK
WHITE PLASTIC TAPE
COPPER LINK
+
BATTERY BOX
Figure 2-7 Battery box front view showing internal battery positions and fixtures

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 219
GMR-01
Maintaining the heat exchanger
GSM-105-523

Overview
The procedures in this section cover inspection and checking of grilles, fans, control system and the heat exchanger matrix in the Heat Management System (HMS) heat exchanger fitted to an outdoor M-Cell6 BTS or ancillary cabinet. NOTE The heat exchanger is only fitted to the external M-Cell6 cabinet.
Safety
WARNING The cabinet must be powered down before carrying out any of these HMS procedures.


The HMS heat exchanger maintenance procedures below must be carried out every six months. The procedures must be performed in the sequence identified to avoid repetition of the cabinet strip procedure: NOTE Follow the instructions given in Chapter 1 Separating the BTS and heat management system (HMS) unit before starting these procedures. S S S S S Cleaning the air circuit grilles. Cleaning the fan impellers and Inspecting the bearings. Checking the control system. Cleaning the recuperators. Cleaning the heater element and relays.
Maint. 220
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Outdoor cabinet BTS with heat exchanger external view diagram

Figure 2-8 shows the BTS/HMS heat exchanger configuration:
M-CELL6 BTS CABINET
HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Heat Exchanger
Figure 2-8 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet and HMS heat exchanger unit

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 221
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Heat exchanger internal view diagram

Figure 2-9 shows the location of the various components that comprise the heat exchanger:
HMS CONTROL BOARD
RECUPERATOR
POWER ENTRY BOARD
AMBIENT AIR FANS
HEATER RELAYS
HEATER ELEMENTS
RECUPERATOR
Figure 2-9 M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger details
Functional testing
A functional test must be carried out after the procedures have been satisfactorily completed.
Maint. 222
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cleaning the air circuit grilles

Overview
This procedure describes how to check and clear the cabinet air inlets and exhausts on the M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety


31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 223
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Airflow path diagram

Figure 2-10 shows the airflow paths through the combined HMS heat exchanger cabinet and BTS or ancillary cabinet:
AMBIENT AIRFLOW
Figure 2-10 Airflow paths through the combined HMS heat exchanger unit and BTS or ancillary cabinet.
Maint. 224
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To check and clear the air circuit grilles: WARNING Ensure that the cabinet is powered down before starting this procedure.
1. 2.
Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws holding the rear panel of the HMS in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Check for blockages in the louvres on the rear panel, and in the grilles covering the two fans inside the cabinet. Remove any blockages, and use the soft brush and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the grilles. Examine the exhaust grille below the front door of the cabinet and check for blockages. Remove any blockages, and use the soft brush and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the grilles. Examine the exhaust duct at the top of the HMS. Check for blockages or debris in the grille and water trap. Remove any blockage or debris, and use the soft brush and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the grilles. Replace and secure the rear panel with the four M6 tamper-proof screws.
3.
4.
5.
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Check that the cabinet is operating correctly by referring to the Checking for normal operation of the BTS procedure in this chapter and complete any post maintenance checks where applicable. Notify the OMC cell site network that the maintenance check has been completed.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 225
GMR-01
Maintaining the heat exchanger fan impeller
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to clean the fan impellers on the M-Cell6 and check the fan bearings for wear.
Safety

Maint. 226
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
HMS heat exchanger internal view diagram

Figure 2-11 shows the location of the two fans inside the HMS heat exchanger.
AMBIENT AIR FANS
Figure 2-11 M-Cell6 HMS (heat exchanger) unit, showing ambient air fans

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 227
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To clean the fans and check the bearings: WARNING Ensure that the equipment is powered down before starting this procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws holding holding the rear panel of the HMS in position and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Remove the five M4 Torx screws from around the rim of each fan base and retain them for re-assembly. Extract each fan from its mounting position until it is restrained by its cable. Lay the fans on a convenient work surface. Use the soft brush or compressed air-line and the vacuum cleaner to remove any dirt or dust that may have accumulated on the impellers. Wash the impellers with a solution of PH-neutral soap/water and dry them with a soft cloth. Spin the impellers to ensure that there is freedom of rotation with no excessive noise. Hold each fan motor and move it left and right to see if there is any lateral play in it, indicating wear in the bearing. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order to replace the fans.
6. 7. 8.
Return to service
Maint. 228
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Checking the heat exchanger control system

Overview
This procedure describes how access the control system board, the fan control board and to check the operation of the control system on the M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger. The control board is mounted on the back panel of the cabinet, in the top right corner. There are two fan control boards, one mounted on either side of the upper ambient air fan tunnel. The procedure for each one is exactly the same.
Safety


The maintenance procedures described here are S S Checking the HMS heat exchanger control board Checking the fan control boards

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 229
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Heat exchanger components diagram

Figure 2-12 shows the location of the HMS control board, the power entry board and both fan controller boards in the HMS heat exchanger cabinet.
HMS CONTROL BOARD
POWER ENTRY BOARD
NOTE: THE FRONT PANEL AND WIRING INTERCONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY.
Figure 2-12 M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger controller details
Maint. 230
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
HMS control board diagram

Figure 2-13 shows an HMS heat exchanger connection panel.
TEST SOCKET RS232 LINK
27V DC
HMS ALARM AND CONTROL
+
FANS SUPPLY
Figure 2-14 M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger connection panel details
HMS control board procedure

1. 2. Remove and retain the four M4 crosshead screws holding the control board in position. Slowly withdraw the control board forward from its mounting location. Note the positions of the wiring connections for reconnection, then carefully disconnect all wiring from the plug connector terminals. As the wiring is removed the control board will eventually come free from its securing. Examine the control board for signs of mechanical damage, overheating, worn insulation etc. Gently brush any dust from the control board. To replace the board, repeat the removal steps in the reverse order.
3. 4. 5.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 231
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fan control board procedure

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Ensure the heat exchanger rear panel is removed, as described in the previous procedure. Remove the four M4 crosshead screws that secure the access plate for the fan control board. Remove the two connectors on the fan control board, noting their orientation for re-connection. Remove the four M4 crosshead screws from the side of the inlet vent to release the board. Examine the control board for signs of mechanical damage, overheating, worn insulation etc. Gently brush any dust from the control board. To replace the board, repeat the removal procedure in the reverse order.
Return to service
Maint. 232
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cleaning the recuperators

Overview
This procedure describes how to clean the recuperators in the HMS heat exchanger of the M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety


31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 233
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Heat exchanger recuperator location diagram

Figure 2-15 shows the location of the recuperators in the HMS heat exchanger cabinet:
RECUPERATOR
RECUPERATOR
Figure 2-16 M-Cell6 HMS heat exchanger recuperator detail.
Maint. 234
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws holding the rear panel of the HMS in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Inspect the recuperator(s) and remove any debris that may have accumulated on them. Using the compressed air line, the soft brush and the vacuum cleaner, remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the recuperator. If necessary, use a soft cloth and a PH-neutral soap/water solution to gently wash the recuperator. CAUTION If using the water to clean with, ensure that the water does not reach the electronic equipment in the cabinet. 5. Replace and secure the rear panel with the four M6 tamper-proof screws.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 235
GMR-01
Maintaining the air conditioner
GSM-105-523

Overview
The procedures in this section cover inspection and checking of grilles, fans, control system, pipes and couplings and the condenser in the HMS air conditioner fitted, for particular environments, to an outdoor M-Cell6 BTS or ancillary cabinet. NOTE The HMS air conditioner is ONLY fitted to the external M-Cell6 BTS and ancillary cabinets.
Safety


The air conditioner maintenance procedures below must be carried out every six months. The procedures must be performed in the sequence identified to avoid repetition of the cabinet strip procedure: S S S S S S S Inspecting all pipes and couplings. Cleaning the air circuit grilles. Cleaning the fan impellers and Inspecting the bearings. Checking the control system. Cleaning the recuperators. Cleaning the condenser. Cleaning the heater element and relays.
Maint. 236
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Outdoor cabinet BTS with air conditioner external view diagram

Figure 2-17 shows the BTS/HMS air conditioner configuration:
HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HMS) AIR CONDITIONER M-CELL6 BTS CABINET
Figure 2-17 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet and HMS air conditioner unit

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 237
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Figure 2-18 shows the location of the various components that comprise the HMS air conditioner.
CONDENSER COIL
CONDENSER FAN
EVAPORATOR COIL
HI/LO PRESSURE STATS SOLENOID VALVE
RECEIVER COMPRESSOR
NOTES: (1) THE HMS COVER, AIR CONDITIONER PIPING AND WIRING INTERCONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY. (2) ONLY THOSE MAJOR COMPONENTS THAT MAKE UP THE AIR CONDITIONER ARE SHOWN.
Figure 2-18 M-Cell6 HMS (air conditioner) details
Maint. 238
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Inspecting all pipes and couplings

Overview
This procedure describes how to check all pipes and couplings in the refrigeration system of the M-Cell6 cabinet HMS air conditioner, to ensure that they are serviceable and that no leaks exist. All of the piping used in the refrigeration system is made of copper, and all couplings are soldered.
Safety

Diagram
Refer to Figure 2-18 in the Maintaining the air conditioner section of this chapter.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 239
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To check the refrigeration system: 1. Remove the six M6 tamper-proof screws from the front panel of the HMS air conditioner unit, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the panel to allow access to the cabinet Observe the pipes and couplings, and note any signs of damage or leakage. Using the gas leak detector, (for R134a refrigerant), ascertain if there are any leaks in the refrigeration system. NOTE No item in the refrigeration system can be replaced on site. In the event of any fault being discovered, the whole air conditioner assembly MUST be replaced. 4. Replace and secure the rear panel with the four M6 tamper-proof screws.
2. 3.
Return to service
Maint. 240
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to check and clear the M-Cell6 cabinet air inlets and exhausts.
Safety


31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 241
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Air conditioner airflow paths diagram

Figure 2-19 shows the internal airflow paths through the combined HMS air conditioner and BTS or ancillary cabinets:
Figure 2-19 Airflow paths through the combined HMS air conditioner unit and BTS or ancillary cabinet.
Maint. 242
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To check and clear the air circuit grilles: 1. Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws holding holding the rear panel of the HMS air conditioner in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Check for blockages in the louvres on the rear panel, and in the grilles covering the two fans apertures inside the cabinet. Remove any blockages, and use the soft brush, air hose and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the grilles. Examine the exhaust grille below the front door of the cabinet and check for blockages. Remove any blockages, and use the soft brush and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the grilles. Examine the exhaust duct at the top of the A-C. Check for blockages or debris in the grille and water trap. Remove any blockage or debris and Remove any blockages, and use the soft brush and vacuum cleaner to remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the grilles. Replace and secure the rear panel with the four M6 tamper-proof screws. Power up the cabinet and check that the air is flowing correctly. Log the maintenance activity.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 243
GMR-01
Maintaining the air conditioner fan impeller
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to clean the condenser and ambient fan impellers on the M-Cell6 equipment, and check the bearings of both fans for wear.

Safety
Maint. 244
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Figure 2-20 shows the location of the ambient air fan in the HMS air conditioner:
THE AIR CONDITIONER COMPONENTS
AMBIENT AIR FAN
Figure 2-20 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner front view showing ambient air fan.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 245
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Air conditioner internal rear view diagram

Figure 2-21 shows the location of the condenser fan and the ambient air fan in the HMS air conditioner cabinet:
CONDENSER FAN
AMBIENT AIR FAN (behind grille)
NOTES: (1) THE HMS COVER, AIR CONDITIONER PIPING AND WIRING INTERCONNECTIONS ARE OMITTED FOR CLARITY.
Figure 2-21 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner rear view showing fan details.
Maint. 246
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ambient air fan procedure

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws holding the rear panel of the HMS air conditioner in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Remove the eight M4 Torx screws holding the grille that covers the ambient air fan aperture, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the ambient air fan grille. Use a small screwdriver to release the three cables from their spring-loaded terminals on the fan control board, noting their orientation for re-assembly. Release the five self-tapping screws holding the fan cover in place. Withdraw the cover/fan assembly, pulling the fan cable through the rubber sleeve. Using the air-line, brush and vacuum cleaner, clean the impellers of the fan of any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on them, and wash them with a solution of PH-neutral soap/water and a soft cloth. Spin the impellers to ensure that they rotate freely with no excessive noise. Hold the fan motor and move it left and right, noting any wear in the bearing. Repeat the removal procedures reverse order to replace the fans.
7. 8. 9.
Condenser fan procedure

1. 2. 3. Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws holding the rear panel of the HMS air conditioner in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Inspect the fan wheel, and remove any debris that may be caught there. Use the compressed air-line to remove any dust or dirt that may have accumulated on the impellers and wash them with a solution of PH-neutral soap/water and a soft cloth. Spin the impellers to ensure that there is freedom of rotation with no excessive noise. Hold the fan motor and move it left and right, noting any wear in the bearing. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order to replace the fans.
4. 5. 6.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 247
GMR-01
Checking the air conditioner control system
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to access to the HMS control board, the fan control boards and the air conditioner control panel of the M-Cell6 equipment.
The HMS control board is mounted in the top right-hand corner of the front panel of the cabinet, immediately above the power entry board. The fan control board is mounted inside the cabinet, and access to it is through the mounting aperture for the air conditioner control panel. The air conditioner control board is mounted inside the rear panel of the cabinet.
Safety


The maintenance procedures described here are: S S S Checking the HMS control board Checking the fan control board Checking the air conditioner control board
Maint. 248
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
HMS control boards locations diagrams

Figure 2-22 shows the location of the HMS control board and the fan controller board in the air conditioner cabinet.
THE AIR CONDITIONER COMPONENTS HMS CONTROL BOARD
POWER ENTRY BOARD
FAN CONTROL BOARD
Figure 2-22 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner controller details

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 249
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Air conditioner control board location

Figure 2-23 shows the location of the air conditioner control board in the air conditioner cabinet:
Figure 2-23 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner control board details.
Maint. 250
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Air conditioner control board diagram

Figure 2-24 shows an HMS control panel which is mounted above the power entry board in the air conditioner cabinet:
TEST SOCKET RS232 LINK
27V DC
HMS ALARM AND CONTROL
+
FANS SUPPLY
Figure 2-25 M-Cell6 HMS (air conditioner) connection panel details.
HMS control board procedure

1. 2. Remove the four M4 crosshead screws holding the HMS control board in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Slowly withdraw the control board forward from its mounting location. Note the positions of the wiring connections for reconnection, then carefully disconnect all wiring from the plug connector terminals. As the wiring is removed the control board will eventually come free from its securing. Examine the control board for signs of mechanical damage, overheating, worn insulation etc. Gently brush any dust from the control board. To replace the board, repeat the removal steps in the reverse order.
3. 4. 5.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 251
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fan control board procedure

1. 2. Remove the four tamper-proof screws holding the rear panel of the air conditioner cabinet in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Remove the two M4 crosshead screws which secure the air conditioner control board enclosure in position, and retain the screws for re-assembly. Remove the enclosure. Remove the four M4 crosshead screws which secure the fan controller board to the side of the cabinet, from the outside of the panel. Remove the fan control board from its mounting position. Remove the four M4 crosshead screws that secure the fan control board in position. Remove all the connectors on the fan control board, noting their orientation for re-connection. Examine the fan control board for signs of mechanical damage, overheating, worn insulation etc. Gently brush any dust from the fan control board. To replace the fan control board, repeat the removal procedure in the reverse order.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Air conditioner control board procedure

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the two self-tapping screws which hold the air conditioner control board enclosure in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the enclosure. Remove the four self-tapping screws which hold the air conditioner control board in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the air conditioner control board from its mounting position. Disconnect all connections to the air conditioner control board, noting their orientation for re-assembly. Examine the air conditioner control board for signs of mechanical damage, overheating, worn insulation etc. Gently brush any dust from the control board. To replace the air conditioner control board, repeat the removal procedure in the reverse order.
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Check that the cabinet is operating correctly by referring to the Checking for normal operation of the BTS procedure in this chapter and complete any post maintenance checks where applicable. Notify the OMC cell site network that the maintenance check has been completed. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 252
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cleaning the air conditioner recuperator

Overview
This procedure describes how to clean the recuperators in the HMS air conditioner of the M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety


31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 253
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Air conditioner recuperator location diagram

Figure 2-26 shows the location of the recuperator in the air conditioner cabinet.
THE AIR CONDITIONER COMPONENTS
RECUPERATOR
Figure 2-26 M-Cell6 HMS air conditioner recuperator detail
Maint. 254
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To clean the recuperators: 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the ambient air fan. Inspect the recuperator from the ambient air fan aperture, and remove any debris from it. Using the compressed air line, the soft brush and the vacuum cleaner, remove any dust and dirt that may have accumulated on the recuperator. If necessary, use a soft cloth and a PH-neutral soap/water solution to gently wash the recuperator. CAUTION If using the water to clean with, ensure that the water does not reach the electronic equipment in the cabinet. 5. To re-assemble the recuperator and ambient air fan, follow the removal procedures in the reverse order.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 255
GMR-01
Cleaning the air conditioner condenser coil
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to clean the condenser unit in the HMS air conditioner of the M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety

Maint. 256
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Air conditioner condenser location diagram

Figure 2-27 shows the location of the condenser coil and the condenser fan in the air conditioner unit.
CONDENSER COIL
CONDENSER FAN
Figure 2-27 M-Cell6 HMS (air conditioner) condenser details

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 257
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To check the condensers: 1. Remove the four M6 tamper-proof screws that hold the rear panel of the air conditioner cabinet in position, and retain them for re-assembly. Remove the rear panel. Undo the four self-tapping screws retaining the condenser fan, and remove it. Inspect the condenser coil for dust and debris, and use the stiff brush and the vacuum cleaner to remove any that may have accumulated there. NOTE If the fins of the condenser coil are damaged, use a comb to straighten them out. 4. To reassemble the condenser, repeat the removal procedures in the reverse order.
2. 3.
Return to service
Maint. 258
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Maintaining the power distribution system
Maintaining the power distribution system

Overview
The following procedures cover inspection and checking of the ac and dc Power Distribution System (PDS) in GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 BTS cabinets, and outdoor side or ancillary cabinets.
Safety

List of procedures
The PDS maintenance procedures are: S S S S S S S Visually Inspecting the BTS cabinet system. Checking for normal operation of the BTS. Visually Inspecting the ancillary cabinet system. Checking the ancillary cabinet for normal operation. Checking the ancillary cabinet battery operation. Visually Inspecting the side cabinet system. Checking side cabinet for normal operation.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 259
GMR-01
Visually inspecting the BTS cabinet system
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure is intended to ensure that the M-Cell6 equipment is in a safe, operational condition, and to note that the LEDs and any other indicators denote the correct functioning of individual modules.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415V ac in the side cabinet, and high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.

Maint. 260
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
BTS cabinet LED location diagram

Figure 2-28 illustrates the position of those LEDs inside the BTS cabinet front door which are lit when the cabinet is functioning correctly:
TCU 5 TCU 4 TCU 3 TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 0 (not visible) TCU 1 TCU 2
REDUNDANT mBCU 1 CAGE
mBCU 0 CAGE
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (P/NPSM) 1 P/NPSM 0
Figure 2-28 M-Cell6 BTS cabinet, showing position of LEDs

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 261
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To inspect the system visually: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door. Observe the inside of the cabinet and note any signs of physical damage, overheating, loose connections and badly fitting components, etc. Note the LEDs which are lit. Check against the table below to ensure that only those LEDs which indicate the correct functioning of the cabinet are lit. Observe the fans through the fan grilles to see that the fans are operating correctly, with no excessive noise. Close the cabinet door.
Table 2-2 illustrates the LEDs that are lit when the BTS cabinet is functioning correctly: Table 2-2 M-Cell6 BTS cabinet LED details Unit Transceiver Control Unit 0 (TCU0) Unit and Colour of LED TX Status ORANGE Radio Status GREEN TX Status ORANGE Transceiver Control Unit 1 (TCU1) Radio Status GREEN TX Status ORANGE Transceiver Control Unit 2 (TCU2) Radio Status GREEN TX Status ORANGE Transceiver Control Unit 3 (TCU3) Radio Status GREEN TX Status ORANGE Transceiver Control Unit 4 (TCU4) Radio Status GREEN TX Status ORANGE Transceiver Control Unit 5 (TCU5) +ve/ve Power Supply Module 0 (P/NPSM0) +ve/ve Power Supply Module 1 (P/NPSM1) +ve/ve Power Supply Module 2 (P/NPSM2) Micro Base Control Unit 0 Network Interface Unit (NIU) Main Control Unit (MCU) Micro Base Control Unit Power Supply Radio Status GREEN Top LED GREEN Top LED GREEN Top LED GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN
Return to service
Maint. 262
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Checking for normal operation of the BTS
Checking for normal operation of the BTS

Introduction
This procedure is to be carried out on the M-Cell6 equipment every six months, to verify that the power distribution system in the BTS is operating correctly .
Safety

Diagram
Refer to Figure 2-28 in the Visually inspecting the BTS cabinet system section of this chapter.
Procedure
To monitor the systems dc voltage: CAUTION Before checking any multimeter reading, ensure that the multimeter is set to the appropriate range. 1. 2. Connect the multimeter to the output monitoring terminals. Check the PDS output voltage. It should be within the normal operating limits of +27.4 V dc 0.5 V dc at 20_C . NOTE If the voltage is outside the limits, this may be due to a recent interruption of the ac supply or at extremes of temperature. This can be verified by checking the battery recharge current. 3. 4. Check that the system LEDs are indicating the correct status. Refer to Table 2-2 in the Visually inspecting the BTS cabinet system section of this chapter. Log the maintenance activity.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 263
GMR-01
Visually inspecting the ancillary cabinet system
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure is intended to ensure that the ancillary cabinet of the M-Cell6 equipment is in a safe operational condition, and to note that the LEDs which indicate the correct functioning of the system are lit.
Safety

Maint. 264
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet LED location diagram

Figure 2-29 shows the location of those LEDs inside the ancillary cabinet which are lit when the cabinet is functioning correctly.
APSM 5
APSM 4 APSM 0 APSM 3
APSM 2
BYPASS PANEL
Figure 2-29 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet, showing position of LEDs

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 265
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To inspect the system visually: 1. 2. 3. 4. Observe the inside of the cabinet and note any signs of physical damage, overheating, loose connections and badly fitting components, etc. Note the LEDs which are lit. Check against the table below to ensure that only those LEDs which indicate the correct functioning of the cabinet are lit. Observe the fan through the fan grille to see that the fan is operating correctly, with no excessive noise. Log the maintenance activity.
Table 2-3 illustrates the LEDs that are lit when the cabinet is functioning correctly, their colour when lit, and the units on which the LEDs are located. Table 2-3 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet LED details Unit Bypass Panel Unit and Colour of LED BCA Closed LED GREEN BCB Closed GREEN I/P Healthy LED ORANGE APSM 0 O/P Healthy LED GREEN I/P Healthy LED ORANGE APSM 1 O/P Healthy LED GREEN I/P Healthy LED ORANGE APSM 2 O/P Healthy LED GREEN I/P Healthy LED ORANGE APSM 3 O/P Healthy LED GREEN I/P Healthy LED ORANGE APSM 4 O/P Healthy LED GREEN I/P Healthy LED ORANGE APSM 5 O/P Healthy LED GREEN
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Check that the cabinet is operating correctly by referring to the Checking the ancillary cabinet for normal operation procedure in this chapter and complete any post maintenance checks where applicable. Notify the OMC cell site network that the maintenance check has been completed.
Maint. 266
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Checking the ancillary cabinet for normal operation

Overview
This procedure is to be carried out every six months to verify that the ac and dc PDS in the indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet is operating correctly.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac, and high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator is set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.


31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 267
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet PDS location diagram

Figure 2-30 shows the location of the PDS output monitoring terminals in an ancillary cabinet:
BATTERY ISOLATORS
PDS OUTPUT MONITORING TERMINALS BATTERIES
Figure 2-30 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet, showing PDS details
Maint. 268
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To monitor the systems dc voltage: CAUTION Before checking any multimeter reading, ensure that the multimeter is set to the appropriate range. 1. 2. Connect the multimeter to the output monitoring terminals. Check the PDS output voltage. It should be within the normal operating limits of +27.4 V dc 0.5 V dc at 20 _C . NOTE If the voltage is outside the limits, this may be due to a recent interruption of the ac supply or at extremes of temperature. This can be verified by checking the battery recharge current. 3. 4. Check that system LEDs are indicating the correct status. Check that the battery monoblocs are undamaged, with no corrosion, leaks or bulges. NOTE Carry out the battery maintenance in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 5. 6. Check that the battery monoblocs are clean and dry. Clean monoblocs only with a clean cotton cloth dampened with water. Log the maintenance activity. NOTE Do not use solvents, paraffin or other similar cleaning agents to clean the monoblocs.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 269
GMR-01
Checking the ancillary cabinet for battery operation
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure is required to check the capacity of the batteries on the M-Cell6.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected. Power down the cabinet before starting this procedure.

Preliminary checks
To perform preliminary battery checks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check that the battery has been float charged by the APSMs for a period of at least 24 hours. Check that all system fuses and circuit breakers are intact. Check that all battery and APSM connections are tight. Check that the nominal float voltage setting is 27.4 V dc. Check that the ambient air temperature around the battery is 20 C 5 C.
Maint. 270
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet battery location diagram

Figure 2-31 shows position of the batteries in an ancillary cabinet.
BATTERY ISOLATORS
PDS OUTPUT MONITORING TERMINALS BATTERIES
Figure 2-31 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet, showing PDS details

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 271
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Procedure
To perform battery checks: CAUTION Ensure that the battery voltage does not fall below 21.6 V dc at any time during the test, or the battery may be permanently damaged. If this happens, abort the test and report the discrepancy to the maintenance organization responsible. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the four T20 Torx screws on the battery panel and lift the panel off. Determine the system rated standby time (5 minutes) and discharge current (32.8 A). Measure the voltage across each monobloc and record the reading. Set all circuit breakers to the OFF position. Disconnect the cables from the load and connect to the load frame (set to 32.8 A). Set CB5 to the ON position for 5 minutes and leave the unit connected. The unit will draw power from the battery during the test, partially discharging the battery, but the battery should continue to function correctly. NOTE It may be necessary to adjust the load frame current periodically to maintain a current of 32.8 A. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Wait for a period of 1min 15secs (25% of the system rated standby time). Record the voltage across each monobloc. Repeat step 8 after 2mins 30secs, 3mins 15secs and 5 mins. Check that the final voltage of all four monoblocs is equal to within 10%. Check that the final voltage of each string is greater than 21.6 V dc. Set CB5 to the OFF position and disconnect the load frame. Connect the cables to the load, observing correct polarity. Refit the battery panel and secure with the four screws. Power up the system as after installation. The APSMs may operate in current limit mode while recharging the battery. Check that this does not continue once the battery is recharged.
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Check that the cabinet is operating correctly by referring to the Checking the ancillary cabinet for normal operation procedure in this chapter and complete any post maintenance checks where applicable. Notify the OMC cell site network that the maintenance check has been completed. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 272
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Visually inspecting the side cabinet system

Overview
This procedure is intended to ensure that the side cabinet is in a safe, operational condition, ensuring the correct functioning of the M-Cell6 equipment.
Safety

Procedure
Observe the inside of the cabinet and note any signs of physical damage, overheating, loose connections and badly fitting components, etc.
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Check that the cabinet is operating correctly by referring to the Checking the side cabinet for normal operation procedure in this chapter and complete any post maintenance checks where applicable. Notify the OMC cell site network that the maintenance check has been completed.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 273
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Side cabinet internal view diagram

Figure 2-32 shows the interior of a side cabinet.
RF BULKHEAD PANEL
AC CIRCUIT BREAKERS
DUPLEXER (HIGH POWEr)
DUPLEXER SHELF
AC INPUT ISOLATOR
Figure 2-32 M-Cell6 side cabinet details
Maint. 274
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Checking the side cabinet normal operation
Checking the side cabinet normal operation

Overview
This procedure is to be carried out every six months, to verify that the side cabinet in the power distribution system of the M-Cell6 is operating correctly.

Safety
Diagram
Refer to Figure 2-8 in the Visually inspecting the side cabinet section of this chapter.
Procedure
To check for normal operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ensure that the ON/OFF switch on the circuit breaker is in the ON position. Check that system LEDs are indicating the correct status. Visually inspect for mechanical damage, signs of overheating and damaged cables, terminals and insulation. Check that all electrical connections and mechanical fixings are secure. Log the maintenance activity.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 275
GMR-01
Checking the installation annually
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure outlines the functional checks which must be carried out on the MCell6 BTS system on an annual basis.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and high energy sources are present within the cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or the batteries are connected.

List of annual Procedures

NOTE Refer to Installation & configuration M-Cell BSS/RXDCR (GSM-106-423) to carry out the following procedures: The following must be performed annually: S S S S S S S S Earth electrode test. Power commissioning. Electricity company connection. Pre-power up. AC power up. DC power up. HMS heat exchanger system test. HMS Air conditioner system test.
Return to service
Maint. 276
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Indoor BTS configuration diagrams

Figure 2-33 shows the BTS/HMS heat exchanger configuration:
M-CELL6 HEAT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HMS) HEAT EXCHANGERS
M-CELL6 BTS CABINET
M-CELL6 ANCILLARY CABINET
M-CELL6 SIDE CABINET
Figure 2-33 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS site, with heat exchanger HMS units

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 277
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Indoor BTS internal view diagram

Figure 2-34 shows an internal view of the EGSM900 M-Cell6 BTS indoor cabinet and equipment, with the door removed:
TOP PANEL
ALARM BOARD (AB 6)
DC power input terminals
BLANKING PLATE or redundant power supply POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (P/NPSM) 1 P/NPSM 0
mBCU 0 CAGE
Figure 2-34 Interior details of an M-Cell6 indoor EGSM900 BTS cabinet
Maint. 278
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Figure 2-35 shows an internal view of the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet, with the door and hood removed:
EXTERNAL ALARMS INTERFACE TOP PANEL
COMMS POWER SUPPLY MODULE (CPSM) PANEL (CPSMs mounted behind panel, if required) APSM 5 APSM 4 APSM 3 CUSTOMER COMMS EQUIPMENT SPACE
COOLING FANS
APSM 1
BATTERY ISOLATORS APSM 2
CONTROL PANEL
BATTERY BOX
Figure 2-35 Interior details of an M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 279
GMR-01
Checking the installation every 24 months
GSM-105-523

Overview
These procedures which are to be repeated every 24 months, describe the maintenance of the hinges and locks on the cabinet door for both indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 BTS cabinets and the hood on outdoor cabinets.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, and high energy sources are present within the cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or the batteries are connected.

Diagrams
Refer to Figure 2-33 Figure 2-34 and Figure 2-35 in the Checking the installation annually section of this chapter.
List of 24 monthly maintenance procedures

NOTE Before starting this 24 month schedule, complete the procedure Opening and closing the cabinet door, side panel, cover or hood in this chapter. The following procedures must be carried out annually: S S Inspect general mechanical condition of the cabinets. Inspect locks, handles and hinges of door and hood.
Maint. 280
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Door hinges, latches and lock

Follow this procedure using the manufacturers recommended lubricants (see Tools, materials and equipment in this chapter). NOTE If the equipment is active, a door open alarm will be generated. 1. Check the door hinges and lubricate them if they are dry. Leave the door open. CAUTION Do not contaminate the EMC gasket with lubricant. 2. 3. 4. Check the two door latches, and lubricate them if the sliding parts are dry. Check the door handle, and lubricate it if the sliding parts are dry. Lubricate the lock mechanism in the door handle.
Hood hinges and lock

Follow this procedure using the manufacturers recommended lubricants (see Tools, materials and equipment in this chapter). NOTE If the equipment is active during this procedure, a hood open alarm will be generated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the hood hinges and lubricate them if they are dry. Unscrew the M6 x 10 mm screw holding the pawl. Remove the pawl and the lock insert. Check the lock insert, and lubricate it if it is dry. Refit the lock insert and pawl using steps 23 but in the reverse order. Close and lock the door and hood.
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Check that the cabinet is operating correctly by referring to the Checking for normal operation of the BTS procedure in this chapter and complete any post maintenance checks where applicable. Notify the OMC cell site network that the maintenance has been completed.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 281
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Maint. 282
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 3
M-Cell6 fault diagnosis

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Fault diagnostic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of diagnostic procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Cabinet interconnection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 34 Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 34 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 319 BTS cabinet interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 333 Indoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 333 Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 334 DC power distribution to CCB and IADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 335 DC power distribution to mBCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 336 DC power distribution to TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 337 DC power distribution to distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 338 CCB power link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 339 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 340 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (outdoor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 341 HMS to top panel, fan dc power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 342 Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 343 Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 344 Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 345 Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 346 Alarm board (AB 6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 348 Interconnect Bus Board (IBB) electrical interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 350 IBB to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 352 HMS to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 354 BTS 1 to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 355 BTS 2 to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 357 Ancillary to IBB signal bus link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 359 TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 361 mBCU to mBCU redundant link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 362 mBCU to BIB/T43 signal alarm links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 364 TATI to TATI 1 signal link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 365 mBCU to GPS signal link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 366 Indoor ac BTS power interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 367

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ACPIM and ACPM fault LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 368 ACPIM and ACPM alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 369 Battery box panel fault LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 370 Battery box fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 371 Indoor ac power supply module interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 373
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fault diagnostic procedures

Overview
This chapter contains basic information for diagnosing faults in a GSM900, GSM1800 or PCS1900, indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 base transceiver station (BTS), including the side and ancillary cabinets fitted in outdoor installations. The information is given as a general aid to tracing a fault to a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and is not intended to provide details to sub-module or component level. General fault diagnosis for the M-Cell6 BTS is performed as part of the OMC function. The procedures in this chapter are therefore confined to fault location at a local level within the cabinets that is beyond the scope of OMC diagnosis. Refer to BSS Field Troubleshooting (68P0201W51) for in-depth fault finding procedures. NOTE The term TCU used in this chapter is a generic reference to: EGSM900 TCU and TCU-B. GSM1800/PCS1900 TCU and high powered TCU. Except where specific differences are detailed, details and procedures for all TCU types are the same.
Format
Diagnosing faults
A tabular format is generally used for the fault finding procedures with symptoms shown to the left and suggested cause and rectification to the right. Fault location is achieved by assessing the type of fault from the exhibited symptoms and then tracing the source by following the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
Cabinet interconnections
To support the diagnostic procedures, a set of reference diagrams and tables detailing the interconnections for each type of BTS cabinet is provided. The internal connections for the M-Cell6 side and ancillary cabinets used in outdoor installations are detailed in Technical Description: M-Cell BSS/RXDCR (GSM-106-323 which is part of this Service Manual).
Safety
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these fault diagnosis procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working on the equipment.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 31
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
List of diagnostic procedures

The fault diagnosing procedures are: S S S S S S Diagnosing module indicator and alarm faults. Diagnosing circuit breaker trip faults. Diagnosing blown fuse faults. Diagnosing miscellaneous faults. Diagnosing heat management system faults. Diagnosing air conditioner unit faults.
Maint. 32
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Overview
The internal connections for the indoor and outdoor M-Cell6 BTS cabinets are routed through cableforms. The following diagrams and tables provide detailed intercabling information to support the fault diagnosis procedures.
Interconnection diagrams
The diagrams are divided as follows: S S Indoor BTS cabinet interconnections. Outdoor BTS cabinet interconnections.
Interconnection tables
Each table represents a cableform, as follows: S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S DC power distribution to TATI and IADU. DC power distribution to mBCU. DC power distribution to TCU. DC power distribution to distribution panel. TATI power link. Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor). Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (outdoor). HMS to top panel, fan dc power. Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU. Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1. Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU. Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE. Alarm board (AB 6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1 & 2. Interconnect bus board (IBB) electrical interconnections. IBB to IBB signal bus link. HMS to IBB signal bus link. BTS1 to IBB signal bus link. BTS2 to IBB signal bus link. Ancillary to IBB signal bus link. TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links. mBCU to mBCU redundant link. mBCU to BIB/T43 signal/alarm links. TATI 1 to TATI 2 signal link. mBCU to GPS signal link.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 33
GMR-01
Cabinet interconnection diagrams
GSM-105-523

Indoor cabinet BTS interconnections
Figure 3-39 to Figure 3-52 show the interconnection cabling details for the indoor BTS cabinet. Table 3-1 identifies the interconnection diagrams: Table 3-1 M-Cell6 indoor BTS interconnection diagrams Topic Indoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS positive earth dc power intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3) with air combining diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector and twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling. Indoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling. See Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10 Figure 3-11 Figure 3-12 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-14
Maint. 34
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-1 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet negative earth dc power intercabling details.
(WHEN INSTALLED)
CCB0
RED BLK
CCB1
RED BLK
GSM1800/PCS1900 only LNA2 IADU (EGSM900 only)

2 RED 2 BLK
+27 V LNA1 LNA0
0V
FAN 1
FAN 0
RED BLK RED BLK PL1
AB6
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
4 RED 4 BLK
RED
BLK
6 BLK
6 RED 6 BLK
MCB9
MCB8
MCB7
MCB6
MCB5
0 V BUS BAR
F5 F3
3 BLK
F4 F2 F1
MCB10
2 BLK
MCB4
3 BLK
F6
mBCU 0
PSU BACKPLANE
PPSM 2
PPSM 1
PPSM 0
Figure 3-1 Indoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 35
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-2 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet positive earth dc power intercabling details:
(WHEN INSTALLED)
CCB0
RED BLK
CCB1
RED BLK
GSM1800/PCS1900 only LNA2 IADU (EGSM900 only)

2 RED 2 BLK
48 V LNA1 LNA0
0V
FAN 1
FAN 0
RED BLK RED BLK PL1
AB6
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
4 RED 4 BLK
RED
BLK
6 BLK
6 RED 6 BLK
MCB9
MCB8
MCB7
MCB6
MCB5
0 V BUS BAR
F5 F3
3 BLK
F4 F2 F1
MCB10
2 BLK
MCB4
3 BLK
F6
mBCU 0
PSU BACKPLANE
NPSM 2
NPSM 1
NPSM 0
Figure 3-2 Indoor cabinet BTS positive earth dc power intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 36
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-3 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet alarm intercabling details:
FAN 1 SPEED SENSOR

4 4 SMOKE ALARM 10
FAN 0 SPEED SENSOR
PIX 0
2 THERMOSTAT
J1 37
AB6
PL3 J2 PL5 PL6 PL7 PL4 PL1 PL2
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
2 THERMOSTAT
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE
25 FOX J31 J30 J12 9
J14
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
25
PWR IADU J21 PWR
PWR IADU J21 PWR
FOX J31 J30
J12
+12 V GPS J13 J11
+12 V GPS J13 J11
PSU BACKPLANE
PSM 2
PSM 1
PSM 0
Figure 3-3 Indoor cabinet alarm intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 37
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-4 shows the M-Cell6 cabinet AB6 extender board alarm intercabling details:
PIX 0
37 J1 PL3 25 PL4 J1 PL1
AB6
PL2
AB6 EXTENDER BOARD

PL5 PL6 J2 PL7
Figure 3-4 Indoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling.
Maint. 38
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-5 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 2
7/16 7/16
DLNB 1
7/16 7/16 7/16
DLNB 0
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
DUPLEXER 2
7/16
DUPLEXER 1
7/16
DUPLEXER 0
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
CBF 2
N N
CBF 1
N N
CBF 0
N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-5 Indoor cabinet EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 39
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-6 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 0
7/16 7/16
7/16
BPF CCB 1
N
CCB 0
N N N N N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-6 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 310
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-7 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
DLNB
RF INPUT RF LOAD
IADU
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-7 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 311
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-8 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 2 sector (3:3) with air combining diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB DLNB
IADU RF INPUT RF LOAD RF INPUT RF LOAD
3-INPUT CBF
NON-H COMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
M-Cell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-8 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3) with air combining diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Maint. 312
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-9 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
A
RF INPUT RF LOAD
Rx EXT BLOCK
DLNB
DLNB
IADU
IADU
RF INPUT RF LOAD
6 2 2 6
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
Figure 3-9 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 313
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-10 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
RF INPUT RF LOAD
DUPLEXER
DLNB
Rx EXT BLOCK
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB
DLNB
IADU IADU RF INPUT

6 6 6 6
RF INPUT RF LOAD
RF LOAD
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B A B
T C U
T C U A B
Figure 3-10 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Maint. 314
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-11 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet EGSM900 2 single sector and twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling details:
DLNB
IADU
TBPF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-11 Indoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector and twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 315
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-12 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet GSM1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling details:
TX1 RX1B RX1A
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
HYBRID COMBINERS
TX BPF 0
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-12 Indoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling.
Maint. 316
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-13 shows the M-Cell6 indoor cabinet GSM1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling details:
TX3 TX2 TX1 RX3B RX3A RX2B RX2A RX1B RX1A

5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 2 TX BPF 1
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-13 Indoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 317
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-14 shows the M-Cell6 cabinet data and fibre optic intercabling details:
(TOP OF CABINET)
MS0 BIB/T43
37
(WHEN INSTALLED)
TATI 1
9
TATI 0
MS1 BIB/T43
GPS
37
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
10
12
12
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE #
J14
#
PWR J21
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
PWR J21
FOX J31 J30
J12
FOX J31 J30
J12 +12 V
+12 V GPS J13 J13 J11
GPS
*
15 RED RED IN OUT
J11
ALARM
Figure 3-14 Indoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 318
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnections

Figure 3-53 to Figure 3-65 show the interconnection cabling details for the indoor BTS cabinet. Table 3-2 identifies the interconnection diagrams: Table 3-2 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS interconnection diagrams Topic Outdoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS cabinet alarm intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3), with air combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector, twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling. Outdoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling. See Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16 Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 319
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-15 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet negative earth dc power intercabling details:
HMS GSM1800/PCS1900 only LNA2
(WHEN INSTALLED)
LNA1
LNA0
2 RED/2 BLK
CCB0
RED BLK
CCB1
RED BLK RED BLK RED BLK
+27 V
0V
IADU (EGSM900 only)

2 RED 2 BLK RED BLK PL1 RED BLK
FAN 1
FAN 0
AB6
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
4 RED 4 BLK
RED
BLK
6 BLK
6 RED 6 BLK
MCB9
MCB8
MCB7
MCB6
MCB5
0 V BUS BAR
F5 F3
3 BLK
+27 V BUS BAR CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL MCB11 MCB10 mBCU 1
F4 F2 F1
2 BLK
BLK
Figure 3-15 Outdoor cabinet BTS negative earth dc power intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 320
MCB4
3 BLK
F6
mBCU 0
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-16 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet alarm intercabling details:
25
HMS
2 2 CABINET HOOD SWITCH 2
50 IBB IN NEXT CABINET
IBB
TEMP SENSE (ON TOP PANEL)
50 BTS 2 CABINET (TOP OF CABINET) PIX 1 35 2 PIX 0 TRIP THERMOSTAT 10 HMS ALARMS
ALARM THERMOSTAT
FAN 1 SPEED SENSOR

4 2
FAN 0 SPEED SENSOR
CABINET DOOR SWITCH
J1 37
AB6
PL3 J2 PL4
VSWR PL1 PL2
ALARM TO TCU
PL5 INTERNAL ALARMS 16 16
PL7 PL6 TEST POWER INPUT
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
PIX O/P
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE
PIX O/P
J14
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
25
PWR IADU J21 PWR
FOX J31 J30
J12
25
PWR IADU J21 PWR
FOX J31 J30
J12
+12 V GPS J13 J11
+12 V GPS J13 J11
Figure 3-16 Outdoor cabinet BTS alarm intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 321
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-17 shows the M-Cell6 cabinet AB6 extender board alarm intercabling details:
PIX 0
37 J1 PL3 25 PL4 J1 PL1
AB6
PL2
AB6 EXTENDER BOARD

PL5 PL6 J2 PL7
Figure 3-17 Outdoor cabinet BTS AB6 extender board alarm intercabling.
Maint. 322
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-18 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 2
7/16 7/16
DLNB 1
7/16 7/16
DLNB 0
7/16 7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
DUPLEXER 2
7/16
DUPLEXER 1
7/16
DUPLEXER 0
7/16
7/16
7/16
7/16
CBF 2
N N
CBF 1
N N
CBF 0
N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-18 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 wideband combining RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 323
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-19 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling details:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
IADU
DLNB 0
7/16 7/16
7/16
BPF CCB 1
N
CCB 0
N N N N N N
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
Figure 3-19 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 cavity combining RF intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 324
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-20 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
DLNB
RF INPUT RF LOAD
IADU
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-20 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 4 carrier Omni (Omni 4) with air combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 325
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-21 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet EGSM900 2 sector (3:3), with air combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB DLNB
RF INPUT RF LOAD
RF INPUT RF LOAD
IADU
3-INPUT CBF
NON-H COMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
M-Cell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-21 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (3:3), with air combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Maint. 326
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-22 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling details:
A
RF INPUT RF LOAD
Rx EXT BLOCK
DLNB
DLNB
IADU
IADU
RF INPUT RF LOAD
6 2 2 6
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
T C U
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
A B
Figure 3-22 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 sector (4:4) with hybrid combining and diversity RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 327
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-23 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4) with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling details:
RF INPUT RF LOAD
DUPLEXER
DLNB
Rx EXT BLOCK
DUPLEXER
DUPLEXER DLNB
DLNB
IADU IADU RF INPUT

6 6 6 6
RF LOAD
RF INPUT RF LOAD
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
HCOMB
3-INPUT CBF
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
T C U A B
Figure 3-23 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 3 sector (4:4:4), with 3-input CBF, hybrid combining, diversity and medium power duplexer RF intercabling.
Maint. 328
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-24 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet RF EGSM900 2 single sector, twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling details:
DLNB
IADU
TBPF
4 4
T C U A B
T C U A B
MCell6 BTS CABINET
Figure 3-24 Outdoor cabinet BTS EGSM900 2 single sector, twin band pass filter (TBPF) RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 329
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-25 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet GSM1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling details:
TX3 RX3B RX2B RX1B RX3A RX2A RX1A
TX2 TX1
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
HYBRID COMBINERS
TX BPF 0
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-25 Outdoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Omni 6 RF intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 330
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-26 shows the M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet GSM1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling details:
TX3 TX2 TX1 RX1B RX2B RX3B RX1A RX2A RX3A

5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 2 TX BPF 1
HYBRID COMBINER
TX BPF 0
HYBRID COMBINER
TCU5
TCU4
TCU3
TCU2
TCU1
TCU0
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
PC1
Figure 3-26 Outdoor cabinet BTS GSM1800/PCS1900 Sector 2:2:2 RF intercabling.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 331
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Figure 3-27 shows the M-Cell6 cabinet data and fibre optic intercabling details:
(TOP OF CABINET)
MS0 BIB/T43
37
(WHEN INSTALLED)
TATI 1
9
TATI 0
MS1 BIB/T43
GPS
37
TCU 5
TCU 4
TCU 3
TCU 2
TCU 1
TCU 0
10
12
12
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
J14
mBCU 1 BACKPLANE #
J14
#
PWR J21
mBCU 0 BACKPLANE
PWR J21
FOX J31 J30
J12
FOX J31 J30
J12 +12 V
+12 V GPS J13 J13 J11
GPS
*
15 RED RED IN OUT
J11
ALARM
Figure 3-27 Outdoor cabinet BTS data and fibre optic intercabling. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 332
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
BTS cabinet interconnection tables

Indoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables
Table 3-5 to Table 3-10, Table 3-13 to Table 3-16, and Table 3-24 to Table 3-29 show the interconnection cabling details for the indoor BTS cabinet. Table 3-3 identifies the interconnection tables: Table 3-3 M-Cell6 indoor BTS cabinet interconnection tables Topic DC power distribution to TATI and IADU DC power distribution to mBCU DC power distribution to TCU DC power distribution to distribution panel CCB power link Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor) Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1 Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links mBCU to mBCU redundant link mBCU to BIB/T43 signal/alarm links TATI 1 to TATI 2 signal link mBCU to GPS signal link 3004910C01 3004908C01 3004906C01 3004571D01/D02/D03 3004648D01 3004302D01 3004960C01 3004961C01 3004905C01 3004300D01/D02 3004929C01/C02 3004909C01 3004907C01/C02 3004650D01 3004963C01 See Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-10 Table 3-13 Table 3-14 Table 3-15 Table 3-16 Table 3-24 Table 3-25 and Table 3-26 Table 3-27 Table 3-28 Table 3-29

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 333
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Outdoor cabinet BTS interconnection tables

Table 3-5 to Table 3-9, Table 3-11 to Table 3-12, and Table 3-14 to Table 3-29 show the interconnection cabling details for the outdoor BTS cabinet. Table 3-4 identifies the interconnection tables: Table 3-4 M-Cell6 outdoor BTS cabinet interconnection tables Topic DC power distribution to TATI and IADU DC power distribution to mBCU DC power distribution to TCU DC power distribution to distribution panel CCB power link Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power HMS to top panel, fan dc power Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1 Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE Alarm board (AB6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1 & 2 BTS cabinet IBB electrical interconnections IBB to IBB signal bus link HMS to IBB signal bus link BTS 1 to IBB signal bus link BTS 2 to IBB signal bus link Ancillary to IBB signal bus link TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links mBCU to mBCU redundant link mBCU to BIB/T43 signal/alarm links TATI 1 to TATI 2 signal link mBCU to GPS signal link See Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-11 Table 3-12 Table 3-14 Table 3-15 Table 3-16 Table 3-17 Table 3-18 Table 3-19 Table 3-20 Table 3-21 Table 3-22 Table 3-23 Table 3-24 Table 3-25 & Table 3-26 Table 3-27 Table 3-28 Table 3-29
Maint. 334
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
DC power distribution to CCB and IADU
DC power distribution to CCB and IADU

Where fitted
M-Cell6 indoor and outdoor cabinets.
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-39, Figure 3-40 and Figure 3-53. Table 3-5 Cable assembly 3004910C01 Interconnections Cable Colour TATI POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 V busbar Black Black 0 V busbar Black Black TATI 2 fuse Red Red Linked to 7 Linked to 6 TATI 1 fuse Red Red Linked to 4 Linked to 3 Not connected Not connected +27 V +27 V Not connected +27 V +27 V Not connected Not connected Not connected Linked to 12 +27 V Return Linked to 11 +27 V Return Not connected Linked to 15 +27 V Return Linked to 14 +27 V Return Twisted Pairs Function
IADU POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 0 V busbar IADU fuse Black Red Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Linked to 3 Linked to 4 Linked to 1 Linked to 2 +27 V Return +27 V +27 V Return +27 V

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 335
GMR-01
DC power distribution to mBCU
GSM-105-523
DC power distribution to mBCU

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-15. Table 3-6 Cable assembly 3004908C01 Interconnections Cable Colour mBCU (M) (J14) 1 2 3 4 GND 0 V busbar mBCU1 C/B Black Red Black Yellow mBCU (S) (J14) 1 2 3 4 Ground 0 V busbar mBCU2 C/B Black Red Black Yellow Linked to 1 Linked to 3 +27 V Return + 27 V psu enable Ground Linked to 1 Linked to 3 +27 V Return + 27 V psu enable Ground Twisted Pairs Function
Maint. 336
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
DC power distribution to TCU
DC power distribution to TCU

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-15. Table 3-7 Cable assembly 3004906C01 Interconnections Cable Colour TCU 0 1 2 3 TCU 1 1 2 3 TCU 2 1 2 3 TCU 3 1 2 3 TCU 4 1 2 3 TCU 5 1 2 3 0 V busbar TCU 5 C/B Black Red 1 and 2 2 and 1 +27 V Return +27 V Not used 0 V busbar TCU 4 C/B Black Red 1 and 2 2 and 1 +27 V Return +27 V Not used 0 V busbar TCU 3 C/B Black Red 1 and 2 2 and 1 +27 V Return +27 V Not used 0 V busbar TCU 2 C/B Black Red 1 and 2 2 and 1 +27 V Return +27 V Not used 0 V busbar TCU 1 C/B Black Red 1 and 2 2 and 1 +27 V Return +27 V Not used 0 V busbar TCU 0 C/B Black Red 1 and 2 2 and 1 +27 V Return +27 V Not used Twisted Pairs Function

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 337
GMR-01
DC power distribution to distribution panel
GSM-105-523
DC power distribution to distribution panel

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-15. Table 3-8 Cable assembly 3004571D01/D02/D03 Interconnections D01 27V busbar mBCU1 C/B mBCU2 C/B D02 TATI 1 fuse 27V busbar TATI 2 fuse IADU fuse D03 FAN 1 fuse 27V busbar FAN 2 fuse NAB fuse Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Cable colour
Maint. 338
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
CCB power link
CCB power link

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-15. Table 3-9 Cable assembly 3004648D01 Interconnections Top panel 3 4 11 12 Top panel 6 7 14 15 CCB 0 3 4 # # CCB 1 3 4 # # Red Red Black Black Red Red Black Black Cable colour
NOTE Pins 1, 2, 5, 8, 9, 10 and 13 not connected on the Top Panel connector

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 339
GMR-01
Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor)
GSM-105-523
Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (indoor)

Where fitted
M-Cell6 indoor cabinet.
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-39 to Figure 3-41. Table 3-10 Cable assembly 3004302D01 Interconnections AB 6 (PL5) Smoke Alarm
End 1 End 2 End 3 End 4 1 2 3 4 Red Black Orange Green Linked to 4 Linked to 3
Cable colour
Twisted pairs
Function
+27 V (smoke alarm power) 0 V (smoke alarm return) Smoke alarm signal Smoke alarm signal return
Fan 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 Fan 1 fuse 0 V busbar White Blue Red Black
Fan 1 fail Fan 1 fail return +27 V 0V Fan 2
1 2 3 4
7 8 Fan 2 fuse 0 V busbar
Orange Green Red Black
Fan 2 fail Fan 2 fail return +27 V 0V
9 10
Orange Orange
Linked to 10 Linked to 9
Thermostat
End 5 End 6 11 12 White Blue
BTS overtemp alarm (thermostat 2) BTS overtemp alarm (thermostat 2) +27 V 0V Ground 0V
AB 6 (PL7)
1 2 3 4 NAB fuse 0 V busbar Ground 0 V busbar Red Black Green/Yellow Black
Maint. 340
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (outdoor)
Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB 6) dc power (outdoor)

Where fitted
M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet.
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-53 and Figure 3-54. Table 3-11 Cable assembly 3004629D01 Interconnections AB 6 (PL5) Smoke Alarm End 1 End 2 End 3 End 4 1 2 3 4 Red Black Orange Green Linked to 4 Linked to 3 Fan 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 HMS A3 HMS A2 White Blue Red Black Fan 2 1 2 3 4 7 8 HMS A1 HMS A2 Orange Green Red Black Door switch 5 6 HMS A5 9 HMS A4 10 Orange Thermostat End 5 End 6 11 12 White Blue AB 6 (PL7) 1 2 3 NAB fuse 0 V busbar Ground Red Black Black +27 V 0V Ground BTS overtemp alarm (thermostat 2) BTS overtemp alarm (thermostat 2) Orange Door 1 open # Door 1 return Fan 2 fail Fan 2 fail return +27 V temperature sensor 0 V temperature sensor Fan 1 fail Fan 1 fail return +27 V temperature sensor 0 V temperature sensor +27 V (smoke alarm power) 0 V (smoke alarm return) Smoke alarm signal Smoke alarm signal return Cable colour Twisted pairs Function

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 341
GMR-01
HMS to top panel, fan dc power
GSM-105-523
HMS to top panel, fan dc power

Where fitted
M-Cell6 outdoor cabinets.
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16. Table 3-12 Cable assembly 3004328D01 Interconnections HMS A1 A2 A3 Fans A1 A2 A3 Hood switch 1 2 A4 A5 Orange Orange Red Black Red Cable colour
Maint. 342
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU
Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU

Where fitted
M-Cell6 indoor cabinets.
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-41. Table 3-13 Cable assembly 3004960C01 Interconnections AB 6 (J1) PSU 1&2 3&4 5&6 7&8 1 2 3 4 5 35 10, 12 & 14 13 11 9 15 & 16 17 & 18 19 & 20 21 & 22 23 & 24 25 & 26 27 & 28 29 & 30 # # # # 31 32 33 34 # # # # Thermostat 1 2 36 37 Orange Orange Smoke O/P N/O Smoke O/P N/C Smoke O/P COM +27 V # Green red White Black PSU enable Signal return Overtemperature PSU OK N/O Input fail N/C Cable colour Function

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 343
GMR-01
Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1
GSM-105-523
Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-41 and Figure 3-54. Table 3-14 Cable assembly 3004961C01 Interconnections AB 6 (PL2) TCU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 TCU 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 Blue/Red Red/Green Orange/Black Blue/Black 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Black/Red White/Red Black/White Red/White Green/White Blue/White Orange/Red Alarm decode 1 Alarm decode 2 Alarm decode 3 Alarm string 1 Alarm string 2 Alarm string 3 Alarm string 4 Not used Cabinet ID 1 Cabinet ID 2 Data valid Signal return Not used Red/Black Green/Black Orange/Black Blue/Black 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Orange Blue Black White Red Blue White/Black Alarm decode 1 Alarm decode 2 Alarm decode 3 Alarm string 1 Alarm string 2 Alarm string 3 Alarm string 4 Not used Cabinet ID 1 Cabinet ID 2 Data valid Signal return Not used Cable colour Function
Maint. 344
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU
Alarm board (AB 6) to mBCU

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-16. Table 3-15 Cable assembly 3004905C01 Interconnections mBCU (J11) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 AB 6 (PL3/PL4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Black White Red Green Orange Blue White/Black Red/Black Green/Black Orange/Black Blue/Black Black/White Red/White Green/White Blue/White Black/Red White/Red Orange/Red Blue/Red Red/Green Orange/Green Black/White/Red White/Black/Red Red/Black/White Green/Black/White Site_ID_GND_1 (GND) spi_s0 spi_s1 spi_ck eid_sel Spare Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected alarm_rx_9 (master/slave signal O/P) GND (signal return) alarm_tx_0 (mBCU 1/2 I/P 1) alarm_tx_1 (mBCU 1/2 I/P 2) alarm_tx_2 (mBCU 1/2 I/P 3) alarm_tx_3 (mBCU 1/2 I/P 4) alarm_tx_4 (spare input) alarm_tx_5 (mBCU 1/2 healthy) GND (signal return) Cable colour Function
NOTE AB 6 PL4 is routed to mBCU 1 (master) and AB 6 PL3 is routed to mBCU 2 (slave).

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 345
GMR-01
Alarm board (AB 6) to KRONE
GSM-105-523

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-16. Table 3-16 Cable assembly 3004300D01/D02 Interconnections AB 6 (J2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 13 32 16 4 23 5 24 KRONE 1 20 2 21 3 22 11 12 14 15 Black White Red Green Orange Blue White/Black Red/Black Green/Black Orange/Black Blue/Black Black/White Red/White Green/White Blue/White Black/Red White/Red Orange/Red Blue/Red Red/Green Orange/Green Black/White/Red White/Black/Red Red/Black/White Green/BLK/White Orange/Black/White Blue/Black/White Input 11 Input 12 Input 21 Input 22 Input 31 Input 32 Relay 1 N/O Relay 2 N/O Relay 3 N/O Relay 4 N/O Spare Spare 0V EXT 9 input EXT 10 input EXT 11 input EXT 12 input Input 41 Input 42 Input 51 Input 52 Spare Spare Relay 1 N/C Relay 2 N/C Relay 3 N/C Relay 4 N/C Cable colour Function
Maint. 346
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Interconnections 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 36 25 37 26 8 27 30 31 33 34
Cable colour Black/Red/Green White/Red/Green Red/Black/Green Spare Spare
Function
EXT 13 input
Green/Black/Orange EXT 14 input Orange/Black/Green EXT 15 input Blue/White/Orange Black/White/Orange White/Red/Orange Orange/White/Blue White/Red/Blue # # # # # # # # # # # # # EXT 16 input Output 3 COM Output 4 NC Output 4 COM Output 5 COM EXT 81 EXT 82 Relay 1 COM Relay 2 COM Relay 3 COM Relay 4 COM Spare Spare 0V +5 V +5 V 0V 0V

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 347
GMR-01
Alarm board (AB 6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1 & 2
GSM-105-523

Where fitted
M-Cell6 outdoor cabinet.
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-16. Table 3-17 Cable assembly 3004976C01 Interconnections AB 6 (J1) HMS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Black White Red Green Brown Blue # Black White Red Green Brown Blue # Black White Red Green Orange Blue White/Black Red/Black Green/Black Orange/Black Blue/Black Air conditioning unit 1 fail Return Air conditioning unit 2 fail Return HMS unit 1 fail Return HMS unit 2 fail PSU AC I/P fail Return Linked to J1/12 Return PSU DC O/P fail Linked to J1/10 Return Overtemp Return Low voltage disconnect imminent Return Ancillary smoke alarm Ancillary smoke alarm return Ancillary fan 1 fail Linked to J1/22 Return Ancillary fan 2 fail Linked to J1/20 Return Ancillary HMS O/T Return Door 2 open Cable colour Twisted pairs Function
Maint. 348
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Interconnections 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Cable colour Blue/White Red/White # # # # # # # #
Twisted pairs Linked to J1/28 Return
Function
Door 3 open Linked to J1/26 Return Ancillary cabinet O/T (Thermostat 2) Ancillary cabinet O/T (Thermostat 2) Smoke O/P N/O Smoke O/P N/C Smoke O/P COM +27 V (PSU enable input)
Thermostat 1 2 NOTE Connector HMS 1 pins 10, 20 and 26 not connected; 36 and 37 not used 36 37 Orange Orange BTS cabinet O/T trip (Thermostat 1) BT cabinet O/T Trip (Thermostat 1)

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 349
GMR-01
Interconnect Bus Board (IBB) electrical interconnections
GSM-105-523

Where fitted
Where located
Table 3-18 details the BTS cabinet IBB electrical interconnections:
Table 3-18 BTS cabinet IBB interconnection Interconnections Input PL1 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 22 10 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 25 23 11 10 11 24 12 HMS J1 (25W) Output J2 (50W) 1 2 27 28 6 7 8 9 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 Cabinet J3 (50W) 17 16 14 13 12 11 Return Return O/T HMS 1 or PSU PSU return PSU DC O/P fail Not used PSU AC I/P fail Return HMS unit 2 fail Return HMS unit 1 fail Return Air con unit 2 fail Return Air con unit 1 fail Smoke O/P common (COM) Smoke O/P normally closed (N/C) Smoke O/P normally open (N/O) Anc cab O/T return Anc cab O/T Door open return Door 3 open Not used Door 2 open Function Anc smoke alarm
Maint. 350
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Input PL1 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HMS J1 (25W)
Output J2 (50W)
Cabinet J3 (50W) 24 23 Return
Function
Anc HMS O/T Anc fan return Anc fan 2 fail Not used
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 25 13 19 6 18 5 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
22 21
19 18
Anc fan 1 fail Anc smoke return Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare
43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
Low temp alarm COM Low temp alarm COM Cabinet equipment ON COM Cabinet equipment ON N/C Mains present COM Mains present N/C Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 2 Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 1 Spare Spare

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 351
GMR-01
IBB to IBB signal bus link
GSM-105-523

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements IBB J2 to IBB PL1 as shown in Figure 3-54. Table 3-19 Pin details J2 to PL1 (Cable 3004331D01) IBB PL1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 IBB J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Air con unit 1 fail Return Air con unit 2 fail Return HMS unit 1 fail Return HMS unit 2 fail Return PSU AC I/P fail Not used PSU DC O/P fail PSU return O/T HMS or PSU Return LVD imminent Return Anc smoke alarm Return Anc fan 1 fail not used Anc fan 2 fail Return Anc HMS O/T Return Door 2 open Not used Door 3 open Return Anc cabinet O/T Signal
Maint. 352
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-19 Pin details J2 to PL1 (Cable 3004331D01) IBB PL1 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 IBB J2 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Anc cabinet O/T Smoke O/P N/O Smoke O/P N/C Smoke O/P COM Spare Spare Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 1 Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 2 Mains present N/C Mains present COM Cabinet eq on N/C Cabinet eq on COM Low temp alarm N/O Low temp alarm COM Signal

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 353
GMR-01
HMS to IBB signal bus link
GSM-105-523
HMS to IBB signal bus link

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the HMS to IBB J1 as shown in Figure 3-16. Table 3-20 Pin details HMS to J1 (Cable 3004327D01) HMS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 IBB J1 RF hood temp sensor pin 1 2 Hood switch 2 pin 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 RF hood temp sensor Pin 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Signal RF hood temp sensor pin 1 Not used Hood open switch 2 pin Input to HMS 1 Not used Mains present N/C Cabinet eq on N/C Not used Not used Aux relay O/P Air con fail N/C HMS unit fail N/C HMS over temp N/C Low temp alarm N/O RF hood temp sensor Pin 2 Not used Hood open switch 2 pin 2 Not used Mains present COM Cab eq on COM Not used Aux relay O/P Air con fail COM HMS unit fail COM HMS over temp COM Low temp alarm COM Output from HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Input to HMS Input to HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Output from HMS Input to HMS Input to HMS Input to HMS Description Input to HMS
Maint. 354
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
BTS 1 to IBB signal bus link

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects BTS 1 to IBB J3 as shown in Figure 3-16. Table 3-21 Pin details BTS 1 to IBB J3 (Cable 3004732D01) BTS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 IBB J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Signal Air con unit 1 fail Return Air con unit 2 fail Return HMS unit 1 fail Return HMS unit 2 fail Return PSU AC I/P fail Not used PSU DC O/P fail Return PSU O/T HMS or PSU Return LVD imminent Return Anc smoke alarm Anc smoke return Anc fan fail Not used Anc fan 2 fail Return anc fan Anc HMS O/T Return Door 2 open Not used Door 3 open Return door Anc cabinet O/T Description

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 355
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-21 Pin details BTS 1 to IBB J3 (Cable 3004732D01) BTS 1 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 IBB J3 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Low temp alarm Cabinet equipment on Mains present Signal Anc cabinet O/T return Smoke O/P N/O Smoke O/P N/C Smoke O/P COM Spare Spare Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 1 Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 2 Cabinet O/T trip Cabinet O/T trip Description
Maint. 356
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects BTS 2 to IBB J3 as shown in Figure 3-16. Table 3-22 Pin details BTS 2 to IBB J3 (Cable 3004733D01) BTS 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 13 14 5 6 IBB J3 1 2 Signal Air con unit 1 fail Return Link to 4 Link to 3 HMS unit 1 fail Return Link to 8 Link to 7 Link to 12 Not used Not used O/C Link to 9 HMS over temp Return Link to 16 Link to 15 Link to 18 Link to 17 Link to 22 Not used Link to 22 Link to 19 & 21 Link to 24 Link to 23 Link to 28 Not used Link to 28 Link to 25 & 27 Link to 30 Door 2 & 3 open Ancillary cab O/T Door 2 & 3 open Ancillary HMS O/T Ancillary fan fails Ancillary smoke alarm LVD signal PSU AC and DC fail HMS unit 2 fail Air con unit 2 fail Description

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 357
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-22 Pin details BTS 2 to IBB J3 (Cable 3004733D01) BTS 2 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Low temp alarm Cabinet equipment on Mains present IBB J3 Signal Link to 29 Smoke O/P N/O Smoke O/P N/C Smoke O/P COM Spare Spare Cabinet O/T trip Cabinet O/T trip Cabinet O/T trip Ancillary cab O/T Description
Maint. 358
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary to IBB signal bus link

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the Ancillary Cabinet to IBB J3. Table 3-23 Pin details Ancillary to IBB J3 (Cable 3004626D01) Ancillary Cabinet (37 way) 1 2 IBB J3 (50 way) 1 2 No connection No connection 3 4 5 6 No connection No connection 5 9 No connection 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 No connection 15 16 21 22 No connection No connection 17 25 No connection 18 19 27 28 Door 3 open Return door Door 2 open Ancillary HMS O/T Anc fan 2 fail Return anc fan PSU DC I/P fail Return PSU Not used Not used LVD imminent Return Anc smoke alarm Anc smoke return Anc fan 1 fail HMS 1 O/T or PSU O/T Signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used PSU AC I/P fail HMS unit 2 fail HMS unit 1 fail Air con 2 fail Air con 1 fail Description

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 359
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-23 Pin details Ancillary to IBB J3 (Cable 3004626D01) Ancillary Cabinet (37 way) 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 IBB J3 (50 way) 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Signal Anc cabinet O/T Anc cabinet O/T return Smoke O/P N/O Smoke O/P N/C Smoke O/P COM Spare Spare Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 1 Cabinet O/T trip thermostat pin 2 Mains present N/C Mains present COM Cabinet eq on N/C Cabinet eq on COM Low temp alarm N/O Low temp alarm COM Spare Spare Spare Input to HMS Input to ancillary control board Input to HMS BTS O/T trip signal to ancillary control board BTS smoke input to Anc control board Description
Maint. 360
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links
TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-43/ Figure 3-44 and Figure 3-56/Figure 3-57. Table 3-24 Cable assembly 3004929C01/C02 Interconnections IADU (J1) TCU 0 1 2 2 1 1340 1370 TCU 1 1 2 4 3 1430 1460 TCU 2 1 2 6 5 1520 1550 TCU 3 IADU (J2) 1 2 5 6 1520 1550 TCU 4 1 2 3 4 1430 1460 TCU 5 1 2 1 2 1340 1370 Cable length Function

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 361
GMR-01
mBCU to mBCU redundant link
GSM-105-523

Where fitted
Where located
There are two ribbon cables (assigned J30/J31), which interconnect the elements and are shown in Figure 3-52 and Figure 3-65. The two cables are a one to one pin number link. S S J30 (cage 0) to J31 (cage 1) J31 (cage 0) to J30 (cage 1)
Table 3-25 illustrates the J30 ribbon cable. Table 3-25 Cable assembly 3004909C01 mBCM (J30) PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal /REF125_TO_RED_B /CLK_2M_N_TO_RED_B /MCU_RED_TX /CLK_2M_TO_RED /EXT_CLK_B_1_RED /TX_TO_RED_0 /CLK_2M_N_TO_RED /EXT_CLK_B_2_RED /RX_FROM_RED_0 /REF_125U_TO_RED /TX_TO_RED_1 /DIST_MEAS_STB_A /REF_612_TO_RED /RX_FROM_RED_1 /DIST_MEAS_STB_B /EXT_CLK_A_1_RED /TX_TO_RED_2 /CLK_2M_TO_RED_B /EXT_CLK_A_2_RED /RX_FROM_RED_2 mBCU (J30) PIN No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
Maint. 362
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-26 illustrates the J31 ribbon cable. Table 3-26 Cable assembly 3004909C01 mBCM (J31) PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal /REF125_FROM_RED_B /CLK_2M_N_FROM_RED_B /MCU_RED_RX /CLK_2M_FROM_RED /EXT_CLK_B_TO_RED_1 /TX_FROM_RED_0 /CLK_2M_N_FROM_RED /EXT_CLK_B_TO_RED_2 /RX_TO_RED_0 /REF_125U_FROM_RED /TX_FROM_RED_1 /DM_STRB_A_TO_RED /REF_612_FROM_RED /RX_TO_RED_1 /DM_STRB_B_TO_RED /EXT_CLK_A_RED_TO_1 /TX_FROM_RED_2 /CLK_2M_FROM_RED_B /EXT_CLK_A_TO_RED_2 /RX_TO_RED_2 mBCU (J31) PIN No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 363
GMR-01
mBCU to BIB/T43 signal alarm links
GSM-105-523
mBCU to BIB/T43 signal alarm links

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-27. Table 3-27 Cable assembly 3004907C01/C02 Interconnections mBCU (J13) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 NOTE BIB/T43 pins 36, 912, 1519, 2225, 2831 and 3437 not used. 13 32 14 33 1 20 7 26 8 27 BIB/T43 2 21 Cable colour Black White Red Green Orange Blue White/Black Red/Black Green/Black Orange/Black Blue/Black Black/White Red/White Green/White Blue/White nw_tx_pos_3 nw_tx_neg_3 nw_rx_pos_3 nw_rx_neg_3 nw_tx_pos_1 nw_tx_neg_1 nw_tx_pos_2 nw_tx_neg_2 nw_rx pos_2 nw_rx neg_2 Function nw_rx_pos_1 nw_rx_neg_1
Maint. 364
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
TATI to TATI 1 signal link
TATI to TATI 1 signal link

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-27. Table 3-28 Cable assembly 3004650D01 Interconnections TATI 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TATI 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Not connected Cable colour Function

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 365
GMR-01
mBCU to GPS signal link
GSM-105-523
mBCU to GPS signal link

Where fitted
Where located
The cableform interconnects the elements as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-27. Table 3-29 Cable assembly 3004963C01 Interconnections mBCU (J12) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GPS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 +batt_to_gps +5main_to_gps +main_ rtn vpp_to_gps +12v_main_to_gps one_pps one_pps_rtn txd_gps rxd_gps gnd_to_gps Cable colour Function
Maint. 366
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Indoor ac BTS power interface
Indoor ac BTS power interface

Overview
This section contains information for diagnosing faults in the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS ac power interface module (ACPIM), ac power supply modules (ACPM) and battery box. General fault diagnosis for the M-Cell6 BTS is performed as part of the OMC function. The procedures in this chapter are therefore confined to fault location at a local level within the cabinets that is beyond the scope of OMC diagnosis.
Presentation
Diagnosing faults
A tabular format is generally used for the fault finding procedures with symptoms shown to the left and suggested cause and rectification to the right. Fault location is achieved by assessing the type of fault from the exhibited symptoms and then tracing the source by following the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
Connections
To support the diagnostic procedures, a set of reference diagrams and tables detailing the ac power supply module and battery box internal and external connections are provided.
Safety
List of diagnostic procedures

The fault diagnosis procedures are: S S S S ACPIM and ACPM fault LED indicators. ACPIM and ACPM alarms. Battery box panel fault LED indicators. Battery box fault indications.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 367
GMR-01
ACPIM and ACPM fault LED indicators
GSM-105-523
ACPIM and ACPM fault LED indicators

Overview
The power system is designed for maximum reliability and therefore it is unlikely that faults will occur during operation. If faulty operation does occur, the failure can usually be traced to the source by inspection of the AC lamp, DC lamp and LEDs on the ac power interface module (ACPIM) and ac power supply modules (ACPM). WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 264 V ac are present in the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, when the ac mains isolators are set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.
Fault symptoms
Typical fault symptoms and their possible causes are shown in Table 3-30. Table 3-30 ACPIM and ACPM fault LED diagnosis Symptom Output voltage is zero AND/OR INPUT HEALTHY LEDs are extinguished on all ACPM. Possible cause(s) AC supply is not present. Failure of the external disconnect device. AC circuit breaker is faulty, set to the OFF position or has tripped. AC lamp is extinguished. AC supply is not present. Failure of the external disconnect device. AC circuit breaker is faulty, set to the OFF position or has tripped. Failure of AC lamp. INPUT HEALTHY LED is extinguished on one ACPM. OUTPUT HEALTHY LED(s) is/are extinguished AND/OR OVERVOLTAGE LED(s) is/are illuminated AND/OR CURRENT LIMIT LED(s) is/are illuminated. DC LED is extinguished. Failure of the DC LED or misconnection to LED. Failure of DC supply. Failure of the corresponding ACPM. Failure of the corresponding ACPM(s).
Maint. 368
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ACPIM and ACPM alarms
ACPIM and ACPM alarms

Overview
The power system is designed for maximum reliability and therefore it is unlikely that faults will occur during operation. If faulty operation does occur, the failure can usually be traced by the generated ACPIM or ACPM fault alarm. WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 264 V ac are present in the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, when the ac mains isolators are set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.
Fault symptoms
Typical fault symptoms and their possible causes are shown in Table 3-31. Table 3-31 ACPIM and ACPM alarm diagnosis Symptom AC fault alarm is generated. Possible cause(s) AC supply is not present. Failure of the external disconnect device. Failure of the master or slave interface PCA (master PCA in ACPM position 2 and slave PCA in ACPMs positions 0, 1, 3, and 4). ACPM fault alarm is generated. AC supply is not present. Failure of one or more rectifiers. Failure of the master or slave interface PCA (master PCA in ACPM position 2 and slave PCA in ACPMs positions 0, 1, 3, and 4). Overtemperature alarm is generated. Temperature rise inside unit is excessive. Failure of the master interface PCA (master PCA in ACPM position 2 and slave PCA in ACPMs positions 0, 1, 3, and 4). Status of the master interface PCA alarms is not consistent with unit conditions. Failure of the master interface PCA (master PCA in ACPM position 2 and slave PCA in ACPMs positions 0, 1, 3, and 4).

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 369
GMR-01
Battery box panel fault LED indicators
GSM-105-523
Battery box panel fault LED indicators

Overview
The battery box panel is designed for maximum reliability and therefore it is unlikely that faults will occur during operation. If faulty operation does occur, the failure can usually be traced to the source by inspection of the LED fault indicator. WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 264 V ac are present in the M-Cell6 ac indoor BTS cabinet, when the ac mains isolators are set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.
Fault symptoms
Typical fault symptoms and their possible causes are shown in Table 3-32 . Table 3-32 Battery box panel fault LED indicators diagnosis Symptom The LOW VOLTAGE LED is lit. Possible cause(s) Excessive load current is being drawn. Failure of one or more battery monoblocs. A battery discharge test has taken place. Failure of the control and alarms PCA. Failure of the LVD bypass PCA.
The status of the BYPASS LED is not consistent with the position of the AUTO/BYPASS switch. The BCB CLOSED LED is extinguished.
Failure of the contactor BCB. Failure of fuse FS4 (see battery box PDP Figure 6-10 and Table 6-2 of section 323). Failure of the control and alarms PCA. The emergency stop BCB link is opened. Failure of the contactor BCA. Failure of fuse FS3 (see battery box PDP Figure 6-10 and Table 6-2 of section 323). Failure of the control and alarms PCA. The emergency stop BCA link is opened. Failure of the control and alarms PCA. Failure of the control and alarms PCA.
The BCA CLOSED LED is extinguished.
The smoke alarm is lit. The status of the control and alarms LEDs is not consistent with unit conditions.
Maint. 370
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery box fault indications

Overview
The battery box panel is designed for maximum reliability and therefore it is unlikely that faults will occur during operation. If faulty operation does occur, the failure can usually be traced by the generated fault indicator. WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 264 V ac are present in the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, when the ac mains isolators are set to the ON position, and/or the batteries are connected.
Fault symptoms
Typical fault symptoms and their possible causes are shown in Table 3-33. Table 3-33 Battery box panel fault indicator diagnosis Symptom Output voltage is zero. Possible cause(s) The ac supply is not present and the battery voltage is less than 21.6 Vdc. The emergency stop links are opened. Failure of the contactor. Corresponding distribution MCBs BTS 1 (CB3) or BTS 2 (CB4) is/are faulty, or set to the OFF position, or have tripped out. Either or both of CB1 and CB2 (M-Cell6 ac circuit breakers) are faulty, or are set to the OFF position, or have tripped out. Failure of the control and alarms PCA. Failure of the corresponding contactor(s).
Section(s) of the load is/are disconnected.
The battery is not charging on a fully loaded system. Contactor(s) do not de-energise or energise at the correct voltages.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 371
GMR-01
Maint. 372
Battery box internal connections

Figure 3-28 shows the battery box connection details:
BTS 2
BTS 1
CPSM
6WMNL 2x 2.8A Comms

31st May 01
0V
2x 63A C60HB per
0V
CPSM 1 10A
CPSM 0 10A CPSM Alarms
Emergency Stop Button
BTS 1 Aux. Contact (for LED)
Figure 3-28 Battery box connections
Contactor Fuses Control Bd O/T (A) O/T (T) 2A LVD Bypass plus LEDs Bypass
GMR-01
200A MCCB Batt 1 Batt 2 200A MCCB
BTS 2
Temp Sensor
BTS 1 BTS 2
V sense
Control Board I sense Imax charge = 60A
GSM-105-523
Door (Link on board)
Signals and Alarms 37W Cable
0V
GSM-105-523
Indoor ac power supply module interconnections

Overview
The following diagrams and tables enable the interconnection cables to be identified and their connections traced.
Interconnections
Table 3-34 details the ac power supply modules diagrams and connector table: Table 3-34 Interconnections overview Topic ACPM interface connections ACPIM and ACPM block diagram Signal control board Control board input/output connectors See Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 and Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Table 3-36

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 373
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Diagram of ACPM interface

Figure 3-29 illustrates the ACPM interface connections.
ACPM SIGNALS
LEDs
input healthy overvoltage overcurrent

output healthy
current share
CONTROL BOARD Within BTS
sense + sense current shunt
input good cabinet output good enable signal return
sense voltage trim charge current thermal sense

CONTROL BOARD Within battery box
thermal sensor
BATTERY BOX
battery charge compensation
NOTE The control board provides temperature compensation when charging the batteries.
Figure 3-29 ACPM interface connections Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 374
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ACPIM and ACPM power system

The ac power interface module (ACPIM) and ac power module (ACPM) power system consists of five ACPMs connected in parallel to provide a 27.4 V 0.5 V dc supply. Associated interface printed circuit assemblies (PCAs), mounted behind each ACPM, provide interfacing, control and alarm facilities.
Four functional blocks can be identified, ac input, ACPMs, dc output and interface PCAs (see also Figure 3-30 and Figure 3-31).
AC input
The single phase ac supply is fed to the ac miniature circuit breaker (MCB) CB1, then distributed via the a.c. input filter providing attenuation of conducted mains interference to the ac power connections on each ACPM interface PCA. The live phase is connected to CN3 pin 3, neutral to CN3 pin 1 and earth to CN3 pin 2 on each PCA. Each ACPIM connector mates with the corresponding connector on the rear of each ACPM. A neon lamp (LP1, labelled AC) is connected between the live and neutral inputs. The lamp is lit when the ac supply is present at the ACPMs. If the supply is present at the input of the unit but not at the ACPMs the LED is extinguished.
ACPMs
The ACPMs convert the ac supply voltage to a nominal 27.4 V dc voltage. The positive output from ACPMs 0 to 4 (on pins 26 and 28 on each ACPM connector) is connected to the positive busbars and the negative output from each ACPM (on pins 22 and 24) is connected to the negative busbar.
DC output
The positive busbar is connected to two positive (red) cables and the negative busbar is connected to two negative (black) cables. A LED (D1, labelled DC) is connected between the busbars and is illuminated when the dc output voltage is present.
Interface PCAs
Two types of interface PCAs are used, normally a master PCA in ACPM position 2 and a slave PCA in positions 0, 1, 3, and 4.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 375
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
The master interface PCA provides the following functions: S Alarms are presented to the PCA via opto couplers in each ACPM. The PCA converts these alarms into voltage signals which are passed to connector CN4 for driving external alarms. The pin locations for connector CN4 are shown in Table 3-35. Table 3-35 CN4 connectors Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NOTE CN4 is connected to a 9 way D type plug on the top of the ACPIM. S S S S S Enables the ACPM (allows the ACPM to operate) when CN4 pin 1 is linked to CN4 pin 2. Provides a contactor disable function when CN4 pin 1 is linked to CN4 pin 7 provided that the enable link of the function directly above is removed. Provides connection to the ACPMs voltage trim facility. Provides interface connections from the ac supply to the ACPM input and from the ACPM output to the dc output. Programmes (via a link on the PCA) the current limit point to the maximum (forced cooled) level of 25.5 A. Enable Return Overtemperature ACPM fault AC fault Spare Contactor disable Voltage trim Ground Function
The slave interface PCA provides the following functions: S S S Provides interface connections from the ac supply to the ACPM input and from the ACPM output to the dc output. Extends the control and alarm signals to the master PCA via a ribbon cable. Programmes (via a link on the PCA) the current limit point to the maximum (forced cooled) level of 25.5 A.
Maint. 376
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ACPIM and ACPM functional diagram
KEY
B BK BN = = = BLUE (NEUTRAL) BLACK ((NEGATIVE) BROWN (LIVE) GREEN/YELLOW (EARTH) RED (POSITIVE) + S C R E E N 3 C O R E
GY
GY = R =
GY
NEGATIVE SENSE OPTO COMMON EMITTER CONNECTOR ENABLE CURRENT SHARE OVERTEMPERATURE RECTIFIER FAIL MAINS FAIL POSITIVE SENSE GY GY
OPTO = EN SH O/T RF MF S+ = = = = = =
2 3
GY B BN B S L A V E I N T E R F A C E CN3 E S L A V E I N T E R F A C E BN
S OPTO EN SH O/T RF MF S+
5 6 7 8 9 10
BK R BK NEGATIVE BUSBAR D1 GREEN DC R
11
2K2 R1 POSITIVE BUSBAR
12
Figure 3-30 ACPIM and ACPM block diagram (part 1)

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 377
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
B
1
B
BN
BN
CB1b 63A
CB1a 63A
MAINS INPUT FILTER
AC NEON LAMP B B BN
2
BN
3 4
GY GY B BN GY B BN GY B BN
M A S T E R I N T E R F A C E
CN3 V O L T A G G E R O T U R N I D M E C O ND TI AS CA TB OL RE A C A P O C M V E F F R A A T U U E L L M T T P
S L A V E I N T E R F A C E
S L A V E I N T E R F A C E
S P A R E
R E T U R N
E N A B L E
9 8
6 5 4 3
2 1
CN4
5 6 7 8 9 10
BK R BK R BK R
11
NEGATIVE BUSBAR
12
POSITIVE BUSBAR BK COMMON NEGATIVE BK R R COMMON POSITIVE
Figure 3-31 ACPIM and ACPM block diagram (part 2) Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 378
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Connectors, links and signals upon the control board

BACK OF PCB PL3 1 PL7 1
PL2
P L 1 1
P L 6 1 PL5 SW1 1
FRONT OF PCB
SK1 +
SK2
Figure 3-32 Signal control board (component side view)

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 379
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-36 and Table 3-36 show the control board input/output connectors: Table 3-36 Control board input/output connectors Name PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 PL1 Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FUSE4/PCB FUSE3/PCB CONTACT/PCB CONTACT/PCB APSM/PCB APSM/PCB From/To PCB/CONTACTB PCB/CONTACTA Function BCB contactor coil BCA contactor coil Not used Not used Contactor fuse 3 (via auto/bypass switch) Contactor fuse 2 (via auto/bypass switch) Contactor return drive, linked to PL1 - 8 Contactor return drive, linked to PL1 - 7 Ground Ground
PL2 PL2 PL2 PL2 PL2 PL2
1 2 and 3 4 5 6 7 and 8
PL2 - 6
ACPM trim signal (outputs acpm trim via PL3 - 6) Not used Not used (was apcm enable) Not used
PL2 - 1
ACPM trim (outputs acpm trim via PL3 - 6) Not used
PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3
1 to 5 6 7 8 and 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PCB/REAR PANEL PCB/REAR PANEL PCB/REAR PANEL PCB/REAR PANEL
Not used ACPM trim signal (from PL2 - 6 via PL2 - 1) Not used (return via main 0V return) Not used Low voltage disconnect, relay RL1A contact 1 LVD return, relay RL1A switch arm contact 3 Not used Not used CPSM 0 fail (input via PL7 - 6) CPSM 0 return (input PL7 - 8) CPSM 1 fail (Input via PL7 - 10) CPSM 1 fail (input via PL7 - 9) Not used Not used
Maint. 380
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-36 Control board input/output connectors Name PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 Pin No 20 PCB/REAR PANEL 21 22 to 26 27 28 29 to 30 31 PCB/REAR PANEL 32 33 to 37 PCB/REAR PANEL From/To Function Battery box over temp signal (input via PL7 - 4) Battery box over temp RTN (input via PL7 - 3) Not used BTS over temperature trip signal Not used (BTS over temperature signal return) (return via main 0V return) Not used Contactors closed, relay RL3A, contact 1 Contactor closed return, relay RL3A, switch AR contact 3 Not used
PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5 PL5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BATT CHECK BATT CHECK
Input to SW1 (1B) SK2 Input to SW1 (2B) SK2 Not used
SYSTEM VOLTS ve SHUNT ve
Input to SW1 (4B) SK2 Input to SW1 (5B) SK2 Not used
+BATT CHECK +BATT CHECK SYSTEM VOLTS +ve SHUNT +ve
Input to SW1 (1A) SK1 Input to SW1 (2A) SK1 Input to SW1 (4A) SK1 Input to SW1 (5A) SK1
PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6 PL6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BATT/PCB BATT/PCB FS 5 BATTERY/PCB BATTERY/PCB
Not used + Battery temperature sense Battery temperature sense Not used Not used PCB power Ground Ground Battery voltage sense + Battery voltage sense

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 381
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Table 3-36 Control board input/output connectors Name PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 PL7 Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CPSM 0 / PCB CPSM 1 / PCM CPSM 1 / PCB CPSM 0 / PCB From/To O/T (T) / PCB O/T (T) / PCB O/T (A) / PCB O/T (A) / PCB Function Battery box internal over temperature trip Battery box internal over temperature trip Battery box over temp RETURN (linked to PL3 - 21) Battery box over temp ALARM (linked to PL3 - 20) Not used CPSM 0 fail alarm (linked to L3 - 14) Not used CPSM 0 fail RETURN (linked to PL3 - 15) CPSM 1 fail RETURN (linked to PL3 - 17) CPSM 1 fail alarm (linked to PL3 - 16)
SK1 SK2 NOTE PCB = Battery box control board
Positive volts/amps test point Negative volts/amps test point
Maint. 382
31st May 01
GMR-01
Chapter 4
M-Cell6 repair

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ii
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i
Repairing the cabinet equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 42 Replacing a cabinet door or hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 43 Replacing a cabinet door, side panel or hood lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 46 Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 49 Replacing a hinge on a BTS cabinet door or hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 411 Replacing the BTS cabinet door emc seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 413 Replacing the BTS cabinet door or hood environmental seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 415 Replacing a BTS cabinet door or hood stay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 417 Replacing BTS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 419 DLNB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 420 CBF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 423 CCB and TATI control board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 427 GSM900 medium power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 431 GSM900 high power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 434 DCS1800 medium power duplexer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 438 LNA replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 442 Hybrid combiner and power load replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 446 TxBPF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 450 Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 454 IADU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 460 TCU and TCU-B replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 464 Micro base control unit module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 468 Micro base control unit cage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 472 Alarm board AB6 and extender replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 475 T43/BIB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 479 IBB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 482 Temperature sensors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 486 Door or hood microswitch replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 492 Krone box replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 494 BTS cabinet power distribution repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 497 Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 498 Fuse holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4101 DC circuit breaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4104 micro BCU circuit breaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4107

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
iii
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Indoor cabinet PSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4110 Ancillary cabinet power distribution repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4113 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4114 APSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4118 Ancillary cabinet control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4121 APSM fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4125 APSM fuse holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4127 BTS cabinet ac power interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4130 Additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4135 Power distribution panel (PDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4139 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4145 Communications power supply module (CPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4148
iv
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Repair procedures
Repair procedures
Overview
This chapter contains the information and procedures for repairing an indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900,GSM1800 or PCS1900 base transceiver station (BTS) by replacement of any field replaceable units (FRUs) that have been diagnosed as faulty. Except where specifically stated, these procedures are common to both indoor and outdoor installations. Most of the procedures are common to all M-Cell6 installations. Where there are differences, details are noted in the text, or a specific procedure is provided. Where applicable, cross references are made to the associated GSM manuals for setting up or test procedures. NOTE Since an M-Cell6 BTS operates as part of a network, the procedures in this chapter must be performed in conjunction with the relevant network procedures in the associated OMC manuals. At the end of the chapter are repair details for the M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS.
Safety
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially lethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these repair procedures, and the preliminary pages of this manual, must be adhered to when working on the equipment.
Presentation
The M-Cell6 repair procedures are organized according to the following physical and functional aspects of the equipment: S S S S S S S S S The cabinet equipment. The BTS equipment. The power distribution system (PDS). The heat management system (HMS) heat exchanger. The HMS air conditioner. The ancillary cabinet. The side cabinet. The ac BTS cabinet. The additional equipment and battery box cabinet.
Assumptions
All the procedures assume the following: S S The conditions for entering the equipment cabinets have been considered and applied as detailed in Access conditions in chapter 1. The access doors and hoods are opened and closed at the start and end of each repair activity in accordance with the procedures in Door opening and hood opening in the support procedures in chapter 1.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 41
GMR-01
Repairing the cabinet equipment
GSM-105-523
Repairing the cabinet equipment

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the replacement of cabinet equipment M-Cell6 FRUs.
Safety
CAUTION These procedures may be carried out without power down of the system, provided suitable care is taken.

List of repair procedures

The repair procedures for the equipment cabinets are: S S S S S S S Replacing a cabinet door or hood. Replacing a lock on a cabinet door, side panel or hood. Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism. Replacing a hinge on a BTS cabinet door or hood Replacing an emc seal on a BTS cabinet door. Replacing an environmental seal on a cabinet door or hood. Replacing a stay on a cabinet door or hood.
Maint. 42
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing a cabinet door or hood

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a cabinet door or hood on indoor and outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 and GSM1800 cabinets. The door and hood on all outdoor cabinets use the same fitting method. Indoor cabinet doors use a different type of hinge. The following common procedure is common to all with differences detailed where necessary.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected.

Diagram
Refer to Figure 1-2 in the Maintenance support procedures section of chapter 1
Preliminaries
The door or hood can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.
Door replacement procedure

To remove a door
1. 2. Open the cabinet door. Using a 10 mm insulated wrench unscrew and retain the nut and shakeproof washer securing the earth cable to the door. NOTE The shakeproof washer is located under the earth tag. If... An outdoor cabinet door is being replaced An indoor cabinet door is being replaced Then... Rotate the door hinge pin lugs to a central position by gripping them with the long nose pliers and moving the door to achieve the desired setting. Open the door wide and lift it off its hinges.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 43
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
3. 4. 5.
Support the door and remove the hinge pins by pulling their lugs in the required direction using the long nose pliers. Place the door carefully to one side. The door removal is now complete.
To replace the door

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE When replacing the earth nut and washer, tighten to a torque of 3.4Nm. Lubricate the door hinge using the Rembrandt EP2 lubricant. 2. 3. Check the door for correct operation in opening, closing and locking. The door replacement is now complete.
Hood replacement procedure

To remove a hood
1. 2. Open the cabinet hood and support it with the stay. Using a 10 mm insulated wrench unscrew and retain the nut and shakeproof washer securing the earth cable to the hood. NOTE The shakeproof washer is located under the earth tag. If... An outdoor cabinet door is being replaced An indoor cabinet door is being replaced 3. 4. 5. Then... Rotate the hood hinge pin lugs to a central position by gripping them with the long nose pliers and moving the door or hood to achieve the desired setting. Open the door wide and lift it off its hinges.
Support the hood and remove the hinge pins by pulling their lugs in the required direction using the long nose pliers. Place the hood carefully to one side. The hood removal is now complete.
Maint. 44
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To replace the hood

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE When replacing the earth nut and washer, tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm. Lubricate the door hinge using the Rembrandt EP2 lubricant. 2. 3. Check the hood for correct operation in opening, closing and locking. The hood replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Perform the operational checks or cross refer to the appropriate GSM service manual or chapter containing the associated post maintenance checks. Notify the OMC cell site network that the repair work has been completed. Log the repair activity.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 45
GMR-01
Replacing a cabinet door, side panel or hood lock
GSM-105-523

Overview
The following procedures describe how to replace the lock mechanisms fitted to the M-Cell6 cabinet door, hood or side panel. The doors use a key handle with bars to remote latches and the hoods.
Safety

Diagram
Preliminaries
The lock mechanisms can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.
Maint. 46
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Cabinet door and side panel lock procedure

To remove a door or side panel lock
1. 2. Using an M6 tamper-proof Torxdriver, remove the two, M6x12 screws holding the round guard plate over the lock. On BTS cabinet and ancillary cabinet doors, unscrew and retain the twenty, M4x12 Torx screws securing the inner panel to the door frame. Place the panel safely to one side. Using a T20 Torxdriver loosen the grub screw in both the upper and lower lock device which clamps the hexagonal bar in position. Remove the hexagonal bars from the locking devices by sliding them clear and lifting them away. Using a 10 mm box torque wrench, unscrew the M6 clamp bolt on the rear of the central lock. Remove and retain the bolt and clamp. Steady the central lock in its door aperture and close the handle to the latched position, when the lock button audibly clicks out. CAUTION When removing the central lock, take care not to damage the gasket between the lock and the face of the door. 7. Slide the central lock towards the centre of the door, rotate the lock body until the two sockets clear the door aperture. and remove the lock by pushing it out of the door aperture. The door locking mechanism removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5. 6.
8.
To replace the door or side panel lock

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE When replacing the central lock, and each latch assembly, tighten the clamp nuts to a torque of 3.4 Nm. Ensure that the central lock is fully open and the latches are fully retracted when refitting the hexagonal operating rods into the lock sockets. Lubricate lock mechanisms using the Rembrandt EP2 lubricant. 2. 3. Check the door for correct operation in opening, closing and locking. The door replacement is now complete.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 47
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Hood lock procedure

To remove the hood lock
1. 2. 3. Using an M6 tamper-proof Torxdriver, remove the two, M6x12 screws holding the round guard plate over the lock, then use the hood key to open the hood. Holding the latch arm, use a10mm torque wrench to unscrew the central hexagonal bolt at the rear of the lock . Remove and retain the bolt and latch. NOTE The central lock shaft will also become free when the bolt is removed. Take care not to let it drop out, or, remove it to a safe location. 4. 5. Using a 27 mm torque wrench unscrew the large nut securing the lock body to the hood. Remove the lock body through the outside face of the hood. The hood locking mechanism removal is now complete
To replace the hood lock

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE When replacing the lock body, tighten the M20 securing nut to a torque of 3.4 Nm. When replacing the rear latch, tighten the M6 securing bolt to a torque of 8 Nm. Lubricate the lock mechanism using Rembrandt EP2 lubricant. 2. 3. Check the hood for correct operation in opening, closing and locking. The hood replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 48
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism

Overview
The following procedures describe how to replace the locking mechanisms fitted to the M-Cell6 cabinet door. The doors use a key handle with bars to remote latches and the hoods.
Safety

Diagram
Preliminaries
The door locking mechanisms can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.
Replacement procedure
To remove a door locking mechanism
1. 2. 3. Remove the door as shown in the procedure Replacing a cabinet door or hood, and place the door on a flat surface. On BTS and ancillary cabinet doors, unscrew and retain the twenty, M4 x 20 Torx screws securing the inside panel to the door. Place the panel safely to one side. Using an 8 mm open jawed spanner, unscrew and retain the four hexagonal nuts securing the upper latch assembly to the door. Repeat this process on the lower latch assembly. Using a T20 Torxdriver, loosen the M4 grub screw in the upper and lower latch assemblies which hold the hexagonal bars in position. Pull the upper latch assembly off the threaded studs until it is just free, then gently pull the hexagonal operating rod out of its socket in the central door lock. If required, remove the spacer block from the threaded studs.
4. 5.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 49
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
6. 7. 8.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for the lower latch assembly. Using a 10 mm insulated wrench, unscrew the clamp bolt on the rear of the central lock. Remove and retain the bolt and clamp. Steady the central lock in its door aperture and close the handle to the latched position, when the lock button audibly clicks out. CAUTION When removing the central lock, take care not to damage the gasket between the lock and the face of the door.
9. 10. 11. 12.
Push the lock out of the door aperture and slide it towards the centre of the door. Align the two sockets for the operating bars on the rear of the lock with the cut-outs in the door aperture. Rotate the lock body until the two sockets clear the door aperture and remove the lock. The door locking mechanism removal is now complete.
To replace the door locking mechanism

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE When replacing the central lock, and each latch assembly, tighten the clamp nuts to a torque of 3.4 Nm. Ensure that the central lock is fully open and the latches are fully retracted when refitting the hexagonal operating rods into the lock sockets. Lubricate lock mechanisms using the Rembrandt EP2 lubricant. 2. 3. Check the door for correct operation in opening, closing and locking. The door locking mechanism replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 410
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing a hinge on a BTS cabinet door or hood

Overview
The following procedures describe how to replace a hinge fitted to the M-Cell6 cabinet door and hood.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. CAUTION The repair person carrying out this procedure must take care to avoid causing cuts to their hands on the sharp edges of the emc seal.

Diagram
Preliminaries
The door or hood hinges can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.
Door hinge replacement procedure

To remove a door hinge on a BTS cabinet
1. Using a 10 mm socket spanner, release the earth strap from its connection near the cabinet door lower hinge. CAUTION Care must be taken during this procedure to ensure that the emc seal is not damaged. 2. Place a finger under each hinge lug, push the lug upwards, and remove it from its location.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 411
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
3. 4. 5.
Remove the door and place it on a flat surface. Use a 8 mm socket spanner to remove the two hexagonal nuts and spring washers on the inside of the door post, and lift it away from its location. The door hinge removal procedure is now completed.
To replace the door hinge on a BTS cabinet

1. 2. 3. Repeat steps 1 4 but in the reverse order. Check that the door operates correctly, and the door locking mechanism operates correctly. The door hinge replacement on a BTS cabinet is now completed.
Hood hinge replacement procedure

To remove a hood hinge
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Using a 10 mm socket spanner, release the earth strap from its connection near the lower right hand corner of the hood. Hold the cabinet hood steady and remove the hood stay from its location on the BTS cabinet frame, and secure it in its proper seating inside the hood. Place a finger at the tapered end of both hinge lugs, and push the lugs out of their locations. Lift the hood away from the cabinet top, and place it on a level surface. Remove the female section of the hinge by sliding it out of its location in the hood. Use a T30 Torxdriver to remove the single M6x20 screw holding the male section of the hinge to the cabinet. The hood hinge removal procedure is now completed.
To replace a hinge on a BTS cabinet hood

1. 2. 3. Repeat steps 1 7 in the reverse order. Check that the hood operates correctly. The hinge replacement on a BTS cabinet hood is now completed.
Return to service
Maint. 412
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing the BTS cabinet door emc seal

Overview
The following procedures describe how to replace the emc seal fitted to the M-Cell6 cabinet door.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. CAUTION The repair person carrying out this procedure must take care when handling the emc seal to avoid causing cuts to their hands on the sharp edges of the emc seal.

Diagram
Preliminaries
The emc seal can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 413
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacement procedure
To remove a BTS cabinet door emc seal
CAUTION Care must be taken during this procedure to ensure that the replacement emc seal is not damaged. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Using a 10 mm socket spanner, release the earth strap from its connection near the cabinet door lower hinge. Remove the door as per the procedure Replacing a cabinet door or hood, and place it on a flat surface. Remove the door locking mechanism as per the procedure Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism in this chapter. Using a 7 mm torque wrench, remove the two hexagonal nuts that hold the door stay in position on the cabinet door. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the single M4x20 screw that now holds the door stay in position and lift the door stay clear. Use a T20 screwdriver to remove the remaining nineteen, M4x20 screws holding the inner door panel in position. Carefully lift off the inner door panel. Carefully strip off the damaged emc seal on the inner door panel. Clean off the old surplus glue after the seal has been removed, using the stipulated solvent found in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials section of chapter 1. The removal of the emc seal is now complete.
10.
To replace the BTS cabinet door emc seal

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the protective strip covering the adhesive on the new emc seal. Carefully fit the new adhesive emc seal. Repeat steps 1 7 of the removal of the emc seal, but in the reverse order. Check that the door operates correctly, and the door locking mechanism operates correctly. The emc seal replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Perform the operational checks or cross refer to the appropriate GSM service manual or chapter containing the associated post maintenance checks. Notify the OMC cell site network that the repair work has been completed. Log the repair activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 414
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing the BTS cabinet door or hood environmental seal

Overview
The following procedures describe how to replace the environmental seal fitted to the M-Cell6 cabinet door or hood.
Safety

Diagram
Preliminaries
The environmental seal can be replaced on the cabinet door or hood without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.
Door seal procedure

To remove a cabinet door environmental seal
CAUTION Care must be taken during this procedure to ensure that the replacement environmental seal seal is not damaged. 1. 2. 3. 4. Using a 10 mm socket spanner, release the earth strap from its connection near the cabinet door lower hinge. Remove the door as per the procedure Replacing as cabinet door or hood and place it on a flat surface. Remove the door locking mechanism as per the procedure Replacing a cabinet door locking mechanism in this chapter. Using a 7 mm torque wrench, remove the two hexagonal nuts that hold the door stay in position on the cabinet door.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 415
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Using a T20 screwdriver, remove the single M4x20 screw that now holds the door stay in position and lift the door stay clear. Use a T20 screwdriver to remove the remaining 19, M4x20 screws holding the inner door panel in position. Carefully lift off the inner door panel. Carefully strip off the damaged environmental seal on the inside of the cabinet door. Clean off the old surplus glue after the seal has been removed, using the stipulated solvent found in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials section of chapter 1. The removal of the environmental seal is now complete.
10.
To replace the door environmental seal

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the protective strip covering the adhesive on the new environmental seal. Carefully fit the new adhesive environmental seal to the inside edge of the cabinet door. Repeat steps 1 7 of the removal of the environmental seal, but in the reverse order. Check that the door operates correctly, and the door locking mechanism operates correctly. The environmental seal replacement is now completed.
Hood seal procedure

To remove a hood environmental seal
1. 2. 3. Remove the hood as per the procedure Replacing a cabinet door, cover or hood in this manual. Carefully strip off the damaged environmental seal on the inside edge of the hood. Clean off the old surplus glue after the seal has been removed, using the stipulated solvent found in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials section of chapter 1. The environmental seal removal from a hood is now completed.
4.
To replace the hood environmental seal

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the protective strip covering the adhesive on the new environmental seal. Carefully fit the new environmental seal to the inside edge of the hood. Repeat steps 1 2 of the removal of the environmental seal, but in the reverse order. Check that the hood locking mechanism operates correctly. The environmental seal replacement in a hood is now complete.
Return to service
Perform the operational checks or cross refer to the appropriate GSM service manual or chapter containing the associated post maintenance checks. Notify the OMC cell site network that the repair work has been completed. Log the repair activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 416
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing a BTS cabinet door or hood stay

Overview
The following procedures describe how to replace the stays fitted to the M-Cell6 cabinet door and hood.
Safety

Diagram
Preliminaries
The door or hood stays can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for in outdoor installations.
Door stay replacement procedure

To remove a door stay
1. 2. 3. Using a 7 mm socket spanner, remove the two hexagonal nuts that hold the door stay in position on the cabinet door. Using a T20 screwdriver, remove the single T20 screw that now holds the door stay in position, and lift the door stay clear. The removal of the door stay is now completed.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 417
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To replace the door stay

1. 2. 3. Repeat steps 1 2 of the removal of the stay, but in the reverse order. Check that the stay operates correctly, and the door locking mechanism operates correctly. Ensure that the correct torque settings, as per the torque settings given in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials section of chapter 1, are used in this procedure. The door stay replacement on a BTS cabinet is now completed.
4.
Hood stay replacement procedure

To remove a hood stay
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the hood of the cabinet as per the procedure Replacing a cabinet door, side panel, cover or hood and place it on a flat surface. Using a 7 mm insulated spanner, remove the two hexagonal nuts which fix the stay to the hood. Remove the stay from the hood. The removal of the hood stay is now completed.
To replace the hood stay

1. 2. Repeat the removal procedures but in reverse order. Ensure that the correct torque settings, as per the torque settings given in the Field tool kits, Test equipment and Materials section of chapter 1, are used in this procedure. The hood stay replacement is now completed.
3.
Return to service
Maint. 418
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Replacing BTS equipment
Replacing BTS equipment

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the replacement of M-Cell6 FRUs that relate to the BTS functions of the equipment.
Procedures
The repair procedures for the BTS equipment are: S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Dual low noise block (DLNB) replacement. Combining band pass filter (CBF) replacement. Cavity combining block (CCB) and TATI control board replacement. Duplexer (medium power) replacement. Duplexer (high power) replacement. Low noise amplifier (LNA) replacement. Hybrid combiner and power load replacement. Transmitter band pass filter (TxBPF) replacement. Fan replacement. Integrated antenna distribution unit (IADU) replacement. Transceiver control unit (TCU) replacement. Micro base control unit (mBCU) module replacement. Alarm board AB6 and extender replacement. Type43 interconnect board/balanced-line interface board (T43/BIB) replacement. Interconnection bus board (IBB) replacement. Temperature sensors replacement. Door or hood microswitch replacement. Krone box replacement.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 419
GMR-01
DLNB replacement
GSM-105-523
DLNB replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a DLNB RF module. DLNB modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 BTS cabinets.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.

Preliminaries
Replacing a DLNB module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.

The following procedures are described: S S Removing a DNLB module. Installing a replacement DLNB module.
Maint. 420
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
DLNB replacement
DLNB module location diagram

Figure 4-1 shows the location of DLNB modules and items referred to in the procedures in a BTS cabinet (indoor EGSM900).
DLNB MODULES
TOP PANEL
TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 1
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU) MAIN CONTROL UNIT (MCU)
Figure 4-1 M-Cell6 EGSM900 indoor BTS cabinet, showing position of DLNBs

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 421
GMR-01
DLNB replacement
GSM-105-523
To remove a DLNB module

1. Locate the DLNB module to be replaced and note the RF cable connections to it. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Using a 13mm insulated wrench unscrew and retain the central M8 bolt, with spring and flat washers, securing the module to the top panel. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module and lift it upwards and away from the top panel. This action also disconnects the DLNB from the IADU. CAUTION Handle the DLNB module with care. The IADU connector can easily be damaged if the base of the module is placed heavily on a work surface. 6. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5.
To install a replacement DLNB module

1. 2. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module to the removed module. Carefully lower the replacement module into its location on the top panel, ensuring correct alignment is maintained with the top panel guide spigots and connector spigots. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Insert the M8 bolt and washers and tighten to a torque of 4.3 Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors as noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check the DLNB as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
Return to service
Return to service as detailed in the support procedures. Notify OMC of the base station availability. Log the maintenance activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 422
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
CBF replacement
CBF replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a CBF RF module. CBF modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for this repair activity are: S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 13mm box spanner. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a CBF module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.

The following procedures are described: S S Removing a CBF module. Installing a replacement CBF module.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 423
GMR-01
CBF replacement
GSM-105-523
CBF module location diagram

Figure 4-2 shows the location of CBF modules and items referred to in the procedures in a BTS cabinet (indoor EGSM900).
CBF MODULES TOP PANEL
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU) MAIN CONTROL UNIT (MCU)
Figure 4-2 M-Cell6 EGSM900 indoor BTS cabinet, showing position of the CBF modules
Maint. 424
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
CBF replacement
To remove a CBF module

1. Locate the CBF module to be replaced and note the RF cable connections to it. NOTE Each CBF module has two connections under the top panel to separate TCUs. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Using a 13mm insulated wrench unscrew and retain the two M8 bolts with spring and flat washers, securing the module to the top panel. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module and lift it upwards to clear the cut outs in the top panel. The module removal is now complete. CAUTION Handle the CBF module with care. The cooling fins on the base can easily be damaged if the module is placed heavily on a work surface.
3. 4. 5. 6.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 425
GMR-01
CBF replacement
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement CBF module

1. 2. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module to the removed module. Carefully lower the replacement module into its location on the top panel, ensuring correct alignment is maintained with the top panel cut outs. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Insert the M8 bolt and washers and tighten to a torque of 4.3Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors as noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check the CBF in the RF antenna path as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
Return to service
Return to service as detailed in the support procedures. Notify OMC of the base station availability. Log the maintenance activity.
Maint. 426
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
CCB and TATI control board replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a CCB RF module, together with its transmit antenna transceiver interface (TATI) control board and transmit bandpass filter (if fitted). CCB modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for this repair activity are: S S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 2 mm flat blade screwdriver 7 mm, 10 mm and 13 mm box spanners. M4 Torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench. A 2 m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a CCB module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a CCB module and TATI control board. Installing a replacement CCB module and TATI control board.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 427
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
CCB module location diagram

Figure 4-3 shows the location of CCB modules and items referred to in the procedures in a BTS cabinet (outdoor EGSM900).
TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER MODULE (FITTED ON CCB)
TOP PANEL
CAVITY COMBINING BLOCK (CCB) MODULE
TRANSMIT ANTENNA TRANSCEIVER INTERFACE (TATI) CONTROL BOARD
TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU)
Figure 4-3 M-Cell6 EGSM900 outdoor BTS cabinet, showing position of CCB modules
Maint. 428
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a CCB module and TATI control board:

1. Locate the CCB module to be replaced and note the DATA, POWER and RF cable connections to it. NOTE Each CCB module has three RF connections under the top panel to separate TCUs. One module has a transmit bandpass filter attached to its top surface. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Unscrew and retain the four M4 Phillips screws securing the cover of the TATI control board assembly to the front of the CCB module. Remove and retain the cover. Unscrew and disconnect the two D-type POWER and DATA connectors Unscrew and retain the four M4 standoffs securing the TATI control board to the standoffs on the front of the CCB module using a 7mm box spanner. Carefully remove the TATI board from the D-type connector on the face of the CCB. Unscrew and retain the M8 bolt with, spring and flat washers, securing the rear of the CCB to the top panel. Unscrew and retain the two M6 nuts, with spring and flat washers, securing the front of the CCB to the top panel. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module and lift it upwards and away from the top panel. Place the CCB on a suitable work surface. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 429
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement CCB module and TATI control board:

1. 2. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement CCB module to the removed module. Carefully lower the replacement module into its location on the top panel, ensuring correct alignment is maintained with the top panel rear bolt hole and front M6 studs. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Refit the two M6 nuts and washers at the front of the CCB and tighten to a torque of 3.4Nm. Insert the M8 bolt and washers at the rear of the CCB and tighten to a torque of 4.3 Nm. Carefully fit , or refit, the TATI control board to the D-type connector on the front of the CCB and secure it to the module standoffs with the four M4 standoffs taken off in the removal procedure. Tighten to a torque of 2.2 Nm. Refit the TATI control board cover to the M4 standoffs with the four M4 Phillips screws. Tighten to a torque of 2.2 Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check the CCB in the RF antenna path as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
9. 10.
Return to service
Maint. 430
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
GSM900 medium power duplexer replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a duplexer (medium power) RF module. Duplexer (medium power) modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 BTS cabinets where CBFs are used.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 13mm box spanner. 8mm socket. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a duplexer module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a medium power duplexer module. Installing a replacement medium power duplexer module.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 431
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
GSM900 medium power duplexer module location diagram

Figure 4-4 shows the location of EGSM900 duplexer modules and items referred to in the procedures in an indoor BTS cabinet.
DUPLEXER MODULES
TOP PANEL
MAIN CONTROL UNIT (MCU)
Figure 4-4 M-Cell6 EGSM900 indoor BTS cabinet showing position of duplexer modules.
Maint. 432
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a medium power duplexer module

1. Locate the duplexer module to be replaced and note the RF cable connections to it. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Using an 8 mm torque wrench, unscrew and retain the two M8 bolts, with spring and flat washers, securing the module to the top panel. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module and lift it upwards and away from the top panel. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5. 6.
To install a replacement medium power duplexer module

1. 2. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module to the removed module. Carefully lower the replacement module into its location on the top panel, ensuring correct alignment is maintained with the top panel bolt holes in the bearer. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Insert the two M8 bolts and washers and tighten to a torque of 4.3Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check the duplexer as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 433
GMR-01
GSM900 high power duplexer replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a duplexer (high power) RF module. Duplexer (high power) modules are used in indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 base stations where CCBs are used. In indoor installations, the duplexers are located next to the BTS cabinets on customer provided racking. In outdoor installations, the duplexers are mounted on racking in the side cabinet.

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T30 Torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench.
Preliminaries
Replacing a duplexer module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity. WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a high power duplexer module Installing a replacement high power duplexer module.
Maint. 434
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
GSM900 high power duplexer module location diagram

Figure 4-5 shows the location of high power duplexer modules in a side cabinet.
RF BULKHEAD PANEL
DUPLEXER (HIGH POWER)
DUPLEXER SHELF
Figure 4-5 M-Cell6 side cabinet showing position of high power duplexer

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 435
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a high power duplexer module

1. Locate the duplexer module to be replaced and note the two RF cable connections at the front and one at the rear. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Using a T30 torxdriver, unscrew and retain the two M6 Torx screws, with spring and flat washers, that secure the modules front base plate to the duplexer shelf mounting. Carefully pull the module forwards and upwards, releasing the two locating lugs at the rear from the slots in the shelf mounting. Place the duplexer on a suitable work surface. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4.
5.
6.
To install a replacement high power duplexer module

1. 2. 3. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module to the removed module. Carefully align the two lugs at the rear of the module with the slots in the duplexer shelf mounting and slide it into position. Using the T30 Torxdriver, refit the two M6 Torx screws and washers that secure the front of the module base plate to the shelf mounting. Tighten to a torque of 3.4Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check the duplexer as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
4. 5.
6. 7.
Maint. 436
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 437
GMR-01
DCS1800 medium power duplexer replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a DCS1800 medium power duplexer module. DCS1800 medium power duplexer modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 DCS1800 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T10 and T20 torxdrivers. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a DCS1800 medium power duplexer module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a medium power duplexer module. Installing a replacement medium power duplexer module.
Maint. 438
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
DCS1800 medium power duplexer location diagram

Figure 4-6 shows the location of DCS1800 medium power duplexer modules and items referred to in the procedures in an indoor DCS1800 BTS cabinet.
DCS1800 MEDIUM POWER DUPLEXER
TOP PANEL
Figure 4-6 M-Cell6 DCS1800 indoor BTS cabinet, showing position of medium power duplexer modules

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 439
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a medium power duplexer module

1. Locate the DCS1800 medium power duplexer module to be replaced and note the RF cable connections to it. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Using a 19mm torque wrench, loosen the single bolt in both rear corners of the cabinet hood, and remove the single bolt in both front corners of the cabinet hood. Retain the bolts. Lift the front of the cabinet hood sufficiently to pass a T20 Torxdriver under it, to unscrew the central M4 Torx screw securing the front of the module to the footplate of the top panel mounting bracket. Retain the M4 screw. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module. Lift the front of the module upwards and pull forwards away from the top panel. Place the DCS1800 medium power duplexer upside down on a suitable work surface. Unscrew and retain the four countersunk M2 Torx screws securing the upper half of the mounting bracket to the DCS1800 medium power duplexer. Retain the bracket. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Maint. 440
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement medium power duplexer module

1. 2. 3. Fit the removed mounting bracket to the replacement DCS 1800 medium power duplexer module using the four countersunk M2 Torx screws. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module to the removed module. Carefully lower the replacement module into its location on the top panel footplate, ensuring correct alignment is maintained when inserting the guide lug at the rear of the upper bracket into the footplate. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Lift the front of the cabinet hood sufficiently to pass a T20 Torxdriver under it, to refit the central M4 Torx screw. Refit the central M4 Torx screw at the front of the mounting bracket, to secure the module to the footplate of the top panel mounting bracket. Tighten to a torque of 2.2Nm. Using a 19mm torque wrench, tighten the single bolt in both rear corners of the cabinet hood, and refit the single bolt in both front corners of the cabinet hood. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 3.4Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit The module replacement is now complete.
4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
9.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 441
GMR-01
LNA replacement
GSM-105-523
LNA replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a LNA RF module. LNA modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T10 and T20 Torxdrivers. 2mm flat blade screwdriver. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a LNA module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing an LNA module. Installing a replacement LNA module.
Maint. 442
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
LNA replacement
LNA module location diagram

Figure 4-7 shows the location of LNA modules and items referred to in the procedures in an indoor DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinet.
LNA MODULES
TOP PANEL
LNA POWER CONNECTOR
Figure 4-7 M-Cell6 DCS1800 indoor BTS cabinet, showing position of LNA modules.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 443
GMR-01
LNA replacement
GSM-105-523
To remove a LNA module

1. Locate the LNA module to be replaced and note the RF cables attached to the top of it. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Unscrew and remove the D-type LNA POWER connector from the cabinet top panel using a 2mm flat blade screwdriver. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables attached to the top of the LNA by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Unscrew and retain the two M4 Torx screws securing the module in its carrier. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module and lift it upwards from its carrier to expose the lower panel connections. Note these connections. Place the LNA on a suitable work surface. Unscrew the four M2 Torx screws securing the RF input adapter bracket to the LNA. Unscrew the two RF connections at the input to the module and retain the adapter bracket with its extension RF cables. Refit the four M2 Torx screws on the module cover. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10.
Maint. 444
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
LNA replacement
To install a replacement LNA module

NOTE The latest version of the LNA has a High Gain and Low Gain setting on the rear of the unit. Normally insure that High Gain is selected, however, ensure that Low Gain is selected where there is to be another source of gain in front of the LNA, ie. if a masthead amplifier is to be used or in the case of daisy chaining receivers. 1. 2. 3. Unscrew and retain the four M2 screws on the LNA module cover adjacent to the RF output connections. Reconnect the two RF extension cables on the adapter bracket to the module and refit the bracket using the four screws removed in step 1. Carefully lower the module into position, ensuring that the lugs at the bottom edge engage with the slots in the carrier. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Refit the the two M4 Torx screws in the slotted holes at the top of the module to secure it in the carrier. Tighten to a torque of 2.2Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Refit the D-type connector into the LNA POWER socket on the cabinet top panel. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check the LNA as described in Installation & Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 445
GMR-01
Hybrid combiner and power load replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace the RF modules comprising a hybrid combiner and its associated power load. The hybrid combiner is attached to the power load which is fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T20 Torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a hybrid combiner and/or power load requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a hybrid combiner and power load module. Installing a replacement hybrid combiner and power load module.
Maint. 446
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Hybrid combiner and power load location diagram

Figure 4-8 shows the location of the hybrid combiner with power load and items referred to in the procedures in an indoor DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinet .
HYBRID COMBINERS, WITH POWER LOADS BEHIND TXBPF TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER (TXBPF)
TOP PANEL
Figure 4-8 M-Cell6 DCS1800 indoor BTS cabinet showing position of hybrid combiners and power loads

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 447
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a hybrid combiner and power load module

1. Locate the hybrid combiner and/or the power load to be replaced and note the RF cables attached to the combiner. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables attached to the the hybrid combiner by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module connectors. Disconnect and remove the hybrid combiner from the top panel by unscrewing the remaining fixed RF connection to the power load. If required, remove the power load by unscrewing and retaining the two M4 Torx screws securing it to its top panel mounting frame. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5. 6.
To install a replacement hybrid combiner and power load module

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module(s) to the removed module(s). If removed, refit the power load to the top panel mounting frame using the two M4 Torx screws. Tighten to a torque of 2.2Nm. Connect the output port of the replacement hybrid combiner to the power load, ensuring that the combiner is correctly orientated as the connector is tightened. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions on the combiner noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit. Check and optimize the hybrid combiner and power load as described in Installation & Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
6.
7.
Maint. 448
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 449
GMR-01
TxBPF replacement
GSM-105-523
TxBPF replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a TxBPF RF module. TxBPF modules are fitted to the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T10 and T20 torxdrivers. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Replacing a TxBPF module requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a TxBPF module. Installing a replacement TxBPF module.
Maint. 450
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
TxBPF replacement
TxBPF module location diagram

Figure 4-9 shows the location of TxBPF modules and items referred to in the procedures in an indoor DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinet.
TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTERS (TXBPF)
TOP PANEL
Figure 4-9 M-Cell6 DCS1800 indoor BTS cabinet showing position of TxBPF modules.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 451
GMR-01
TxBPF replacement
GSM-105-523
To remove a TxBPF module

1. Locate the TxBPF module to be replaced and note the RF cable connections to it. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result 2. Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing their knurled rings and pulling them out of the module sockets. Using a 19mm torque wrench, loosen the single bolt in both rear corners of the cabinet hood, and remove the single bolt in both front corners of the cabinet hood. Retain the bolts. Lift the front of the cabinet hood sufficiently to pass a T20 Torxdriver under it, to unscrew the central M4 Torx screw securing the front of the module to the footplate of the top panel mounting bracket. Retain the M4 screw. Carefully clear any cables away from the top of the module. Lift the front of the module upwards and pull forwards away from the top panel. Place the TxBPF upside down on a suitable work surface. Unscrew and retain the four countersunk M2 Torx screws securing the upper half of the TxBPF mounting bracket to the TxBPF. Retain the bracket. The module removal is now complete.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7. 8.
Maint. 452
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
TxBPF replacement
To install a replacement TxBPF module

1. 2. 3. Fit the removed mounting bracket to the replacement TxBPF module using the four countersunk M2 Torx screws. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement module to the removed module. Carefully lower the replacement module into its location on the top panel footplate, ensuring correct alignment is maintained when inserting the guide lug at the rear of the upper bracket into the footplate. Be careful not to trap any wiring as the module is seated. Lift the front of the cabinet hood sufficiently to pass a T20 Torxdriver under it, to refit the central M4 Torx screw. Refit the central M4 Torx screw at the front of the mounting bracket, to secure the module to the footplate of the top panel mounting bracket. Tighten to a torque of 2.2Nm. Using a 19mm torque wrench, tighten the single bolt in both rear corners of the cabinet hood, and refit the single bolt in both front corners of the cabinet hood. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 3.4Nm. Reconnect the coaxial RF connectors to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Switch ON the TCU circuit breakers on the PDU and enable the TCUs to transmit RF power using unlock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Check that these commands have been accepted as indicated by the Tx STATUS (orange) LED on each TCU being lit Check and optimize the TxBPF as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423 and Cabinet Interconnections of this Category (523). The module replacement is now complete.
4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
9. 10.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 453
GMR-01
Fan replacement
GSM-105-523
Fan replacement
Overview
These procedures describe how to remove and replace a cabinet cooling fan. Depending on the equipment configuration, one or two fans can be mounted inside the top of each indoor BTS cabinet and outdoor ancillary cabinet in the M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 systems.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S Door key. M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. T20 Torxdriver.
Preliminaries
Replacing a fan in a BTS cabinet requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S Removing a BTS cabinet fan. Installing a replacement BTS cabinet fan. Removing an ancillary cabinet fan. Installing a replacement ancillary cabinet fan. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 454
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fan replacement
BTS cabinet fans location diagrams

Figure 4-10 shows the location of the fans and items referred to in the procedures in an indoor GSM900 BTS cabinet .
RECEIVE/TRANSMIT EQUIPMENT TOP PANEL
COOLING FANS
FAN CONNECTOR TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU) 1
Figure 4-10 M-Cell6 EGSM900 indoor BTS cabinet showing cooling fan detail.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 455
GMR-01
Fan replacement
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet fans location diagram

Figure 4-11 shows the location of the fans and items referred to in the procedures in an ancillary cabinet.
COOLING FANS
FAN CONNECTOR
Figure 4-11 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet showing cooling fan detail.
Maint. 456
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fan replacement
Removing a fan from a BTS cabinet

First disconnect the power as shown in the table below, then follow the procedure from step 1: If... Indoor BTS fan is being replaced Outdoor BTS fan is being replaced 1. Then... Identify the fan to be replaced and switch OFF the relevant BTS1 or BTS2 HMS SUPPLY circuit breaker on the ancillary cabinet PDP. Then disconnect the six pin plug adjacent to the relevant fan. Identify the fan to be replaced and power down by disconnecting the six pin plug adjacent to the relevant fan.
Disable the transmitter RF power from the TCUs using lock device commands, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on each TCU is extinguished. When they are all extinguished, switch OFF each TCU circuit breaker on the PDU. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure that the RF power is OFF, as indicated by the TX STATUS LEDs being extinguished on the relevant TCUs. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.
2.
Unscrew and remove the knurled ring cable connectors that secure the RF cables positioned in front of the fan to be removed to the underside of the top panel RF modules. Secure the cables out of the way. Unscrew and retain the three M4 torx screws securing the front base of the fan housing to the fan shelf. Grasp the handle at the front of the fan housing and carefully slide it forwards out of its location. Place the fan assembly on a convenient work surface. On the bottom panel of the assembly, use a T20 Torxdriver to remove the four M4x12 screws around the large circular hole, and remove the bottom plate of the assembly. Taking care to support the fan blades, unscrew and retain the four M4 screws and shakeproof washers securing the fan to the top of the fan housing. Withdraw the fan from the bottom of its housing, guiding the lead and connector through the aperture at the top. The fan removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 457
GMR-01
Fan replacement
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement fan in a BTS cabinet

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. CAUTION When sliding the fan housing back into the cabinet, take care not to stress or damage the interior cableforms. 2. 3. Check the fan operation, as described in Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 (GSM-106-423). The fan replacement is now complete.
To remove a fan from an ancillary cabinet

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Switch OFF the ANC HMS SUPPLY circuit breaker on the PDP. Identify the fan to be replaced and disconnect its associated six pin plug at the relevant side of the fan shelf. Unscrew and retain the three M4 torx screws securing the front base of the fan housing to the fan shelf. Grasp the handle at the front of the fan housing and carefully slide it forwards out of its location. Place the fan assembly on a convenient work surface. On the bottom panel of the assembly, use a T20 Torxdriver to remove the four M4x12 screws around the large circular hole, and remove the bottom plate of the assembly. Taking care to support the fan blades, unscrew and retain the four M4 screws and shakeproof washers securing the fan to the top of the fan housing. Withdraw the fan from the bottom of its housing, guiding the lead and connector through the aperture at the top. The fan removal is now complete.
6.
7.
To install a replacement fan in an ancillary cabinet

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. CAUTION When sliding the fan housing back into the cabinet, take care not to stress or damage the interior cableforms. 2. 3. Power up and check the fan operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The fan replacement is now complete. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 458
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fan replacement
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 459
GMR-01
IADU replacement
GSM-105-523
IADU replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace an IADU. An IADU is fitted beneath the top panel of indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T20 torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench.
Preliminaries
Replacing a IADU requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing an IADU module. Installing a replacement IADU module.
Maint. 460
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
IADU replacement
IADU module location diagrams

Figure 4-12 shows the location of an IADU module and items referred to in the procedures in a BTS cabinet (indoor GSM900).
DLNB MODULES TOP PANEL
DUPLEXER MODULES
IADU MODULE (MOUNTED BENEATH TOP PANEL UNDER DLNB AND DUPLEXER MODULES)
Figure 4-12 M-Cell6 EGSM900 indoor cabinet showing location of IADU.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 461
GMR-01
IADU replacement
GSM-105-523
IADU module
Figure 4-13 shows an IADU:
RF DATA CONNECTOR
RF DATA CONNECTOR
POWER CONNECTOR
Figure 4-13 IADU module
To remove an IADU module

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital modules. An earthing connection point is provided on the rack frame to the right of the TCUs. 1. Remove the fan(s) as described in Fan replacement in this chapter. CAUTION In the following steps, take care not to drop screws down the inside of the cabinet. 2. 3. Note the positions of the six M4 Torx screws securing the IADU to the underside of the top panel. Carefully unscrew and retain them. Ease the IADU from the DLNB connectors protruding through the top panel and carefully withdraw the unit, with cables, to the front of the fan shelf. Note the power and RF cables on each side. Unclip the power connector and unscrew the RF connectors, noting that the thumbscrews on the RF connectors detach when they are unscrewed. Withdraw the IADU and wrap it in anti-static packaging. The unit removal is now complete.
4. 5. 6.
Maint. 462
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
IADU replacement
To install a replacement IADU module

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital modules. An earthing connection point is provided on the rack frame to the right of the TCUs. 1. 2. 3. Remove the replacement IADU from its anti-static packaging and transfer any protective caps on the connectors to the removed unit. Reconnect the power and RF cables to the positions noted in the removal procedure. Being careful not to stress the cables or connectors, ease the IADU back into position beneath the top panel. Align the fixed connectors on the IADU with the DLNB connectors protruding through the top panel and reconnect them evenly across the board assembly. Refit the six M4 screws to secure the IADU to the top panel. Tighten evenly to 2.2 Nm. Replace the fan(s), as described in Fan replacement in this chapter. Check the operation and switch setting of the IADU as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The module replacement is now complete.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 463
GMR-01
TCU and TCU-B replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a TCU or TCU-B. A maximum of six transceivers can be fitted in indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 EGSM900 or DCS1800 BTS cabinets. NOTE TCU-Bs cannot be used in DCS1800 BTS cabinets
Safety
WARNING This equipment contains Beryllium see Frontmatter warnings. Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S S Door key. M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. T10 torxdriver. T20 torxdriver. Flat bladed screwdriver. Insulated torque wrench.
Preliminaries
Replacing a TCU or TCU-B requires removal of RF transmitter power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a TCU or TCU-B module. Installing a replacement TCU or TCU-B module. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 464
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
TCU/TCU-B location diagram

Figure 4-14 shows the location of a transceiver (TCU or TCU-B) in a BTS cabinet (outdoor GSM900).
CAVITY COMBINING BLOCK (CCB) MODULE TOP PANEL
TRANSCEIVER (TCU OR TCU-B)
Figure 4-14 M-Cell6 EGSM900 outdoor BTS cabinet showing position of TCUs.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 465
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a TCU or TCU-B

1. 2. Locate the TCU or TCU-B module to be replaced and note the RF cable connections to it. Disable the transmitter RF power from the transceiver, as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. When these commands have been accepted, and the power is down, the (orange) Tx STATUS LED on the transceiver is extinguished. When it is extinguished, switch OFF the relevant transceiver circuit breaker on the PDU. WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Carefully unscrew and disconnect the coaxial cable from the RF power output TX OUT connector at the top of the transceiver front panel. Carefully unscrew and disconnect the coaxial cables from the RF input connectors, RX IN1 and RX IN2 at the bottom of the transceiver front panel. Using a flat bladed screwdriver unscrew and gently remove the dc power cable from the POWER connector at the bottom of the transceiver front panel. Using a flat bladed screwdriver unscrew and gently remove the cable from the EXTERNAL ALARMS connector at the centre of the transceiver front panel. Note the fibre optic cable connections to the DATA IN A/B and DATA OUT A/B connectors on the transceiver front panel. WARNING Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beam with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors. 8. Unscrew and gently pull the fibre optic cables out of the DATA IN and DATA OUT connectors on the transceiver front panel. It is advisable to protect the tips of the fibre cables with a protective cover. WARNING Handle the TCU with extreme care when removing it from its slot. The TCU weighs 9.8 Kg. 9. Remove the transceiver from its slot by grasping the handle with one hand and placing the finger tips of the other hand under the front panel bottom flange. Gently lift up on the flange and pull outwards on the transceiver handle. Ensure the module is kept clear of the cables on the alarm board cover as it is withdrawn. The module removal is now complete.
10.
Maint. 466
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement TCU or TCU-B

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door.
TCU-B alarm connections

The alarm connection socket is in a different position on the TCU-B to that of the TCU, and has a different orientation. The following additional steps may be required to connect the alarm cable to the TCU-B: 2. 3. Remove the cable ties securing the alarm cables. Carefully take up any available slack on the cables. This should provide sufficient extra cable length to reach the alarm sockets.
If these steps fail to provide sufficient cable to make the connection then: S Use the adaptor cable (3086626M01: alarm cable adaptor, TCU-B) to link between the alarm cable and the alarm socket on the front panel of the TCU. or S Contact the following number for further advice: GSM MCSC +44 (0) 1793 430040 NOTE If a replacement transceiver is not available, a transceiver blanking panel must be fitted. 4. 5. Check and optimize the TCU as described in the Installation and Configuration, GSM-100- 423 manual. The module replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 467
GMR-01
Micro base control unit module replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace the digital modules in a micro base control unit (mBCU). One or two mBCU assemblies can be fitted in indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 or DCS1800 BTS cabinets. They are located either side of the PDU, above the PSU shelf in the lower portion of the cabinet. The mBCU cage assembly can accommodate the following digital modules: S S S S S mBCU power supply (BPSM). Main control unit (MCU). Fibre optic extender (FOX). Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX). Network Interface Unit (NIU). NOTE It is necessary to remove all of the above digital modules before removing the mBCU assembly cage.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beam with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S Door key. M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Anti-static earthing wrist strap. M30 torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench.
Preliminaries
Replacing a mBCU module or cage requires the site to be taken out of service and calls to be interrupted and/or dropped. It is therefore advisable to perform these procedures during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 468
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a mBCU module. Installing a replacement mBCU module.
mBCU module location diagram

Figure 4-15 shows a mBCU cage with a full complement of modules:
BACKPLANE
BPSM MCU FOX
FMUX
Figure 4-15 mBCU cage module layout

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 469
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a mBCU module

WARNING Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beam with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital modules. An ESP earthing connection point is provided on the right hand rack frame, adjacent to the TCUs. 1. 2. 3. Locate the digital module to be replaced. Disable the mBCU as described in Disabling and enabling devices in the support procedures in chapter 1. Switch the associated mBCU dc circuit breaker on the PDU front panel to OFF. NOTE The mBCU 0 is the right hand cage assembly The mBCU 1 is the left hand cage assembly If an MCU, FOX or FMUX module is being replaced, note the fibre optic cable connections to the module before removal. 4. Disconnect each fibre cable by gently pushing the knurled connector in and rotating it through a quarter turn anticlockwise to disengage, and then carefully withdraw the cable. It is advisable to protect the tips of the fibre cables with a protective cover. Secure the cables to one side. Unseat the module by gripping the upper and lower pair of plastic ejectors between the thumb and first finger of each hand, then gently squeeze and pull on the ejectors until the module unclips at the top and bottom of its front panel and unplugs from its rear connector. Carefully slide the module from its location and place it in an anti-static storage container. The module removal is now complete.
5.
6. 7.
Maint. 470
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement mBCU module

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE Ensure the ejectors audibly click into place when the module is pushed back in. 2. 3. Check the module operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423.. The module replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 471
GMR-01
Micro base control unit cage replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a micro base control unit (mBCU) assembly cage. One or two mBCU assembly cages can be fitted in indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900 or DCS1800 BTS cabinets. They are located either side of the PDU, above the PSU shelf in the lower portion of the cabinet. The mBCU cage assembly can accommodate the following digital modules: S S S S S mBCU power supply (BPSM). Main control unit (MCU). Fibre optic extender (FOX). Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX). Network Interface Unit (NIU). NOTE It is necessary to remove all of the above digital modules before the removal of the mBCU2 assembly cage can take place.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. WARNING Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beam with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S Door key. M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Anti-static earthing wrist strap. M30 torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench.
Preliminaries
Replacing a mBCU module requires the site to be taken out of service and calls to be interrupted and/or dropped. It is therefore advisable to perform these procedures during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 472
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a mBCU cage. Installing a replacement mBCU cage.
mBCU cage Diagram

Figure 4-16 shows a mBCU cage with a full complement of modules:
BACKPLANE
BPSM MCU FOX
FMUX
Figure 4-16 A mBCU cage

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 473
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a mBCU assembly cage

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital modules. An ESP earthing connection point is provided on the right hand rack frame, adjacent to the TCUs. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove all the digital modules in the mBCU to be removed, as described in the previous procedure. Secure all cables away from the front of the cage. Using a T30 torxdriver remove the six M6x12 screws securing the front of the cage. Remove the two plastic rivet screws holding the PDP cover in position, and remove it. CAUTION Take care when withdrawing the cage. Protrusions on the cage can snag on the cabinet frame and the rear connectors can be damaged if excessive force is used. 5. Withdraw the cage sufficient to expose the rear cables and note their positions, as follows: ALARM J11 25 pin D-type Release sliding catch NIM J13 15 pin D-type Release sliding catch POWER J14 4 pin Press end lugs to unclip REDOUT J30 50 pin D-type Open end clips REDIN J31 50 pin D-type Open end clips +12V J21 2 pin Press end lugs to unclip Unclip each cable connector and carefully disconnect from the cage connectors. Remove the mBCU assembly cage by drawing it out of the front of the cabinet. The cage removal is now complete.
6. 7. 8.
To install a replacement mBCU cage

1. 2. 3. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. Check mBCU operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423.. The cage replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Return to service as detailed in the support procedures. Notify OMC of the base station availability. Log the maintenance activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 474
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Alarm board AB6 and extender replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace the alarm board AB6, with the alarm 6 extender board, in the indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900,DCS1800 and PCS1900 BTS cabinets. The alarm board is mounted between the TCU frame and the fan shelf near the top of the cabinet. The extender board is optional and is mounted on the alarm board on six stand-off pillars, on the left hand side of AB6.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S Door key. M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. T10 torxdriver. T20 torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench.
Preliminaries
Replacing an alarm board requires the removal of cabinet power, causing the site to be taken out of service and calls to be interrupted and/or dropped. It is therefore advisable to perform these procedures during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing an AB6 and extender board. Installing a replacement AB6 and extender board.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 475
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Alarm board location diagram

Figure 4-17 shows the location of an alarm board in an outdoor EGSM900 BTS cabinet.
fan shelf
alarm board
TRANSCEIVER CONTROL UNIT (TCU)
Figure 4-17 M-Cell6 EGSM900 outdoor BTS cabinet showing position of alarm board.
Maint. 476
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove the alarm board AB6 and extender

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital modules. An ESP earthing connection point is provided on the right hand rack frame, adjacent to the TCUs. 1. 2. Shut down the BTS cabinet power by switching all the ac and dc circuit breakers to OFF Make a note of layout and position of the cable connectors on AB6, and remove them. POWER FAN ALARMS TCU ALARMS mBCU 0 mBCU 1 KRONE (PIX0) PSU/ANC ALARMS VSWR NOTE Ensure that switches S1 and S2 are set as per the diagrams on the plastic cover of Alarm Board AB2. CAUTION Take care not to drop screws into the cabinet in the following step. 3. Using a T20 Torxdriver, unscrew and retain the six M4x12 Torx screws securing the alarm board, and its clear protective cover to the cabinet frame. Remove the plastic cover. Secure the cables away from the alarm board and unclip the TCU/ top panel RF cables from their fan shelf retainers. Carefully lift the alarm board, and extender if fitted, up and out of its location. If the extender board is to be removed, place the board on a suitable anti-static work surface. Otherwise place it in an anti-static storage container. If required, remove the extender board, and its clear protective cover, by unscrewing the six M3 screws securing it to the alarm board. Place the extender board in an anti-static storage container. The alarm board AB6 and its extender removal is now complete. PL7 PL5 PL2 PL4 PL3 J2 J1 PL1 4-PIN 12-PIN 24-PIN 15-PIN 15-PIN 50-WAY 50-WAY 14-Pin Press end lugs to unclip Press central lug to unclip Press central lug to unclip Press central lug to unclip Press central lug to unclip Unscrew ends Unscrew ends Press central lug to unclip
4.
5.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 477
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To install a replacement alarm board AB6 and extender

1. 2. 3. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. Check alarm board operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The alarm board AB6 and alarm 6 extender board replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 478
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
T43/BIB replacement
T43/BIB replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a T43 interconnect board or BIB assembly in the indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets. A T43 or BIB assembly is mounted on the left side of the top panel, adjacent to the RF modules. Since the T43 and BIB assemblies use identical mountings and locations in the cabinet, the following repair procedure is common to both.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T20 torxdriver. 7mm box spanner. Insulated torque wrench. A 2m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
All channel traffic associated with a T43 or BIB 2 Mbit/s link is lost during the replacement procedure. It is therefore advisable to perform these procedures during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a T43 or BIB assembly board. Installing a replacement T43 or BIB assembly board.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 479
GMR-01
T43/BIB replacement
GSM-105-523
T43/BIB module location diagrams

Figure 4-18 shows the location of a T43 interconnect board or BIB on the top panel of a EGSM900 BTS cabinet:
PIX0
PIX1
MS0
POWER SUPPLY INPUT
MS1 FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE
Figure 4-18 EGSM900 top panel showing position of T43/BIBs. Figure 4-19 shows the location of a T43 interconnect board or BIB on the top panel of a DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinet:
PIX0
PIX1
MS0
MS1 FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE
Figure 4-19 DCS1800 top panel showing position of T43/BIBs.
Maint. 480
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
T43/BIB replacement
To remove a T43 or BIB assembly

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Disable the 2 Mbit/s link drive commands as described in Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 (GSM-106-423). Locate the T43 or BIB assembly to be replaced. On a T43, note the order in which the 2 Mbit/s links are connected to it and remove them. On a BIB, unscrew the hold down screws securing the 2 Mbit/s link 37-pin D-type connector using a 3 mm flat blade screwdriver. Disconnect the link. Using a T20 Torxdriver, unscrew and retain the four M4 x 12 Torx screws securing the cover of the assembly and remove the cover. Using a 7 mm box spanner unscrew and retain the four M4 standoffs securing the circuit board to the standoffs on the cabinet. Carefully remove the circuit board by unplugging it from the 37-pin D-type connector on the cabinet. The module removal is now complete.
To install a replacement T43 or BIB assembly

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door or hood. NOTE When replacing the 7 mm standoffs and M4 Torx screws, tighten to 2.2 Nm. 2. 3. Check module operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The T43 or BIB replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 481
GMR-01
IBB replacement
GSM-105-523
IBB replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace an interconnect bus board (IBB) in outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS and ancillary cabinets. An IBB is fitted on the back wall left side, in the top box of outdoor BTS and ancillary cabinets. Since the IBB assemblies use identical mountings and locations in the cabinets, the following repair procedure is common to all.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T20 torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench. A 2 m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
Cabinet alarms and HMS control signals will be lost during the replacement procedure. It is therefore advisable to perform this procedures during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing an IBB assembly board. Installing a replacement IBB board.
Maint. 482
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
IBB replacement
IBB module location diagram

Figure 4-20 shows the location of an IBB on the top box of an outside GSM900 BTS cabinet (outdoor EGSM900):
IBB
Figure 4-20 M-Cell6 EGSM900 outdoor BTS cabinet, showing position of IBB.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 483
GMR-01
IBB replacement
GSM-105-523
IBB module diagram

Figure 4-21 shows the connectors on an IBB: Cabinet Top Panel
J3
PL1 INPUT FROM ANCILLARY J1 HMS J2 OUTPUT TO NEXT BTS
Figure 4-21 Interconnect bus board (IBB) connector details
To remove an IBB
1. 2. 3. Locate the IBB to be replaced. On the IBB, note the cable connections and unscrew the hold down screws securing each D-type connector. Clear the cables out of the way. Using a T20 Torxdriver, unscrew and retain the four M4x12 Torx screws securing the IBB to the angled bracket on the back wall of the top box. Carefully withdraw the IBB. The module removal is now complete.
4.
Maint. 484
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
IBB replacement
To install a replacement IBB assembly

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door or hood. NOTE When replacing the M4 Torx screws, tighten to 2.2 Nm. 2. 3. Check alarm module and HMS operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The IBB replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 485
GMR-01
Temperature sensors replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
These procedures describe how to remove and replace the temperature sensors in indoor or outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 BTS or PCS1900 ancillary cabinets. There are three types of temperature sensor: S S S Fan speed control thermistor(s), mounted in the lower section of indoor and outdoor BTS cabinets, and the ancillary cabinet. Cabinet overtemperature alarm thermostat(s), mounted adjacent to the alarm panel in the BTS cabinet. HMS control thermistor, mounted on the top panel of outdoor BTS cabinets.
Safety

The tools and materials required for this repair activity are: S S S S S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. Side cutters. T10 and T20 torxdrivers. 7mm box spanner. Soldering iron. Heatshrink sleeving. Plastic cable clips. Insulated torque wrench. A 2 m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
To replace the fan speed thermistors in the BTS cabinet it is necessary to remove the TCUs and, therefore, remove RF transmitter power. It is therefore advisable to perform these procedures during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 486
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S S S S S Removing a BTS cabinet fan speed thermistor. Installing a replacement BTS cabinet fan speed thermistor. Removing an ancillary cabinet fan speed thermistor. Installing a replacement ancillary cabinet fan speed thermistor. Removing a BTS cabinet overtemperature alarm thermostat. Installing a replacement BTS cabinet cabinet overtemperature alarm thermostat. Removing a BTS cabinet HMS control thermistor. Installing a replacement BTS cabinet HMS control thermistor.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 487
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a BTS cabinet fan speed thermistor

1. 2. 3. Remove all TCUs, as described in TCU replacement in this chapter. Using a T20 Torxdriver unscrew and retain the two M4x12 Torx screws securing the TCU shelf to the PDU frame. Pull the shelf forwards and out of the cabinet. The fan speed thermistor(s) will now be visible, clipped each side at the top of the PDU frame behind the control panel. Locate the sensor to be replaced; they are fitted on the same side as their respective fan at the top of the cabinet. Using side cutters, cut through the plastic clip holding the sensor in position and remove the cut pieces. Feed the sensor cable back from its location in the side channelling of the cabinet to the six-way connector at the side of the fan shelf. Repeat step 5 for the other leads attached to the six-way connector. Unclip the six-way connector and remove the complete cableform, including the faulty sensor. Remove the sensor and leads from the cabinet. The fan speed thermistor removal is now complete.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
To install a replacement BTS cabinet fan speed thermistor

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE The speed thermistor sleeving is colour coded for particular operation: Yellow - outdoor installations. Black - indoor installations. When replacing the TCU shelf M4 Torx screws, tighten to 2.2 Nm. 2. 3. Check sensor operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The fan thermistor replacement is now complete.
Maint. 488
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove an ancillary cabinet fan speed thermistor

1. Locate the fan speed thermistor(s) on top of the battery box/control compartment, in the communications equipment area. They are fitted on the same side as their respective fan at the top of the cabinet. Using side cutters, cut through the plastic clip holding the sensor in position and remove the cut pieces. Feed the sensor cable back from its location in the side channelling of the cabinet to the six-way connector at the side of the fan shelf. Unclip the six-way connector block and remove the leads of the faulty sensor using the extraction/insertion tool. Remove the sensor and leads from the cabinet. The fan speed thermistor removal is now complete.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
To install a replacement ancillary cabinet fan speed thermistor

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE The speed thermistor sleeving is colour coded yellow for outdoor operation. 2. 3. Check sensor operation, as described in Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 (GSM-106-423). The fan thermistor replacement is now complete.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 489
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a BTS cabinet overtemperature alarm thermostat

1. 2. Locate the overtemperature thermostat(s) to be replaced, adjacent to the alarm board AB6, and note the two wires connected by spade terminals. Carefully pull off the spade connections. CAUTION Take care in the next step when removing the sensor not to drop the screws down the interior of the cabinet. 3. 4. 5. Using a T20 Torxdriver unscrew the two M3x12 Torx screws securing the sensor next to the alarm panel. Remove the sensor from the cabinet. The overtemperature thermostat removal is now complete.
To install a replacement BTS cabinet overtemperature alarm thermostat

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE When replacing the sensor M3 Torx screws, tighten to a torque of 1.0Nm. 2. 3. Test the sensor as described in Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 (GSM-106-423). The overtemperature thermostat replacement is now complete.
Maint. 490
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a BTS cabinet HMS control thermistor

1. Locate the sensor to be replaced on the top panel near the HMS connection panel. CAUTION Take care in the next steps not to stress the connecting leads at the sleeving into the sensor. 2. 3. 4. Using a T10 Torxdriver unscrew and retain the two M3x8 Torx screws securing the sensor to the top panel. Cut the heat shrink sleeving and unsolder the two leads connected to the sensor. The HMS control thermistor removal is now complete.
To install a replacement BTS cabinet HMS control thermistor

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order but do not close the cabinet door. NOTE When replacing the sensor securing nut and the top panel bracket M4 Torx screws, tighten to a torque of 2.2 Nm. 2. 3. Test the sensor as described in Installation & Configuration: M-Cell6 (GSM-106-423). The HMS control thermistor replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 491
GMR-01
Door or hood microswitch replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a door or hood alarm microswitch in outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 cabinets. The microswitch assembly is a common fit in all the outdoor cabinet access locations. The following procedure therefore describes how to replace a microswitch in any location. For hood locations where two microswitch assemblies are ganged together on common fixings, the same procedure is still applicable.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T10 torxdriver. Insulated torque wrench. A 2 m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
The door or hood microswitches can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated alarms are accounted for.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a door or hood microswitch. Installing a replacement door or hood microswitch.
Maint. 492
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a microswitch
1. 2. Locate the microswitch to be replaced at the periphery of the door or hood and note the wire connections. Carefully pull off the spade terminals. CAUTION Take care in the following steps when removing a microswitch not to drop the screws or clamping plate down the interior of the cabinet. 3. 4. 5. 6. Using a T10 Torxdriver unscrew one of the two M3x8 Torx screws securing the microswitch to the cabinet. Gripping the microswitch and its clamping plate (on the rear of the support bracket) unscrew the second M3x8 Torx screw. Carefully remove the microswitch and its clamping plate from the cabinet. The microswitch removal is now complete.
To install a replacement microswitch

1. 2. 3. 4. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order. Slacken the clamping screws until the microswitch can just be moved in and out in the elongated holes provided in the support bracket. Adjust the position of the microswitch such that it operates when the associated door or hood is closed, as denoted by an audible click. Tighten the clamping screws to a torque of 1.0 Nm. NOTE Repeat steps 2 to 4 as necessary until correct operation is achieved. 5. 6. Check microswitch operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The microswitch replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 493
GMR-01
Krone box replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a Krone box in outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900,DCS1800 or PCS1900 ancillary cabinets. Indoor installations use customer provided Krone boxes. Up to two Krone boxes for external alarms and communications interfaces can be mounted on the top panel of the ancillary cabinet. Since they are an identical fit, the following procedure describes how to replace either of them.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 4 mm flat blade screwdriver. 5.5 mm box spanner. Krone box terminal insertion tool. Insulated torque wrench. A 2 m set of steps or suitable platform for access to the cabinet top.
Preliminaries
The Krone boxes can be replaced without interruption to normal operation of the equipment, provided the associated customer alarms and communications signal losses are accounted for.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a Krone box. Installing a replacement Krone box. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 494
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Krone box location diagram

Figure 4-22 shows the location of the two Krone boxes on the top panel of a GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 ancillary cabinet:
ISOLATION TRANSFORMER TOP PANEL KRONE BOX EXTERNAL ALARMS INTERFACE
KRONE BOX EXTERNAL COMMS INTERFACE
Figure 4-22 View of M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet top panel showing position of Krone boxes

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 495
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a Krone box

1. 2. 3. Locate the Krone box to be replaced on the top panel and unscrew the two 4mm captive screws at diagonal corners of the box. Remove the cover. Note the location of the wires into the terminal blocks and cut them using insulated wire cutters. Unscrew the two screws securing the 37-pin D-type connector and remove the cable along with all other wiring from the box. CAUTION Take care in the following steps when removing the Krone box not to drop the nuts or plain washers down the interior of the cabinet. 4. 5. Using a T20 Torxdriver, unscrew and remove the four M3x8 screws securing the box to the bulkhead. The Krone box removal is now complete.
To install a replacement Krone box

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE When replacing the nuts and washers, using a 5.5 mm torque wrench, tighten to a torque of 1.0 Nm. Re-insert the terminal block connections to the positions noted in the removal procedure using an insertion tool. 2. 3. Check the Krone box connections, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The Krone box replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 496
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
BTS cabinet power distribution repair
BTS cabinet power distribution repair

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the replacement of M-Cell6 FRUs that relate to the BTS cabinet power distribution functions of the base station.

List of procedures
The repair procedures for power items in the BTS cabinet are: S S S S S Fuse replacement. Fuse holder replacement. DC circuit breaker replacement. Micro Base Control Unit (mBCU) circuit breaker replacement. Indoor cabinet power supply module (PSM) replacement.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 497
GMR-01
Fuse replacement
GSM-105-523
Fuse replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a ruptured fuse in indoor and outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets. The fuses are located on the PDU front panel in the lower section of the cabinet and are a common fit. NOTE The procedure assumes that the reason for fuse failure has been established and the fault corrected before an attempt is made to replace the fuse.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 5 mm flat blade screwdriver. Digital voltmeter
Preliminaries
Replacing a fuse requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a fuse. Installing a replacement fuse.
Maint. 498
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fuse replacement
PDU front panel diagram

Figure 4-23 shows the location of the fuses on a typical indoor cabinet DCS1800 PDU front panel.
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
FUSES PCU2 100A PCU1 100A PCU0 100A
FUSE IDENTITIES CCB/TCB 1 3A ALARM BD 3A FAN 1 10A CCB/TCB 0 3A LNA 3A FAN 0 10A
Figure 4-23 PDU front panel details (DCS1800 indoor cabinet)

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 499
GMR-01
Fuse replacement
GSM-105-523
To remove a fuse
1. S S 2. 3. 4. 5. Power down the supply to the fuse as follows: In an indoor base station, switch OFF circuit breakers PCU0, PCU1 and PCU2 on the PDU front panel. In an outdoor base station, switch OFF the associated MAIN BTS 1 or 2 circuit breaker in the ancillary cabinet. Insert the screwdriver into the slot on the fuse head. Give a slight push inwards, and simultaneously give a quarter turn anti-clockwise to release the fuse from the holder. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder. The fuse removal is now complete.
To install a replacement fuse

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Using a digital multimeter, check that the new fuse is serviceable. Insert a new fuse of the correct rating into the fuse holder. Place the tip of the screwdriver into the slot, and while giving a slight push in, give a quarter-turn clockwise to secure the fuseholder in position. Reapply power to the associated circuit and check that the fuse remains intact. The fuse replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4100
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fuse holder replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a faulty fuse holder in indoor and outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets. The fuse holders are located on the PDU front panel in the lower section of the cabinet and are a common fit. NOTE The procedure assumes that the reason for fuse holder failure has been established and the fault corrected before an attempt is made to replace the fuse holder.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 3 mm cross head screwdriver. 5 mm flat blade screwdriver.
Preliminaries
Replacing a fuse holder requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a fuse holder. Installing a replacement fuse holder.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4101
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Fuse holder location diagram

Figure 4-24 shows the location of the fuse holders on a typical PDU front panel (indoor cabinet DCS1800):
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
FUSES PCU2 100A PCU1 100A PCU0 100A
FUSE IDENTITIES CCB/TCB 1 3A ALARM BD 3A FAN 1 10A CCB/TCB 0 3A LNA 3A FAN 0 10A
Figure 4-24 PDU front panel details (DCS1800 indoor cabinet)
Maint. 4102
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a fuse holder

NOTE Note the orientation of the fuse holder before removing it from its location. 1. Power down the supply to the fuse holder as follows: In an indoor base station, switch OFF circuit breakers PCU0, PCU1 and PCU2 on the PDU front panel. In an outdoor base station, switch OFF the associated MAIN BTS 1 or 2 circuit breaker in the ancillary cabinet 2. Use the cross head screwdriver to remove the centre thread of the two plastic push rivet fasteners in the PDU panel. Remove the body of the fasteners and then remove the PDU panel. NOTE Depending on which fuse holder assembly needs to be replaced, it may be necessary to remove the three PCU circuit breakers as per the DC circuit breaker replacement in this manual. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Identify the assembly to be replaced. With a small flat blade screwdriver prise open the metal clip which holds the assembly in position on the mounting plate. Move the fuse holder forward out of its location. Remove the spade connections to the fuse holder, noting their orientation for re-assembly. The fuse holder removal is now complete.
To install a replacement fuse holder

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Fit the new fuse holder into its location, ensuring its correct orientation. Fit the metal clip on to the body of the fuse assembly. When the fuse assembly is hard against the mounting plate, push home the metal clip, ensuring that it clicks into place on the body of the assembly. Refit the spade connections to the fuse holder. Replace the three PCU circuit breakers if necessary. Replace the cover on the PDU panel, and then the plastic push rivets. Reapply power to the associated circuit and check that the fuse holder is functioning correctly. The fuse holder replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4103
GMR-01
DC circuit breaker replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a faulty dc circuit breaker in indoor and outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets. The circuit breakers are located on the PDU front panel in the lower section of the cabinet and are a common fit. NOTE The procedure assumes that the reason for the malfunction has been established as a faulty circuit breaker and not a secondary cause, before an attempt is made to replace the circuit breaker.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 5mm flat blade screwdriver. 3mm cross head screwdriver.
Preliminaries
Replacing a circuit breaker requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a dc circuit breaker. Installing a replacement dc circuit breaker. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4104
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
DC circuit breaker location diagram

Figure 4-25 shows the location of the circuit breakers on a typical PDU in an indoor DCS1800 cabinet:
DC CIRCUIT BREAKERS
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
WARNING
PCU2 100A
PCU1 100A
PCU0 100A
Figure 4-25 PDU front panel details (DCS1800 indoor cabinet) showing circuit breakers.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4105
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a dc circuit breaker

1. Power down the supply to the fuse holder In an outdoor base station, switch OFF the associated MAIN BTS 1 or 2 circuit breaker in the ancillary cabinet In an indoor base station If... TCU0 to TCU5 are being replaced PCU0, PCU1 or PCU2 are being replaced 2. Then... Switch OFF circuit breakers PCU0, PCU1 and PCU2 on the PDU front panel. Switch OFF external dc supply to BTS cabinet.
Use the cross head screwdriver to remove the centre thread of the two plastic push rivet fasteners in the PDU panel. Remove the body of the fasteners and then remove the PDU panel. Use the flat blade screwdriver to loosen the bottom captive screws on all of the circuit breakers in the bank and remove the connecting bar from them. Observe under the circuit breaker a rectangular aperture at the rear. Place the end of the screwdriver in this aperture and press it down to release the circuit breaker from the support DIN rail. Extend the circuit breaker forwards to reveal the upper connections. Loosen the captive screw at the top of the faulty circuit breaker and remove the conductor in the top connector. The circuit breaker removal is now complete.
3. 4.
5. 6.
To install a replacement dc circuit breaker

1. 2. 3. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order. Check that the replaced circuit breaker operates and remains set. The circuit breaker replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4106
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
micro BCU circuit breaker replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a faulty mBCU circuit breaker in indoor and outdoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets. The circuit breakers are located on the PDU front panel in the lower section of the cabinet and are a common fit. NOTE The procedure assumes that the reason for the malfunction has been established as a faulty circuit breaker and not a secondary cause, before an attempt is made to replace the circuit breaker.
Safety
Tools and materials

The tools required for the repair activity: S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. 3 mm cross head screwdriver.
Preliminaries
Replacing a mBCU circuit breaker requires removal of power and equipment control, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a mBCU circuit breaker. Installing a replacement mBCU circuit breaker.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4107
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
mBCU circuit breakers location diagram

Figure 4-26 shows the location of the mBCU circuit breakers on a PDU front panel in an indoor cabinet GSM1800:
TCU5 16A
TCU4 16A
TCU3 16A
TCU2 16A
TCU1 16A
TCU0 16A
mBCU CIRCUIT BREAKERS
WARNING
PCU2 100A
PCU1 100A
PCU0 100A
Figure 4-26 PDU front panel details (GSM1800 indoor cabinet) showing BCU circuit breakers
Maint. 4108
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a mBCU circuit breaker

1. S S 2. Power down the supply to the circuit breaker as follows: In an indoor base station, switch OFF circuit breakers PCU0, PCU1 and PCU2 on the PDU front panel. In an outdoor base station, switch OFF the associated MAIN BTS 1 or 2 circuit breaker in the ancillary cabinet. Use the cross head screwdriver to remove the centre thread of the two plastic push rivet fasteners in the PDU panel. Remove the body of the fasteners and then remove the PDU panel. Place the fingers at the back of the circuit breaker and push firmly at the top and bottom plastic retainers to release it from its location. Move the circuit breaker forward out of its location. Remove the spade connectors, noting their position for re-assembly. Remove the circuit breaker from its location. The circuit breaker removal is now complete.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
To install a replacement mBCU circuit breaker

CAUTION Ensure that the replacement circuit breaker is the correct way up before fitting. 1. 2. 3. 4. Hold the circuit breaker in front of its location and refit the spade connections through the panel aperture to the terminals noted in the removal procedure. Use the fingers to push the circuit breaker into its location, so that it is securely in place. Reapply power to the associated circuit and check that the circuit breaker is functioning correctly. The mBCU circuit breaker replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4109
GMR-01
Indoor cabinet PSM replacement
GSM-105-523

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a faulty dc power supply module (PSM) in indoor M-Cell6 GSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 BTS cabinets. The PSMs are located in the lower section of the cabinet.
Safety
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 415 V ac in the side cabinet, and other high energy sources are present within the cabinets when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or batteries are connected. The cooling fins on the PSM can become hot during operation. Caution must be exercised when the module is being removed.

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key.
Preliminaries
Replacing a PSM requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a PSM. Installing a replacement PSM.
Maint. 4110
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
PSM location diagram

Figure 4-27 shows the location of the PSMs in an indoor BTS cabinet.
POWER SUPPLY MODULES (P/NPSM)
AIR DUCT
Figure 4-27 View of indoor BTS cabinet, showing position of PSMs

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4111
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a PSM
1. Switch OFF circuit breakers PCU0, PCU1 and PCU2on the PDU front panel to power down the supply to the PSMs. WARNING The cooling fins on the PSM can become hot during operation. Caution must be exercised when the module is being removed. 2. 3. 4. 5. Using a T30 Torxdriver, slacken the two M6x12 Torx screws securing the air duct and lower the duct. Grip the handle of the power supply module and pull it forward out of its location. Support the bottom of the unit with the other hand and remove it completely. The module removal is now complete.
To install a replacement PSM

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Hold the handle of the module, and support it with the other hand. Place it in its location, ensuring that it is positioned on the guides for the unit. Carefully push the module in, ensuring that the connectors fit correctly into position before finally pushing the module home. Raise the air duct below the PSMs to retain the PSMs and, using a T30 Torxdriver tighten the two M6x12 Torx screws to a torque of 2.2Nm. Check the PSM, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The PSM replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4112
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet power distribution repair
Ancillary cabinet power distribution repair

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the replacement of M-Cell6 FRUs that relate to the ancillary cabinet power distribution functions of the base station.

List of procedures
The repair procedures for the power items in the ancillary cabinet are: S S S S S Battery replacement. AC Power Supply Module (APSM) replacement. Control board. Fuse replacement. Fuse holder replacement.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4113
GMR-01
Battery replacement
GSM-105-523
Battery replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a battery monobloc in the M-Cell6 outdoor ancillary cabinet.
Safety
WARNING The battery is capable of supplying high short circuit current and as such provides a high energy hazard. The battery monoblocs weigh 2.7 kg each and are considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the batteries. Refer to the Health and Safety Warnings and Cautions contained in the battery manual. Do not wear any earthing wrist strap, watches, rings or jewellery when operating on or near the batteries.

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T20 torxdriver. 10 mm insulated spanner. Insulating tape. Insulated torque spanner. De-oxidized grease.
Preliminaries
A battery monobloc can be replaced without the removal of power to the equipment. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a battery monobloc. Installing a replacement battery monobloc. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4114
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery replacement
Battery monoblocs location diagram

Figure 4-28 shows the location of the battery monoblocs in an ancillary cabinet:
TOP PANEL
APSM
BATTERY ISOLATORS
CONTROL PANEL
BATTERIES
Figure 4-28 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet showing battery monobloc detail.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4115
GMR-01
Battery replacement
GSM-105-523
To remove a battery monobloc

WARNING The battery is capable of supplying high short circuit current and as such provides a high energy hazard. Do not wear any earthing wrist strap, watches, rings or jewellery during the following steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch OFF the battery isolators on the control panel, and isolate the unit from all external equipment. Unscrew and retain the six M4x20 Torx screws retaining the battery panel and remove the panel. Identify which battery is to be replaced. Remove and retain the plastic covers from the terminals on the two battery strings. Grasp the end of the white plastic tape which shows next to the faulty battery and pull it forwards to allow access to the faulty battery. Using a 10 mm insulated spanner, remove the nuts on the battery terminals. Remove the battery sense cables, then the black and the red cables from the battery terminals. Wrap the black and red cable terminals with two layers of insulating tape. Remove the inter-bloc link. This operation also releases the single, ring-terminated cable connected to the inter-bloc link. Slide the battery forward and lift it away from its location. WARNING Each battery monobloc weighs 2.7 kg and is considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying a battery. 8. 9. Remove the faulty battery to a safe location. The battery monobloc removal is now complete.
7.
Maint. 4116
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery replacement
To install a replacement battery monobloc

WARNING Refer to the Health and Safety Warnings and Cautions in the battery manual. 1. 2. Locate, unpack and prepare the battery as detailed in the manufacturers manual supplied with the battery. Position the replacement battery in the compartment and connect the single, ring terminated cable to the inter-bloc connecting link between it and the existing battery using a 10 mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to a torque of 3.95 Nm. Remove the insulating tape from the battery cables. Bolt the red cable to the battery positive terminal and the black cable to the negative common battery terminal using a 10mm insulated torque wrench. Tighten to a torque of 3.95 Nm. Apply de-oxidized grease to the battery terminals, taking care not to allow the grease to contact any plastic components on the lid assembly. Refit the terminal covers to each terminal and the plastic covers on each monobloc. Refit the battery panel using the six M4x20 Torx screws, and switch ON the battery isolators. Check battery operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The battery replacement is now complete.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4117
GMR-01
APSM replacement
GSM-105-523
APSM replacement
Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace an APSM in an M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet. Up to six APSMs can be located beneath the power distribution panel in the upper half of the cabinet.
Safety

Preliminaries
Replacing an APSM requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing an APSM module. Installing a replacement APSM module.
Maint. 4118
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
APSM replacement
APSM location diagram

Figure 4-29 shows the location of the APSMs in an ancillary cabinet:
COMMS POWER SUPPLY MODULE (CPSM) PANEL (CPSMs mounted behind panel, if required) APSM 5 APSM 4 APSM 3 APSM 1 AC POWER SUPPLY MODULE (APSM) 0
CUSTOMER COMMS EQUIPMENT SPACE
APSM 2
Figure 4-29 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet showing position of APSMs.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4119
GMR-01
APSM replacement
GSM-105-523
To remove an APSM
1. 2. Switch OFF the appropriate circuit breaker for the APSM being replaced (APSM 0 to APSM 5) on the PDP front panel. Unscrew and retain the two M6x20 Torx screws securing the APSM to the PDP frame. CAUTION Handle the APSM with care, the unit weighs 4.6 kg. 3. 4. Slide the APSM out of the PDP frame, supporting it from beneath with the other hand as it emerges. Place it securely to one side. The APSM removal is now complete.
To install a replacement APSM

1. Repeat the removal procedures in reverse order. NOTE Ensure that the APSM is pushed fully home into its connector on the back panel before refitting the two M6 Torx screws. Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm. 2. 3. Check APSM operation, as described in Installation and Configuration, Category 423. The APSM replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4120
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet control board

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the replacement of M-Cell6 FRUs that relate to the ancillary cabinet control panel of the equipment.
Safety
WARNING The battery is capable of supplying high short circuit current and as such provides a high energy hazard. The battery monoblocs weigh 2.7 kg each and are considered to be a heavy piece of equipment. Observe proper lifting precautions when carrying the batteries. Refer to the Health and Safety Warnings and Cautions contained in the battery manual. Do not wear any earthing wrist strap, watches, rings or jewellery when operating on or near the batteries.

Preliminaries
Replacing an APSM requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S S S Removing the control panel. Removing the control and alarms PCA. Removing the bypass assembly. Installing a replacement control panel. Installing a replacement bypass assembly. Installing a replacement control and alarms PCA.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4121
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Ancillary cabinet control panel diagram

Figure 4-30 illustrates the control panel of the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet.
BTS.2
AUTO BYPASS BYPASS BCB CLOSED BCA CLOSED
BATT. 2 BATT. 1
V A +
BTS.1
SMOKE ALARM RESET SMOKE DETECTOR LOW VOLTS
RESET
Figure 4-30 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet control panel detail
Maint. 4122
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove the control panel

WARNING Power down the ancillary cabinet before starting this procedure. 1. 2. Using a T20 Torxdriver, unscrew the six M4x12 counter sunk screws holding the panel over the BTS1 and BTS2 isolators. Remove the part of the control panel that covers the isolators.
To remove the control and alarms PCA

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the top two M4x12 screws on the control and alarms front panel. Pull the front panel outwards to slide the control and alarms board forward on the runners. Remove the six connectors on the control and alarms board, and also release the black plastic clamp which retains the ribbon cable for PL3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the six screws which hold the control and alarms PCA in its location. Loosen the grub screw in the knurled knob on the front panel and remove the knob. Remove the bottom two M4 screws on the front panel of the control and alarms PCA front panel and remove the front panel. Pull the control and alarms board forward and away from its location, out of the front of the cabinet.
To remove the bypass assembly

1. With the control and alarms PCA out of the panel, use a Phillips screwdriver, to remove the two M3x12 countersunk screws with nuts and washers which retain the Bypass assembly in position on the control and alarms PCA. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two M3x20 screws which hold the Bypass assembly to its mounting bracket. Remove the 10-pin connector on the Bypass assembly board, by pressing the centre lug on the connector, and pulling it clear. The removal of the control panel assembly is now complete.
2. 3. 4.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4123
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To replace the control panel

1. Repeat the removal procedure, but in the reverse order
To replace the bypass assembly

1. Repeat the removal procedure, but in the reverse order.
To replace the control and alarms PCA

1. 2. Repeat the removal procedure above, but in the reverse order. The replacement of the control panel assembly is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4124
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
APSM fuse replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a ruptured fuse in the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet. The fuses, FS1, FS2 and FS3, are located on the PDP front panel in the upper section of the cabinet and are a common fit. NOTE The procedure assumes that the reason for fuse failure has been established and the fault corrected before an attempt is made to replace the fuse.
Safety

Preliminaries
Replacing a fuse requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a fuse. Installing a replacement fuse.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4125
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
PDP fuse location diagram

Figure 4-31 shows the location of the fuses on the PDP:
126A
MAIN BTS.2 MAIN BTS.1 BTS2
63A
HMS SUPPLY BTS1 ANC
10A
COMMS0 COMMS1
10A
AIR CONDITIONERS FS1-2A CONTROL BOARD FS2-2A LVD CONT. A FS3-2A LVD CONT. B BTS2 BTS1 ANC 10A 10A 10A
20A
A.P.S.M
10A
ISO TRANS
63 63 A A
63 A
63 A
63 A
63 A
63 A
10 10A A
20A 20A 20A 20A
20A 20A 10A
Figure 4-31 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet PDP fuse details.
To remove a fuse
1. 2. 3. 4. Power down the supply to the fuses by switching OFF all the APSM circuit breakers on the PDP and the two battery isolators on the battery control panel. Identify the ruptured fuse. Grip and squeeze the top and bottom of the fuse carrier between thumb and first finger and pull out from the panel. Unclip the fuse from the fuse carrier. The fuse removal is now complete.
To install a replacement fuse

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Insert a new fuse of the correct rating into the fuse carrier. Use a digital multimeter to check the serviceability of the new fuse. Refit the fuse carrier into the panel fuse holder, ensure it audibly clicks into place. Reapply power to the associated circuit and check that the fuse remains intact. The fuse replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Return to service as detailed in the support procedures. Notify GSM cell site network of the base station availability. Log the maintenance activity.
Maint. 4126
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
APSM fuse holder replacement

Overview
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a fuse holder in the M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet. The fuse holders are located on the PDP front panel in the upper section of the cabinet and are a common fit. NOTE The procedure assumes that the reason for fuse failure has been established and the fault corrected before an attempt is made to replace the fuse.
Safety

The tools required for the repair activity are: S S S S M6 pin hexagon screwdriver. Door key. T20 torxdriver. M4 Phillips screwdriver.
Preliminaries
Replacing a fuse holder requires removal of power, it is therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. Notify the OMC of imminent repair activity.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing a fuse holder. Installing a replacement fuse holder.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4127
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
PDP fuse holder location diagram

Figure 4-32 shows the location of the fuse holders on the PDP
126A
MAIN BTS.2 MAIN BTS.1 BTS2
63A
HMS SUPPLY BTS1 ANC
10A
COMMS1 COMMS0
10A
AIR CONDITIONERS FS1-2A CONTROL BOARD FS2-2A LVD CONT. A FS3-2A LVD CONT. B BTS2 BTS1 ANC 10A 10A 10A
20A
A.P.S.M
10A
ISO TRANS
63 63 A A
63 A
63 A
63 A
63 A
63 A
10 10A A
20A 20A 20A 20A
20A 20A 10A
Figure 4-32 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinet PDP fuse detail
Maint. 4128
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a fuse holder

1. Power down the supply to the fuses by switching OFF all the APSM circuit breakers on the PDP, and the two battery isolators on the battery control panel CAUTION Take care in the following steps not to drop screws and washers down the interior of the cabinet. 2. 3. Remove and retain the six M4x12 countersunk Torx screws securing the front panel of the PDP. Place the panel safely to one side. Remove and retain the two M4x20 Phillips screws, with spring and flat washers, securing the 3-fuse mounting bracket in position. Note the orientation of the fuse holder and the bracket. Press the four retaining clips on the top and bottom of the faulty fuse holder until it is released and can be pushed out of its location. Remove the spade connections to the fuse holder, noting their orientation for re-assembly. Remove the fuse holder from its location. The fuse holder removal is now complete.
4. 5. 6. 7.
To install a replacement fuse holder

1. 2. 3. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order, tightening the six M4x12 Torx screws to a torque of 2.2 Nm. Reapply power to the associated circuit and check that the fuse holder is functioning correctly. The fuse holder replacement is now complete.
Return to service
Return to service as detailed in the support procedures. Notify GSM cell site network of the base station availability. Log the maintenance activity.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4129
GMR-01
BTS cabinet ac power interface module
GSM-105-523

Overview
This section contains the procedures to make repairs to the following items:
S S S
AC power supply modules (ACPMs). 63 A contact breakers. AC power interface module (ACPIM).
Safety
WARNING Isolate the mains input cable from the site power supply before starting this procedure.

The tools required for the following procedure are: S S S S S S Door key. T10 Torxdriver. T30 Torxdriver. 3 mm crosshead screwdriver. 10 mm socket spanner. Flatbladed screwdriver.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S Removing an ACPM from the ACPIM. Installing a replacement ACPM in the ACPIM. Removing an ACPIM from the cabinet. Installing a replacement ACPIM in the cabinet.
Maint. 4130
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
ACPIM and ACPMs diagram

Figure 4-33 illustrates the ac power interface module (ACPIM) of the BTS cabinet, containing the circuit breaker unit and the five ac power modules (ACPMs).
ACPM 0186534E01
ACPM 0186534E01
ACPM 0186534E01
ACPM 0186534E01
ACPM 0186534E01
DC AC
CB1 63A
INPUT HEALTHY OVERVOLTAGE CURRENT LIMIT OUTPUT HEALTHY
Figure 4-33 M-Cell6 indoor ac cabinet ACIPM details

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4131
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove an ACPM from the ACPIM

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present within the cabinet. Isolate the mains input cable from the site power supply before continuing with this procedure. 1. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the single M6x20 screw at either end of the baffle plate protecting the lower edge of the ACPIM. Remove the baffle plate and retain for re-assembly. WARNING Observe the warning note on the front of the ACPM, regarding the retention of circuit charge when the unit is removed. 2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, release the spring-loaded screw alongside the handle on the front panel of the ACPM, then grip the handle and pull the ACPM forwards to remove it from its location on the ACPIM. The removal of the ACPM is now complete.
3.
To replace an ACPM in the ACPIM

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present within the cabinet. Isolate the mains input cable from the site power supply before continuing with this procedure. Observe the warning note on the front of the ACPM, regarding the retention of circuit charge when the unit is removed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Offer the new ACPM to its location on the ACPIM, and gently push it home, ensuring that the pcb is engaged into the card guides of the ACPIM. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, tighten the spring-loaded screw alongside the handle on the front panel of the ACPM. Offer the baffle plate up to its location at the lower edge of the shelf, and using a T30 Torxdriver, refit the single M6x20 screw at either end of the baffle plate. The replacement of the ACPM convertor is now complete. NOTE In the event of a component part of the contact breaker unit becoming faulty, the whole of the ACPIM must be replaced.
Maint. 4132
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove the ACPIM from the cabinet

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present within the cabinet. Isolate the mains input cable from the site power supply before continuing with this procedure. As a precaution, switch off the ac current at the ACPM circuit breakers and switch off the battery power in the battery box. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Using a 10 mm socket spanner remove and retain the bolt, washers holding the earth lead to the underside of the ACPIM. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the single M6x20 screw at either end of the baffle plate protecting the lower edge of the ACPIM. Remove the baffle plate. Remove each of the ACPMs in turn as per the procedure above, To remove an ACPM from the ACPIM. Using a T10 Torxdriver, remove the four M3 countersunk screws on the front panel of the contact breaker unit. Disconnect the live, neutral and earth leads in the three core cable which connect the contact breakers, noting their position for re-assembly. Loosen the cable gland through which the three core cable passes, and remove it from the shelf. Use the crosshead screwdriver to remove the centre thread of the two plastic rivet fasteners in the PDU panel. Remove the body of the fasteners and then remove the PDU panel. Using a suitable screwdriver loosen the bottom screws on all the circuit breakers in the bank and remove the connecting busbar containing the live power cables. Unplug the positive power cables from the busbar (1st and 2nd cables from the left facing PDU front). Unplug the negative power cables from their busbar on the left side of the circuit breaker unit. Remove the ACPIM signal output connector from the top of the unit (slide lock assembly). Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the remaining three M6x12 retaining screws on either side of the ACPIM. Carefully withdraw the ACPIM from the cabinet.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4133
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To replace the ACPIM in the cabinet

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present within the cabinet. Isolate the mains input cable from the site power supply before continuing with this procedure. NOTE Ensure that the contact breaker unit is correctly assembled on the ACPIM before beginning this procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Offer up the ACPIM to its location, and using a T30 Torxdriver, secure six M6 screws in the three positions on either side of the shelf. Refit the ACPIM signal output connector to the top of the unit (slide lock assembly). Refit the positive power cables to the busbar (1st and 2nd cables from the left facing PDU front). Refit the busbar to the circuit breakers and secure with a suitable screwdriver. Refit the negative power cables to their busbar on the left side of the circuit breaker unit. Refit the PDU cover. Replace the body of the fasteners and then insert the two plastic push rivet fasteners in the PDU panel. Use the crosshead screwdriver to secure the rivet fasteners to the PDU panel. Connect the live, neutral and earth leads in the three core cable to their respective terminals on the contact breakers. Position the gland holding the three core cable in its location and tighten it to secure it in position. Using a T10 Torxdriver, secure the front panel of the contact breaker unit in position with the four M3 countersunk screws. Follow the procedure To replace an ACPM in the ACPIM and fit all required units on the ACPIM. Replace the baffle plate using a T30 Torxdriver. Secure the earth lead on the underside of the ACPIM with the bolt and washers using a 10 mm socket spanner.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Return to service
Power up the cabinet. Notify the OMC cell site network that the repair has been completed. Log the repair activity.
Maint. 4134
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Overview
This section contains the procedures to make repairs to the following items: S S S S Additional equipment cabinet. Battery boxes.
The additional equipment cabinet may consists of: RF duplexers. RF filters.
Safety
WARNING Potentially high energy sources are present within the cabinet and arcing may occur. Power down the battery box cabinet before starting this procedure by switching BATT 1 and BATT 2 to the OFF position in the battery box power distribution panel (PDP), then disconnect the Anderson (power) connectors from the top of the additional equipment cabinet. Before connecting/disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are connected/disconnected, severe burns may result.

The tools required for the following procedure are: S S S Door key. T20 Torxdriver. T30 Torxdriver.
Procedures
The following procedures are described: S S Removing an RF high power duplexer. Installing a replacement RF high power duplexer.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4135
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Additional equipment cabinet external view diagram

Figure 4-34 shows the location of the integral parts of the additional equipment cabinet and battery box assembly:
Figure 4-34 M-Cell6 indoor additional equipment cabinet and battery box assembly.
Maint. 4136
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Additional equipment cabinet internal view diagram

Figure 4-35 shows the interior of the additional equipment cabinet:
ENCLOSURE TOP PANEL DOOR (ONLY REQUIRED WITH BATTERY BOXES)
RF DUPLEXERS RF MOUNTING BRACKET RF FILTERS
Figure 4-35 M-Cell6 indoor ac additional equipment cabinet interior detail. NOTE There may be up to three RF duplexers on the shelf.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4137
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove an RF high power duplexer

WARNING Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Unscrew the RF three knurled connectors on the RF duplexer, noting their position. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the two M6 screws in front of the antenna terminal of the RF duplexer, and slide the duplexer forward and away from its location. Using a T20 Torxdriver remove the eight M4 countersunk screws (four on each arm) of the right-angled bracket on which the RF duplexer is mounted. Separate the bracket from the RF duplexer. The removal of the RF duplexer is now complete.
To replace an RF high power duplexer

WARNING Before connecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result. 1. 2. Mount the RF duplexer on the rightangled bracket fixing positions. Replace the eight M4 countersunk screws (four on each arm) on the rightangled bracket. Using a T20 Torxdriver, secure the RF duplexer to the rightangled bracket by tightening the screws to torque of 2.2 Nm. Place the RF duplexer within additional equipment cabinet, then slide it backwards to its fixing position. Replace the two M6 screws in the front fixing positions of the antenna terminal of the RF duplexer. Using a T30, secure the RF duplexer to its fixing location by tightening the screws to a torque of 3.4 Nm. Refit the three RF knurled connectors on the RF duplexer to their original positions. The replacement procedure is now complete.
3.
4. 5.
Return to service
Maint. 4138
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Power distribution panel (PDP)

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the removal and replacement of the power distribution panels (PDP). The PDPs are situated in the master and slave battery boxes.
Safety
WARNING Potentially high energy sources are present within the cabinet and arcing may occur. Power down the battery box cabinet before starting this procedure by switching BATT 1 and BATT 2 to the OFF position in the battery box(es) PDP panel, then disconnect the Anderson (power) connectors from the top of the additional equipment cabinet.

The tools required for the following procedure are: S S S S S S S Door key. T20 Torxdriver. T30 Torxdriver. 6 mm crosspoint screwdriver. 7 mm insulated spanner. 13 mm insulated spanner. 19 mm insulated spanner.
List of procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S S S S S S S Removing the BTS1 and BTS2 circuit breakers. Replacing the BTS1 and BTS2 circuit breakers. Removing the fuse in the circuit breaker and bypass assembly. Replacing the fuse in the circuit breaker and bypass assembly. Removing the BATT1 and BATT2 circuit breakers. Replacing the BATT1 and BATT2 circuit breakers. Removing the control and alarms PCA. Replacing the control and alarms PCA. Removing the low voltage detector contactors. Replacing the low voltage detector contactors.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4139
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Power distribution panel (PDP) diagram

Figure 4-36 shows the layout of the power distribution panel (PDP):
MCBs 200 A
FS1T10 AH CPSM0 BTS 1 126A FS3T2 AH BCA BTS 2 126A FS5T2 AH
FS2T10 AH CPSM1 BATT 1 FS4T2 AH BCB BATT 2
CONTROL PCA
AUTO BYPASS BYPASS BCB CLOSED BCA CLOSED
BATT. 2 BATT. 1
LOW VOLTS
Figure 4-36 M-Cell6 indoor ac battery box PDP details.
Maint. 4140
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery box PDP front panel removal

WARNING Potentially high energy sources are present within the cabinet and arcing may occur. Power down the battery box cabinet before starting this procedure by switching BATT 1 and BATT 2 to the OFF position in the battery box(es) power distribution panel, then disconnect the Anderson (power) connectors from the top of the additional equipment cabinet.
CAUTION Set all the MCBs and to the OFF position and isolate the unit from all external equipment. In order to carry out any of the following procedures, the front panel of the battery box PDP must be removed as follows: Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the six M4 screws holding the battery box PDP in position, and lift the panel away. When the required repair has been completed, refit the PDP as follows: Offer up the PDP to its location, and using a T20 Torxdriver secure the six M4 screws which hold the panel in position.
To remove the BTS 1 and BTS 2 circuit breakers

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the connections from the faulty circuit breaker, noting their position. Observe a rectangular aperture on the rear right of the circuit breaker (CB). Place the end of a small screwdriver in this aperture, and snap it down, to release the CB from the DIN rail. Remove the CB from the DIN rail. The CB removal is now complete.
To replace the BTS 1 and BTS 2 circuit breakers

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Noting the earlier cable positions, connect the cables to the new circuit breaker. Observe a rectangular aperture on the rear right of the circuit breaker. Place the end of a small screwdriver in this aperture, and snap it down. Replace the CB on the DIN rail. Snap in the rectangular aperture to secure the CB to the rail. The CB replacement is now complete.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4141
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove a fuse in the circuit breaker and bypass assembly

1. 2. 3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, unscrew the fuse holder cap. Remove the fuse. The fuse removal is now complete.
To replace a fuse in the circuit breaker and bypass assembly

1. 2. 3. 4. Using a digital multimeter, check that the fuse is serviceable. Fit the fuse into the fuse holder cap. Tighten the fuse holder cap with a flat bladed screwdriver. The fuse replacement is now complete.
To remove the BATT1 and BATT2 circuit breakers

1. 2. 3. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the six M6 screws holding the cage in position and slide it forward to its fullest extent. Using a small crosspoint screwdriver remove the two screws which hold the clear plastic cover over the CBs terminals. Using a 19 mm spanner, remove the two nuts on each of the terminals on the CB to be replaced. Wrap the terminals with two layers of insulation tape in order to prevent arcing. Also remove (and retain) the washers, copper links and spade connectors, noting their orientation. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the two recessed M6 bolts from the front of the circuit breaker. Pull the CB away from the front panel to remove it. The BATT1 and BATT2 CB removal is now complete.
4. 5. 6.
To replace the BATT1 and BATT2 circuit breakers

1. 2. Repeat the removal procedure, but in the reverse order, tightening the CB terminals to a torque of 6 Nm. The BATT1 and BATT2 replacement is now complete. Maintenance Information: M-Cell6 68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4142
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove the control and alarms PCA

1. 2. 3. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the two top M4 screws on the control and alarms front panel. Pull the front panel outwards to slide the control and alarms board forward on the runners. Remove the five connectors on the control and alarms board (noting their positions), and also release the black plastic clamp which retains the ribbon cable for PL3. Using a crosspoint screwdriver, remove the six screws which hold the control and alarms PCA in its location. Loosen the grub screw in the knurled knob on the front panel and remove the knob. Remove the bottom two M4 screws on the front panel of the control and alarms PCA front panel and remove the front panel. Pull the control and alarms board forward and away from its location, out of the front of the cabinet. The removal of the control and alarms board is now complete.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
To replace the control and alarms PCA

1. 2. Repeat the removal procedure above, but in the reverse order. The replacement procedure is now complete.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4143
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To remove the low voltage detector contactors

1. 2. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the six M4 screws from the lower front panel, and lift off the front panel. Disconnect the black cable then the red cable from the terminals of each battery box string. Wrap the cable spade connectors in two layers of insulation tape in order to prevent arcing. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the six M6 screws holding the cage in position, and slide the inner cabinet forwards to its fullest extent. Check that the voltage across the contactor terminals is zero volts. Remove all of the spade connectors to the LVD contactor, noting their position. Using a 7 mm insulated spanner, remove the two nuts which secure the contactor mounting bracket, from underneath the top of the slave battery compartment, and lift the contactor and bracket away. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the four screws from the plate underneath the contactor and separate the contactor from the bracket. Use a 13 mm insulated spanner to remove the top hexagonal nut on the contactor, noting the connections to this terminal (two for the rear contactor and four for the front contactor). Using a 13 mm spanner, remove the bottom 13 mm hexagonal nut which holds the contactor to its pink coloured busbar. Lift the LVD contactor away from its location. The removal of the LVD contactor is now complete.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9. 10. 11.
To replace the low voltage detector contactors:

1. 2. Replace the LVD contactors by using the above procedure but in reverse order, noting that the components are fitted correctly. The replacement of the LVD contactor is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4144
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery box
Battery box
Overview
There are two battery boxes in this configuration, the upper box being the slave battery box, and the lower one being the master battery box, as illustrated in Figure 4-34 M-Cell6 indoor additional equipment and battery box. These two battery boxes are identical, and the following procedures apply to both of them.
Safety
Tools
Procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S Removing the battery box cover. Refitting the battery box cover. Removing a battery. Replacing a battery.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4145
GMR-01
Battery box
GSM-105-523
Battery box diagram

Figure 4-37 illustrates one of the battery boxes in the cabinet. The battery boxes, slave and master in the configuration shown earlier are identical.
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL
BATTERY HEAT SENSORS ON REAR WALL OF CABINET
COPPER LINK
WHITE PLASTIC TAPE
COPPER LINK
+
BATTERY BOX
Figure 4-37 M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS battery box
To remove the battery box cover

1. 2. 3. 4. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the three M4 screws holding the top edge of the battery box cover and the handle in position. Using a T20 Torxdriver, remove the three M4 screws holding the bottom edge of the battery box cover. Remove the battery box cover. The removal of the battery box cover is now complete.
To refit the battery box cover

1. 2. Repeat the removal procedure but in the reverse order. The replacement of the battery box cover is now complete.
To remove a battery
WARNING Care must be taken when handling the battery monoblocks, as high energy sources are present within the unit and arcing may occur. Care must be taken when handling the battery monoblocs, as each battery weighs 18 kg and could cause injury if handled incorrectly.
Maint. 4146
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
Battery box
1. 2. 3.
Set all MCBs to the OFF position, and isolate the unit from all external equipment. Identify which battery is to be replaced. Grasp the end of the white plastic tape which is positioned next to the faulty battery terminals and pull it slightly forwards to improve access to the faulty battery. Using a 10 mm insulated torque spanner, remove the nuts on the battery terminals. Remove the battery sense cables, then the black and the red cables from the battery terminals. Wrap the black and red cable terminals with two layers of insulation tape in order to prevent arcing. Remove the inter-bloc link. Slide the battery forward and lift it away from its location. The removal of the battery is now complete.
4. 5.
6. 7.
To replace a battery
WARNING The power system uses negative earth. Ensure that the battery is connected correctly. 1. 2. 3. 4. Repeat the battery removal procedure, but in the reverse order. Tighten each battery terminal nut to a torque of 6 Nm. Carefully apply non-oxide grease to the battery terminals Push the battery into its location. The battery replacement is now complete.
Return to service

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4147
GMR-01
GSM-105-523

Overview
The repair procedures in this section cover the removal and replacement of the communications power supply module (CPSM) and the CPSM power switch. The CPSM is situated inside the master battery box, see Figure 4-38.
Safety
Tools
Procedures
The following procedures are described: S S S S Removing a communications power supply module (CPSM). Replacing a communications power supply module (CPSM). Removing a CPSM ON/OFF power switch. Replacing CPSM ON/OFF power switch.
Maint. 4148
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
CPSM diagram
Figure 4-38 illustrates then communications power supply module (CPSM) which currently is fitted to the inside of the master battery box.
CPSM BRACKET screw fixing positions
Mains ON/OFF switch
Mains ON/OFF switch
CPSM
CPSM
CPSM 0 input socket
CPSM 1 input socket CPSM alarms socket CPSM 0 and 1 output socket
Earthing point and screw fixing position
Figure 4-38 M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS battery box CPSM details
To remove a communications power supply module (CPSM)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Open the master battery box door to display the CPSM mounted on the inside of the door panel. Remove the four connectors on the bottom face of the CPSM bracket. Using a T30 Torxdriver, remove the four M6x8 screws holding the CPSM bracket in its location. Remove the 3-pin connector on the side of the CPSM by squeezing the two side lugs and carefully separating the connector. Remove the 3-pin mains connector by squeezing the four spring lugs and pulling the connector inside the CPSM box. Using a T20 Torxdriver remove the four M4 screws holding the CPSM in its location. Lift the CPSM away from its location. The removal of the CPSM is now complete.

31st May 01
68P02901W89-B
Maint. 4149
GMR-01
GSM-105-523
To replace a communications power supply module (CPSM)

1. 2. 3. Replace the CPSM by using the above procedure, but in reverse order, noting that the components are fitted correctly. Tighten the four CPSM bracket retaining nuts to a torque of 3.4 Nm in order to secure the unit to the master battery box inside door. The replacement of the CPSM is now complete.
To remove a CPSM ON/OFF power switch

1. 2. Remove the leads to the rear of the switch, noting their orientation. Squeeze the four lugs on the switch and pull the switch outwards through the front panel. The removal of the switch is now complete.
To replace a CPSM ON/OFF power switch

1. 2. Repeat the above procedure but in the reverse order. The replacement of the switch is now complete.
Return to service
Maint. 4150
31st May 01
GMR-01
Index

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
I1
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
I2
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
A
ac BTS configurations, Inst. 43, Inst. 53 additional equipment cabinet, Inst. 44 battery box, Inst. 45, Inst. 54 BTS cabinet, Inst. 43, Inst. 53 ac power interface module, Tech. 431 controls and indicators, Tech. 432 current/voltage, Tech. 435 ac power interface module repair, Maint. 4130 ac power supply module current/voltage, Tech. 418 dimensions, Tech. 418 indicators, Tech. 418 ac power supply module (ACPM), Tech. 417 Additional equipment cabinet, Tech. 72 connectors, Tech. 74 top panel, Tech. 73 Additional equipment cabinet and battery box installation, Inst. 427 Additional equipment cabinet repair, Maint. 4135 Ancillary control board To remove/replace the Bypass assembly, Maint. 4123 To remove/replace the control and alarms PCA, Maint. 4123
Checking the ac power module interface, Maint. 213 six monthly procedure check, Maint. 213 Commissioning, Inst. 71 Communications power supply module, Tech. 718, Inst. 528 Control and alarm assembly, Tech. 720 controls and indicators, Tech. 721
D
Diagnosing faults in the MCell6 BTS, BTS cabinet interconnections, Maint. 33 Diagnosing faults in the MCell6 BTS Alarm board (AB 6) to ancillary alarms and HMS 1& 2, Maint. 348 Alarm board (AB 6) to Krone, Maint. 346 Alarm board (AB 6) to micro BCU, Maint. 345 Alarm board (AB 6) to TCU 0 and TCU 1, Maint. 344 Cabinet interconnections (indoor), Maint. 34 Cable interconnections (outdoor), Maint. 319 CCB power link, Maint. 339 DC power distribution to micro BCU, Maint. 336 DC power distribution to TATI and IADU, Maint. 335 DC power distribution to TCU, Maint. 337 DCpower distribution to distribution panel, Maint. 338 HMS to top panel, fan dc power, Maint. 342 Micro BCU to BIB/T43 signal/alarm links, Maint. 364 Micro BCU to GPS signal link, Maint. 366 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB6) dc power (indoor), Maint. 340 Miscellaneous alarms and alarm board (AB6) dc power (outdoor), Maint. 341 Overview, Maint. 31 TATI 0 to TATI 1 signal link, Maint. 365 TCU 0 TCU 5 to IADU RF links, Maint. 361 Diagnosing faults in the MCell6 BTS Alarm board (AB 6) to PSU, Maint. 343 BTS1 to IBB signal bus link, Maint. 355 BTS2 to IBB signal bus link, Maint. 357, Maint. 359 HMS to IBB signal bus link, Maint. 354 Interconnect bus board (IBB) to IBB signal bus link, Maint. 352 Micro BCU to micro BCU redundant link, Maint. 362 Digital power system, Tech. 414, Tech. 420, Tech. 423 Dismantling the shipping crate, Inst. 58
B
Base station unit shelf, Integrated power supply, Tech. 414 Battery box installation, Inst. 516 Battery box repair, Maint. 4145 BSSC and BTS cabinet descriptions, Tech. 14, Tech. 16, Tech. 18, Tech. 110, Tech. 111, Tech. 113, Tech. 115, Tech. 117 BTS receiver overview External receiver RF hardware, Tech. 95 Receiver RF operating frequency band and channels, Tech. 92
C
Cabinet descriptions, BSSC and BTS, Tech. 14, Tech. 16, Tech. 18, Tech. 110, Tech. 111, Tech. 113, Tech. 115, Tech. 117

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
I3
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
dual path preselector (DPP), Tech. 984
MCell6 Repair, Ancillary cabinet control board, Maint. 4121 MCell6 site dimensions, Inst. 24, Inst. 25 Maintenance, routine, MCell2, Cabinet door and hood maintenance, Maint. 280 Maintenance, routine, MCell6, Maint. 248 Checking normal operation, Maint. 263, Maint. 267 Checking the control system, Maint. 248 Checking the installation annually, Maint. 276 Cleaning the air circuit grilles, Maint. 223 Cleaning the recuperators, Maint. 233 Inspecting the system visually, Maint. 260, Maint. 264 Maintaining the base transceiver station equipment, Maint. 27 Maintaining the HMS air conditioner, Maint. 236 Repairing damaged paintwork, Maint. 23 maintenance, routine, MCell6 Checking battery operation, Maint. 270 Cleaning the condenser, Maint. 256 Maintenance, routine, MCell6 Checking normal operation, Maint. 275 Checking the control system, Maint. 229 Cleaning the air circuit grilles, Maint. 241 Cleaning the fan impellers and inspecting the bearings, Maint. 226, Maint. 244 Cleaning the recuperators, Maint. 253 Inspecting all pipes and couplings, Maint. 239 Inspecting the system visually, Maint. 273 Mounting MCell6 indoor cabinets, Inst. 411 Mounting the battery box to the MCell6 indoor cabinet, Inst. 59
E
Earth electrode test 61.8% Rule, Inst. 213 Fall of potential, Inst. 213 Slope method, Inst. 214 Earthing and transient protection, Inst. 414, Inst. 512 Equipment delivery and packaging, Inst. 47, Inst. 56
H
hybrid combiner, Tech. 988
I
Indoor battery box, Tech. 75 functional description, Tech. 78 three configuration options, Tech. 78 option 1, Tech. 79 option 2, Tech. 710 option 3, Tech. 711 Installation overview, Inst. 51 installation steps, Inst. 52 Installation Procedures, rf modules BTS 6, Inst. 378 Installing and connecting TCU modules, Inst. 379 External alarms, Inst. 379 Mode switch, Inst. 379 Installing the ac power supply, Inst. 423, Inst. 522 Integrated power supply, Tech. 414 Internal units and systems, Base station unit shelf, Integrated power supply, Tech. 414 Introduction, BTS receiver overview External receiver RF hardware, Tech. 95 Receiver RF frequency band and channela, Tech. 92
P
Parallel Interface Extender (PIX), input BTS 6, Inst. 371 PIX function , Inst. 370 Power distribution panel, Tech. 712 circuit breakers and fuses, Tech. 714 Power distribution unit, Inst. 415, Inst. 526 circuit breakers and fuses, Inst. 416, Inst. 527 Powerup a MCell6 indoor ac BTS cabinet, Inst. 75 Prepower up checks, Inst. 72
M
MCell6 BTS cabinet, Cabinet equipment, Maint. 42 MCell6 dimensions, Inst. 23 MCell6 Installation overview, Inst. 41 installation steps, Inst. 42
R
receiver front end modules, DPP, Tech. 984 Receiver overview, BTS External receiver RF hardware, Tech. 95 Receiver RF frequency band and channels, Tech. 92 Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B
I4
31st May 01
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
Reference diagrams and connection tables, Maint. 373 Repair MCell6 Alarm board AB6 and extender replacement, Maint. 475 Ancillary cabinet power distribution repair, Maint. 4113 APSM fuse holder replacement, Maint. 4127 APSM Fuse replacement, Maint. 4125 APSM replacement, Maint. 4118 Battery replacement, Maint. 4114 BTS cabinet power distribution repair, Maint. 497 BTS equipment repair, Maint. 419 CBF replacement, Maint. 423 CCB and TATI control board replacement, Maint. 427 DC circuit breaker replacement, Maint. 4104 Disabling and enabling devices, Maint. 115 DLNB replacement, Maint. 420 Door or hood locking mechanism replacement, Maint. 49, Maint. 411, Maint. 413, Maint. 415, Maint. 417 Door or hood microswitch replacement, Maint. 492 Door or hood replacement, Maint. 43 Duplexer (high power) replacement, Maint. 434 Duplexer (medium power) replacement, Maint. 431 Fan replacement, Maint. 454 Fuse replacement, Maint. 498 Hybrid combiner and power load replacement, Maint. 446 IADU replacement, Maint. 460 IBB replacement, Maint. 482 Indoor cabinet PSM replacement, Maint. 4110 Krone box replacement, Maint. 494 LNA replacement, Maint. 442 Micro base control unit cage replacement, Maint. 472 Micro base control unit replacement, Maint. 468 microBCU circuit beaker replacement, Maint. 4107 Overview, Maint. 41 Support procedures, Maint. 111 T43/BIB assembly replacement, Maint. 479 TCU replacement, Maint. 464 Temperature sensor replacement, Maint. 486 TxBPF replacement, Maint. 438, Maint. 450 Repair MCell6 , Fuse holder replacement, Maint. 4101 Repairing the MCell2 BTS, Separating HMS units from BTS cabinets, Maint. 116
RF Modules, installation BTS 6, Inst. 378 RF modules receiver front end, DPP, Tech. 984 transmit combiner shelf, hybrid combiner, Tech. 988
S
Sample form 1: Request for connection, Inst. 713 Sample form 2: Completion and inspection, Inst. 715 Site Requirements, structural, Inst. 22
T
Top panel connections, Inst. 417, Inst. 513 additional equipment cabinet connection table, Inst. 422 MCell6 additional equipment cabinet top panel, Inst. 420 MCell6 BTS connection table, Inst. 419 MCell6 indoor ac BTS top panel, Inst. 417 MCell6 top panel connection table, Inst. 515 Top panel interconnections, Inst. 437 additional equipment cabinet top panel, Inst. 438 battery box and BTS configuration table, Inst. 442 BTS and battery box options, Inst. 439 BTS and duplexer options, Inst. 445 communications power supply module, Inst. 446 duplexer configurations, Inst. 444 MCell6 indoor ac BTS top panel, Inst. 437 transmit combiner shelf, hybrid combiner, Tech. 988
U
Unpacking the cabinet, Inst. 49
V
VM. See VSWR monitor VSWR monitor, Tech. 995 Service Manual Supplement for, Tech. 995
W
weather conditions, Inst. 29, Maint. 13

31st May 01
68P02901W85-B
I5
GMR-01
GSM-105-020
I6
31st May 01
GMR-01
CATEGORY 323 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CATEGORY 423 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION
CATEGORY 523 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
INDEX
GSM-105-020
SERVICE MANUAL M-CELL6

GMR-01
68P02901W85-B
Including: 68P02901W87-B 68P02901W88-B 68P02901W89-B
SERVICE MANUAL M-CELL6

Service Manaual M Cell6 (68p02901w85 B Uk)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manaual M Cell6 (68p02901w85 B Uk)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

/

GSM-105-020 Manual Revision GMR-01

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Reason for revision

Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B

Cellular Infrastructure Group

SERVICE MANUAL M-CELL6 GMR-01

Service Manual M-Cell6

E Motorola 19932001 All Rights Reserved Printed in the U.K.

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B

Category 323 Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 2 M-Cell6 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 M-Cell6 BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 4 M-Cell6 ancillary cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 M-Cell6 side cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 M-Cell6 additional equipment cabinet and battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 7 M-Cell6 heat management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 8 M-Cell6 RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 9 M-Cell6 digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Category 423 Installation & Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Chapter 2 M-Cell6 site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 M-Cell6 normal installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 5 M-Cell6 installation with battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 51

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 6 M-Cell6 normal commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7 M-Cell6 indoor ac commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Category 523 Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 M-Cell6 routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 M-Cell6 fault diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Chapter 4 M-Cell6 repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B

Issue status of this manual

Issue status of this manual

Resolution of Service Requests

Service Manual: M-Cell6

About this manual

Special key sequences

Service Manual: M-Cell6

First aid in case of electric shock

First aid in case of electric shock

Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85-B

Reporting safety issues

Reporting safety issues

Service Manual: M-Cell6

Warnings and cautions